SlideShare a Scribd company logo
2014 
MEASURING AND UNDERSTANDING 
THE IMPACT OF TERRORISM
QUANTIFYING PEACE AND ITS BENEFITS 
The Institute for Economics and Peace (IEP) is an independent, non-partisan, non-profit think tank dedicated to shifting the 
world’s focus to peace as a positive, achievable, and tangible measure of human well-being and progress. 
IEP achieves its goals by developing new conceptual frameworks to define peacefulness; providing metrics for measuring 
peace; and uncovering the relationships between business, peace and prosperity as well as promoting a better 
understanding of the cultural, economic and political factors that create peace. 
IEP has offices in Sydney, New York and Oxford. It works with a wide range of partners internationally and collaborates 
with intergovernmental organizations on measuring and communicating the economic value of peace. 
For more information visit www.economicsandpeace.org 
SPECIAL THANKS to the National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START) 
headquartered at the University of Maryland for their cooperation on this study and for providing the Institute for 
Economics and Peace with their Global Terrorism Database (GTD) datasets on terrorism.
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 2 
ABOUT THE GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 8 
RESULTS 12 
Global Terrorism Index Map 8 
Terrorist Incidents Map 10 
Global Levels of Terrorism 12 
Ten Countries Most Impacted by Terrorism 15 
TRENDS 26 
Largest Increases and Decreases in Terrorism, 2012 to 2013 26 
Patterns and Characteristics of Terrorist Activity since 2000 29 
Trends and Patterns of Suicide Attacks 32 
Terrorism in the OECD 35 
ASSESSING TERRORISM RISK 38 
Terrorism in Countries with Ongoing Conflict 40 
Terrorism in Countries without Ongoing Conflict 40 
'Black Swan' Attacks 42 
Economic Costs of Terrorism 45 
TERRORIST GROUP CASE STUDIES 48 
Comparing Terrorist Organisations 50 
Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) 52 
Boko Haram 53 
Al-Qa’ida 54 
Taliban 55 
CORRELATES OF TERRORISM 59 
Global Terrorism Index vs. Global Peace Index 60 
Multivariate Analysis 63 
EXPERT CONTRIBUTIONS 64 
Larry Attree, Saferworld & David Keen, London School of Economics 
Envisaging more Constructive Alternatives to the Counter-Terror Paradigm 64 
Henry Dodd & Steven Smith, Action on Armed Violence 
Anatomy of a Suicide Bombing 69 
Ekaterina Stepanova, Institute of World Economy & International Relations 
Transnational Islamist Terrorism 74 
Samantha Pitts-Kiefer, Nuclear Threat Initiative 
Nuclear Nightmares 79 
APPENDICES 82 
Appendix A: GTI Ranks and Scores, 2014 82 
Appendix B: 50 Worst Terrorist Attacks, 2013 84 
Appendix C: Global Terrorism Index Methodology 85 
Appendix D: Verifying the Increase in Terrorism from 2011 to 2012 87 
Endnotes 90 
1
OTHER PUBLICATIONS FROM 
THE INSTITUTE FOR ECONOMICS AND PEACE 
2014 Global Peace Index Report 
Institute for Economics and Peace 
– February 2014 
The 2014 GPI Report analyses the 
state of peace around the world and 
identifies countries most at risk of 
becoming less peaceful. 
The Economic Cost of 
Violence Containment 
Institute for Economics and Peace 
– February 2014 
A new methodology that calculates 
the cost of preventing and containing 
violence in over 150 countries. 
Mexico Peace Index 
Institute for Economics and Peace 
– November 2013 
The Mexico Peace Index measures the 
state of peace in all 32 Mexican states 
analysing trends and drivers of peace 
over the last ten years. 
Pillars of Peace 
Institute for Economics and Peace 
– September 2013 
Pillars of Peace is a new conceptual 
framework for understanding and 
describing the factors that create a 
peaceful society. 
Global Peace Index 2013 
Institute for Economics and Peace 
– June 2013 
The 2013 GPI Report analyses the 
state of peace around the world, 
identifying trends in violence and 
conflict, as well as the key drivers 
of peace. 
GLOBAL PEACE INDEX 2013 /01/ RESULTS, FINDINGS & METHODOLOGY 
1 
GLOBAL 
PEACE 
INDEX 
2013 
MEASURING THE STATE OF GLOBAL PEACE 
United Kingdom Peace Index 2013 
Institute for Economic and Peace 
– April 2013 
The UK Peace Index report analyses 
the fabric of peace in the UK over 
the last decade and has found that 
since 2003 the UK has become more 
peaceful. 
Global Terrorism Index 2012 
Institute for Economic and Peace – 
December 2012 
The Global Terrorism Index is the 
first index to systematically rank and 
compare 158 countries according to 
the impact of terrorism. 
Violence Containment Spending 
in the United States 
Institute for Economics and Peace 
– September 2012 
Violence Containment Spending 
provides a new methodology to 
categorise and account for the 
public and private expenditure on 
containing violence. 
Global Peace Index 2012 
Institute for Economics and Peace 
– June 2012 
The Global Peace Index is the world’s 
preeminent measure of peacefulness. 
This is the 6th edition of the Global 
Peace Index. 
United States Peace Index 2012 
Institute for Economics and Peace 
– April 2012 
The 2012 United States Peace Index 
has found that the U.S. is more 
peaceful now than at any other time 
over the last twenty years. 
Economic Consequences of War 
on the U.S. Economy 
Institute for Economics and Peace 
– February 2012 
The Economic Consequences of 
War on the U.S. Economy analyses 
the macroeconomic effects of U.S. 
government spending on wars 
since World War II. 
Measuring Peace in the Media 2011 
Institute for Economics and Peace and 
Media Tenor – January 2012 
For the second year, IEP and Media 
Tenor have jointly analysed global 
television networks’ coverage of 
peace and violence issues; it covers 
over 160,000 news items from 31 news 
and current affairs programs that air 
on four continents. 
Available for download at www.economicsandpeace.org
EXECUTIVE 
SUMMARY 
This is the second edition of the Global Terrorism Index (GTI) 
report which provides a comprehensive summary of the key 
global trends and patterns in terrorism over the last 14 years 
beginning in 2000 and ending in 2013. 
Produced by the Institute for Economics and Peace (IEP), 
the GTI is based on data from the Global Terrorism Database 
(GTD) which is collected and collated by the National 
Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to 
Terrorism (START). The GTD is considered to be the most 
comprehensive dataset on terrorist activity globally and has 
codified over 125,000 terrorist incidents. 
The report summarises trends in terrorism over time and 
analyses its changing patterns in terms of geographic 
activity, methods of attack, organisations involved and the 
national economic and political context. The index has also 
been compared to a range of socio-economic indicators to 
determine the key factors most closely associated with 
terrorism. 
In 2013 terrorist activity increased substantially with the total 
number of deaths rising from 11,133 in 2012 to 17,958 in 2013, 
a 61 per cent increase. Over the same period, the number of 
countries that experienced more than 50 deaths rose from 
15 to 24. This highlights that not only is the intensity of 
terrorism increasing, its breadth is increasing as well. 
Terrorism is both highly concentrated as well as a globally 
distributed phenomenon. Over 80 per cent of the lives lost 
to terrorist activity in 2013 occurred in only five countries - 
Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria and Syria. However, 
another 55 countries recorded one or more deaths from 
terrorist activity. 
Since 2000 there has been over a five-fold increase in the 
number of deaths from terrorism, rising from 3,361 in 2000 
to 17,958 in 2013. However for four years, starting in 2007, 
there had been modest decreases in terrorist deaths and 
also a slight decrease in the number of countries 
experiencing greater than 50 deaths from terrorism per 
annum. The latest jump in terrorist activity coincided with 
the start of the Syrian civil war in 2011. 
The threat of terrorist activity is a major if not the major 
national security risk for many countries. The recent rise of 
ultra-violent groups such as ISIL in Syria and Iraq is 
underpinned by greater territorial ambitions in the Levant 
which include the countries of Syria, Lebanon, Israel, Jordan, 
Palestine, as well as Southern Turkey, thereby increasing the 
risk of further destabilisation in the Middle East region. 
The majority of claimed deaths from terrorist attacks, 66 per 
cent in 2013, are claimed by only four terrorist organisations; 
ISIL, Boko Haram, the Taliban and al-Qa’ida and its affiliates. 
Variations of religious ideologies based on extreme 
interpretations of Wahhabi Islam are the key commonality 
for all four groups; however their strategic goals are not 
necessarily the same. To counteract the rise of religious 
extremism, moderate Sunni theologies need to be cultivated 
by credible forces within Islam. The current political context 
underscores the importance of moderate Sunni countries 
SINCE 2000 THERE HAS 
BEEN OVER A FIVE-FOLD 
INCREASE IN THE 
NUMBER OF PEOPLE 
KILLED BY TERRORISM. 
82% KILLED IN TERRORIST 
ATTACKS WERE IN 
JUST FIVE COUNTRIES: 
IRAQ 
AFGHANISTAN 
PAKISTAN 
NIGERIA 
SYRIA 
2 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
and not outside influences leading such a response. One 
such example was the Forum for Promoting Peace in Muslim 
Societies led by Shaykh Abdallah Bin Bayyah in March 2014 
which brought together 250 Islamic scholars to promote a 
unified peaceful response to the current violence issuing a 
Fatwa in response to ISIL. 
Religious ideology as the motivation for terrorism is only 
partly a global phenomenon. While it is predominant in 
Sub-Saharan Africa, MENA and South Asia, in the rest of the 
world terrorism is more likely to be driven by political or 
nationalistic and separatist movements. These forms of 
terrorism have remained fairly constant over the last 14 years 
and are still substantial. 
While drivers of terrorist activity are often complex and 
multidimensional, there are several generalised and 
significant socio-economic correlates of terrorism. Countries 
with higher levels of terrorism were found to have three 
statistically significant factors: 
Greater social hostilities between different ethnic, 
religious and linguistic groups, lack of intergroup 
cohesion and high levels of group grievances. 
Presence of state sponsored violence such as extrajudicial 
killings, political terror and gross human rights abuses. 
Higher levels of other forms of violence including deaths 
from organised conflict, likelihood of violent 
demonstrations, levels of violent crime and perceptions of 
criminality. 
Importantly, poverty and many other economic factors have 
little explanatory power on the onset of terrorism. This 
includes several broader development factors such as mean 
years of schooling and life expectancy. This underpins the 
fact that weak political systems, a lack of political legitimacy 
and the presence of state-sponsored violence are more 
influential for explaining the rise of terrorist organisations 
than the broader economic environment. 
The strong relationship between terrorism and other forms 
of violence underlines how the persistent targeting of police 
forces and instability generated by terrorist activity can 
undermine the rule of law and lead to increases in other 
forms of violence. 
There are many peaceful Muslim majority countries that do 
not suffer from terrorism such as Qatar, the U.A.E. and 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
Kuwait, underscoring how there are other social, political 
and geopolitical factors at play other than religion in 
breeding terrorist activity. 
The findings in this report are also helpful in providing 
guidance for assessing the risk of future terrorist attacks in 
countries where there are currently low levels of activity. By 
measuring and comparing various political, social and 
violence indicators, countries at risk of a substantial increase 
in terrorism can be identified. This report has highlighted 13 
countries as being at risk. These countries are Angola, 
Bangladesh, Burundi, Central African Republic, Cote d’Ivoire, 
Ethiopia, Iran, Israel, Mali, Mexico, Myanmar, Sri Lanka and 
Uganda. 
The two most successful strategies for ending terrorist 
groups since the late 1960s have been either policing or the 
initiation of a political process. These strategies were the 
main reason for the ending of over 80 per cent of terrorist 
organisations that ceased operation. Only ten per cent of 
terrorist groups could be said to have achieved their goals 
and only seven per cent were eliminated by full military 
engagement. 
Over the last 14 years five per cent of all terrorist deaths 
have occurred in OECD countries. Excluding the United 
States on September 11, Turkey and Israel experienced the 
highest number of deaths. There were eight OECD countries 
that experienced deadly attacks in 2013, this compares to 20 
OECD countries which have had deadly attacks since 2000. 
Although terrorism is on the increase and a major concern 
compared to other forms of violence, it is relatively small 
when compared to the 437,000 people killed by homicides 
in 2012, this being 40 times greater. 
The findings of this report emphasise the increasing intensity 
and spread of terrorist activity globally and highlight the key 
underlying factors that give rise to terrorism. Short term 
counter-terrorism and policing strategies can often be 
critical to prevent the potential of large and unexpected acts 
of mass violence; however, longer term approaches are 
essential. These longer term priorities include the need to 
address group grievances, ending gross physical rights 
abuses by the state and improving access to justice and the 
rule of law. Extremist Islamic movements that encourage the 
use of terrorism need to be counteracted with moderate 
theologies within Islam that advocate other non-violent 
methods of addressing legitimate political grievances. 
3
Correlates of terrorism 
From thousands of socio-economic, governance 
and attitudinal variables analysed, three 
groupings of indicators show a multivariate 
significant relationship with the GTI: 
—Political stability 
—Intergroup cohesion 
—Legitimacy of the state 
There is no systematic link to poverty measures, 
nor to several broader economic development 
factors such as the Human Development Index or 
its subcomponents such as mean years of 
schooling, or life expectancy. Similarly economic 
indicators such as year to year GDP growth do not 
correlate. 
Trade as a percentage of GDP is the only 
economic indicator to show moderate 
correlation at R= -0.40. 
Tactics and patterns 
The primary target of terrorism has consistently 
been private property and citizens. 
60 per cent of all attacks involve the use of 
explosives, 30 per cent use firearms and 10 per 
cent used other tactics including incendiary 
devices, melee attacks and sabotage of 
equipment. 
Religion as a driving ideology for terrorism has 
dramatically increased since 2000. Prior to 2000 
nationalist separatist agendas were the biggest 
drivers of terrorist organisations. 
Political and national separatist movements are 
still significant in 2013 but have seen little change 
over the 14 year period. 
Explosives accounted for the majority of attacks, 
while suicide bombings accounted for less than 
five per cent of all terrorist attacks since 2000. 
Risk of terrorism 
IEP has identified the following 13 countries as 
being at risk of increased terrorist activity from 
current levels: 
—Angola 
—Israel 
—Bangladesh 
—Mali 
—Burundi 
—Mexico 
—Central African Republic 
—Myanmar 
—Cote d’Ivoire 
—Sri Lanka 
—Ethiopia 
—Uganda 
—Iran 
Putting terrorism in context 
Around five per cent of all the 107,000 terrorist 
fatalities since 2000 have occurred in OECD 
countries. 
Homicide claims 40 times more people globally 
than terrorism with 437,000 lives lost due to 
homicide in 2012, compared to 11,000 terrorist 
deaths in 2012. 
Approximately 50 per cent of terrorist attacks 
claim no lives. 
The long term indirect costs of terrorism can be 10 
to 20 times larger than the direct costs. 
Key trends 
In 2013 more than 80 per cent of the lives lost to 
terrorism occurred in only five countries; Iraq, 
Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria and Syria. 
The largest year-on-year increase in deaths from 
terrorism was recorded between 2012 and 2013 
increasing from 11,133 to 17,958. 
102 of 162 countries covered in this study 
experienced no deaths from terrorism in 2013, 
while 60 countries recorded one or more deaths 
from terrorism. 
87 countries experienced a terrorist incident in 
2013, slightly up from 81 in 2012. 
The number of countries experiencing over 50 
deaths in one year hit an all-time high in 2013 at 
24, five greater than the previous high of 19 
countries in 2008. 
4 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
The Results Section summarises overall trends in terrorism 
and includes detailed country profiles for the ten countries 
with the highest levels of terrorist activity in 2013. These 
countries experienced 90 per cent of global terrorist 
activity. This section also provides an overview of the 
global trends in terrorism and details the significant 
increases since 2000. 
The Trends Section highlights the countries that have had 
the largest improvements and deteriorations in terrorist 
activity and maps in detail the patterns and characteristics 
of terrorist activity in terms of its targets, weapons used 
and ideological drivers. This section includes a brief 
statistical summary of the patterns and prevalence of 
suicide attacks as a terrorist tactic, trends in terrorist 
activity among OECD countries, and also compares this to 
other forms of violent activity. The key terrorist actors 
operating in OECD nations are also mapped and 
summarised. 
The Risk Section assesses the risk of countries 
experiencing high levels of terrorism. The research utilises 
GTI data and other existing datasets to statistically analyse 
the future likelihood of terrorist activity based on an 
analysis of the socio-economic conditions most closely 
associated with terrorism. A brief literature review assesses 
the economic costs of terrorism and the potential direct 
and indirect costs as well as an analysis of the effects of 
terrorism on foreign direct investment. 
The Terrorist Group Case Studies Section focuses on the 
four major terrorist groups covering their ideology, history, 
capacity and resources with key networks described as 
well. The numbers of foreign fighters from several OECD 
countries and the Middle East are outlined based on 
existing research highlighting both high and low estimates. 
This section also references existing research on how 
terrorist groups end and the tactics and strategies that 
have been successful for addressing this form of violence 
in the past. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
The Correlates of Terrorism Section uses multivariate 
statistical analysis and other statistical techniques to 
derive the key socio-economic correlations associated with 
terrorism and to better understand the factors most 
closely associated with terrorist environments. 
The Expert Contributions Section includes four essays 
from leading academics and applied researchers in the 
fields of development, public policy, peace and conflict 
and terrorism studies. 
Larry Attree from Saferworld and David Keen from the 
London School of Economics, outline a series of counter-terrorism 
approaches that should be scaled back and 
present six constructive alternatives that could help 
reverse the alarming rise in global terrorism. 
Henry Dodd and Steve Smith from Action on Armed 
Violence, provide an important contribution from another 
perspective to the research provided in this report. 
They detail the horrific human impact of a single suicide 
attack in a Pakistan marketplace in 2009, contextualising 
the broader physical, psychological and financial 
consequences of this form of violence. 
Ekaterina Stepanova from the Institute of World Economy 
 International Relations, outlines a shift in two main 
trends, the broader network fragmentation of the global 
jihadi movement and shift from top-down to bottom-up 
regionalization of violent Islamic groups. She also tracks 
the complex evolution of ISIL as a regional force in the 
Middle East, and what its continued growth means for the 
world and region. 
Finally, Samantha Pitts-Kiefer from the Nuclear Threat 
Initiative, outlines the history and current reality of a 
nuclear terrorist threat, suggesting approaches for 
strengthening global nuclear security, highlighting the 
urgent need to improve global nuclear security. 
ABOUT THE REPORT 
5
ABOUT THE GLOBAL 
TERRORISM INDEX 
The Global Terrorism Index (GTI) is a comprehensive study 
that accounts for the direct and indirect impact of 
terrorism in 162 countries in terms of lives lost, injuries, 
property damage and the psychological after-effects of 
terrorism. This study covers 99.6 per cent of the world’s 
population. 
It aggregates the most authoritative data source on 
terrorism today, the Global Terrorism Database (GTD) into 
a composite score in order to provide an ordinal ranking 
of nations on the negative impact of terrorism. The GTD is 
unique in that it consists of systematically and 
comprehensively coded data on domestic as well as 
international terrorist incidents and now includes more 
than 125,000 cases. 
Given the resources committed to counter-terrorism 
efforts internationally, it is important to analyse and 
aggregate available data related to terrorism to better 
understand its various properties such as: 
The differing socio-economic conditions under which it 
occurs. 
The geopolitical drivers associated with terrorism and 
ideological aims of terrorists groups. 
The types of strategies deployed, tactical terrorist 
targets and how these evolve over time. 
In this context, one of the key aims of the GTI is to 
examine these trends to help inform a positive and 
practical debate about the future of terrorism and the 
required policy responses. 
The GTI was developed in consultation with the GPI 
Expert Panel, and in particular with the advice of Expert 
Panel member and terrorism expert Dr Ekaterina 
Stepanova, Head of the Peace and Conflict Studies Unit at 
the Institute of World Economy  International Relations. 
Defining terrorism is not a straightforward matter. There is 
no single internationally accepted definition of what 
constitutes terrorism, and the terrorism literature abounds 
with competing definitions and typologies. IEP accepts 
the terminology and definitions agreed to by the authors 
of the GTD, the National Consortium for the Study of 
Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START) 
researchers and its advisory panel. The GTI therefore 
defines terrorism as “the threatened or actual use of 
illegal force and violence by a non-state actor to attain a 
political, economic, religious, or social goal through fear, 
coercion, or intimidation.” This definition recognises that 
terrorism is not only the physical act of an attack, but also 
the psychological impact it has on a society for many 
years after. 
In order to be included as an incident in the GTD the act 
has to be: “an intentional act of violence or threat of 
violence by a non-state actor.” This means an incident has 
to meet three criteria in order for it to be counted as a 
terrorist act: 
6 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
THE GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX IS A COMPREHENSIVE 
STUDY THAT ACCOUNTS FOR THE DIRECT AND INDIRECT 
IMPACT OF TERRORISM IN 162 COUNTRIES IN TERMS OF 
LIVES LOST, INJURIES, PROPERTY DAMAGE AND THE 
PSYCHOLOGICAL AFTER-EFFECTS OF TERRORISM. 
THIS STUDY COVERS 99.6 PER CENT OF THE 
WORLD’S POPULATION. 
1. The incident must be intentional – the result of a 
conscious calculation on the part of a perpetrator. 
2. The incident must entail some level of violence or 
threat of violence — including property violence, as well 
as violence against people. 
3. The perpetrators of the incidents must be sub-national 
actors. This database does not include acts of 
state terrorism. 
In addition to this baseline definition, two of the following 
three criteria have to be met in order to be included in the 
START database from 1997: 
The violent act was aimed at attaining a political, 
economic, religious, or social goal. 
The violent act included evidence of an intention to 
coerce, intimidate, or convey some other message to a 
larger audience (or audiences) other than the 
immediate victims. 
The violent act was outside the precepts of 
international humanitarian law. 
In cases where there is insufficient information to make a 
definitive distinction about whether it is a terrorist 
incident within the confines of the definition, the database 
codes these incidents as ‘doubt terrorism proper’. In 
order to only count unambiguous incidents of terrorism, 
the GTI does not include doubted incidents. 
It is important to understand how incidents are counted. 
According to the GTD codebook: “incidents occurring in 
both the same geographic and temporal point will be 
regarded as a single incident, but if either the time of the 
occurrence of the incidents or their locations are 
discontinuous, the events will be regarded as separate 
incidents.” Illustrative examples from the GTD codebook 
are as follows:1 
Four truck bombs explode nearly simultaneously in 
different parts of a major city. This represents four 
incidents. 
A bomb goes off, and while police are working on the 
scene the next day, they are attacked by terrorists with 
automatic weapons. These are two separate incidents, 
as they were not continuous, given the time lag 
between the two events. 
A group of militants shoot and kill five guards at a 
perimeter checkpoint of a petroleum refinery and then 
proceeds to set explosives and destroy the refinery. 
This is one incident since it occurred in a single location 
(the petroleum refinery) and was one continuous event. 
A group of hijackers diverts a plane to Senegal and, 
while at an airport in Senegal, shoots two Senegalese 
policemen. This is one incident, since the hijacking was 
still in progress at the time of the shooting and hence 
the two events occurred at the same time and in the 
same place. 
7
1 Iraq 10 
2 Afghanistan 9.39 
3 Pakistan 9.37 
4 Nigeria 8.58 
5 Syria 8.12 
6 India 7.86 
7 Somalia 7.41 
8 Yemen 7.31 
9 Philippines 7.29 
10 Thailand 7.19 
11 Russia 6.76 
12 Kenya 6.58 
13 Egypt 6.5 
14 Lebanon 6.4 
15 Libya 6.25 
16 Colombia 6.24 
17 Turkey 5.98 
18 Democratic Republic of the Congo 5.9 
19 Sudan 5.77 
20 South Sudan 5.6 
21 Algeria 5.52 
22 Mali 5.29 
23 Bangladesh 5.25 
24 Nepal 5.23 
25 China 5.21 
26 Central African Republic 5.19 
27 United Kingdom 5.17 
28 Iran 4.9 
29 Greece 4.73 
30 United States 4.71 
31 Indonesia 4.67 
32 Israel 4.66 
32 Mexico 4.66 
34 Bahrain 4.41 
35 Myanmar 4.24 
36 Mozambique 4.01 
36 Sri Lanka 4.01 
38 Rwanda 4 
39 Burundi 3.97 
40 Cote d’Ivoire 3.76 
41 Tanzania 3.71 
42 Ethiopia 3.7 
43 Paraguay 3.63 
44 Norway 3.57 
45 Senegal 3.55 
46 Tunisia 3.29 
47 Ireland 3.09 
48 Malaysia 3.04 
48 South Africa 3.04 
50 Peru 2.96 
51 Ukraine 2.95 
52 Uganda 2.93 
53 Belarus 2.85 
54 Kosovo 2.73 
55 Saudi Arabia 2.71 
56 France 2.67 
10 
8 
6 
4 
57 Guatemala 2.61 
58 Chile 2.59 
58 Niger 2.59 
60 Bulgaria 2.58 
60 Georgia 2.58 
62 Italy 2.55 
63 Eritrea 2.45 
64 Honduras 2.38 
65 Kazakhstan 2.37 
66 Cyprus 2.3 
67 Morocco 2.11 
68 Tajikistan 1.99 
69 Spain 1.84 
70 Jordan 1.76 
71 Argentina 1.73 
72 Brazil 1.72 
73 Republic of the Congo 1.59 
74 Trinidad and Tobago 1.54 
75 Cameroon 1.45 
75 Macedonia (FYR) 1.45 
77 Switzerland 1.34 
78 Madagascar 1.26 
79 Ecuador 1.18 
80 Zimbabwe 1.16 
81 Guinea 1.12 
82 Sweden 1.07 
83 Germany 1.02 
84 Canada 0.95 
RANK COUNTRY SCORE 
.01 
0 
Highest impact 
of terrorism 
Lowest impact 
of terrorism 
No impact of 
terrorism 
2 
No records 
GLOBAL 
TERRORISM 
INDEX 2014 
8 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
85 Czech Republic 0.81 
86 Bosnia and Herzegovina 0.76 
87 Burkina Faso 0.7 
87 Montenegro 0.7 
89 Netherlands 0.58 
89 Serbia 0.58 
91 Mauritania 0.56 
92 Venezuela 0.54 
93 Belgium 0.53 
94 Dominican Republic 0.47 
95 Angola 0.41 
95 Australia 0.41 
97 Guinea-Bissau 0.35 
98 Cambodia 0.31 
98 Taiwan 0.31 
100 United Arab Emirates 0.29 
101 Moldova 0.28 
102 Armenia 0.27 
103 Austria 0.24 
103 Bolivia 0.24 
105 Croatia 0.23 
105 Portugal 0.23 
107 Albania 0.19 
107 Denmark 0.19 
109 Bhutan 0.16 
109 Estonia 0.16 
111 Uzbekistan 0.14 
112 Kyrgyzstan 0.1 
113 Iceland 0.08 
113 Laos 0.08 
113 Liberia 0.08 
116 Hungary 0.07 
117 Azerbaijan 0.06 
118 Chad 0.05 
119 Kuwait 0.04 
119 Panama 0.04 
121 Equatorial Guinea 0.01 
121 Japan 0.01 
121 Lesotho 0.01 
124 Benin 0 
124 Botswana 0 
124 Costa Rica 0 
124 Cuba 0 
124 Djibouti 0 
124 El Salvador 0 
124 Finland 0 
124 Gabon 0 
124 Gambia 0 
124 Ghana 0 
124 Guyana 0 
124 Haiti 0 
124 Jamaica 0 
124 Latvia 0 
124 Lithuania 0 
124 Malawi 0 
124 Mauritius 0 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
10 
8 
6 
4 
124 Mongolia 0 
124 Namibia 0 
124 New Zealand 0 
124 Nicaragua 0 
124 North Korea 0 
124 Oman 0 
124 Papua New Guinea 0 
124 Poland 0 
124 Qatar 0 
124 Romania 0 
124 Sierra Leone 0 
124 Singapore 0 
124 Slovakia 0 
124 Slovenia 0 
124 South Korea 0 
124 Swaziland 0 
124 Timor-Leste 0 
124 Togo 0 
124 Turkmenistan 0 
124 Uruguay 0 
124 Vietnam 0 
124 Zambia 0 
RANK COUNTRY SCORE 
.01 
0 
Highest impact 
of terrorism 
Lowest impact 
of terrorism 
No impact of 
terrorism 
2 
No records 
GLOBAL 
TERRORISM 
INDEX 2014 
9
All attacks since 2000 scaled 
by number of fatalities 
Worst attacks in 2013 TERRORIST 
INCIDENTS MAP 
2000-2013 
DATE COUNTRY LOCATION F* I* GROUP DESCRIPTION 
17/09/2013 Nigeria Beni Shiek 142 - Boko Haram Gunmen dressed in military uniforms set up illegal 
checkpoints and shot civilians. 
22/07/2013 Syria Khan Al-Assal 123 - Al-Nusrah Front Assailants attacked soldiers and civilians in the 
town of Khan al-assal. 
10/01/2013 Pakistan Quetta 107 169 Lashkar-E-Jhangvi Suicide bombers detonated inside of a snooker hall 
and attacked responders to the first explosion. 
16/08/2013 Pakistan Quetta 91 169 Lashkar-E-Jhangvi An explosives-laden water tanker detonated in a 
vegetable market. 
22/09/2013 Pakistan Peshawar 87 131 Jundallah Two suicide bombers detonated outside of all saints 
church in Peshawar City. 
2/08/2013 Afghanistan Sherzad District 82 - Taliban Assailants ambushed a joint military and police 
convoy. 
18/08/2013 Afghanistan Gulistan District 82 22 Taliban Assailants attacked a police convoy in Gulistan 
district. 
21/09/2013 Kenya Nairobi 72 201 Al-Shabaab 
Assailants with automatic weapons and grenades 
attacked the westgate mall in Nairobi and held 
patrons hostage. 
11/06/2013 Syria Hatla 70 - Al-Nusrah Front Gunmen attacked the shiite village of Hatla. 
20/12/2013 Nigeria Bama 70 - Boko Haram 300 Assailants attacked a Nigerian army barracks 
and kidnapped some soldiers. 
16/01/2013 Algeria In Amenas 69 8 
Al-Mua’qi’oon Biddam 
Brigade (Those who 
Sign with Blood) 
Terrorists seized a British Petroleum gas complex 
and held 800 people hostage. 
THE 20 WORST ATTACKS OF 2013 
* F= FATALITIES, I = INJURIES 
10 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
All attacks since 2000 scaled 
by number of fatalities 
Worst attacks in 2013 TERRORIST 
INCIDENTS MAP 
2000-2013 
DATE COUNTRY LOCATION F* I* GROUP DESCRIPTION 
5/12/2013 Yemen Sanaa 68 215 
Al-Qa'ida 
in the Arabian 
Peninsula (AQAP) 
A suicide bomber then 12 gunmen attacked the 
Ministry of Defense. 
21/02/2013 Syria Damascus 62 201 Unknown A car bomb exploded near the baath party offices 
in Damascus City. 
6/02/2013 Syria Al-Buraq 61 - Al-Nusrah Front An explosives-laden vehicle detonated at a bus stop 
near a military factory killing civilian employees. 
5/12/2013 Central African 
Republic Bangui 54 - Anti-Balaka Militia Gunman attacked a mosque in km-five 
neighborhood, Bangui City. 
3/04/2013 Afghanistan Farah 53 95 Taliban 
A suicide bomber and nine assailants dressed as 
soldiers and armed with guns and grenades 
attacked a courthouse. 
21/03/2013 Syria Damascus 50 84 Unknown A suicide bomber detonated himself 
at al-eman mosque in Damascus City. 
24/04/2013 Iraq Mosul 46 - Unknown Assailants attacked a police headquarters and held 
17 hostage. 
6/07/2013 Nigeria Mamudo 46 4 Boko Haram Assailants set fire to a school and shot at students 
and staff who were fleeing the burning building. 
3/03/2013 Pakistan Karachi 45 151 Tehrik-i-Taliban 
Pakistan (TTP) 
An explosives-laden car detonated 
in outside a shiite mosque. 
* F= FATALITIES, I = INJURIES 
11
RESULTS 
In total there have been over 48,000 terrorist incidents 
over the last 14 years claiming over 107,000 lives. Terrorism 
has increased dramatically with even conservative estimates 
suggesting a fivefold surge since the year 2000. 2 
In 2013 alone, almost 10,000 terrorist incidents were 
recorded, resulting in approximately 18,000 deaths. The 
significant majority of these incidents, over 60 per cent, 
occurred in Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria and Syria. 
The increase is due mainly to terrorist activity within these 
five countries. As a consequence, these countries have 
experienced a dramatic increase in the loss of life in 2013 
with fatalities reaching 14,722 collectively. 
Excluding these five countries in 2013, there were almost 
4,000 attacks in the rest of the world killing 3,236 people. 
This represents an increase of 54 per cent over the 
prior year. 
Other than the five most affected countries, the trend over 
the last 14 years is upward with terrorist attacks substantially 
increasing by 180 per cent. Furthermore, terrorists are 
largely successful in carrying out their tactical objectives. 
Figure 3 shows that in 2013 the success rate was over 85 per 
cent. However this does represent a decrease since 2011 
when over 90 per cent of attacks were successful. 
The rise in terrorist activity coincided with the US invasion of 
Iraq. This created large power vacuums in the country 
allowing different factions to surface and become violent. 
Despite the fact that a government was formed and 
elections held, the country and region has been unstable 
ever since. 
In 2006 Nouri al-Maliki was appointed Prime Minister of Iraq. 
In the following year amid sectarian tensions Iraq suffered 
the worst year of terrorist activity recorded since 2000. It 
was only in 2013 with the rise of ISIL that Iraq suffered this 
same level of terrorism again. 
Terrorism has also been increasing on the borders of 
Pakistan and Afghanistan where the Taliban has escalated 
attacks over the last three years. Tensions in Pakistan 
escalated in 2007 when Presidential candidate Benazir 
Bhutto was assassinated, and deaths have increased by 
20 per cent over the last two years. In India, there remains 
significant terrorist activity, including on the border between 
India and Pakistan. 
The rise of terrorism in Nigeria is largely centred around the 
terrorist group Boko Haram which started to engage in 
significant violence from 2009 onwards. As a result, Nigeria 
has had the fourth highest number of deaths from terrorism 
over the last three years. Figure 1 plots these events against 
trends in terrorism since 2000. 
GLOBAL LEVELS OF 
TERRORISM 
COUNTRIES WITH GREATER 
THAN 50 TERRORIST DEATHS 
In 2013 the number of countries that lost over 50 lives to 
terrorist attacks reached 24, the most it has been in the 14 
years covered in this report. It also represents an 
additional nine countries when compared to 2012. These 
countries are Algeria, Central African Republic, China, 
Egypt, Lebanon, Libya, Mali, Sudan and South Sudan. This 
is a notable change from the 2008 trend that showed that 
the number of countries with greater than 50 deaths had 
been decreasing while the overall 12 year trend to 2012 
was basically flat. 
Terrorism is a global phenomenon and in 2013 attacks 
were carried out in 87 countries with 60 of these 
experiencing deaths from terrorism. 
12 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
FIGURE 1 DEATHS FROM TERRORISM, 2000–2013 
The number people who have died from terrorist activity has increased fivefold since the year 2000. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
Usama bin Ladin killed. 
Syrian Civil War begins. 
Bhutto assasinated in Pakistan. 
YEAR 
20,000 
16,000 
12,000 
8,000 
4,000 
0 
Global total 
Iraq, 
Afghanistan, 
Pakistan, 
Nigeria  Syria 
ISIL capture large parts 
Source: GTD Notes: The dashed part of the trend line represents a change in data collection methodology for terrorist acts. The methodology change did not materially 
alter the results as the increase in terrorism is verifiable, see methodological note in Appendix C for further details. 
FIGURE 2 TERRORIST INCIDENTS, 2000–2013 
In 2013, 60 per cent of all attacks occurred in five countries; Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria and Syria. However the rest of the 
world suffered a 54 per cent increase in terrorist incidents in 2013. 
YEAR 
10,000 
8,000 
6,000 
4,000 
2,000 
Source: GTD 
0 
NUMBER OF INCIDENTS 
Global total 
Iraq, 
Afghanistan, 
Pakistan, 
Nigeria  Syria 
Rest of the world 
2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 
NUMBER OF DEATHS 
Rest of the world 
2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 
of Syria and Iraq 
September 11. 
War begins in Afghanistan. 
Iraq Prime Minister appointed. 
War begins in Iraq. Arab Uprising. 
Precursor of ISIL begin to 
launch attacks in Syria and Iraq. 
13
FIGURE 3 SUCCESS RATES OF TERRORIST ATTACKS 
In 2013 over 85 per cent of all recorded incidents were successful. This represents an improvement from 2011 when over 
90 per cent of attacks were successful. 
100% 12,000 
YEAR 
10,000 
8,000 
6,000 
4,000 
2,000 
0 
90% 
70% 
60% 
30% 
Percentage of successful incidents 
Total 
Successful 
Source: GTD Note: Success is defined in respect to the tangible effects of an incident, not the overall strategic goal. For example, a bomb attack is deemed successful 
if the bomb is detonated regardless of whether the detonation achieves greater aims such as destroying a building or killing a specific person. 
FIGURE 4 NUMBER OF COUNTRIES THAT EXPERIENCE SEVERE LOSSES FROM TERRORISM 
The number of counties that have lost more than 50 lives hit an all-time high in 2013. 
20 
10 
Source: GTD 
YEAR 
25 
15 
5 
0 
NUMBER OF COUNTRIES WITH GREATER 
THAN 50 DEATHS FROM TERRORISM 
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 
80% 
50% 
40% 
20% 
10% 
0% 
PERCENTAGE OF SUCCESSFUL ATTACKS 
NUMBER OF INCIDENTS 
2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 
14 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
TEN COUNTRIES MOST IMPACTED BY TERRORISM 
The ten countries ranked at the top of the 2014 Global Terrorism 
Index have all suffered from terrorism for many years. Every one 
of the ten most affected countries, with the exception of Syria, 
has had terrorist attacks consecutively for at least fifteen years. 
In 2013 the most impacted five countries accounted for more 
than 80 per cent of all terrorist deaths. 
The overwhelming majority of deaths from terrorism in 2013 
occurred in Iraq, accounting for 35 per cent of all deaths. In nine 
out of the last ten years Iraq has been the country with the most 
deaths from terrorism. The only exception was in 2012 when 
Afghanistan had 300 more deaths than Iraq. 
Syria is the country that has had the largest percentage increase 
in terrorism, with a combined total of 27 deaths from 1998 to 
2010. Since the start of the Syrian civil war in 2011, Syria has had 
over a hundred deaths from terrorism in both 2011 and 2012, 
jumping to over 1,000 deaths in 2013. 
FIGURE 5 COUNTRIES WITH THE HIGHEST NUMBER OF DEATHS BY TERRORISM, PERCENTAGE 
OF GLOBAL TERRORIST DEATHS FOR 2013 
Five countries account for more than 80 per cent of global terrorist deaths. 
18,000 
16,000 
14,000 
12,000 
10,000 
8,000 
4,000 
2,000 
Source: GTD 
0 
NUMBER OF DEATHS 
35.4% 
Iraq 
17.3% 
Afghanistan 
13.1.% 
Pakistan 
10.2% 
Nigeria 
6% 
Syria 
2.3% 
Somalia 
2.2% 
India 
1.6% 
Philippines 
1.6% 
Yemen 
1.1% 
Rest of the world 
Thailand 
10% 
15
2,492 INCIDENTS 
IRAQ DEAD 6,362 
Private citizens  property 
Police 
Government (general) 
Other 
Iraq continues to be the country that is most impacted by 
terrorism. Terrorist incidents have increased significantly in Iraq in 
2013 with the number of deaths rising 162 per cent from 2012. No 
group claimed responsibility for the majority of terrorist activity. 
However, six terrorist groups were responsible for the 1,670 
claimed deaths. These groups are all Islamic extremist with 
relatively short histories. 77 per cent of attacks for which a group 
claimed responsibility were conducted by ISIL. The oldest group, 
Ansar al-Islam, was formed in 2001 but has subsequently joined 
ISIL. Some of the groups are relatively new such as Mukhtar Army, 
a Shia Iraqi militia group formed in early 2013, and Al-Nusrah 
Front, a branch of al-Qa'ida formed in 2012. 
The majority of terrorist groups in Iraq are Sunni and are opposed 
to the Shia dominated government. In the 2014 parliamentary 
elections 53 per cent of the seats were won by Shia parties as 
opposed to just 11 per cent of seats for Sunni parties. The 
remaining seats were won by Kurds or secular parties. The 
demographic split between Shia and Sunni is 66 per cent and 34 
per cent respectively. 
As is characteristic of terrorist attacks generally, the majority of 
incidents were not claimed by any group. In 2013, 4,660 people 
were killed by terrorist acts by unknown actors, representing 73 
per cent of all attacks. The tactics used by terrorist groups in Iraq 
remain almost exclusively confined to bombings and explosions. 
This method was responsible for 87 per cent of deaths and 97 per 
INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
+6,352 
2002 2014 
cent of injuries. Suicide attacks also continue to be used with a 
very high cost on human lives, with an average of over seven 
deaths per suicide attack. There were 232 suicide attacks, which 
were responsible for 27 per cent of fatalities. ISIL took 
responsibility for the majority of suicide bombings, averaging 
nearly 10 deaths and 18 injuries per attack. 
Political assassinations were less likely to be successful, 
accounting for nearly half of the 165 failed terrorist attacks. 
There were more than 430 casualties from attempted political 
assassinations. The majority of assassinations targeted political 
figures, but police, private citizens and leaders of other terrorist 
groups were also targeted. 
Of all terrorist attacks, 25 per cent took place in Baghdad, with 
Mosul, Baqubah, Kirkuk and Tuz Khormato also experiencing 
considerable activity. There were 135 cities that had one 
terrorist attack and 115 cities that had two or more attacks. This 
demonstrates how widespread terrorism is across the country. 
Of the 19 provinces in Iraq, 17 experienced terrorism. The two 
provinces without terrorism were both in the Iraqi Kurdistan 
region. There were 1,424 attacks and 3,414 deaths in the four 
provinces of Al Anbar, Diyala, Nineveh and Saladin. These four 
provinces also had more than twice as many terrorist attacks 
than the capital of Baghdad. The number of attacks in these 
provinces doubled in 2013 while the number of deaths was two 
and a half times higher. 
Unknown 
Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant 
Al-Qa’ida in Iraq 
Other 
INJURED 
14,947 
WORST ATTACK 
47 killed and 85 injured when a 
suicide bomber targeted Shiite 
pilgrims. ISIL suspected. 
GTI RANK: 1 
GTI SCORE: 10/10 
MAJOR ATTACK 
16 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
Police 
Private citizens  property 
Government (general) 
Other 
Terrorism is increasing in Afghanistan, with ten per cent more 
terrorist attacks and 13 per cent more fatalities in 2013 than 
2012. Whilst there were seven different terrorist groups active in 
Afghanistan, one group, the Taliban, was responsible for the 
majority of attacks and casualties. The Taliban remains one of 
the most deadly terrorist groups in the world. In both 2012 and 
2013 the Taliban was responsible for 75 per cent of all terrorist 
fatalities in Afghanistan. In 2013 unknown actors accounted for 
23 per cent of deaths by terrorism. The remainder of fatalities 
were claimed by six terrorist groups. 
In 2013 there were terrorist acts in over 440 different cities 
in Afghanistan, clearly highlighting the breadth of terrorism 
across the country. However 304 cities suffered only one 
terrorist attack. There were 36 attacks in the capital Kabul and 
25 attacks in the old capital of Kandahar. Police are the targets 
of most attacks, being targeted 46 per cent of the time and 
suffering 53 per cent of the deaths. Private citizens are the 
second biggest target group, with 21 per cent of attacks and 
19 per cent of deaths. 
Although attacks on schools and educational institutions 
account for only two per cent of attacks they result in one of the 
highest injury rates per attack averaging nearly ten injuries but 
only one death. The Taliban is opposed to the education of girls 
and when in power banned girls above the age of eight from 
attending school. In 2013 the Taliban conducted at least seven 
MAJOR ATTACK 
attacks targeting girls attending school, mostly in the north, 
resulting in over 160 casualties. 
Bombings and explosions were the most common tactic used in 
Afghanistan, accounting for over half of all attacks and fatalities. 
A quarter of all terrorist attacks were armed assaults, with 37 
per cent of deaths attributed to this tactic. Almost all armed 
assaults were with firearms, although there were a few instances 
of knives and axe attacks with at least 19 beheadings. There 
were over 100 suicide bombings in 2013, mostly by the Taliban. 
Suicide bombings were very deadly, averaging five deaths and 
ten injuries per attack. 
AFGHANISTAN 
Taliban 
Unknown 
Hizb-i-Islami 
Other 
DEAD 3,111 
INJURED 3,721 
INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
+3,057 
2002 2014 
GTI RANK: 2 
GTI SCORE: 9.39/10 
1,148 INCIDENTS 
WORST ATTACK 
98 killed when the Taliban 
targeted a tribal elder and 
security personnel who 
responded to the scene. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
17
1,933 INCIDENTS 
PAKISTAN 
DEAD 2,345 
GTI RANK: 3 INJURED 5,035 
GTI SCORE: 9.37/10 
Private citizens  property 
Police 
Government (general) 
Other 
Terrorism in Pakistan is strongly influenced by its proximity to 
Afghanistan with most attacks occurring near the border 
involving the Taliban. Like in Afghanistan, terrorism increased 
significantly in Pakistan in 2013, with a 37 per cent increase in 
deaths and 28 per cent increase in injuries since 2012. Nearly half 
of all attacks had no groups that have claimed responsibility. The 
deadliest group in Pakistan in 2013, responsible for almost a 
quarter of all deaths and 49 per cent of all claimed attacks, is 
Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP), the Pakistani Taliban. 
Terrorism in Pakistan has a diverse array of actors. In 2013 there 
were 23 different terrorist groups, down from 29 groups in 2012. 
However, 11 groups account for the majority of the 270 claimed 
attacks. While many of these groups are Islamist there are also 
other organisations such as separatist movements for Baloch, the 
Bettani tribe and Sindhi people. 
Over 60 per cent of fatalities were from bombings and explosions 
and around 26 per cent from firearms. A quarter of targets and 
deaths were against private citizens, with police accounting for 
20 per cent of targets and deaths. The deadliest attacks were 
against religious figures and institutions which, on average, killed 
over five people and injured over 11 per attack. This includes the 
killing of 87 people attending All Saints Church in Peshawar city 
from two suicide bombs by a sub-group of the Pakistani Taliban. 
MAJOR ATTACK 
The Pakistani Taliban also, like the Taliban in Afghanistan, is 
opposed to the western education and the education of girls and 
has targeted schools and advocates of equal education. This issue 
gained worldwide recognition in October 2012 when a 15 year old 
school girl and advocate of female education, Malala Yousafzai, 
was shot by gunmen from the Pakistani Taliban on a school bus in 
the northwest. In 2014 Malala Yousafzai, along with the Indian 
activist Kailash Satyarthi campaigning against forced childhood 
labour, were awarded the Nobel Peace Prize. Despite the 
international attention brought to the issue, violence continues 
and in 2013 there were over 100 attacks on educational 
institutions, with a total of 150 casualties. Suicide bombings were 
used by the Pakistani Taliban and three other groups, all of which 
have some affiliation with the Pakistani Taliban. In 2013 there were 
71 suicide attacks responsible for around 2,740 casualties. 
More than 500 cities in Pakistan had at least one terrorist incident 
in 2013, with two or more incidents occurring in 180 cities. Of all 
attacks 16 per cent occurred in the largest city of Karachi in the 
south. However, the majority of attacks occurred in the north 
closer to the border with Afghanistan. This includes cities such as 
Peshawar, Quetta and Jamrud, which combined, had more 
attacks than Karachi. The city of Parachinar in the Federally 
Administered Tribal Areas, the closest point in Pakistan to Kabul 
in Afghanistan, has among the highest rates of deaths per 
incident in Pakistan with 87 people killed from seven incidents. 
Unknown 
Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) 
Lashkar-e-Jhangvi 
Other 
INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
+2,243 
2002 2014 
WORST ATTACK 
119 killed and 219 injured when two 
suicide bombers targeted a crowd. 
Lashkar-e-Jhangvi responsible. 
18 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
Private citizens  property 
Police 
Government (general) 
Other 
The dramatic increase in terrorism in Nigeria can be attributed 
to the rise of Boko Haram. Boko Haram can be translated to 
mean ‘western education is forbidden’. In 2013 this Islamist 
terrorist group killed at least 1,587 people and claimed 
responsibility for nearly 90 per cent of all terrorist acts in 
Nigeria. They are one of the most deadly terrorist groups in 
the world with an average of close to eight deaths per 
terrorist attack. 
The nature of terrorism in Nigeria is different to Iraq, 
Afghanistan and Pakistan. Terrorist activity in Nigeria has 
more in common with the tactics of organised crime and 
gangs, focusing on armed assaults using firearms and knives 
than the bombing or suicide tactics of other large terrorist 
groups. Armed assault has claimed 85 per cent of deaths in 
Nigeria while bombings or explosions account for five per 
cent of deaths. Suicide attacks are very rare, approximately 
12 per cent of terrorist attacks are kidnappings or 
hostage takings. 
The majority of these kidnappings are by Boko Haram. In 2013 
targets included business leaders such as the Manager of the 
Nigerian Flour Mills; senior police officers such the Divisional 
Police Officer of Borno State; people with government 
connections like the former minister of Petroleum Resources; 
DEAD 1,826 
MAJOR ATTACK 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
members of the military; and women and children. This 
includes the more than 200 Chibok girls kidnapped in 
northern Nigeria in early 2014 from their school. Boko Haram 
announced the girls were to become slaves and wives for 
their members. 
Most terrorist attacks were in the northeast of Nigeria where 
Boko Haram is based, with 16 per cent of attacks in the 
regional capital of Maiduguri. 
Apart from Boko Haram, six other terrorist groups were 
responsible for attacks in 2013. Three of these groups are 
Islamist and the other groups are separatists or oppositional 
groups. One of the largest terrorist groups in Nigeria, with an 
estimated membership of 15,000, is the Movement for the 
Emancipation of the Niger Delta, who were responsible for 14 
fatalities in 2013. This group has been active since 2004 and 
aims to force oil revenues to be shared with impoverished 
regions. Whilst they have a larger membership than Boko 
Haram, they are responsible for fewer deaths, killing 268 
people since 2006. 
NIGERIA 
GTI RANK: 4 
GTI SCORE: 8.58/10 
303 INCIDENTS 
INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
+1,812 
2002 2014 
Boko Haram 
Unknown 
Fulani militants 
Other 
INJURED 457 
WORST ATTACK 
142 killed and 100 shops 
damaged when gunmen 
attacked civilians in a village. 
Boko Haram responsible. 
19
Private citizens  property 
Journalists  media 
Government (general) 
Other 
The dramatic rise of terrorism in Syria is a direct result of the 
Syrian civil war. There were no recorded acts of terrorism in the 
two years prior to the civil war commencing in 2011. By 2012 
there were 136 terrorist attacks and over 600 deaths. In 2013, 
this has increased to 217 attacks and over 1,000 deaths. There 
are at least ten different terrorist groups active in Syria, many 
of which are Sunni and opposed to the Alawite Assad regime. 
It is estimated that the civil war has led to between 180,000 
and 260,000 deaths and the displacement of over 35 per cent 
of the population of the country. The majority of these deaths 
are classified as a result of conventional warfare rather than 
acts of terrorism. However, terrorism has been deployed as a 
tactic by some of the rebel forces to bring about a political, 
economic, religious, or social goal rather than purely 
military objectives. 
It is unknown which group was responsible for half of the 
terrorist attacks in Syria in 2013, and as a result of the civil war 
the number of attacks may be underreported. Some of the 
biggest groups in Syria include ISIL, the Free Syrian Army, 
Hizballah and Popular Front for the Liberation of Palestine, 
Gen Cmd (PFLP-GC). 
The Sunni and al-Qa’ida linked Al-Nusra Front claimed 
responsibility for more than 40 per cent of deaths from 
terrorism in 2013. This group regularly uses suicide attacks, 
employing suicide bombing in nearly a third of their attacks. 
They are also one of the most deadly groups, averaging nearly 
19 deaths per attack. 
The most common form of terrorist attacks are bombings or 
explosions, which account for 70 per cent of attacks that are 
generally targeted at private citizens. Kidnappings account for 
18 per cent of all incidents. Most of the kidnappings are of 
journalists, although NGO workers and UN Peacekeepers have 
all been kidnapped in 2013. Syria is the only country among 
those most impacted by terrorism where journalists are a major 
target of terrorist attacks. Nearly 70 per cent of all journalists 
killed last year in Syria were Syrian citizens. 
In 2013 at least 16 European journalists were kidnapped, 
including Danish, French, Italian, Polish, Spanish and Swedish 
journalists. Two American journalists who were kidnapped in 
Syria, James Foley and Steven Sotloff, were both murdered in 
late 2014 by ISIL. 
Although the entire country is affected by a very severe civil 
conflict, terrorism is largely centralised. There were 57 cities 
that had a terrorist attack, of which only 16 cities had more 
than one attack. Terrorism is largely concentrated around large 
cities, with 42 per cent of attacks taking place in the capital of 
Damascus and 12 per cent in the largest city of Aleppo. 
SYRIA 
MAJOR ATTACK 
WORST ATTACK 
123 killed when assailants attacked 
soldiers and civilians in a town centre. 
Known as the Khan al-Assal massacre. 
Al-Nusrah Front responsible. 
Unknown 
Al-Nusrah Front 
Liwa al-Haqq 
Other 
DEAD 1,078 INJURED 1,776 
INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
+1,078 
2002 2014 
GTI RANK: 5 
GTI SCORE: 8.12/10 
217 INCIDENTS 
20 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
624 INCIDENTS 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
DEAD 404 INJURED 719 
2002 2014 
MAJOR ATTACK 
Police 
Private citizens  property 
Government (general) 
Other 
Terrorism increased by 70 per cent in India from 2012 to 2013, 
with the number of deaths increasing from 238 to 404. The 
number of attacks also increased, with 55 more attacks in 2013 
than 2012. However, the majority of terrorist attacks in India have 
low casualties. In 2013 around 70 per cent of attacks were 
non-lethal. There were attacks by 43 different terrorist groups 
who can be categorised into three groups: Islamists; separatists; 
and communists. 
Communist terrorist groups are by far the most frequent 
perpetrators and the main cause of deaths in India. Three Maoist 
communist groups claimed responsibility for 192 deaths in 2013, 
which was nearly half of all deaths from terrorism in India. Police 
are overwhelmingly the biggest targets of Maoists, accounting 
for half of all deaths and injuries. This is mainly through armed 
assaults, which killed 85, and bombings and explosions, which 
killed 43. Kidnapping is also a common tactic of the Maoists 
where it is often used as political tool to force the government 
to release Maoist prisoners. The majority of Maoist attacks 
occurred in the provinces of Bihar, Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand. 
Generally, the dispute with Pakistan over Jammu and Kashmir is 
the source of Islamic terrorism. In 2013 three Islamist groups 
were responsible for around 15 per cent of deaths. This includes 
Hizbul Mujahideen, an Islamist group allegedly based in Pakistan 
with a membership of around 15,000. This group was the only 
group in India to use suicide tactics in 2013. Islamist groups in 
India commonly use armed assaults targeting the police or 
bombings targeting private citizens. The majority of attacks 
occur in Hyderabad in the south, a city with a 40 per cent 
Muslim population, and Jammu and Kashmir in the north, an 
area which is nearly two thirds Muslim. In September 2014 
al-Qa’ida announced a presence in India, hoping to unite other 
Islamist groups. 
India’s north east region has for the last three decades seen 
continual ethno-political unrest from ethnic secessionist 
movements. Separatist groups including in Assam, Bodoland, 
Kamtapur and Meghalaya were responsible for 16 per cent of 
deaths. Targeting private citizens, police and businesses, attacks 
are generally restricted to the geographic region as most of 
these groups are relatively small and have local claims. 
INDIA 
Maoists 
Communist Party of India - Maoist (CPI-M) 
Unknown 
Other 
WORST ATTACK 
17 killed and 32 injured when 
100 gunmen ambushed and 
kidnapped government officials. 
The Communist Party of India - 
Maoist (CPI-M) responsible. 
DECREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
-87 GTI RANK: 6 
GTI SCORE: 7.86/10 
21
197 INCIDENTS 
SOMALIA INJURED 492 
MAJOR ATTACK 
Government (general) 
Private citizens  property 
Military 
Other 
Somalia continues to face violence in the south with rebel forces 
and terrorist groups using terrorist tactics. The number of 
people killed in Somalia from terrorism increased by 32 per cent 
from 2012 to 2013. 2013 has been the deadliest year of the past 
14 years with 405 people killed, up from 307 in 2012. 
In 2013, the Al-Shabaab group was responsible for all claimed 
attacks. This militant group is allied with Al-Qa’ida and has an 
estimated 4,000 to 6,000 soldiers. Unlike some other Al-Qa’ida 
affiliates, there has been infighting in Al-Shabaab over whether 
it should focus on local and regional objectives rather than 
transcontinental jihad. Notably, this was one of the reasons why 
the American recruit to Al-Shabaab, Abu Mansoor Al-Amriki, 
was killed by Al-Shabaab in 2013 as he criticised the group for 
being too focused on Somalian outcomes to the detriment of 
international jihad. Nevertheless, Al-Shabaab has attracted 
foreign fighters and has partnered with other groups. 
Al-Shabaab was responsible for the Westgate shopping mall 
attack in September 2013 in Kenya, which resulted in 67 deaths 
and 175 injuries. This was reportedly in retaliation for the 
involvement of the Kenyan military in a military operation to 
eradicate the group in Somalia. The leadership of Al-Shabaab 
contains many Somalis trained in the Iraq and Afghani conflicts. 
Many of the organisation’s leaders have been killed, including 
the overall leader, Moktar Ali Zubeyr killed by a U.S. drone strike 
in September 2014. There have been reports that members of 
Al-Shabaab and Boko Haram have trained together. Al-Shabaab 
has controlled several areas of Somalia including the capital 
Mogadishu in 2010. In recent times African Union support for the 
Somalia government has restricted their military operations. 
Al-Shabaab generally uses guerrilla warfare and is structured as 
an insurgency force in three parts: intelligence gathering; law 
enforcement; and a military arm. Most of the attacks are 
bombings or explosions which average around two and a half 
deaths per attack. One in ten attacks are suicide bombings. 
Suicide assault teams have become a feature in attacks by 
Al-Shabaab. Suicide bombings are much more deadly than 
other explosions, with an average of nine and a half deaths per 
attack. Such attacks have been used primarily against the 
government but also the military and police. Private citizens are 
generally not the target of suicide bombings. Armed assaults 
are used nearly 20 per cent of the time and are mainly used 
against private citizens. 
Southern Somalia has 90 per cent of attacks, with most of the 
remaining attacks occurring in Puntland in the north-east. 
Somaliland to the north-west saw the least terrorist activity. 
Almost half of all attacks were in the largest city and capital 
Mogadishu and 15 per cent of attacks in the port city of Kismayo 
in the south. Al-Shabaab announced it would further target the 
government in Puntland, with terrorist attacks in the Bari region 
increasing threefold from 2012 to 2013. 
Al-Shabaab 
Unknown 
DEAD 405 
WORST ATTACK 
38 killed and 58 injured when 
an explosives-laden vehicle 
detonated outside a courthouse. 
Al-Shabaab responsible. 
INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
+399 
2002 2014 
GTI RANK: 7 
GTI SCORE: 7.41/10 
22 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
MAJOR ATTACK 
WORST ATTACK 
68 killed, 215 injured when a suicide 
bomber detonated an explosives-laden 
vehicle at the entrance of a government 
building. Al-Qa’ida in the Arabian 
Peninsula (AQAP) responsible. 
Government (general) 
Utilities 
Police 
Other 
Terrorist attacks and injuries increased by 50 per cent between 
2012 and 2013. However, the attacks were less fatal with a 15 per 
cent reduction in fatalities to 291. Whilst there were nine different 
groups active in Yemen in 2013, two major terrorist groups 
committed over 80 per cent of terrorist acts. The other groups 
include tribesmen and separatists. It is unknown who committed 
16 per cent of attacks in 2013. The two most active terrorist 
groups are the Houthis and al-Qa’ida in the Arabian Peninsula 
(AQAP). The Houthis are the smaller group and claimed 
responsibility for 20 per cent of deaths in 2013 with 18 separate 
attacks, whereas AQAP claimed responsibility for 60 per cent of 
attacks in 2013 with 83 separate attacks. Both groups in Yemen 
are in conflict with the government and deploy terrorist tactics. 
Despite this, the Houthis and AQAP are opposed to each other 
and are based in separate parts of the country. 
AQAP is an al-Qa’ida affiliate which is currently being led by Nasir 
al-Wuhayshi who was Usama bin Ladin’s former secretary. The 
group was responsible for the bombing of the USS Cole in 2000 
which resulted in the deaths of 17 U.S. soldiers. It is considered to 
be one of the most active al-Qa’ida affiliates.3 AQAP mainly has 
operated in the south of Yemen and has been the target of U.S. 
predator drone attacks since 2002. AQAP are responsible for 
over 850 deaths from 300 terrorist attacks in the last four years. 
In 2013 they killed 177 people and they were the only group in 
Yemen to use suicide bombings. Suicide bombings were very 
INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
deadly, with an average of 11 deaths and nearly 30 injuries per 
attack. These bombings overwhelmingly targeted the 
government. This includes the bombing of the Ministry of 
Defence in Sana’a city, which resulted in 68 deaths and 215 
injuries. AQAP focused attacks on Sana’a and the city of 
Dhamar in south-west Yemen. 
The other major terrorist group, the Houthis, is a militant Islamist 
insurgency made up of followers of a Shia sect known as Zaydi. 
The Houthis are in conflict with the Yemen government opposing 
the Sunni-majority government and military. In September of 
2014, the Houthis invaded the capital city demanding a change 
of government. 
The Houthis are also opposed to AQAP, a Sunni group, and there 
have been several major battles between the two groups. Since 
2009 the Houthis have killed 200 people in terrorist attacks from 
28 separate attacks. The Houthis are a deadly terrorist group 
averaging over six deaths per attack. Their most deadly attack 
occurred in 2010 when 30 people were killed when they attacked 
pro-government Bin Aziz tribesmen. Most attacks by the Houthis 
target the capital city Sana’a, with all but one attack in 2013 
occurring in Sana’a or in the administrative centre of Amanat Al 
Asimah. In late 2014 the Houthis had administrative control over 
parts of north-west Yemen including partial or full control over 
the governorates of Al Jawf, Al Mahwit, ‘Amran, Hajjah, Saada 
and Sana’a. 
YEMEN 
Al-Qa’ida in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP) 
Houthis 
Unknown 
Other 
DEAD 291 INJURED 583 
2002 2014 
+287 
295 INCIDENTS 
GTI RANK: 8 
GTI SCORE: 7.31/10 
23
Government (general) 
Business 
Private citizens  property 
Other 
Terrorism has increased significantly in the Philippines between 
2012 and 2013, with almost twice as many incidents. The number 
of deaths has also more than doubled in this period increasing 
from 122 to 292. Terrorism in the Philippines is intrinsically tied 
with nationalist and separatist claims by people living in 
provinces in southern Philippines. However, terrorism is spread 
across the country. There were 438 cities that suffered a terrorist 
attack in 2013 of which only 104 had one attack. The city that 
saw the highest number of terrorist attacks was Cotabato City in 
Mindanao with 11 separate attacks that killed 11 people. 83 per 
cent of the 81 provinces of the Philippines had at least one 
terrorist attack in 2013. 
Whilst there were seven known groups that carried out a 
terrorist act in 2013 most activity is carried out by the New 
People’s Army, Moro Islamic Liberation Front (MILF) and the 
Abu Sayyaf Group (ASG). The largest individual group was the 
New People’s Army, a communist organisation, which claimed 
responsibility for 30 per cent of deaths in 2013. Armed assault 
represented nearly half of all fatalities, followed by 
assassinations, which constituted a quarter of all fatalities. This 
differs from many other parts of the world where use of 
explosives and bombings are more common. 
499 INCIDENTS 
Assassinations were prominent with 56 per cent of attempts 
successful. In total, 103 people were killed by assassinations in 
2013 which is more than five times higher than 2012. The use of 
these tactics and targets demonstrates that many of the 
terrorist groups in the Philippines are seeking to directly change 
the political system. Around 34 per cent of deaths from terrorist 
attacks were targeting the government, with business leaders, 
private citizens and police representing between ten and 
seventeen per cent of deaths. Only the Islamist Abu Sayyaf 
Group (ASG) engaged in suicide bombing. 
PHILIPPINES 
Unknown 
New People’s Army (NPA) 
Bangsamoro Islamic Freedom Movement (BIFM) 
Other 
DEAD 292 
WORST ATTACK 
9 killed and 7 injured when police 
were targeted with a bomb and 
shooting. New People’s Army 
(NPA) suspected. 
INJURED 444 
INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
+210 
2002 2014 
GTI RANK: 9 
GTI SCORE: 7.29/10 
MAJOR ATTACK 
24 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
THAILAND DEAD 131 INJURED 398 
Business 
Government (general) 
Police 
Other 
In 2013 Thailand saw the lowest number of deaths from 
terrorism since 2005. The number of deaths from 2012 to 2013 
decreased from 171 to 131. However, there were 116, or 54 per 
cent more terrorist attacks over this period. Three quarters of 
terrorist attacks were not claimed nor attributed to any group. 
Terrorist activity is overwhelmingly confined to the south of the 
country where there is an ongoing insurgency between Muslim 
separatists and the Thai government, with Malay Muslims 
opposed to the Thai Buddhist minority and supporters of the 
government. This conflict has been ongoing since 2004 with 
estimates of 5,000 deaths and 10,000 casualties. The majority 
of attacks have historically occurred in the four southern 
border provinces of Narathiwat, Pattani, Songkhla and Yala. 
Terrorist activity is so localised that out of the seventy-six 
provinces of Thailand, only 11 suffered from attacks. Five 
provinces only had one attack and six provinces had more than 
one attack. Peace talks hosted in Malaysia resumed in August 
2014 after leaders of the Barisan Revolusi Nasional (BRN) 
called to continue dialogue. 
WORST ATTACK 
6 killed and 1 injured when 
4 gunmen on motorcycles 
opened fire on a grocery 
store. Unknown, but Barisan 
Revolusi Nasional suspected. 
It is suspected that the majority of attacks are committed by a 
group of young independent militants not tied to any particular 
group. Militants are often young and are accordingly called 
Juwae. Older and more organised groups rarely claim 
responsibility for attacks. There is less evidence of groups 
working together, with groups appearing to be more fractured 
than in previous years.4 
Only four terrorist groups are known to have committed 
terrorist attacks in 2013. BRN is the largest of these groups. 
Operating in the South, BRN is a separatist group with a 
membership estimated at 1,000. This group was responsible for 
12 deaths from four attacks in 2013. Other separatist groups 
active in Southern Thailand include the Aba Cheali Group and 
Runda Kumpalan Kecil, both splinter groups of BRN. Armed 
assaults were much more deadly than bombings or explosions. 
The number of bombings increased 50 per cent between 2012 
and 2013, with 170 separate bomb attacks. However, the 
majority of bomb attacks resulted in no fatalities with 44 total 
deaths as opposed to 77 deaths by firearms. The biggest 
targets were businesses followed by police. The majority of 
terrorist attacks in Thailand have relatively low death rates, 
with an average of 1.2 deaths per attack. No attack killed more 
than six people in 2013. 
Unknown 
Separatists 
Barisan Revolusi Nasional (BRN) 
Other 
INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 
2002 2014 
+115 
332 INCIDENTS 
GTI RANK: 10 
GTI SCORE: 7.19/10 
MAJOR ATTACK 
25
TRENDS 
LARGEST INCREASES AND 
DECREASES IN TERRORISM 
2012 TO 2013 
Analysis of the year-to-year trends in terrorist attacks 
underscores its dynamic nature showing it can quickly 
intensify yet also fall away. As has been highlighted in the 
results section, the majority of terrorist attacks are 
concentrated in a small number of countries and this is 
where most of the year-to-year change is observed. 
While this section focuses on number of deaths, this is not 
always perfectly reflective of changes in overall terrorist 
impact as some countries may experience more incidents 
but fewer deaths, as was the case in Yemen in 2013. 
In 2013, 102 of the 162 countries included in this report did 
not experience a fatal terrorist attack. Of the remaining 60 
countries, 40 experienced an increase in the number of 
fatalities when comparing 2012 to 2013. Conversely, there 
were 26 countries that had fewer deaths from terrorism in 
2013 than 2012. 
Eighty-seven countries experienced a terrorist incident in 
2013, only slightly up from 81 in the 2012. This trend has 
remained fairly stable over the last 14-year period reflecting 
the fact that many terrorist incidents can manifest 
themselves in very small, non-lethal attacks. 
The five countries with the biggest increases in deaths from 
2012 to 2013 are also the countries most impacted by 
terrorism. The number of deaths in these five countries has 
increased by 52 per cent over this period. The country with 
the biggest increase in deaths was Iraq, which saw nearly 
4,000 more fatalities from terrorism in 2013 than 2012, 
representing a 164 per cent increase. The reason for the 
increase in Iraq is largely due to the actions of ISIL. 
The country with the second largest increase in the numbers 
of deaths was Pakistan. However, Pakistan saw a much 
smaller increase than Iraq with 520 more deaths in 2013 than 
2012. Pakistan saw a substantial increase in the number of 
deaths per attack. In particular, the second and third biggest 
terrorist groups, Lashkar-e-Jhangvi and Jundallah, averaged 
20 more fatalities per attack in 2013 than the previous year. 
This highlights the growing lethality of the groups. 
Syria saw the third largest increase in the number of deaths 
between 2012 and 2013, increasing by 71 per cent. The 
increase in deaths in Syria is partly a result of the ongoing 
civil war which has displaced millions since its start in 2011. 
Most of the deaths in Syria have been classified as war 
deaths rather than terrorist deaths. 
The increase in terrorism in Nigeria is due to Boko Haram 
which has increased in both members and resources. There 
was a significant increase in terrorism from 2009 after the 
founder and leader of Boko Haram, Mohammed Yusuf, 
was killed. 
The country with the fifth largest increase in deaths from 
terrorism is Afghanistan, where there was an increase of 13 
per cent or 350 deaths from 2012 to 2013. This increase is 
largely due to further activity by the Taliban, which killed 
almost 2,350 in 2013 up from 2,050 in 2012. 
26 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
FIGURE 6 LARGEST INCREASES IN DEATHS FROM 2012 TO 2013 
The five biggest increases in deaths were in the countries where terrorism has the biggest impact. 
4000 
3500 
3000 
2500 
2000 
1500 
1000 
500 
INCREASE IN DEATHS FROM TERRORISM 
+3956 
+354 
+519 +449 +422 
Country Iraq Pakistan Syria Nigeria Afghanistan 
Source: GTD 
164% 
Percentage 
change 
28% 71% 30% 13% 
FIGURE 7 LARGEST REDUCTIONS IN DEATHS FROM 2012 TO 2013 
Countries with the largest reduction in deaths from terrorism have all had relatively high 
historical rates of terrorism. 
Percentage 
change -48% -43% -23% -85% 
Country Yemen Colombia Turkey Thailand Cote d’Ivoire 
-10 
-20 
-30 
-40 
-50 
-60 
DECREASE IN DEATHS FROM TERRORISM 
Source: GTD 
-15% 
-52 
-22.5 
-50 
-43 -40 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
27
The five countries with the biggest decrease in deaths from 
2012 to 2013 still maintain high levels of terrorist activity, 
with Yemen and Thailand being amongst the ten countries 
suffering the most from terrorism. 
The country with the biggest fall in deaths was Yemen, 
falling by 52, or 15 per cent. However, that does not mean 
that terrorism is no longer a significant threat. There were 
nearly 100 more attacks in 2013 than 2012. Similarly, the 
number of injuries from terrorism in Yemen increased from 
2012 by 56 per cent to nearly 600. Yemen continues to 
confront a dual terrorist threat from the Houthis in the north 
of the country and al-Qa’ida in the Arab Peninsula (AQAP) in 
the south. 
Colombia experienced the second biggest improvement, 
with the death rate decreasing by 48 per cent to 55 deaths 
from 105 in 2012. This represents a substantial improvement 
over the decade average which was three times higher, 
averaging approximately 150 per year. The Revolutionary 
Armed Forces of Colombia (FARC), the largest terrorist 
group, have been in peace talks with the Colombian 
Government since 2013 and have substantially reduced the 
number of people they have killed. 
The third biggest improvement was seen in Turkey, which 
experienced 57 deaths from terrorism in 2013, down from 
100 in 2012. The decline in Turkey was largely due to the 
Kurdistan Workers’ Party (PKK) decreasing terrorist attacks 
in Turkey in 2013. In 2012 the PKK killed 86 people, whereas 
in 2013 the PKK was responsible for only one death. 
However, the emergence of ISIL, which killed at least 53 
people in Turkey in 2013, is a significant concern. 
The fourth biggest improvement occurred in Thailand which 
saw 23 per cent less deaths in 2013 than 2012. At 131 deaths, 
2013 was the lowest number of fatalities from terrorism in 
Thailand since 2005. 
The fifth biggest improvement occurred in Cote d’Ivoire, 
which saw deaths decrease by 85 per cent with only four 
fatalities in 2013 compared to 27 in 2012. 2012 was the 
deadliest year for terrorists in Cote d’Ivoire since 2005. 
Terrorism in Cote d’Ivoire sometimes takes the form of 
periodic attacks with high casualties. This was the case in 
2012 when a group loyal to the former President Gbagbo, 
who was arrested and imprisoned by the International 
Criminal Court, attacked a UN peacekeeping patrol and 
killed ten people. 
FIGURE 8 TARGETS OF TERRORISM, 2000-2013 
The primary target of terrorism has historically been private property and citizens. However since 2009 there has been a substantial 
proportional upsurge in incidents targeting police. 
40% 
35% 
30% 
25% 
20% 
15% 
10% 
5% 
Source: GTD 
Religious figures/institutions 
YEAR 
PROPORTIONS OF ANNUAL ATTACKS 
0 
Private citizens  property 
Police 
Business 
Government 
Transportation 
2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 
28 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
PATTERNS AND CHARACTERISTICS 
OF TERRORIST ACTIVITY SINCE 
2000 
This section summarises the overarching patterns and 
characteristics of terrorist activity over the last 14 years in 
terms of targets, weapons used, tactics, lethality, ideology 
and location. 
The primary target of terrorism has been private property 
and citizens, followed by attacks on police. In MENA and 
South Asia explosives are primarily used, while in Central 
America, the Caribbean and Sub-Saharan Africa, firearms 
are more regularly used. In North America, incendiary 
devices/firebombs are common. 
Suicide attacks have been used in five per cent of all 
incidents since 2000. 
Most terrorist attacks do not result in heavy loss of life. In 
2013 over 50 per cent of all attacks claimed no fatalities and 
only 10 per cent claimed more than five lives. The most 
lethal terrorism occurs in MENA, South Asia and Sub- 
Saharan Africa. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
Around five per cent of all deaths from terrorism since 2000 
have occurred in OECD countries. 
Over the past 14 years there has been a large increase in 
religion as the motivator for terrorist activity. However in 
2000, nationalist separatist movements were a more 
prominent motivation for terrorism than religion. Today, 
political and national separatist aims are still a significant 
driver of terrorism but unlike religion, they have seen 
comparatively little change over the period. 
Figure 8 highlights that the primary target of most terrorist 
attacks has been private property and citizens, however 
from 2009 onwards the preferred target group gradually 
switched to police. These two groups in 2013 accounted for 
around 50 per cent of all incidents. Attacks on private 
property and citizens decreased from 35 per cent of total 
attacks to 25 per cent, while attacks on police increased 
from 10 per cent of total attacks in 2009 to 24 per cent in 
2013. The trends of these two target groups show large 
fluctuations since 2000 rising and falling with subsequent 
events in Iraq, Afghanistan and Pakistan. 
FIGURE 9 WEAPONS TRENDS IN TERRORISM, 2000-2013 
The proportion of weapons used in terrorist acts has remained relatively constant globally with approximately 60 per cent of all 
attacks using explosives, 30 per cent using firearms and 10 per cent using other weapons. 
Explosives 
Firearms 
All others 
Suicide attacks 
2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 
YEAR 
PROPORTIONS OF INCIDENTS 
70% 
60% 
50% 
40% 
30% 
20% 
10% 
0 
Source: GTD Note: Suicide attacks are dashed to indicate that they are included regardless of weapon used and therefore should not be included when adding 
proportions to total 100 per cent. 
29
FIGURE 10 WEAPONS TYPES IN TERRORIST INCIDENTS BY REGION, 2000-2013 
Explosive weapons are the predominant tactic used by terrorists in South America, MENA, Russia and the CIS, South Asia and Europe. 
Terrorists in Central America, the Caribbean and Sub-Saharan Africa largely use firearms. 
100% 
80% 
60% 
40% 
20% 
PROPORTIONS OF INCIDENTS 
0 
Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite Firearms Incendiary Other 
Over the 14-year period attacks on business, transportation 
and religious figures have all been significant but 
proportionally have remained roughly the same. These 
trends are once again largely driven by events in the five 
countries with the highest levels of terrorism. 
Figure 9 highlights that explosives have consistently been 
the most prevalent type of weapon used in attacks 
accounting for over 60 per cent of all incidents globally. 
Firearms are the next most common weapon being used 
around 30 per cent of the time. Only 10 per cent of attacks 
used some other form of weapon in 2013. Once again these 
global trends are highly dependent on the five countries 
with the highest levels of terrorism. 
In North America, for example, incendiary weapons have 
been the primary mode of attack, with 132 instances since 
2000. In Sub-Saharan Africa, firearms are far more 
prominent than explosives. This is highlighted with the 
recent upsurge in Boko Haram, which has used firearms in 
over 50 per cent of their attacks since 2009. 
Figure 9 also highlights that only five per cent of all terrorist 
attacks in 2013 have been suicide attacks. Suicide attacks 
peaked in 2007 largely due to unrest in Iraq between 
terrorist groups and the then recently-formed Maliki 
Government, where 13 per cent of all terrorist incidents were 
suicide attacks. 
Europe 
South America 
Central America 
 Caribbean 
Whilst the total number of attacks using suicide bombing, as 
well as the numbers of terrorist attacks in general has risen 
substantially in 2012 and 2013, suicide attacks have 
decreased as a proportion of total attacks. In 2012 and 2013 
suicide attacks constituted five and six per cent respectively 
of all terrorist incidents compared to 2007 when suicide 
attacks accounted for 11 per cent of all attacks. 
Figure 12 highlights the changes in ideological drivers of 
terrorist organisations since 2000. Grouping over 350 of the 
most active organisations in the world into either religious, 
political or nationalist separatist groups shows that religious 
organisations have seen the largest rise in activity over the 
period.5 The prevalence of nationalist separatist and political 
terrorist organisations has remained relatively stable by 
comparison. Notably, religious ideology in the year 2000 
was less a motivation for terrorism than nationalist 
separatism. 
Once again, these global trends are dominated by the five 
countries with the highest levels of terrorism. Figure 13 
highlights that each region has its own profile. Since 2000, 
Source: GTD 
South Asia 
MENA 
Asia-Pacific 
Sub-Saharan Africa 
Russia  CIS 
North America 
30 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
FIGURE 11 LETHALITY TRENDS IN TERRORISM, 2000-2013 
Since 2007, there have been proportionally fewer incidents recorded that have killed more than five people while the per cent 
of non-fatal attacks has increased. 
60% 
50% 
40% 
30% 
20% 
10% 
Source: GTD 
YEAR 
PROPORTIONS OF FATALITIES IN AN INCIDENT 
0 
No fatalities 
1–5 fatalities 
5 fatalities 
2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 
FIGURE 12 TRENDS IN TERRORIST GROUP IDEOLOGY, 2000-2013 
Religion as a driving ideology for terrorism has dramatically increased since 2000. However, in 2000 Nationalist Separatist 
movements were more prominent. Political and National Separatist movements are still significant in 2013 but have seen little change 
in activity over the period. 
Religious 
Political 
Nationalist separatist 
2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 
YEAR 
NUMBERS OF INCIDENTS 
2000 
1750 
1500 
1250 
1000 
750 
500 
250 
0 
Source: GTD Note: Only 358 of the most active terrorist organisations have been classified in this analysis. Therefore, the number of incidents will not match the total 
numbers shown in previous figures. 
31
FIGURE 13 TRENDS IN REGIONAL TERRORIST IDEOLOGIES, 2000-2013 
Religious ideologies as a motivation for terrorism is not a global phenomenon. While it is predominant in Sub-Saharan Africa, MENA 
and South Asia, in the rest of the world terrorism is more likely to be driven by political or nationalistic and separatist movements. 
PROPORTIONS OF INCIDENTS 
Source: GTD 
South Asia 
MENA 
Sub-Saharan Africa 
Asia-Pacific 
Political Religious Nationalist separatist 
Europe 
Russia  CIS 
South America 
Central America 
 Caribbean 
North America 
100% 
80% 
60% 
40% 
20% 
0 
terrorist activity in Europe, Central and South America has 
been almost entirely due to nationalist separatist movements 
and political organisations. 
Due to the conflict with Chechnya and Georgia, terrorism in 
Russia has been largely separatist in nature. In China and the 
Asia-Pacific, terrorist activity is approximately evenly split 
between all three ideological strains. Domestic terrorist 
incidents in North America have been primarily of a 
political nature. 
TRENDS AND PATTERNS 
OF SUICIDE ATTACKS 
Suicide attacks in general are confined to only a few 
countries. Figure 14 shows that of the 2,500 suicide 
attacks since 2000, over 90 per cent occurred in MENA 
and South Asia. In these two regions, suicide attacks 
average between 11 and 13 fatalities per incident. These are 
the highest averages for all regions with the exception of 
North America due to the attacks of September 11. 
Overall, suicide attacks average 11 deaths per attack while 
other terrorist attacks average two. By these numbers it 
can be derived that suicide attacks are on average four and 
a half times more lethal than other forms of terrorism. 
Statistically, suicide bombing assassination attempts are 
less successful than other forms, with 56 per cent of 
assassination attempts using suicide bombing ending in 
failure. Six per cent of suicide attacks are assassination 
attempts. However, suicide attacks are much more deadly 
than other forms of terrorism. 
RELIGION AS A 
DRIVING IDEOLOGY 
FOR TERRORISM 
HAS INCREASED 
SINCE 2000. 
32 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
FIGURE 14 SUICIDE ATTACKS BY REGION FROM 2000 TO 2013 
Since 2000, only five per cent of all incidents have been suicide attacks. Of these 2,500 events, over 90 per cent of attacks occurred in 
South Asia and MENA. 
Source: GTD 
Suicide attacks 2% 1% 
MENA 
Sub-Saharan Africa 
South Asia 
Russia  CIS 
Other 
Southeast Asia 
4% 3% 
53% 
37% 
All other attacks 
TABLE 1 NUMBER OF SUICIDE ATTACKS BY ORGANISATION FROM 2000 TO 2013 
The Taliban, al-Qa’ida and ISIL have claimed the most suicide attacks in the period. However Hamas has proportionally used suicide attacks 
the most since 2000. 
ORGANISATION LAST ATTACK 
HAMAS (ISLAMIC RESISTANCE MOVEMENT) 
AL-AQSA MARTYRS BRIGADE 
AL-QA’IDA IN IRAQ 
ISLAMIC STATE OF IRAQ AND THE LEVANT 
AL-QA`IDA IN THE ARABIAN PENINSULA (AQAP) 
TEHRIK-I-TALIBAN PAKISTAN (TTP) 
LIBERATION TIGERS OF TAMIL EELAM (LTTE) 
AL-SHABAAB 
BOKO HARAM 
SUICIDE ATTACKS SINCE 2000 
195 
152 
579 
492 
298 
778 
499 
630 
750 
46 
35 
105 
84 
42 
97 
35 
43 
37 
24% 
23% 
18% 
17% 
14% 
12% 
7% 
7% 
5% 
2008 
2008 
2013 
2013 
2013 
2013 
2009 
2013 
2013 
Total number 
of attacks 
Number of 
suicide attacks Percentage 
33
The Taliban, al-Qa’ida and its affiliates and ISIL have used 
suicide bombing the most since 2000, with a combined 
total of approximately 2,000 attacks. For these groups this 
represents between 12 and 18 per cent of their total attacks. 
All three of these organisations used suicide attacks in 
2013. 
Whilst suicide attacks constitute a minority of total terrorist 
attacks, different terrorist groups use it as a tactic 
proportionally more than others. Hamas has historically had 
the highest prevalence of suicide attacks in their operations 
with 24 per cent of all incidents being suicide attacks. The 
Al-Aqsa Martyrs Brigade, another group based in the West 
Bank and Gaza, have used suicide attacks the second most 
at 23 per cent. However, neither Hamas nor the Al-Aqsa 
Martyrs Brigade has used this tactic since 2008. 
The majority of suicide attacks have been committed by 
jihadist groups in the Middle East. Whilst many of the 
groups which employ suicide tactics are associated with 
al-Qa’ida in some way, suicide bombing is not necessarily 
directed by al-Qa’ida.6 Many jihadists follow their family 
and peers rather than orders from afar.7 
Over the last 14 years the numbers of suicide attacks have 
increased and the areas where the majority of attacks 
occurred have changed. From 2000 to 2003 the majority of 
suicide attacks occurred in Israel, the West Bank and Gaza. 
A truce started in 2003 and led to the gradual decline of 
attacks and it wasn’t till 2006 when Hamas won a majority in 
the Palestinian legislative election and denounced the use of 
suicide bombing that the tactic ended. In 2003, with the 
invasion of Iraq and subsequent war, suicide bombing 
started in Iraq. Iraq accounts for 43 per cent of all deaths 
from suicide attacks in the last decade. Proportionally 
however suicide attacks still remain low. 
SINCE 2000, OVER 90% 
OF SUICIDE ATTACKS TOOK 
PLACE IN MENA AND 
SOUTH ASIA. 
FIGURE 15 NUMBER OF DEATHS FROM SUICIDE ATTACKS, 2000 - 2013 
After 2002 the number of suicide attacks in Israel, the West Bank and Gaza significantly declined, whereas the attacks that occurred 
in Iraq drastically increased. 
500 
400 
300 
200 
100 
Source: GTD 
Iraq 
YEAR 
DEATHS FROM SUICIDE ATTACKS 
0 
Total attacks 
Israel, West Bank  Gaza 
2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 
34 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
TABLE 2 DEATHS FROM TERRORISM IN 2013 
FOR OECD COUNTRIES 
Terrorism killed 57 people in Turkey and 40 people in Mexico in 
2013. The United States, United Kingdom, Greece, Israel, Chile 
and the Czech Republic also had fatal terrorist attacks, 
collectively losing 16 lives. 
ATTACKS 
DEATHS 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
0 0 
COUNTRY 
ATTACKS 
DEATHS 
COUNTRY 
Turkey 34 57 Germany 0 0 
Mexico 4 40 Netherlands 0 0 
United States 9 6 Belgium 0 0 
UK* 131 3 Australia 0 0 
Greece 53 2 Austria 0 0 
Israel 28 2 Portugal 0 0 
Chile 4 2 Estonia 0 0 
Czech Republic 1 1 Iceland 0 0 
Ireland 24 0 Hungary 0 0 
Italy 7 0 Japan 0 0 
France 5 0 Finland 0 0 
Spain 5 0 New Zealand 0 0 
Canada 3 0 Poland 0 0 
Switzerland 2 0 Slovakia 0 0 
Denmark 1 0 Slovenia 0 0 
Norway 0 0 South Korea 0 0 
Sweden 0 0 
TERRORISM IN THE OECD 
Since 2000, seven per cent of all terrorist incidents and five per 
cent of all fatalities have occurred in OECD countries resulting in 
4,861 deaths from 3,151 attacks. Excluding the September 11 
attacks, OECD countries on average suffered approximately 229 
attacks annually and lost on average 130 lives per year to 
terrorist acts. 
The U.S. accounted for the largest loss of life with 3,042 fatalities, 
however the September 11 attacks accounted for 2,996 of these 
deaths. Israel was the country with next highest number of 
fatalities at 841 representing 17 per cent of total fatalities followed 
by Turkey with 445 fatalities, representing 9 per cent of OECD 
fatalities. 
Excluding the September 11 attacks, there were still 1,865 deaths 
from terrorism in OECD countries over the 14 years from 2000 to 
2013. Luxembourg is the only OECD country not to be covered 
by the GTI. 
Although OECD countries represent a minority of terrorist 
attacks globally, they have suffered from several of the most 
deadly attacks of the last 14 years. This includes the September 
11 attacks which killed nearly 3,000 people, the Madrid train 
bombings which killed 191, the Norwegian massacre which killed 
77 and the London bombings which killed 56. 
As the security situation varies from nation to nation, this report 
does not provide a detailed analysis of each individual country; 
instead it analyses the overall level of activity in OECD countries, 
which organisations historically have presented the greatest 
FIGURE 16 TERRORIST FATALITIES IN OECD 
COUNTRIES, 2000-2013 
Five per cent of all 107,000 terrorist fatalities since 2000 have 
occurred in OECD countries. 
Source: GTD 
Rest of the world 
95% 
OECD 
5% 
risks and what are the most common types of attacks. 
In 2013 Turkey and Mexico were the countries in the OECD with 
the highest number of deaths from terrorism losing 57 and 40 
lives respectively; however the UK recorded the highest number 
of incidents at 131 of which 88 per cent occurred in Northern 
Ireland. 
Other countries which suffered fatalities from terrorism were the 
United States, United Kingdom, Greece, Israel, Chile and the 
Czech Republic, collectively losing a total of 16 lives. Terrorist 
incidents were much higher in European OECD countries than 
North American and Latin American countries with 244 and 20 
incidents recorded respectively in 2013. 
According to data from the International Centre for the Study of 
Radicalisation and Political Violence (ICSR), of the 34 OECD 
countries, 20 are believed to have citizens fighting in Syria 
against the Assad Government.8 Figure 26 (on page 57) 
summarises available data from a variety of sources on 
foreign fighters. 
35
THE MOST ACTIVE TERRORIST 
GROUPS IN THE OECD 
This section of the report covers the last five years in which 
447 people died from terrorism in the OECD from 1,284 
incidents. During the five years from 2009 to 2013, terrorism 
in the OECD was predominately concentrated in two 
countries, Turkey and Mexico, which had 58 per cent of all 
deaths over the last five years. 
Lone individuals who were not affiliated with any terrorist 
group accounted for 25 per cent of the deaths in OECD 
countries over the last five years with for 113 fatalities. The 
four groups covered below as well as individual actors 
accounted for 338 deaths or 76 per cent of all deaths from 
terrorism in OECD countries over the last five years. 
Kurdistan Workers’ Party (PKK) 
OECD countries attacked in last five years: Turkey 
Incidents in last five years in OECD countries: 156 
Fatalities in last five years in OECD countries: 129 
Injuries in last five years in OECD countries: 303 
The PKK are responsible for the most terrorist deaths 
in the OECD in the last five years. They were 
established in 1978 and initially sought an 
independent Kurdish state.9 However, in recent years 
the group has focussed more or Kurdish autonomy 
within a Turkish state. Operating primarily in Turkey 
and Iraq, waves of violence waged by the PKK in the 
1990’s are estimated to have caused approximately 
40,000 casualties.10 In the past five years the PKK 
has been responsible for 29 per cent of all deaths 
from terrorism in the OECD. 
Individual Actors 
OECD countries attacked in last five years: 
Belgium, France, Great Britain, Norway, Sweden 
and the United States. 
Incidents in last five years: 35 
Fatalities in last five years: 113 
Injuries in last five years: 144 
Individual actors are the second major cause of 
terrorist deaths in the OECD in the last five years. 
They are people who are not formally members of a 
terrorist group but may work in cooperation with 
one. In the last five years individual actors have been 
responsible for over a quarter of all terrorist deaths in 
OECD countries. These individuals could either be 
attempting to promote their own cause or to support 
another group. One prominent example of lone wolf 
terrorism occurred in Norway in July 2011 when a 
right-wing extremist killed 77 and injured over 300 in 
two attacks in part to promote his manifesto. 
Another example is in 2013 with the Boston 
Marathon Bombing on April 15 which was conducted 
by two brothers who learned ideology and terrorist 
tactics from al-Qa’ida publications.11 
36 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) 
OECD countries attacked in last five years: Turkey 
Incidents in last five years in OECD countries: 2 
Fatalities in last five years in OECD countries: 53 
Injuries in last five years in OECD countries: 140 
Over the last five years ISIL was responsible for a 
quarter of all deaths from terrorism in Turkey. This 
makes them the fourth most active group in the 
OECD. What is striking is that they have not been 
active in Turkey for long and in a short period of time 
have replaced the PKK as the most deadly group in 
the country killing 53 people in 2013. It is important 
to note that these numbers only count up to the 
end of 2013. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
Devrimci Halk Kurtulus Cephesi 
(DHKP/C) 
OECD countries attacked in last five years: Turkey 
Incidents in last five years in OECD countries: 10 
Fatalities in last five years in OECD countries: 6 
Injuries in last five years in OECD countries: 16 
The DHKP/C, a Marxist-Leninist party formed in 
Turkey in 1978 is the fifth most active terrorist group 
in the OECD over the past five years.14 It aims to 
establish a socialist state within Turkey and is 
strongly opposed to the United States, NATO and 
Turkish establishment.15 They have claimed 
responsibility for the suicide bombing outside the 
U.S. Embassy in Ankara in 2013 which killed an 
embassy guard and injured one.16 
Individualidades Tendiendo a lo Salvaje 
(Individuals Tending Toward Savagery) 
OECD countries attacked in last five years: Mexico 
Incidents in last five years in OECD countries: 2 
Fatalities in last five years in OECD countries: 37 
Injuries in last five years in OECD countries: 102 
This group, based in Mexico, have branded 
themselves as anarchist eco-terrorists opposed to 
nanotechnology.12 They have claimed responsibility 
for an explosion at the Pemex state oil company 
offices which killed 37 people in January 2013. They 
have also claimed responsibility of shooting a 
biotechnology researcher, Ernesto Mendez Salinas to 
death in 2011.13 If responsible for both attacks then 
they are the fourth most deadly terrorist group in the 
OECD in the last five years. Deaths from the drug 
wars which have been active in Mexico over the last 
decade are not classified as terrorism because they 
are organised criminal groupings without unified 
political or ideological objectives. 
LONE INDIVIDUALS WHO 
WERE NOT AFFILIATED 
WITH ANY TERRORIST 
GROUP ACCOUNTED FOR 25 
PER CENT OF THE DEATHS 
IN OECD COUNTRIES. 
37
ASSESSING 
TERRORISM RISK 
This section describes how the results of the statistical 
analysis carried out for the GTI can be used to develop a 
quantitative understanding of the future risk of terrorism. 
Using terrorist incidents and events data dating back to 1970 
and comparing it to over 5,000 socio-economic, political 
and conflict indicators, three groups of factors related to 
terrorist activity have been identified. Countries that are 
weak on these factors and do not have high levels of 
terrorism are assessed as being at risk. 
The correlations section of this report details the most 
significant socio-economic correlates with terrorism. There 
are three groups of factors: 
Social hostilities between different ethnic, religious and 
linguistic groups, lack of intergroup cohesion and 
group grievances. 
Measures of state repression such as extrajudicial 
killings, political terror and gross human rights abuses. 
Other forms of violence such violent crime, organised 
conflict deaths and violent demonstrations. 
Terrorism risk can be clearly grouped into three categories 
or contexts: 
1. The risk of terrorism in the context of a larger ongoing 
conflict. 
2. The risk of terrorism in countries without conflict. 
3. The risk of ‘black swan’ attacks. 
This analysis finds that meaningful risk factors can be 
identified for two of the three risk categories, (1) risk of 
terrorism in a context of a larger conflict, and (2) risk of 
terrorism in countries without conflict. ‘Black Swan’ events 
are by their nature very difficult to predict, but statistical 
analysis can provide important context to their overall 
likelihood. The methodology for conceptualising each 
category of risk is detailed further within this section. 
Understanding the statistical patterns of terrorist activity 
and its socio-economic drivers is a useful starting point for 
conceptualising the key risk factors. Over 5,000 datasets, 
indexes and attitudinal surveys were statistically compared 
to the GTI to find the most significant socio-economic 
factors linked to terrorist activity. This process identified 
several key indicators which were significantly correlated to 
terrorism. 
These factors were compared to the literature on the 
conditions that are considered conducive for breeding 
terrorist violence. There was significant overlap between the 
IEP statistical analysis and the literature.17 Several key 
variables were then chosen and a multivariate analysis was 
performed to understand key causal factors. This process is 
further detailed in the correlations section. Key factors 
analysed were: 
Weak state capacity. 
Illegitimate and corrupt governments. 
Powerful external actors upholding corrupt regimes. 
Extremist ideologies. 
Historical violence and conflict. 
Inequality in power. 
Repression by foreign occupation or colonial powers. 
Discrimination based on ethnic or religious origin. 
Failure of the state to integrate dissident groups of 
emerging social classes. 
Social injustice. 
To determine which countries are most at risk of a large 
increase in terrorism, the 162 countries covered in the GTI 
were compared to these factors to find which countries 
performed poorly on these measures and were not already 
suffering from high levels of terrorism. 
38 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
KEY FINDINGS 
Based on measuring these factors IEP has identified the 
following 13 countries as being at risk of substantial 
increased terrorist activity from current levels: 
—Angola 
—Bangladesh 
—Burundi 
—Central African Republic 
—Cote d’Ivoire 
—Ethiopia 
—Iran 
—Israel 
—Mali 
—Mexico 
—Myanmar 
—Sri Lanka 
—Uganda 
Countries with higher levels of terrorism perform 
significantly worse on the Pillars of Peace, a framework 
developed by IEP to assess the positive peace factors 
that create peaceful societies. The ten countries with the 
most deaths from terrorism in 2013 performed 26 per 
cent worse on the Pillars of Peace compared to the 
international average. These countries performed 
particularly poorly on three out of the eight Pillars of 
Peace. These three Pillars are: 
Free flow of information, which captures the extent to 
which citizens can gain access to information, whether 
the media is free and independent. Peaceful countries 
tend to have free and independent media, which 
disseminate information in a way that leads to greater 
openness and helps individuals and civil society work 
together. This leads to better decision-making and 
rational responses in times of crisis. 
Good relations with neighbours, which refers to the 
relations between individuals and between 
communities as well as to cross-border relations. Some 
of the countries with the highest levels of terrorism 
border each other. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
Acceptance of the rights of others, which includes 
both the formal laws that guarantee basic freedoms as 
well as the informal social and cultural norms that 
relate to behaviours of citizens. Yemen is the worst 
performing country in this Pillar, with Nigeria and 
Pakistan also performing in the bottom ten. 
The countries with the highest rates of terrorism also 
have certain commonalities in behaviours and attitudes. 
Corruption is generally higher among the 10 countries 
with the highest number of deaths from terrorism. 
According to the Gallup World Values Survey, these 
countries experience 11 per cent more people facing a 
bribe situation than the international average. All ten 
countries have significant Muslim populations and there 
are relatively more people expressing the view that the 
West is in conflict with the Muslim world. The rates of 
political terror and political instability are also 
significantly higher in these ten countries than the 
international average. 
BOX 1 TERRORIST ACTIVITY AND THE PILLARS OF PEACE 
One of the most important findings in this report is that 
there is not a strong statistical link between poverty and 
terrorism.18 Many people who join terrorist groups in wealthy 
countries are well educated and come from middle class 
families.19 A detailed understanding of what is statistically 
associated with terrorism is contained in the correlates 
section of this report. Other measures which didn’t correlate 
include life expectancy, mean years of schooling and 
economic factors such as GDP growth. 
In comparison to other forms of violence, in 2012 the 
number of people killed by homicide was 40 times greater 
than those killed by terrorism. Furthermore, terrorist 
incidents that kill more than 100 people are rare and 
represent only 1 in 1000 terrorist incidents. The required 
resources and the planning needed to conduct such attacks 
are more likely to be outside the capabilities of most 
existing groups. 
39
TERRORISM IN COUNTRIES 
NOT IN CONFLICT 
TERRORISM IN THE COUNTRIES 
WITH ONGOING CONFLICT 
In contrast to countries immersed in significant conflict, there 
are terrorist activities in countries where there is no ongoing 
conflict. Two factors with a strong statistical relationship in 
these environments are political terror and low levels of 
intergroup cohesion. 
To further explore these linkages, IEP has compared the levels 
of political terror and intergroup cohesion of countries since 
1996 that have suffered a major terrorist attack.22 Of the 6,100 
major terrorist acts analysed, over 90 per cent occurred in 
countries which at the time were in the lowest quartile of 
societal group cohesion as measured by the Indices of Social 
Development.23 A similar statistic exists when looking at 
political terror with over 90 per cent of the countries that 
suffered major terrorist incidents having the highest levels of 
political terror and political instability. High levels of extrajudicial 
killings and disappearances were common in about 70 per cent 
of the countries targeted by major terrorist attacks. 
The most common context for the onset of terrorist violence is 
within an ongoing conflict. According to the GTD there were 
around 40,000 terrorist attacks in which at least one person 
was killed between 1970 and 2013. This number spans 178 
countries. Of these 40,000 terrorist attacks, around 70 per cent 
occurred in countries that were at the time already immersed in 
serious political, civil, ethnic or international conflicts.20 This 
statistic remains true even if you remove terrorist attacks that 
have occurred in MENA and South Asia. 
Table 3 lists countries that are currently suffering from ongoing 
conflict of this nature.21 Of these, only six are not in the twenty 
countries with the highest levels of terrorism, Central African 
Republic, Ethiopia, Israel, Mali, Mexico and Myanmar. 
TABLE 3 COUNTRIES THAT MAY EXPERIENCE 
INCREASES IN TERRORISM DUE TO ONGOING 
CONFLICT 
The following countries are currently suffering from ongoing conflict. 
Of these only six are not in the twenty countries with the highest 
levels of terrorism as measured by the GTI. These six are determined 
at risk of increases in terrorist activity. 
COUNTRY 
Afghanistan Myanmar* 
Central African Republic* Nigeria 
Colombia Pakistan 
Democratic Republic of the Congo Philippines 
Egypt Russia 
Ethiopia* Somalia 
India South Sudan 
Iraq Sudan 
Israel* Syria 
Mali* Thailand 
Mexico* Turkey 
Yemen 
*Note: not in the twenty countries with the highest levels of 
terrorism as measured by the GTI. 
FIGURE 17 PER CENT OF TERRORIST ATTACKS 
DURING ONGOING CONFLICT 1970-2012 
Over 70 per cent of terrorist attacks occur within a country 
during periods of major conflict. 
During a period of major 
conflict. 
72% 
Outside of a period of 
major conflict. 
28% 
Source: GTD and Center for Systemic Peace, 
Major Episodes of Political Violence, 1946-2013 
40 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
BOX 2 DISTINGUISHING BETWEEN TERRORIST ACTIVITY AND WARTIME ACTIVITY 
The Global Terrorism Database (GTD) and the Study 
of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START) 
classify terrorism as actions outside the context of 
legitimate warfare activities. That means only acts 
which are contrary to international humanitarian law, 
such as the deliberate targeting of civilians, conducted 
by sub-national actors are viewed as terrorism. The 
actions of governments do not get counted in the GTD 
and are therefore not included in the GTI. The GTD and 
START do not count state terrorism and only record 
incidents by sub-national actors. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
Battle deaths when state actors are involved are not 
defined as acts of terrorism, but rather the result of war. 
As such, a group such as ISIL attacking a Syrian Army 
regiment would not be classified as terrorism by either 
side but as a wartime activity. Terrorism often invokes a 
distinct political or ideological message to be conveyed 
to a larger audience than the immediate victims, which is 
another reason that battle conflicts are not regarded as 
terrorism. 
Political terror refers to human and physical rights abuses as 
measured by Amnesty International and the U.S. State 
Department. This includes violations of human rights, state-sanctioned 
killings, torture and political imprisonment.24 
Intergroup cohesion refers to relations of cooperation and 
respect between identity groups within a society.25 A 
breakdown of this social fabric increases the risk of violent 
conflict between groups within a country. Importantly, poverty 
and other development indicators do not show strong 
relationships to high levels of terrorism. Both of these findings 
are corroborated with literature in the field. 
By analysing the countries that are in a state of peace but have 
high levels of political terror and low levels of intergroup 
cohesion it is possible to identify countries that have the risk of 
increased terrorist activity. IEP has analysed the most up-to-date 
data on these factors globally. Table 4 lists countries that 
are currently not in outright war or conflict but have the 
characteristics of those countries that suffer from high levels of 
terrorism and are outside of the 20 countries with the highest 
levels of terrorism in the GTI 2014. 
TABLE 4 COUNTRIES NOT IN CONFLICT BUT AT 
RISK OF HIGHER LEVELS OF TERRORISM 
The following countries exhibit traits that are normally associated 
with countries with higher levels of terrorism. 
COUNTRY EXTRAJUDICIAL 
KILLING 
LACK OF 
WOMEN’S 
POLITICAL 
RIGHTS 
LACK OF 
INTERGROUP 
COHESION 
POLITICAL 
INSTABILITY 
RANK 
IN GTI 
2014 
Bangladesh 9 9 9 9 23 
Iran 9 9 9 28 
Sri Lanka 9 9 9 9 37 
Burundi 9 9 9 39 
Cote 
d’Ivoire 
9 9 9 9 40 
Uganda 9 9 9 9 52 
Angola 9 9 9 9 95 
*Note: ticks show where countries score in the bottom 25 per cent globally. 
41
Not all terrorist incidents are equally devastating, and not 
all terrorist groups are equally effective. ‘Black Swan’ events 
are by their nature, unknown, unpredictable and devastating. 
Understanding the statistical properties and patterns of 
these attacks in the context of all terrorist attacks can 
provide information that can help with prediction and 
risk assessment. 
Whilst the fear of large scale and unpredicted black swan 
terrorist incidents loom large in the public imagination, the 
reality is that most terrorist incidents result in no deaths. 
Only one terrorist attack has resulted in more than a 
thousand deaths, that being the attacks of September 11th, 
with 49 attacks resulting in more than one hundred deaths. 
Just over half of all terrorist attacks recorded in the GTI led 
to one or more deaths, with the vast majority of those 
resulting in less than ten deaths. 
The majority of terrorist organisations are relatively 
ineffective, with the vast majority of deaths from terrorism 
being the responsibility of the four largest terrorist 
organisations in the world, each of which has the resources, 
manpower, experience, and expertise in order to carry out 
successful attacks. Even with these resources, most large 
terrorist organisations have had very limited success in 
pulling off large scale attacks, especially beyond the 
territories in which they operate. 
By analysing the distribution and intensity of terrorist 
activity it can be seen that the majority of deaths from 
terrorism occur from a relatively small percentage of attacks. 
Figure 18 shows in fact around 50 per cent of all incidents 
claim no lives and most of the remainder claim less than ten. 
By analysing the cumulative distribution of deaths Figure 19 
shows that 80 per cent of all deaths were caused by only 17 
per cent of all the attacks since 2000. Such statistical 
properties lead to the observation that deaths from 
terrorism follows a power-law probability distribution. 
Based on purely mathematical assumption of the power-law 
distribution there may even have been slightly fewer terrorist 
attacks claiming between 100 and 1000 casualties than 
expected. Logical explanations for this include successful 
counter-terrorism efforts, or that large scale terrorist 
organisations focus on encouraging either small or 
independent terrorist cells to pursue smaller scale attacks. 
If deaths from terrorism do follow a power-law distribution, 
it is expected to see a logarithmic relationship between 
deaths in a given incident and the number of incidents with 
at least that many deaths. This is indeed what is observed, as 
shown in figure 20. Large scale terrorist attacks like the 
September 11 attacks, 7/7 London attack, the Madrid train 
bombing, or the Beslan hostage crisis are rare but not 
completely unexpected. 
Terrorism as a tactic of sustained mass destruction on a 
large scale is mostly ineffective. However, large scale 
explosions and mass deaths cause large, unpredictable and 
unintended consequences whereas individual deaths have 
much smaller flow-on effects. Therefore comparing ‘black 
swan’ events with smaller incidents is difficult as these large 
events can be profoundly course changing and result in 
significant domestic and international consequences well 
beyond their initial impact. 
‘BLACK SWAN’ ATTACKS 
FIGURE 18 NUMBER OF INCIDENTS 
CATEGORISED BY DEATHS. 
Just half of all terrorist incidents result in no fatalities. 
100–1000 Deaths 
 1,000 Deaths 
No deaths 
24,413 
10–100 Deaths 
2,427 
1–10 Deaths 
22,470 
49 
1 
Source: GTD 
42 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
FIGURE 19 CUMULATIVE DEATHS FROM TERRORISM SINCE 2000 
80 per cent of all deaths have occurred from only 17 per cent of all attacks. 
ATTACK RANK BASED ON FATALITIES 
60% 
FIGURE 20 NUMBER OF DEATHS PER INCIDENT VS NUMBER OF INCIDENTS 
WITH AT LEAST THAT MANY DEATHS 
Terrorist incidents with extremely high casualties rarely occur. 
100,000 
10,000 
1,000 
100 
10 
1 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
1 10 100 1,000 10,000 
NUMBER OF ATTACKS WITH AT LEAST THIS MANY DEATHS 
Source: GTD Note: Log Scale 
NUMBER OF DEATHS IN A SINGLE INCIDENT 
100% 
80% 
40% 
20% 
0% 
1 8330 24413 49360 
PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL FATALITIES 
Four fifths of all fatalities since 2000 
were caused by the top 8,330 most lethal 
terrorist attacks. 
Therefore 80 per cent of fatalities come 
from about 17 per cent of the attacks. 
43
Comparing the number of deaths from homicide versus the 
number of deaths from terrorism from 2000 to 2011 in the 
four countries that experienced ‘black swan’ events it is 
possible to compare the ratio between homicides and 
terrorism. Four examples of significant ‘black swan’ incidents 
since 2000 include the 2011 Norway attack, the 2004 Madrid 
bombings, the 2005 7/7 London attacks and September 11. 
A comparison of deaths from these four events to national 
homicides of each country over the period of 2000 to 2011 is 
shown in Table 5. What is apparent is that even in countries 
which have experienced a devastating terrorist attack in the 
last ten years; significantly more people were killed by 
homicide than by terrorism over the period. 
At the global level, the difference between deaths from 
intentional homicide and terrorism is very significant. Figure 
21 shows that in 2012 a total of around 437,000 lives were 
lost due to homicide, by contrast in the same year, a total of 
11,000 people were killed from terrorism representing a 
number 40 times less than homicide.26 Therefore the 
likelihood of being killed through intentional homicide is 
much greater than being killed in a terrorist attack. 
Of course while it should be noted that while terrorism may 
claim fewer lives, its effect on a community is traumatic, 
creating fear, changing daily habits and producing 
substantial economic costs. 
x40 
TOTAL NUMBER OF DEATHS 2000 - 2011 
FIGURE 21 NUMBER OF DEATHS BY HOMICIDES 
VS. TERRORISM GLOBALLY, 2012 
Around 40 times more people were killed globally by 
homicide than terrorism in 2012. 
DEATHS IN 2012 
500,000 
400,000 
300,000 
200,000 
100,000 
0 
437,000 
Homicides 
Terrorism 
Source: GTD, UNODC Global Study on Homicide 2013 
11,000 
COMPARING HOMICIDE TO 
TERRORIST DEATHS 
TABLE 5 DEATHS BY HOMICIDE VS. DEATHS FROM 
FOUR LARGE ‘BLACK SWAN’ EVENTS 
Even in countries which have experienced a devastating terrorist 
attack in the last ten years; significantly more people were killed by 
homicide than by terrorism over the 2000-2011 period. 
Country Deaths from 
terrorism (T) 
Homicides (H) 
[1] 
Ratio = (H – T)/ 
(T) 
Norway 75 518 1:6 
Spain 249 5,897 1:23 
United Kingdom 57 10,776 1:188 
United States 3029 195,948 1:64 
Source: UNODC, Homicide Statistics, http://www.unodc.org/gsh/en/data.html ,2013, 
(accessed 7 October 2014). 
AN INDIVIDUAL IS 40 
TIMES MORE LIKELY 
TO BE A VICTIM OF 
HOMICIDE THAN 
BE KILLED IN A 
TERRORIST ATTACK. 
44 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
The economic costs of terrorism go further than the 
destruction of property and the loss of life. The increased 
costs of security, military expenditure and insurance often 
outweigh the original attack. Further, terrorist activities 
increase uncertainty in the market, decrease foreign 
investment, alter trade and change consumption and 
savings behaviour.27 Long run effects can be long lasting 
and have a significantly larger effect on the economies of 
developing economies. 
In 2001 the IMF estimated that terrorism cost the U.S. 0.75 
per cent of GDP or approximately US$75 billion per year, 
while increases in terrorism in Nigeria in 2010 was 
associated with a decline of Foreign Direct Investment 
(FDI) by 30 per cent the following year.28 
The total costs of terrorism can be divided into two 
categories, primary or direct costs and secondary or 
indirect costs. Primary costs refer to the immediate 
damage caused by an act of terrorism. For example, the 
primary costs include the loss of life, injury and damage to 
infrastructure. These are the immediate costs in the 
aftermath of an event. Secondary costs are more 
complicated and can span a greater time period. These are 
disruptions to an economy due to a terror event or threat. 
This may take the form of increased security costs, 
changed consumption patterns, decreased FDI, decreased 
trade, and decreased tourism. 
Trying to quantify the total global cost of terrorism is 
difficult. While direct costs of terrorism are largely agreed 
upon in the literature, secondary costs, however, are wide 
ranging. For example, studies trying to assess the cost of 
the September 11 attack have estimates ranging from $35 
billion to $109 billion.29 In addition, terrorism as a term 
covers such a vast array of attacks that generalisation is 
almost impossible. For example a bioterrorist attack could 
be delivered using a poison, virus or bacteria, each of which 
would have varying degrees of damage. The estimated 
economic cost of such an attack could range from $477.7 
million to $26.2 billion for every 100,000 persons 
exposed.30 
Other economic costs of terrorism included in a report 
published by the Australian Department of Foreign Affairs 
and Trade which estimated in 2013 the extra trade costs 
due to terrorism alone could be as high as $180 billion. A 
report by RAND published in 2011 outlined three different 
levels of terrorism and associated costs within the U.S. 
These were moderate, severe and nuclear. Table 6 is a 
rough estimate of the associated direct costs of each 
category of an attack according to their calculations. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
TABLE 6 RAND ESTIMATED DIRECT COSTS OF 
TERRORIST ATTACKS WITHIN THE U.S. 
A RAND study published in 2011, estimated the costs of terrorist 
attacks on the US economy by dividing attacks into three groups. 
Severe attacks such as the 9/11 bombings are estimated to cost 
the economy 1 per cent of GDP, while a nuclear attack would double 
this. These are rough estimations and the location of the attack 
would have major effects on the outcome. 
MODERATE SEVERE NUCLEAR 
Cost per year $11 billion $183 billion $465 billion 
Cost of life $4 million per 
person 
$4 million per 
person 
$4 million per 
person 
Cost of injury $40,000 per 
person 
$40,000 per 
person 
$40,000 per 
person 
Annual resource cost $10 billion $200 billion $300 billion 
GDP 0.05% 1% 2% 
The primary costs of terrorism can incur huge totals, 
especially large scale events such as the London and Madrid 
bombings and the September 11 attacks. The large loss of 
life and destruction of infrastructure from September 11 
totalled $55 billion in New York alone, while secondary 
effects such as increased security ($589 billion), decreased 
economic activity ($123 billion) and other costs have been 
totalled to as much as $3.3 trillion.31 
ECONOMIC COST OF 
TERRORISM 
THE LONG TERM 
INDIRECT COSTS OF 
TERRORISM CAN BE 
TEN TO 20 TIMES 
LARGER THAN THE 
DIRECT COSTS. 
45
Trade and FDI are negatively affected by acts of terrorism. 
However there are exceptions, single incidents, even when 
major events, do not seem to affect FDI. Studies have shown 
that the 9/11 terrorist attacks had little effect on U.S. FDI,32 
while FDI in Spain actually increased by $6 billion in 2005 
following the 2004 Madrid train bombings and by another 
$11 billion in 2006.33 
Decreased FDI flows due to terrorism were recorded in 
Greece and Spain in the 1980s and 1990s and were worth up 
to half a billion for each nation.34 The effect has been more 
dramatic in Nigeria where it has been estimated that FDI 
flows dropped $6.1 billion in 2010 due to Boko Haram’s acts 
of terrorism.35 This represents a decline of almost 30 per 
cent from the previous fiscal year. This is shown in Figure 22. 
As developing economies or fragile states are generally 
more volatile, investment comes at a higher risk. As a result, 
terrorism in high risk countries drastically lowers investment. 
These acts also increase the security premium, further 
increasing the cost of economic activity and leading 
investors to look elsewhere. This is one reason why acts of 
terror within developing nations have a more drastic effect 
on FDI than in developed nations. 
The average FDI within the ten countries most affected by 
terrorism is less than half of that of OECD countries. Trade 
as a per cent of GDP is 51 per cent for these countries, 
while OECD countries are on average 87.5 per cent.36 As 
many developing economies depend on trade flows with 
the developed world and rely on FDI inflows, these 
decreases have substantial long-term economic and 
developmental effects. 
Figure 23 shows the correlation between terrorist incidents 
and trade activity as a per cent of GDP in Colombia. While 
not all change can be attributed terrorism, it demonstrates 
there can be a notable potential impact. 
TERRORISM, 
INVESTMENT AND 
TRADE 
Increased costs of insurance 
Following the 9/11 attacks, insurance premiums on large 
infrastructure within the U.S. skyrocketed, Chicago’s 
O’Hare airport annual insurance policy increased in cost 
from $125,000 to $6.9 million while its insurance 
coverage for terrorism decreased from $750 million to 
$150 million per annum.37 This resulted on the creation of 
the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act (TRIA), which was 
passed resulting in the government reimbursing up to 85 
per cent of losses due to acts of terrorism. Similar 
policies have been seen in Australia following the Bali 
bombings, the UK, Germany and France. 
GDP Decrease 
Changes in consumer behaviour, decreased investment, 
and decreased trade, destruction of human and physical 
capital all combine to decrease a country’s GDP. 
Increased government spending 
Governments often have to take on the financial burden 
of any terrorist acts which result in damage to property 
or people. The opportunity cost of such large scale 
expenditure has the potential to take funding away from 
other infrastructure investments and social investments in 
education, the health sector, transport and RD. 
Changes in consumer behaviour 
The way people act within an economy changes as a 
result of terrorism. Consumption patterns change, 
people invest more wealth into insurance which as a 
result is diverted from other expenditure. In extreme 
cases individuals are reluctant to move in public spaces 
due to the fear of attack thereby decreasing expenditure 
and economic activity. 
BOX 3 OTHER FLOW-ON COSTS OF TERRORISM 
46 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
FIGURE 22 CHANGES IN FDI AS A PER CENT OF GDP IN NIGERIA AND BENIN, 2006-2013 
Since increased violence from Boko Haram in 2009, FDI in Nigeria has decreased sharply from five per cent of GDP to just one per cent, 
while FDI in neighbouring Benin has shown increases. 
5 
4 
3 
0 
Source: World Bank 
Boko Haram 
increases in activity. 
FDI (NET INFLOWS) PER CENT OF GDP 
Benin 
2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 
2 
1 
-1 
Nigeria 
YEAR 
FIGURE 23 COLOMBIA: TERRORIST INCIDENTS COMPARED TO TRADE AS PER CENT OF GDP, 2008–2013 
While a large drop in trade in 2008 was attributed to the global financial crisis, there is a significant statistical relationship between 
trade and terrorism of –R=0.79 over the last 6 years. 
TRADE AS PER PER CENT OF GDP 
160 
120 
80 
40 
0 
Source: World Bank Data, GTD 
40 
39 
38 
37 
36 
35 
34 
33 
32 
31 
ACTS OF TERRORISM 
r=0.79 
Trade as % of GDP 
Acts of terrorism 
2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 
47
TERRORIST GROUP 
CASE STUDIES 
In 2013 four terrorist groups were responsible for 66 per 
cent of all deaths from claimed terrorism incidents. These 
four groups are the most deadly terrorist groups in the last 
fifteen years, and have killed at least 25,000 people in a 
decade. The deadliest terrorist group is the Taliban and the 
TTP, which has killed over 12,000 people, closely followed by 
al-Qa’ida and its major affiliates that have killed at least 
8,585 people. 
The two other largest terrorist groups have shorter histories. 
Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) and Boko Haram 
both became more active in 2009, which was the first year 
that either group killed over 300 people. Based on data up 
to the end of 2013, these two groups have killed in excess of 
3,000 people in four years, half of which was in 2013 alone. 
The ten largest terrorist groups have varying agendas and 
are a combination of religiously motivated groups, separatist 
movements and ideological groups wanting a change of 
system. The four most deadly organisations all ascribe 
broadly to the Wahhabi sect of Sunni Islam and have an 
association with al-Qa’ida. 
The origins of al-Qa’ida can be traced to the Soviet war in 
Afghanistan, where they were one of the many groups 
fighting the Soviet Union. Similarly, the Taliban was involved 
in opposing Soviet forces in Afghanistan. 
The two groups have had close ties since 1996 when they 
trained together in Afghanistan. In recent times al-Qa’ida has 
decentralised and its direct affiliates continue to be 
significant. Of its major branches or affiliated organisations 
al-Qa’ida in Iraq (AQI) has been responsible for the most 
deaths. Following the death of AQI’s leader and a split over 
tactics, Islamic State of Iraq (ISI) emerged from AQI. ISI was 
renamed Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) and is 
the biggest terrorist group operating in Iraq today. It has 
since adopted the name of Islamic State, but this report uses 
the ISIL designation. 
Other large affiliates of al-Qa’ida include al-Qa’ida in the 
Arabian Peninsula (AQAP) based in Yemen which has been 
responsible for nearly 1,000 deaths and al-Qa’ida in the 
Lands of the Islamic Maghreb (AQLIM) based in Algeria and 
48 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
responsible for over 500 deaths. There have been reports 
that Boko Haram is affiliated with al-Qa’ida, with founding 
member Mohamad Yusuf reportedly receiving early funding 
from Usama bin Ladin.38 There are only two other terrorist 
groups among the ten most deadly groups which are also 
motivated by religion. The Lord’s Resistance Army in 
Uganda and South Sudan is driven in part by Christian 
fundamentalism.39 The other religiously motivated group, 
Al-Shabaab in Somalia, is an al-Qa’ida affiliate. 
Al Qa’ida affiliates are defined as either being an ally or as 
having a familial relationship to al-Qa’ida. The activity of 
these 30 organisations span South Asia, MENA, Europe, 
Africa, North America and the Asia-Pacific and have 
claimed 27,169 lives over the period. Activity since 2009 has 
been largely in Afghanistan, Syria, Iraq, Yemen, Algeria 
and Nigeria. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
The changing name of ISIL reflects the many changes of 
the organisation. Originally al-Qa’ida in Iraq (AQI), the 
group changed their name to Islamic State in Iraq (ISI) 
when they split off from al-Qa’ida. In April 2013 the group 
changed its name to Islamic state of Iraq and Syria (ISIS) 
to reflect that it was engaged in the Syrian civil war. Due 
to translation ambiguities it is also known as the Islamic 
State of or Iraq and the Levant (ISIL). In June 2014 the 
group solely referred to itself as the Islamic State or IS 
reflecting its shift of focus from a regime change in Syria 
to a desire to create a ‘caliphate’ or sovereign state. It has 
been referred to as Da’ish (or Daesh) as that is the Arabic 
acronym, although ISIL supporters dislike this name in 
part because it sounds similar to unpleasant words in 
Arabic.40 This report uses the ISIL designation. 
FIGURE 24 10 MOST DEADLY TERRORIST ORGANISATIONS BY NUMBERS KILLED (2000-2013) 
The four biggest terrorist groups in 2013 are also the deadliest groups of the last fifteen years. 
Taliban* Boko Haram Indian Maoists 
8,000 
4,000 
Source: GTD Note: Taliban includes Afghanistan and Pakistan Taliban. 
Al-Shabaab 
Revolutionary Armed Forces 
of Colombia (FARC) 
12,000 
10,000 
6,000 
2,000 
0 
FATALITIES 
Al-Qa'ida ISIL 
(all major affiliates) 
Lord's Resistance Army 
Tamil Tigers 
Chechen Rebels 
BOX 4 THE MANY NAMES OF ISIL 
49
COMPARING TERRORIST ORGANISATIONS 
INCIDENTS, DEATHS  INJURIES In 2013 these four groups are responsible for 66 per cent of all 
deaths from terrorist attacks in which the perpetrator is known. 
Deaths from other groups operating in Pakistan, Syria, Somalia, 
India, and Kenya account for a further 21 per cent of deaths in the 
same year. Prominent groups operating in these countries include 
the Al-Nusrah Front in Syria, Al-Shabaab in Somalia and Kenya, 
Lashkar-e-Jhangvi in Pakistan and Maoists in India. 
Al-Qa’ida 66% Taliban * 
ISIL 
Boko 
Haram 
Of all attacks in 2013 in 
which the perpetrator was 
known, these four groups 
were responsible for 66 per 
cent of all resulting deaths. 
*Includes both Afghanistan 
and Pakistan Taliban. 
9115 
12185 
3111 
Al-Qa’ida Taliban Boko Haram ISIL 
8081 
492 
3440 
1759 
750 
8763 
2757 
8585 
1089 
Total, 2000-2013 
Incidents 
Deaths 
Injuries 
TRENDS, 2000-2013 
Boko Haram 
ISIL Al-Qa'ida (all major affiliates) 
YEAR 
NUMBER OF DEATHS 
3,000 
2,500 
2,000 
1,500 
1,000 
500 
0 
Taliban 
2001 2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 
50 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
TARGETS  TACTICS, 2000-2013 
FREQUENCY AND TYPES OF ATTACKS / / / 
Al-Qa’ida Taliban 
740 /268 / 81 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
Firearms Explosives Others Key 1 icon = 50 incidents 
TARGETS OF ATTACKS / / / / 
ISIL 
420 / 51 / 21 
270 / 375 / 105 
622 / 1612 
133 / 390 
Boko Haram 
Al-Qa’ida 
289 / 520 / 35 / 245 
Taliban 
Taliban 
ISIL 
Al-Qa’ida 
Note: al-Qa’ida includes al-Qa’ida and all major affiliates. 
* Sources detailed in endnotes. 
Boko Haram 
156 / 307 
150 / 137 
1345 / 966 / 446 
ISIL 
219 / 158 
30 / 85 
Private citizens 
 property 
Government, 
police  military 
Others 
Educational 
 religious institutions 
CAPACITY, NUMBER OF FIGHTERS* 
0 20,000 40,000 
36,000-60,000 
20,000-30,500 
3,700-19,000 
500-9000 
60,000 
Boko Haram 
High Estimate 
Low Estimate 
NUMBER OF FIGHTERS 
51
ISLAMIC STATE OF IRAQ AND 
THE LEVANT (ISIL) 
Iraq’s wheat growing land. The second main source of revenue is 
through foreign investors.44 The third revenue stream is through 
looting and controlling resources. Kidnapping and extortion, as 
well as the charging of electricity, fines and religious taxes, are 
also major revenue streams for ISIL.45 
MEMBERSHIP 
Recent estimates suggest that ISIL has access to up to 31,500 
soldiers.46 This represents up to a fifteen fold increase on the 
numbers of AQI in 2011 which the U.S. Department of State 
estimated at 1,000 to 2,000.47 The majority of these soldiers are 
from Syria and Iraq, attracted in part by steady wages. ISIL 
reportedly pays soldiers $400 per month and a bonus every year 
with added premiums for a dependant which is a good wage for 
the region.48 ISIL actively recruits foreign fighters, posting on 
social media in multiple languages and publishing its propaganda 
magazine, Dabiq, in English. The war in Syria has attracted at 
least 12,000 foreign fighters. As the Syrian civil war has 
continued, foreign fighters have been more attracted to 
extremist groups like ISIL over more mainstream rebel groups.49 
ACTIVITIES 
The military and intelligence wings remain significant as ISIL 
attempt to gain and maintain control over land. Military 
operations include training camps as well as military incursions 
and terrorist activity. Terrorist activity takes the form of 
bombings targeting private citizens, police and businesses. In 
2013 there were 350 terrorist attacks by ISIL which killed 1,400 
people and injured 3,600. ISIL conducted over 50 suicide 
bombings which killed an average of nine and injured 17 people. 
ISIL is both an insurgency and a quasi-government for the 
regions it controls in both Iraq and Syria. ISIL has developed a 
governing bureaucracy since shifting its focus from overthrowing 
the Assad regime in Syria to establishing a state. There are 
departments which draft and implement ISIL policies. 
Responsibilities include developing laws, recruitment, controlling 
financial matters including a 410 page annual report and oil and 
weapon sales, propaganda and media outreach. As well as 
internal organisational roles, councils have adopted governance 
responsibilities including the establishment of Islamic courts as 
well as policing and punishment. There are also reports that ISIL 
have taken on service delivery functions including electricity, 
repairing roads, food kitchens and, in some areas, post offices.50 
HISTORY 
The Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) has emerged as 
the largest Sunni terrorist organisation active in the Middle East. 
The group was originally al-Qa’ida in Iraq (AQI). However 
following the death of the head of AQI, Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, 
and disagreements over tactics, a group split from AQI and 
formed the Islamic State in Iraq (ISI). 
ISIL became known for extreme violence and terror tactics as a 
major actor in the Syrian civil war in 2013 and with its rapid 
expansion into Syria and then Iraq in 2014. In February 2014 
al-Qa’ida formally broke ties with ISIL, with leader Ayman 
al-Zawahiri stating ISIL disobeyed directions from al-Qa’ida to kill 
fewer civilians. 
IDEOLOGY 
ISIL is an extremist Wahhabi insurgency with the primary goal of 
establishing a regional caliphate, or state, under Salafist oriented 
Islamic law.41 The group promotes violence to those who do not 
adhere to its interpretations. ISIL aspires to control the Levant 
region which includes Israel, Iraq, Jordan, Lebanon and Syria. It is 
opposed to the Alawite Assad regime and the Shia Iraqi 
Government of both former Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki and his 
successor Haider al-Abadi. ISIL has also claimed to be fighting a 
holy war against Shia Muslims, Christians and Yezidis, a Kurdish 
ethno-religious group in Iraq and Syria. 
LEADERSHIP 
The entire organisation is led by Abu Bakr al Baghdadi who is 
known as the Caliph or political successor. The ‘governor’ of the 
Syrian territories of ISIL is run by Abu Ali al-Anbari, a former 
Major General under the Hussein regime. The ‘governor’ of the 
Iraqi territories of ISIL is run by another former army General 
under Hussein, Abu Muslim al Turkmani. Both men engage in 
military strategy and govern areas through the oversight of local 
councils. 
FUNDING 
ISIL has emerged as one of the wealthiest terrorist organisations, 
with at least three main revenue streams. The first is through 
selling what they have captured. This includes oil sales to local 
consumers, the Syrian regime and black marketers as well as 
exporting crude oil to Turkey.42 It is believed that ISIL controls a 
dozen oil fields and refineries in Iraq and Syria generating 
revenues of between one to three million U.S. dollars per day.43 
ISIL captured some of the oil fields from Al-Nusrah Front in 2014. 
As well as oil, it is believed that ISIL has access to 40 per cent of 
52 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
BOKO HARAM 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
HISTORY 
Boko Haram is a Nigerian based terrorist group founded in 2002. 
The name has been interpreted to mean ‘Western education is 
sin’ or ‘Western Civilisation is forbidden.’ The group began as 
members of a mosque in the north-east which sought to 
implement a separatist community under Wahhabi principles.51 
Boko Haram was founded as a Sunni Islamic fundamentalist sect 
advocating a strict form of sharia law and developed into a 
Salafist-jihadi group in 2009, influenced by the Wahhabi 
movement.52 After a dispute with police which killed 70 
members, a new group was formed under Imam Mohamad Yusuf 
who built a new mosque for the group. Following the death of 
Mohammed Yusuf while he was in police custody in 2009 the 
group became markedly more violent. Before 2009 the group 
engaged in few acts of violence, but it has been responsible for 
3,500 civilian deaths since.53 
IDEOLOGY 
The group is Sunni Islamist and seeks to abolish the secular 
system of government to implement Wahhabi interpretations of 
Sharia law in Nigeria.54 Sharia law is fully implemented in nine and 
partially implemented in three of the 36 states of Nigeria, all of 
which are in northern Nigeria. However, Boko Haram is seeking 
full implementation of Sharia throughout the entire country. 
They aim to use acts of terror to further the social divide 
between Muslim, Christian groups and the Federal Government. 
As such, they have issued an ultimatum to Christians living in 
north-east Nigeria to ‘leave or die.’55 The group is against any 
Western influence and, like the Taliban, attacks educational 
institutions to highlight its opposition to western education.56 
LEADERSHIP 
After the death of founder Mohamad Yusuf in 2009, deputy 
leader Abubakar Shekau took over until he was killed by Nigerian 
forces on 26 September 2014. The group is largely decentralised. 
Different states host cells which often have little communication 
with each other. Hence it is difficult to dissect the organisational 
structure, size and leadership. What is known is that Boko Haram 
has two main sections: the larger section is focused on 
discrediting the Nigerian government; whereas the smaller 
section is more focused on conducting increasingly sophisticated 
and lethal attacks.57 
FUNDING 
Boko Haram has multiple revenue streams. This includes the sale 
of goods, extracting the profits of supportive businesses, child 
beggars which are also used as spies for the organisation, 
extorting local traders and cross-border smuggling of arms and 
cash.58 They also receive funding from wealthy members and 
supportive benefacttors. There are also major narcotic trafficking 
routes to Europe in West Africa and it is suspected that Boko 
Haram has links with al-Qa’ida in the Islamic Maghreb (AQIM) in 
trafficking narcotics as another major source of revenue.59 
MEMBERSHIP 
The exact number of Boko Haram members is unknown60 
however higher estimates are around 9,000.61 Recruitment has 
targeted disaffected youths in the poorest areas of Nigeria, 
namely Yobe, Kano, Bauchi, Borno and Kaduna all in the north. 
The 12 most northern states where Boko Haram operates have 
almost double the poverty rates and four times the child 
malnutrition rates of the rest of the country.62 Members are often 
disaffected youths, unemployed graduates and members of 
Almajiris which are homeless youth supposedly under religious 
guidance. 
ACTIVITIES 
Boko Haram wants to bring about Sharia law rather than control 
areas and service delivery. As such, the majority of its activity is 
aimed at destabilising the Nigerian Government and increasing 
religious tensions rather than becoming the government. Apart 
from recruitment, fundraising and increasing political influence, 
Boko Haram is predominantly engaged in terrorist activity. The 
group has been increasing its deadliness each year, with 2013 
being four times as deadly as 2009. In the period between 2009 
and 2012, over 3,500 Nigerians have been killed by the group 
through shootings and bombings.63 Around 60 per cent of 
attacks and fatalities are armed assaults using guns, with a 
quarter of attacks and fatalities from bombings. They have used 
at least 35 suicide bombings, 28 of which occurred in 2012. 
Suicide bombings account for five per cent of all attacks. 
Boko Haram is known for instigating sectarian violence between 
Christian and Muslim groups and has attacked both churches 
and mosques in an attempt to instigate hatred and unrest among 
the two groups. In 2013 Boko Haram killed 64 people who were 
attending services in mosques and 16 attending church services 
in over 11 separate attacks. In 2013 there were 11 private citizens 
who were beheaded. 
Like other large terrorist groups, Boko Haram shows concern 
over the way it is depicted in the media. The group has specific 
journalists which they contact directly to claim responsibility for 
various attacks. They regularly release videos online, including 
in response to the international ‘Bring Back Our Girls’ campaign 
which was started in protest of the school girls kidnapped 
in Chibok. 53
AL-QA’IDA 
HISTORY 
Al-Qa’ida was formed in 1988 by Usama bin Ladin, a Saudi 
Arabian who was killed in 2011, and Abdullah Azzam, a 
Palestine Sunni scholar who was killed in 1989. The group, like 
the Taliban, rose during the Soviet war in Afghanistan. It strives 
for international jihad, and is the only international jihadi group 
to have successfully conducted large scale attacks in the West. 
The group was responsible for large scale attacks in New York, 
London and Madrid and were a main target of the NATO-led 
War on Terror following September 11. As a result, many of 
al-Qa’ida’s leadership have been killed and al-Qa’ida now 
adopts a decentralised structure using regional cells and 
affiliated organisations instead of a centrally controlled 
organisation. While direct acts of terrorism attributed to 
al-Qa’ida have been relatively lower since 2011, activity by 
al-Qa’ida affiliated groups has risen. 
IDEOLOGY 
Al-Qa’ida is a Salafi jihadist group inspired by the teachings of 
Wahhabism and seeks to use armed conflict to advance Islam. 
The group is opposed to other forms of Islam including Shia, 
and other major religions well as Judaism. Al-Qa’ida also views 
the West as allied to Israel, and determines this relationship as 
responsible for the poverty of many Muslim countries.64 The 
organisation seeks to rid the Muslim world of any western 
influence and implement an Islamic caliphate, or state, under 
sharia law.65 
LEADERSHIP 
Following the capture or assassination of many of the group’s 
leaders, the structure and leadership of the organisation has 
decentralised into regional cells. The current leader is Ayman 
al-Zawahiri, who reportedly was one of the architects of the 
September 11 attacks and served as bin Ladin’s physician in the 
1980s. His whereabouts have remained unknown since he went 
into hiding following the overthrow of the Taliban. 
Nasser Abdul Karim al-Wahuyshi is the leader of al-Qa’ida in the 
Arabian Peninsula (AQAP), the most active franchise of 
al-Qa’ida. Khalid al-Habib was named as the organisation’s 
military commander after it was falsely believed he had been 
killed in U.S. drone strokes in 2006. He is believed to oversee 
internal operations in Afghanistan and Pakistan. 
FUNDING 
Originally the organisation was funded by bin Ladin’s personal 
wealth and fundraising as well as through the opium trade.66 
Recently, ransoms for hostages have been a major source of 
revenue for al-Qa’ida. According to a New York Times report, 
al-Qa’ida has raised $125 million from ransoms since 2008, with 
$66 million from 2013 alone.67 The source of the majority of 
ransom payments is reportedly European governments and 
companies. 
MEMBERSHIP 
The size of al-Qa’ida is hard to measure as many significant 
leaders from al-Qa’ida have been killed or imprisoned and the 
organisation is largely decentralised. The central organisation 
has decreased in size in recent years, with the former CIA 
Director, Leon Panetta, claiming in mid-2010 that there were 
fewer than 100 al-Qa’ida members in Afghanistan. However, its 
affiliation with other organisations and reach, especially in 
Africa, has increased.68 Al-Qa'ida and its affiliates are estimated 
to have 3,700 to around 19,000 members. 69 70 
While the organisation is split into sects such as al-Qa’ida in the 
Islamic Maghreb, al-Qa’ida in Syria, al-Qa’ida in Somalia, 
al-Qa’ida in the Indian Subcontinent and al-Qa’ida in the Arabian 
Peninsula, the organisation is also indirectly affiliated with at 
least 18 other terrorist groups and has connections with Boko 
Haram and Al-Shabaab. 
ACTIVITIES 
Prior to the death of bin Ladin the group were responsible for a 
number of high profile attacks within western countries such as 
September 11, the London and Madrid bombings, as well as a 
string of smaller attacks. However, recently it hasn’t committed 
large scale acts of terror. This may be because of the much 
reduced organisational capacity. Other attacks such as suicide 
bombings, armed attacks, IEDs, kidnapping and hijackings have 
also been employed by the organisation. The number of terrorist 
attacks attributed to al-Qa’ida dropped significantly in 2013 to 
166 from 405 in 2012, while the organisation was still responsible 
for the death of 559 people and injury of 1,245 others. 
54 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
TALIBAN 
HISTORY 
Founded in 1994 by Mohamad Omar, the group were originally a 
mixture of Mujahedeen who fought against the Soviet invasion 
of Afghanistan in the 1980s and a group of Pashtun tribesmen. 
The Taliban took control of Afghanistan in 1996 and ruled until 
2001, when they were overthrown by the American-led invasion 
of Afghanistan. They have since regrouped as an insurgency 
movement to fight the now former Karsai administration and the 
NATO-led International Security Forces (ISAF). Now known as 
the ‘Neo-Taliban’ or the Quetta Shura Taliban due to the current 
location of their leadership, the organisation has rebranded itself 
as an independence movement in an attempt to gain support as 
it endeavours to recapture and take control of Afghanistan. 
IDEOLOGY 
Its beliefs are a mixture of Wahhabism, Deobandi, a form of 
Hanafi Sunni Islam, and Pashtun local tribe codes known as 
Pashtunwali.71 The group has rebranded itself as an 
independence movement rather than a fundamentalist 
organisation.72 The new structure forcibly recruits men and 
children into their ranks. 
LEADERSHIP 
Since the collapse of the Islamic Emirate of Afghanistan in 2001, 
the leadership of the Taliban is based in Quetta, Pakistan, known 
as the Quetta Shura Taliban. Mullah Omar who began his 
involvement with the Taliban in 1996 is said to head the 
organisation. While there have been several reports of his death, 
none have been confirmed. 
FUNDING 
Al-Qa’ida had provided the Taliban with financial support and 
imported fighters from Arab countries and Central Asia. While 
also dependant on smuggling and drug trafficking, opium and 
heroin production is believed to be the equivalent to four per 
cent of Afghanistan’s GDP and the global heroin trade has 
historically been a major source of revenue for the Taliban.73 74 In 
2008 it was estimated that the opium trade financed as much as 
40 per cent of the Taliban’s activities.75 The U.S. has also 
accused Iran for supplying militants with Iranian-made weapons 
including road side bombs, one of the main forms of attacks 
used by the Taliban.76 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
MEMBERSHIP 
In 2010 the estimated size of the Taliban was said to be 36,000 
to 60,000.77 78 
ACTIVITIES 
While the Taliban has been responsible for 75 per cent of civilian 
casualties in Afghanistan since 2010, its main targets are 
government administration, police and military personnel, 
specifically targeting coalition and Afghan forces as it stages an 
insurgency campaign to recapture the state. In 2013 the Taliban 
were responsible for 649 acts of terrorism with 234 associated 
deaths. While suicide bombings are used for around 10 per cent 
of attacks the majority of Taliban incidents have been via 
roadside bombs, explosive devices or armed attacks. There has 
been an increase in targeting of military and police in recent 
years. 
Major attacks in 2013 included: 
A suicide bomber detonated a bomb outside of Kabul’s 
Supreme Court killing 17 and wounding 40. 
In December 2013 an armed assault on Afghan security 
forces in Jurn district, Badakhshan province, Afghanistan 
killed a total of 19 people including two soldiers. 
In November of 2013 an assault on the national army in 
Bala Morgab district, Badgis province, Afghanistan killed 
eight people including two soldiers and injuring 23 others. 
No group claimed responsibility; however the attack was 
attributed to the Taliban. 
The organisation has been using Twitter and text 
messages to communicate with the media and claim 
responsibility for attacks as well as operating a 
clandestine radio station “voice of the Shariat” to claim 
responsibility for attacks and spread their agenda.79 
55
BOX 5 FOREIGN FIGHTERS IN SYRIA 
Following the beginning of the Syrian war there is growing 
interest surrounding the increases in foreign fighters, 
particularly ‘western’ born jihadists. Central to this interest is 
the concern that foreign fighters returning from the conflicts 
in Iraq and Syria will commit terrorist attacks once they have 
returned to their country of origin. Statements made by ISIL 
have said that they wish to encourage ‘lone wolf’ terrorism 
committed by fighters once they return home. 
As a result of these concerns, there has been a great deal of 
debate regarding the number of foreign fighters currently 
fighting for ISIL. Estimates vary depending on sources, with 
some counting total numbers, including those killed in 
action or those who have returned home, whilst others try 
to estimate only the number of currently active fighters 
only. Figure 26 shows an estimate of the total number of 
active foreign fighters in Syria based on government 
reports and the International Centre for the Study of 
Radicalism (ICSR). High and low estimates are provided by 
ICSR as well as a comprehensive account of how these 
estimates were derived. 
The vast majority of foreign fighters in Syria came from 
surrounding Middle Eastern countries. Low estimates 
suggest that there were four times as many foreign fighters 
from the Middle East and North Africa, compared to Western 
European countries. 
BOX 6 HOW TERRORIST GROUPS END 
Comprehensive counter-terrorism efforts are concerned 
not only with stopping specific terrorist attacks, but also 
disrupting, breaking up, and eventually ending terrorist 
groups. Thus, it is important to understand how, 
historically, terrorist groups come to an end in order to 
hasten the demise of currently active terrorist groups. 
A report by the RAND Corporation, which looked at 
terrorist groups over a forty year period, found that the 
majority of terrorist groups ended by either joining the 
political process, meaning either the whole organisation, 
or via a political wing of the organisation and becoming 
became a legitimate political party, or were destroyed by 
policing and intelligence agencies breaking up the group 
and either arresting or killing key members. Military force 
in of itself was rarely responsible for ending terrorist 
groups, as shown in Figure 25. 
The report also found that the manner in which a 
terrorist organisation developed was closely related to 
the goals of that organisation. Terrorist groups with 
narrow goals were much less likely to engage in 
widespread violence, were more likely to find common 
ground or at least negotiate a settlement with the acting 
government, and thus more likely to seek legitimisation 
through the political process. Conversely, groups with 
broad goals or those groups with an international focus 
and a religious orientation were much less likely to 
achieve their goals, and are more likely to continue 
operating, increase in size, and need military intervention 
to halt them. Of all the terrorist groups tracked in the 
report between 1968 and 2006, 62 per cent ended, but 
of these only 32 per cent of religious terrorist groups 
ceased operating. 
FIGURE 25 HOW TERRORIST GROUPS END, 
268 TERRORIST GROUPS (1968-2006) 
Political engagement and policing were the most successful 
strategies in combating terrorist groups in the long run. 
Military force 
Achieved goals 
Source: RAND 
Politicisation 
43% 
Policing 
40% 
10% 
7% 
56 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
FIGURE 26 ACTIVE FOREIGN FIGHTERS IN SYRIA 
Most foreign fighters come from surrounding Middle-Eastern countries. 
0 500 1000 1500 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
2000 2500 3000 
NEAR NEIGHBOURS 
ICSR Low estimate (Dec 2013) 
ICSR High estimate (Dec 2013) 
Govt. Agency Estimates (Feb-April 2014) 
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 
Tunisia 
Saudi Arabia 
Jordan 
Morocco 
Lebanon 
Libya 
Turkey 
Egypt 
Iraq 
Algeria 
Palestine 
Sudan 
Kuwait 
Qatar 
U.A.E. 
Bahrain 
Mauritania 
Oman 
Russia 
France 
UK 
Belgium 
Germany 
Netherlands 
Kosovo 
Denmark 
Spain 
Sweden 
United States 
Austria 
Indonesia 
Italy 
Norway 
Finland 
Ireland 
Canada 
Switzerland 
Kyrgyzstan 
Luxembourg 
Singapore 
7000 
6000 
5000 
4000 
3000 
2000 
6664 
1846 1930 
396 
Europe MENA 
FOREIGN FIGHTERS 
ICSR Low estimate (Dec 2013) 
ICSR High estimate (Dec 2013) 
Govt. Agency Estimates (Feb-April 2014) 
Source: ICSR Data. Report: ICSR Insight: Up to 11,000 Foreign Fighters in Syria; Steep Rise Among Western Europeans (http://icsr.info/2013/12/icsr-insight-11000-foreign-fighters- 
syria-steep-rise-among-western-europeans/); Govt. Agency Data. Report: Foreign Fighters in Syria, The Soufan Group 
(http://soufangroup.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/TSG-Foreign-Fighters-in-Syria.pdf). 
Note: Data refers to fighters in total, does not subtract for fighters who have been killed, or who have returned to their home countries. Other estimates exist in the media, these 
two sources represent the most reliable estimates at the time of publication. Not every foreign fighter in Syria is a terrorist or joined with the explicit desire to fight for ISIL. 
However, as the conflict has gone, foreign fighters have tended to become more radical. 
57
THE RISE AND FALL 
OF TERRORIST GROUPS 
SINCE SEPTEMBER 11 
The RAND study on how terrorist groups end focuses on the 
period 1968 to 2006 as outlined in Box 6 on page 56. 
However, there has been a tremendous growth in the total 
level of terrorist activity in the last decade with a shift from 
small nationalist and ethnic terrorist groups towards large 
scale groups or even insurgencies with broad religious and 
political based goals. 
Despite this increase, there are some large terrorist groups 
that have seen significant declines in terrorist activity over 
the last six years, when compared to total terrorist activity in 
the prior six years from 2002 to 2007. 
Of the 20 terrorist groups which saw the largest declines in 
activity over this period: 
Ten are still active to some degree, although most of them 
are operating with much reduced capacity. 
Nationalist and separatist terrorist groups had the biggest 
decreases in terrorist activity, the key developments were: 
—FARC in Colombia have seen large declines in 
activity by partially entering a political process. 
—The Tamil Tigers were defeated by the military in 
Sri Lanka. 
—Activity by the Chechen Rebels has declined partly 
due to military intervention but also due to the 
dispersion of members into other terrorist groups. 
—In Israel, a combination of political process and 
counterterrorism activities has led to a significant 
reduction in terrorist activity from Hamas, the 
Al-Asqa Martyr’s Brigade, and Palestinian Islamic 
Jihad. This is based on data up to the end of 2013. 
—There was also a significant reduction in terrorism 
in India by Maoist separatists but that trend has 
since plateaued. 
However, most of the religiously motivated terrorist groups 
with broad goals which had large decreases in terrorist 
activity either merged with other terrorist groups or 
morphed into slightly different organisations. For instance: 
Tawid and Jihad, a terrorist organisation founded by 
al-Zarqawi in 1999, began operating in Iraq in 2002 before 
becoming known as Al-Qa’ida in Iraq. It has merged with 
other groups several times, and was the precursor to ISIL. 
Similarly, the Salafist Group for Preaching and Combat 
(GSPC) which was active in Algeria from 1998 to 2006, 
became known as Al-Qa’ida in the Islamic Maghreb in 
2007, after a loss of popular support saw its resources 
dwindle. 
The pattern of terrorist group declines in the last decade 
follows the outline suggested in the RAND study on how 
terrorist groups end. Nationalist groups have either partially 
entered a political process or been completely defeated, 
whilst those groups with mixed ideologies and broad goals 
have mutated or merged with other groups. In some areas, 
ethnically motivated groups have been displaced by 
religious groups with links to broader terrorist networks, and 
even when efforts to quell these groups have been 
successful, they have been able to draw upon networks of 
likeminded groups to rebrand and help rebuild resources 
and capacity. 
IN THE LAST DECADE THERE 
HAS BEEN A SHIFT FROM 
SMALL NATIONALIST AND 
ETHNIC TERRORIST GROUPS 
TOWARDS LARGE GROUPS 
WITH BROAD RELIGIOUS AND 
POLITICAL GOALS. 
58 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
CORRELATES 
OF TERRORISM 
The most significant socio-economic correlates with 
terrorism can be grouped into three main factors. 
Measures of social hostilities between different ethnic, 
religious and linguistic groups, lack of intergroup 
cohesion and group grievances. 
Measures of state sponsored violence such as extrajudicial 
killings, political terror scale and poor human rights. 
Measures of other forms of violence including 
perceptions of criminality, violent demonstrations and 
levels of violent crime. 
Importantly, there is no systematic link to poverty measures, 
and several broader economic development factors such as 
the Human Development Index or its subcomponents such 
as mean years of schooling or life expectancy. Similarly, 
economic indicators such as GDP growth also do not 
correlate. 
When conducting a more in-depth multivariate analysis it 
can be seen that the measures of violence, state-sponsored 
violence, social hostility indicators and governance 
indicators have the most significant explanatory relationship 
with the GTI. This suggests, as shown in the previous 
correlations, that political violence in combination with social 
hostilities is the dominating factor which influences the level 
of terrorism within a country. 
Table 7 highlights the correlations of the 2014 GTI with a 
range of indexes and indicators associated with the level of 
terrorism. Social hostilities and political violence are the key 
correlates of terrorism. While these figures only show 
correlation, not causation, the results provide evidence as to 
the factors that are associated with terrorist activity. Social 
hostilities, ongoing conflict, a lack of social cohesion, and a 
lack of political stability have a strong statistical relationship 
to the GTI. 
Terrorism can be linked to a range of factors which span 
economic, social and political dimensions. However there is 
not one predominant variable responsible for spawning 
terrorist activity. There are a range of factors which jointly 
develop the climate for terrorist activity to thrive. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
TABLE 7 THE MOST SIGNIFICANT CORRELATIONS 
WITH THE GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 
The most statistically significant correlates with terrorism include 
measures of social hostilities and lack of intergroup cohesion 
and group grievances, but also measures of state sponsored 
violence such as extrajudicial killings, political terror scale and 
poor human rights. 
INDICATOR STRENGTH OF 
CORRELATION 
NUMBER OF 
COUNTRIES 
Social Hostilities Index 0.75 155 
Political stability -0.72 162 
Ongoing conflict 0.7 162 
Intergroup cohesion -0.69 153 
Security effectiveness 0.68 161 
Deaths in conflict 0.68 151 
Global Peace Index 0.65 162 
Security legitimacy 0.61 161 
Extrajudicial killing -0.61 160 
Political Terror Scale 0.6 162 
Were there crimes, malicious acts or 
0.59 161 
violence motivated by religious hatred or 
bias? 
Physical Integrity Rights Index -0.59 160 
Guerrilla acts per capita (log) 0.59 158 
Did organised groups use force or coercion 
0.58 161 
in an attempt to dominate public life with 
their perspective on religion, including 
preventing some religious groups from 
operating in the country? 
Was there mob violence related to 
religion? 
0.56 161 
Were there acts of sectarian or communal 
violence between religious groups? 
0.55 161 
Group grievances 0.54 157 
Religious tensions rating -0.53 133 
Order and security -0.52 96 
59
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 
VS GLOBAL PEACE INDEX: 
HOW DOES TERRORISM RELATE 
TO OTHER FORMS OF VIOLENCE? 
When the GTI is correlated with the indicators in the Global 
Peace Index (GPI), other forms of violence which are related 
to acts of terrorism can be further assessed. Out of the 22 
indicators used to calculate the GPI, several are highly 
significant with the GTI. As would be expected, levels of 
terrorism correlates strongly with internal deaths from 
conflict and levels of political terror. 
Levels of internal organised conflict, likelihood violent 
demonstrations, violent crime, and deaths from conflict are 
all significantly related to levels of terrorism. This highlights 
how the persistent targeting of police forces and instability 
generated by terrorism can possibly undermine rule of law 
and lead to the increase in other forms of violence. 
Table 8 continued. 
POLITICAL TERROR AND EXTRAJUDICIAL KILLINGS 
The level of political violence and terror that a country 
experiences in a particular year is measured by the Political 
Terror Scale developed by Wood and Gibney based on U.S. 
State Department and Amnesty International human rights 
reports. The data is presented on a 1 to 5 ‘terror scale’, 5 
being the highest level of political terror. Terrorism correlates 
significantly with the Political Terror Scale with r= 0.59. 
This can be viewed in two ways. Either increased terrorism 
leads governments to implement stricter, authoritarian and 
illegal acts toward its citizens through torture or state 
violence, or the repression results in terrorist acts as 
TABLE 8 CHANGE IN CORRELATION BETWEEN 
GTI AND GLOBAL PEACE INDEX INDICATORS. 
The correlation between the GPI and GTI is very strong indicating 
the link between terrorism and broader societal peacefulness. 
GLOBAL PEACE 
INDICATORS 
CORRELATION 
2013 
CORRELATION 
2014 
CHANGE IN 
CORRELATION 
2013-2014 
Safety  security 0.53 0.51 -0.02 
Militarization 0.43 0.45 0.02 
Ongoing conflict 0.66 0.65 -0.01 
Internal peace 0.59 0.58 -0.02 
External peace 0.48 0.50 0.02 
Deaths from conflict 
(internal) 0.66 0.70 0.04 
Political terror scale 0.63 0.59 -0.04 
Level of organised 
conflict (internal) 0.56 0.57 0.00 
Likelihood of violent 
demonstrations 0.33 0.38 0.05 
Level of violent crime 0.37 0.38 0.01 
Perceptions of 
criminality in society 0.32 0.36 0.04 
Access to small arms 
and light weapons 0.43 0.35 -0.07 
Nuclear and heavy 
weapons capability 0.26 0.33 0.07 
Military expenditure 
(% of GDP) 0.11 0.33 0.22 
Displaced people 
(% population) 0.32 0.33 0.01 
Deaths from conflict 
(external) 0.13 0.32 0.19 
Relations with 
neighbouring countries 0.29 0.32 0.02 
Total conflicts 
(internal and external) 0.33 0.31 -0.02 
Political instability 0.29 0.27 -0.02 
Homicide rate 
(per 100,000 people) 0.28 0.18 -0.10 
UN peacekeeping data 0.16 0.11 -0.05 
Armed services 
personnel 
0.10 0.10 0.01 
(per 100,000 people) 
Police (per 100,000 
people) -0.01 0.01 0.01 
Incarceration rate 
(per 100,000 people) -0.02 -0.01 0.01 
Weapons exports 
(per 100,000 people) -0.03 -0.02 0.00 
Weapons imports 
(per 100,000 people) -0.03 -0.08 -0.05 
OVERALL GPI SCORE 0.65 0.64 -0.01 
60 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
FIGURE 27 GROUP GRIEVANCES VS. GTI 
Group Grievances are positively correlated with the GTI. This shows increased tension and violence between ethnic, religious 
and social groups isrelated to increased levels of terrorism. 
Colombia 
Greece 
Indonesia 
Ukraine Mexico 
Philippines 
Syria 
Germany 
Hungary Norway 
Switzerland 
Japan 
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 
NO TERRORISM GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX (GTI) 
LOW HIGH 
10 
9 
8 
7 
6 
5 
4 
3 
Source: IEP, Failed States Index 
HIGH LEVELS OF TERRORISM 
GROUP GRIEVANCES 
2 
1 
r=0.54 
United Kindgom 
United States 
Mozambique 
Iran 
Nepal Egypt 
Russia 
India 
Nigeria Pakistan 
Afganistan 
Israel South Sudan 
Sri Lianka 
Chad 
Serbia 
Jordan 
Spain 
Canada 
Denmark 
Portugal 
Iceland Sweden 
Ireland 
retaliation. This can create a vicious cycle of violence making 
it difficult to clearly identify causality. 
Extrajudicial killings measured by the CIRI data project hold a 
significant correlation of r=-0.61 with the GTI. Extrajudicial 
killings measure the killings by government officials without 
due process of law. This also includes murders by private 
groups that have been instigated by the government. 
SOCIAL FACTORS, SOCIAL COHESION, 
GROUP GRIEVANCES 
The group grievance indicator correlates significantly with 
the GTI with an r= 0.54. The positive correlation means that 
high levels of group grievances are associated with higher 
levels of terrorism. Conversely, low levels of group grievances 
are associated with low levels of terrorism. 
The intergroup cohesion indicator is compiled by the Institute 
of Social Studies (ISS). The indicator measures the relations 
of cooperation with respect between identity groups within 
a society. When cooperation breaks down between 
prominent identity groups, there is the potential for conflict 
including killings, assassinations, rioting, and acts of 
terrorism. ISS measures intergroup cohesion using 
composite data on ‘inter-group disparities, perceptions of 
being discriminated against, and feelings of distrust against 
members of other groups’. 
DEVELOPMENT INDICATORS 
While countries that record high levels of terrorism tend to 
be under-developed, development indicators do not 
correlate with levels of terrorism globally. This suggests 
that while these characteristics such as poor life expectancy, 
educational attainment and GNI per capita may be common 
in areas with increased levels of terrorism, they are not 
unique to them. 
TABLE 9 CORRELATION WITH HUMAN 
DEVELOPMENT INDICATORS AND THE GTI 
While a negative relationship is shown, suggesting that high 
levels of terrorism are related to low development, none of the 
relationships are significant, suggesting that development is not 
a major contributor to the development of terrorist activity. 
HDI INDICATORS CORRELATION 
Human Development Index (HDI) -0.20 
Life expectancy at birth -0.14 
Mean years of schooling -0.27 
Expected years of schooling -0.21 
Gross national income (GNI) per capita -0.24 
61
TABLE 10 CORRELATION BETWEEN GTI 
AND KEY ECONOMIC STATISTICS, 2012 - 2014 
While the GTI shows negative relationships with the economic 
statistics below, the correlations are not significant. However, 
trade as a per cent of GDP notably correlates. 
ECONOMIC STATISTICS 2012 2014 
FDI net inflows 0.10 -0.07 
Trade as a % of GDP -0.41 -0.40 
Natural resources as a % of GDP 
(2012) 
-0.06 -0.09 
Youth unemployment -0.14 -0.02 
Male youth unemployment -0.18 -0.08 
GDP growth -0.01 -0.05 
FINANCE AND TRADE 
While the table below shows a negative relationship with 
the GTI for five of the six economic, trade and investment 
indicators, there is only one moderately strong statistical 
relationship; trade as a per cent of GDP with a R= -0.40. 
The 2012 GTI was correlated with 2013 economic statistics 
to see if terrorist activity has an effect on future economic 
indicators. While there was a stronger relationship 
between the GTI and decreased levels of economic 
activity, the relationships were not significant. 
FIGURE 28 TRADE AS A PERCENT OF GDP VS. GTI 
Trade as a per cent of GDP shows a negative correlation with the level for terrorism. While this is not overly significant, it does suggest 
that acts of terrorism could affect trade. 
Afganistan 
Canada 
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 
NO TERRORISM GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX (GTI) HIGH LEVELS OF TERRORISM 
TRADE AS PER CENT OF GDP 
180 
160 
140 
120 
100 
80 
60 
40 
0 
Source: IEP, World Bank 
r=-0.40 
Belgium 
Malaysia 
Ukraine 
United Kindgom 
Columbia 
Philippines 
India Nigeria Pakistan 
Iraq 
Lebanon Thailand 
Mozambique 
Chile 
Argentina 
Australia 
Saudi Arabia 
62 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS 
This section seeks to explore what explanatory power a 
range of variables have on the GTI. This is done through 
multivariate regression analysis, a statistical tool which 
enables comparison against multiple variables. The 
multivariate regression analysis reveals the interplay 
between the GTI and 11 different variables, such as economic 
performance, governance and violence, demonstrating the 
nature of the relationship between various indicators. IEP 
does not suggest that these are the only indicators which 
affect the level of terrorism, these were selected due to the 
strength of statistical relationship with the GTI and the 
literature review of the factors that create terrorism. 
The economic indicators used in the analysis are foreign 
direct investment (net inflows) and trade as a per cent of 
GDP. Both indicators are taken form the World Bank data 
bank. Political stability, legitimacy of the state, the level of 
human rights and the number of refugees and IDPs are 
taken from a range of sources. The police rate, homicide 
rate and incarceration rate per 100,000 people are based on 
GPI data. 
Of the indicators used in this analysis, only three show a 
multivariate significant relationship with the GTI: 
Political stability 
Intergroup cohesion 
Legitimacy of the state 
Surprisingly, while none of the violence or economic 
indicators are significant, three political indicators are 
significantly related to terrorism. This suggests that a weak 
political system and a lack of legitimacy of the government 
combined with group grievances may be more influential in 
the rise of terrorist organisations than economic 
performance or violence. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
TABLE 11 MULTIVARIATE REGRESSION ANALYSIS 
Governance and intergroup cohesion related indicators are the 
only indicators to show a significant relationship with the GTI. 
This suggests that the political climate in combination with 
intergroup cohesion is the dominating factor which influences 
the level of terrorism within a country. 
GTI ESTIMATE 
(Intercept) 9.48E+00*** 
Trade as a present of GDP -4.40E-03 
FDI -2.68E-12 
Political stability -1.88E+00** 
Intergroup cohesion -8.26E+00* 
Refugees and IDPs -2.46E-01 
Group grievance 2.47E-01 
Legitimacy of the state -5.65E-01** 
Human rights 2.50E-01 
Police per 100.000 people 1.40E-03 
Homicide rate per 100.000 people. -7.12E-03 
Incarceration rate per 100.000 people 3.72E-05 
Adjusted R-squared 0.71 
A WEAK POLITICAL SYSTEM 
AND A LACK OF LEGITIMACY 
OF THE GOVERNMENT 
COMBINED WITH GROUP 
GRIEVANCES ARE MORE 
INFLUENTIAL IN THE RISE OF 
TERRORIST ORGANISATIONS 
THAN ECONOMIC 
PERFORMANCE OR EXISTING 
LEVELS OF VIOLENCE. 
63
EXPERT 
CONTRIBUTIONS 
According to the findings of the Global Terrorism Index, the level of global 
terrorist activity has greatly increased in the last decade. Most of the public 
conversation about terrorism has focused on conventional counter-terrorism 
efforts: intelligence gathering, policing, and military force. However, such 
efforts are often ineffective, and even counterproductive. In this essay, Larry 
Attree from Saferworld and David Keen from the London School of Economics, 
outline six conventional approaches that should be scaled back and six 
constructive alternatives to conventional counter-terrorism that could help 
reverse the alarming rise in global terrorism. 
ENVISAGING MORE CONSTRUCTIVE ALTERNATIVES 
TO THE COUNTER-TERROR PARADIGM 
Larry Attree, Head of Policy, Saferworld  David Keen, Political Economist and Professor 
of Complex Emergencies, London School of Economics 
‘Terrorism’ has come to dominate current 
affairs in the western world, and dealing with it 
is one of the foremost priorities on the 
domestic and foreign policy agendas of 
western nations. As IEP’s valuable work has 
highlighted, the urgency surrounding the 
agenda has not always facilitated sober 
reflection on the available facts regarding the 
nature of the problem and what they show us. 
The urgent priority afforded to counter-terror 
has impacted on the actions of practitioners 
in many walks of public life. Particularly 
affected by the imperatives of counter-terrorism 
and its conceptual framing have 
been stabilisation and statebuilding—those 
emerging fields poised at the intersection of 
defence, foreign affairs, intelligence, 
peacebuilding and development. Building on 
a forthcoming discussion paper prepared for 
Saferworld by Prof. David Keen (LSE), this 
paper identifies some key questions about 
how counter-terrorism, and related 
stabilisation and statebuilding efforts, are 
being pursued, and suggests some 
constructive peacebuilding alternatives. 
The public debate on how to respond to 
‘terrorist’ threats tends to revolve around the 
most horrific outrages and sensational crises. 
Whether the option in question is to bomb a 
reviled spoiler, to arm those opposing an evil 
regime, or to sponsor a regional partner to 
take on the dangerous militants, public 
debate tends to focus minds on apparently 
simple choices between action and inaction. 
In this climate, the pressure on leaders to 
appear strong and act decisively—especially 
in the face of violent provocation—is very 
powerful. However, when the media directs its 
fickle gaze to newer stories, the success or 
failure of policy responses to ‘terrorism’ 
threats overseas over the long term is rarely 
publicly discussed. 
For this reason, it is perhaps not widely 
known that: 
 In Somalia, thousands of weapons and 
hundreds of vehicles and high-frequency 
radios provided by the international 
community as security assistance during the 
1990s ended up in the hands of local militias. 
In addition, from 2004 onwards over 14,000 
Somali soldiers trained by Ethiopia reportedly 
defected or deserted with their weapons and 
uniforms, while UN-trained police were 
implicated in violent abuses against civilians;1 
 In Iraq, heavy handed military action, such 
as the assault on Falluja in the wake of the 
INTRODUCTION 
64 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
lynching of four American security 
contractors in April 2004, resulted in the 
deaths of hundreds of people, including 
many women and children, and served to 
fuel further insurgency;2 
 In Afghanistan, because of local codes of 
revenge in Pashtun areas, killing insurgents 
has often served ‘to multiply enemies 
rather than subtract them’.3 Studies have 
also ‘found little evidence that aid projects 
are “winning hearts and minds”’ in the 
country: ‘instead of contributing to stability, 
in many cases aid is contributing to conflict 
and instability’;4 
 In Yemen, external counter terror support 
served to reduce the Saleh regime’s need 
to be responsive to its own constituents 
and institute reforms.5 
It is remarkable that such failures have led 
neither to detailed public debate on how 
peace can best be achieved in the wake of 
‘terrorist’ violence, nor to any serious 
accountability for the leaders and officials that 
presided over them. But what is even more 
striking is that the mistakes of the present 
echo those of past decades: for example, the 
practice of bombing large swathes of the 
countryside and the diversion of aid to corrupt 
purposes that fed public support for the Viet 
Cong in Vietnam;6 or the government 
emergency measures, including the attempt to 
use ‘development’ and forced relocation as 
instruments of counterinsurgency, that 
strongly fuelled the Mau Mau insurgency 
under British rule in Kenya during the 1950s.7 
While such problems are, tragically, familiar to 
scholars and experts working to document 
the track record of counter-terror, 
stabilisation and statebuilding approaches 
around the world, attention to the lessons of 
the past is strikingly absent from the public 
debate on how to do better in future. 
In recent months, Saferworld has attempted to 
take the long view on efforts to deal with 
conflicts related to rebel or ‘terrorist’ groups 
and their sponsors in past decades, considering 
contexts as diverse as Afghanistan, Cambodia, 
DRC, Indonesia, Iraq, Kenya, Pakistan, Sierra 
Leone, Somalia, Sri Lanka, Uganda, Vietnam, 
and Yemen. Despite the investment of huge 
resources in such contexts by Western 
governments, the results have been mixed 
at best: the current long-term instability of 
the Middle East, North and East Africa, 
Afghanistan and Pakistan, the spread of 
al-Qa’ida into multiple new regions, and the 
mushrooming of other transnational militant 
groups suggest that something is seriously 
wrong with the Western response to such 
problems. 
Long-standing problems appear to lie in three 
main areas. Firstly, by setting national security 
above human security objectives the West 
has – whether directly or through proxies— 
too frequently responded to the threat of 
‘terrorism’ with the use of violence. Such 
violence has, all too often, been 
indiscriminate, and has had a tendency to 
exacerbate conflict dynamics rather than 
contribute to sustainable peace. Secondly, 
counter-terrorism efforts and related actions 
taken under the label of ‘stabilisation’ and 
‘statebuilding’ have often failed to address 
drivers of conflict in meaningful ways. In fact, 
they often clumsily reinforce the most serious 
drivers of conflict – especially patterns of 
abusive and exclusive governance and 
corruption. Thirdly, the Western response has 
typically neglected to focus on sustainable 
solutions to conflict that involve and respond 
to the concerns, priorities and potentials of 
conflict-affected people in constructive ways. 
There is much detail that could be added to 
this critique, and many examples that could 
be offered of these shortcomings in action 
and their impacts. If policy alternatives are to 
be brought to the fore, more thorough 
analysis is needed to examine why similar 
shortcomings are repeated from one decade 
to the next with diminishing public scrutiny. 
However, what is perhaps more challenging, 
and more useful, is to envisage what 
constructive alternatives are available. 
One caveat before discussing these 
alternatives: all approaches to peacebuilding 
have shortcomings, and the challenges of 
conflict frequently present choices between 
a range of sub-ideal alternatives. The policy 
directions that are set out in this paper are 
neither a call to side with the ‘enemy’, nor to 
evade the imperatives to respond to conflict 
swiftly and effectively. Instead, they are a call 
for the lessons of the past and the available 
alternatives to be more carefully considered, 
with the overarching objective of working 
towards long term peace in mind. 
SIX THINGS TO DO LESS OFTEN 
1 THINKING SHORT TERM 
There needs to be more effort to avoid 
investing in short-term reactions with no 
clear long-term solution in mind—especially 
when there are clear risks of contributing 
to long-term drivers of conflict through 
short-term action. Similarly, more thought 
needs to be put into whether approaches 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
require long-term commitment to be 
sustainable, and whether such commitment 
is feasible. 
2 REINFORCING POOR 
GOVERNANCE AND CORRUPTION 
Governance deficits are perhaps the single 
most significant factor in driving conflict. 
This means that support for repressive and 
corrupt actors and regimes needs, as a 
priority, to be avoided because of its 
potential to lessen accountability and 
worsen governance deficits. Governance 
deficits known to have a significant role in 
driving conflict include corruption, 
violations of human rights and international 
humanitarian law, and exclusive political 
systems. Importantly, where international 
actors support leaders, governments and 
security forces that are not committed to 
addressing these failures, they reduce the 
pressure on them to be inclusive, 
accountable, responsive and fair toward 
their own societies. This in turn tends to 
fuel conflict. The apparent strategic 
advantage to be gained from alliances with 
regimes not committed to inclusive, fair, 
responsive and accountable governance is 
often illusory—not least because such 
alliances typically stoke the grievances that 
fuel insecurity. 
3 MISTAKING PARTNERS’ MOTIVES 
Past experience shows that assumptions 
about the motives and behaviours of 
apparent ‘allies’ in counter-terror, 
stabilisation and state-building endeavours 
need to be interrogated more deeply. The 
consequences of working with allies whose 
motives differ from one’s own have 
included appalling abuses against civilian 
populations, the diversion of money, arms 
and other resources into fuelling conflict, 
and the reinforcement of corruption, bad 
governance and grievances. All of these are 
known drivers of conflict. One of the 
clearest lessons from past failures is that 
the motives of ‘allies’ are hard to 
understand clearly: they may differ 
between individuals and across institutions, 
and can shift over time. An expressed aim 
of defeating terrorism, for example, may 
differ dramatically from the actual aims of 
any given actor. Importantly, the actions of 
‘allies’ are also affected by the resources on 
offer for counter-terror, stabilisation and 
statebuilding processes, which may even 
serve as an incentive for prolonging 
conflict. Conflict sensitivity requires much 
more careful monitoring of these issues 
65
and more determination to minimise harm 
by factoring this better into decision-making. 
4 USING AID IN THE SERVICE OF 
COUNTER-TERRORISM 
Casual assumptions about aid contributing 
to counter-terrorism, stabilisation and 
statebuilding objectives are called into 
question by the significant evidence that 
the use of aid to reinforce military action 
and stabilisation efforts has in many 
contexts proved either ineffective or 
harmful. In particular there is a need to 
revisit the assumption that local action to 
address socio-economic drivers of 
radicalisation can provide an adequate 
solution when wider structural drivers of 
conflict are not simultaneously addressed— 
including the role of international actors 
and their proxies in contributing to 
grievances and injustice. While 
development processes are likely part of 
the solution to the conflicts that are being 
defined as problems of ‘terrorism’, 
‘radicalisation’ and ‘extremism’, the holistic 
pursuit of positive peace should include a 
wider range of measures, including 
avoidance of policies and actions that 
create the grievances that fuel conflict. 
A related issue is the tendency to overlook 
the way in which aid and other resources 
(such as military equipment) provided to 
allies is diverted for harmful or corrupt 
purposes by conflict actors. Because 
corruption is known to be such a visible 
driver of conflict, and diversion of resources 
away from their intended purpose is such a 
common failing, corruption and diversion 
need to be more systematically prevented 
and monitored – even when they involve 
apparent ‘allies’ of the international 
community. Too often, declaring a 
particular government to be an ‘ally’ has 
given it a green light for corruption and 
abuse. In practice, there has often been 
much more concern about the way aid 
might be misused by ‘terrorists’ than the 
way it is being misused by governments.8 
Attempts to co-opt aid agencies into 
support for any particular side in a 
conflict—as providers of intelligence, as 
offering relief and assistance only to one 
group or side – are also counterproductive: 
they compromise the principle of 
impartiality, render assistance ineffective, 
alienate the local population, and make aid 
agencies a target for attack. 
5 USING FORCE 
International actors should be much less 
ready to use force to resolve conflict. In 
particular, more caution is needed in 
designating any particular actor as a 
‘spoiler’. The staying power of ‘spoilers’ 
needs to be assessed much more 
realistically, and greater awareness is 
needed of the potential for conflict 
dynamics to spin out of control as a result 
of intervention. In particular, military force 
should not be used simply to demonstrate 
the resolve or power to retaliate in 
response to violent provocation—indeed, 
military responses of this kind often play 
into the intentions of ‘terrorists’.9 
6 LACK OF ACCOUNTABILITY 
FOR ABUSES 
Significant efforts are also needed to 
strengthen adherence to international 
humanitarian and human rights law by 
international actors and those they 
co-operate with: torture and indiscriminate 
use of violence are not only wrong in 
principle – they also deepen the 
grievances that can fuel violence and make 
sustainable peace much harder to achieve. 
Demonstrating full accountability for 
irresponsible use of force and abuses that 
have taken place is vital to efforts to 
minimise grievances. 
SIX DIRECTIONS FOR 
CONSTRUCTIVE ALTERNATIVES 
1 A DIFFERENT CONCEPTUAL 
FRAMING AND APPROACH 
The first and most important shift in the 
pursuit of constructive alternatives to the 
counter-terrorism paradigm should be to 
reaffirm long-term sustained peace for all 
actors involved as the overall objective— 
rather than ‘victory’ over a particular enemy 
or ‘national security’ defined in narrow 
terms. To construct a strategy oriented 
towards lasting and positive peace it is then 
crucial – especially in relation to conflicts 
involving the most reviled of ‘spoilers’— 
to develop an impartial picture of all 
dimensions of the conflict. One key starting 
point for achieving this is perhaps offered 
by developing a conflict analysis. 
Conflict analysis can provide an important 
opportunity to avoid biased actor analysis 
and narrow analysis of the causes of a 
conflict. In the counter-terrorism paradigm, 
designating certain actors as ‘spoilers’, 
‘radicals’, ‘terrorists’ or ‘extremists’ risks 
framing the problem from the outset as 
lying with those actors alone – the solution 
being to change their wrong-thinking (or 
physically eliminate them) rather than 
seeking to identify what all relevant 
actors—including national, regional and 
international governments—can change to 
contribute towards lasting peace. 
Similarly, approaching conflict as a problem 
of ‘extremism’ or ‘radicalisation’ has 
sometimes encouraged a focus on the 
socio-economic disadvantages experienced 
by the individuals who perpetrate acts of 
violence. Looking at local poverty or 
unemployment may be helpful, but it must 
not preclude a focus on other causes of 
conflict – including the actions of 
governments enjoying various degrees of 
immunity to international criticism. 
Grievances created by powerful political 
actors at national, regional or international 
levels may well prove especially important in 
driving conflicts defined as ‘terrorism’, 
‘radicalisation’ and ‘extremism’. Framing the 
problem impartially as one of ‘conflict’ may 
enable much more comprehensive 
identification of causes that require fresh 
approaches – not only by extremists and 
local actors but also by national, regional 
and international leaders, governments, 
security forces and so on. 
Conflict analysis may also provide an 
opportunity to connect apparently local or 
national dynamics to transnational factors: it 
may be crucial to recognise that ‘extremism’ 
is not only driven by the transnational 
spread of problematic ideologies based on 
misperceptions, but also by the moral 
objection of conflict actors in one country to 
policies and actions taken in other countries, 
which are indeed unjust or unlawful and 
which they feel powerless to change 
through constructive means. Peacebuilding 
strategies in such contexts could valuably 
include the creation of effective channels for 
grievances to be constructively raised and 
addressed. 
Given the need to avoid the common 
challenges of short-term thinking, failure to 
learn from past mistakes and incoherence 
between development, diplomatic, 
economic and military-security approaches, 
conflict analysis also provides opportunities 
to consider how different responses to 
conflict will play out through the 
development of forward-looking scenarios, 
examine lessons from past engagement, and 
facilitate diverse actors to recognise their 
roles and responsibilities within a shared 
long-term peacebuilding strategy. 
66 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
2 CHANGING INTERNATIONAL AND 
NATIONAL POLICIES THAT HAVE 
FUELLED GRIEVANCES 
If conflicts defined as stemming from 
‘extremism’, ‘radicalisation’ or ‘terrorism’ 
are driven in part by moral objections to 
policies and actions which are unjust or 
unlawful, part of the strategy for achieving 
sustainable peace should be to reconsider 
those policies and actions. Just as 
apartheid needed to be brought to an end, 
and many former colonies were awarded 
their independence following struggles by 
rebel organisations now viewed as 
liberation movements, in the same way 
there is a need to examine the justice of 
policies that are the focus of rebellion and 
protest around the world. 
Such unjust policies may be military 
(indiscriminate use of violence, military aid 
to actors who are perpetrating abuses), 
economic (sanctions perceived to be 
unjust, failure to regulate markets in goods 
and resources from conflict-affected 
countries, imposition of unequal trade 
rules, or prioritisation of natural resource 
access over other priorities), diplomatic 
(support for allies who are violating human 
rights and/or international law), or 
developmental (further support for such 
allies). A greater effort to demonstrate 
consistent support for international law 
and human rights is surely one of the most 
promising options for reducing the 
grievances of the victims of unjust 
international policies and practices, and 
those who claim to represent them. 
3 SEEKING TO NEGOTIATE PEACE 
– AND BUILDING TOWARDS 
INCLUSIVE AND JUST POLITICAL 
SETTLEMENTS 
There are many challenges inherent in 
deciding whether and how to negotiate 
peace. Overall, however, negotiating 
solutions is currently a less favoured option 
than it was during the 1990s. Clearly it is 
neither desirable nor practical to welcome 
every militant or rebel group into a 
power-sharing deal. Both inviting and 
excluding rebel movements to the dialogue 
table has incentivised armed violence in the 
past. At the same time, long-term peace 
can of course be undermined when only a 
relatively narrow and elite group is 
accepted into negotiations and into the 
political settlement that results. 
While the dilemmas involved are complex, 
the counter-terrorism paradigm has in 
certain contexts ruled out the possibility of 
negotiation with (or even assistance to) 
large sections of whole societies (as in 
Somalia and Afghanistan). In this context, 
it seems important to reflect that long-term 
peace will eventually be sustainable only if 
those who survive the conflict are prepared 
to accept the eventual settlement that is 
made. Moreover, as Greenhill and Solomon 
argue, even an apparently ‘implacable’ 
spoiler may sometimes change – in new 
circumstances – into a less violent entity.10 
In this context, alongside the inclusion in 
peace processes of those who have not 
resorted to violence, and ongoing efforts to 
ensure broader inclusion in political 
settlements of the public, including women, 
youth and any marginalised groups, more 
effort is needed to pursue communication 
with and understand all actors involved in 
any given conflict – even those ‘terrorists’, 
‘violent extremists’, ‘radicalised groups’ and 
‘spoilers’ that are most reviled. 
4 USING LEGAL-JUDICIAL 
RESPONSES AND TARGETED 
SANCTIONS 
An important option for approaching 
conflict is to use the law (national or 
international) to punish and deter violence 
and to protect those who may otherwise 
feel marginalized and resort to violence as 
a last resort. Legal approaches to insecurity 
are complex, and only a few points can be 
made here. Prosecutions offer the prospect 
of reducing impunity, deterring violence 
(both within a particular country and more 
broadly), and of course incarcerating those 
responsible for violence (and thus taking 
them ‘out of the game’). In many cases, 
a policing response to disorder 
(apprehending and trying criminal 
suspects) will be more appropriate than 
a military response. Sometimes, it is a 
heavy-handed military response that turns 
a small rebellion into a large one or gives 
life to a weakening ‘terrorist’ movement. 
When due process is applied and the rights 
of defendants to fair trials are visibly 
upheld, legal approaches offer the 
considerable advantage of guaranteeing 
rights of defendants and their equal 
treatment before the law—thereby helping 
to dispel perceptions of discrimination 
against particular groups. 
The option to deploy sanctions comes with 
certain drawbacks. Sanctions can be used 
by those targeted to shore up their 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
economic advantages and their political 
support base. They can also do great harm 
to the general population and create 
grievances among those they were 
intended to help. Yet, when they are 
carefully targeted, sanctions can offer an 
important option for pressurising conflict 
actors, including armed groups, to change 
their approach. 
5 SUPPORTING TRANSFORMATIVE 
GOVERNANCE EFFORTS 
Of course, governance reforms are 
explicitly part of the stabilisation and 
statebuilding policy agenda. However, this 
policy agenda is typically coloured by the 
imperatives provided by counter-terrorism 
to boost a counterinsurgency or a new 
political order with external aid or military 
support. Likewise, the international 
discourse on peacebuilding and 
statebuilding enshrines ownership of 
processes by nation states in a way that 
tends towards the exclusion of other actors 
and far-reaching reforms in practice. The 
‘mainstream’ approach to all three 
(counter-terrorism, stabilisation and 
statebuilding) thus leans visibly towards 
aligning behind and reinforcing the 
capacities of the state as it is (including 
states recently installed by military action) 
rather than prioritising wider social 
empowerment models that seek to 
transform the state from within and foster 
lasting and positive peace. 
Peace indeed cannot be built in the absence 
of institutional capacities, but these 
capacities also need to be oriented towards 
beneficial purposes. This makes the 
objective of achieving wider reform and the 
transformation of state-society relations 
(widely acknowledged in policy discourse 
but rarely pursued effectively in practice) 
absolutely central to efforts to respond to 
conflicts labelled as ‘terrorism’, 
‘radicalisation’ and ‘extremism’. After all, 
such conflicts often emerge from the 
grievances and injustice that are created by 
poor governance, and prove difficult to 
manage in the wake of institutional 
breakdown and civic unrest. 
Past research by Saferworld11 suggests that 
to support lasting peace, transformative 
governance reform should include 
significant efforts to: 
Ensure inclusive political dialogue and 
decision making 
Provide people-focused security and justice 
67
Reduce corruption and bribery in 
conflict-sensitive ways 
Offer fair access to social services, 
resources and opportunities to all social 
groups 
Resolve grievances and disputes 
constructively 
An example of the shift that is needed can 
be found in the security sector. While much 
development work is oriented to social 
empowerment and community driven 
models, when it comes to responding to 
conflict and insecurity, bottom-up 
approaches are not pursued on the scale 
that is required to achieve a transformative 
effect. Thus ‘Security Sector Reform’ and 
efforts to negotiate peace settlements tend 
to be relatively top-down and exclusionary. 
Therefore, to a certain extent, they tend to 
lack the legitimacy to be both successful 
and sustainable. Application of ‘community 
security’ approaches at a greater scale has 
the potential to deliver a different kind of 
result.12 
6 BRINGING A PEACEBUILDING 
PERSPECTIVE TO THE FORE IN 
PUBLIC DEBATE 
One of the challenges inherent in trying to 
move beyond mainstream approaches is 
the way in which problems of ‘rogue 
regimes’, ‘terrorism’, ‘radicalisation’ and 
‘extremism’ and relevant responses are 
presented in public debate. Leaders, 
journalists and news outlets are in some 
ways responsible for establishing prevailing 
notions of enmity, while at the same time 
public interest and public opinion has a role 
in shaping and underpinning policy 
directions that leaders come under 
pressure to adopt. Thus the success of 
peace efforts partly depends on much 
more systematic questioning of the 
fault-lines of conflict, the prevailing 
definitions of the enemy, and the impacts 
of potential policy responses. Demonising 
particular enemies too often serves as 
‘cover’ for those claiming to confront them; 
but those making these claims may not 
only be failing to confront these enemies 
but even actively reinforcing them in 
various ways. 
In many contexts, the declaration of a ‘war 
on terror’ remains a convenient banner to 
call for public unity in support of a common 
enemy, bolstering the power base of 
political leaders. When the status of an 
‘enemy’ has been well established in public 
discourse, this seems to lead to journalistic 
failures to question the tactics to be used, 
the allies to be supported, and the 
coherence of longer term strategies. 
A further problem is that, especially within 
conflict-affected contexts, those who 
oppose an officially-approved persecution 
or question the approved ‘fault-lines’ in a 
conflict, risk themselves being labelled as 
‘enemies’, ‘terrorists’ and so on—and 
sometimes face intimidation, violence or 
prosecution as a result. This affects the 
willingness to speak out not only of 
journalists, the public and local activists but 
also international aid agencies and 
multilateral bodies. Particular definitions of 
the enemy have often been ‘policed’ in this 
way, and those who are in a position to 
question these definitions have a particular 
responsibility to do so. 
While politicians, diplomats and human 
rights organisations tend to remain vigilant 
and critical regarding human rights in 
conflict situations, much more systematic 
efforts are needed to question the 
definitions of enmity that create—and 
recreate—mass violence, as well as to 
challenge the methods that are justified 
through this discourse at different levels. 
CONCLUSION 
This paper has offered a summary of 
constructive alternatives to the counter-terrorism 
paradigm and to some of the 
approaches taken to stabilisation and 
statebuilding under the influence of this 
paradigm. Alongside these, it is important to 
mention one further option, noting: that in 
some cases ‘terrorist’ atrocities frequently 
produce a sense of revulsion even among 
those the terrorists claim to represent; that if 
conflict resolution demands reform (as 
suggested above), the best way to encourage 
this may in some circumstances be not to 
provide support to the current leadership and 
institutions in conflict-affected contexts; and 
that international actors may not be able to 
influence the dynamics of each and every 
conflict effectively. Given these points, in 
some contexts choosing not to engage should 
be considered a valid option. 
These issues will be discussed in more detail in 
Saferworld’s forthcoming research studies on 
constructive alternatives to counter-terrorism 
in a range of different country contexts. 
NOTES 
1. Bryden M, ‘Somalia Redux’, (CSIS, August 2013), 
pp 9-10, citing M Bryden et al, ‘‘Report of the 
Monitoring Group on Somalia pursuant to Security 
Council resolution 1811 (2008)’, (New York, UN 
Security Council, 10 Dec 2008), p.12. 
2. Hills, Alice, ‘Fear and Loathing in Falluja’, Armed 
Forces and Society, 32 (2006), 623-639; Barnard 
A, ‘Death toll near 500 in Fallujah, Baghdad’, 
Boston Globe, 22 April 2004; Dodge, Toby, 
testimony to US Committee on Foreign Relations 
on ‘The Iraq Transition’ (20 April 2004). 
3. The words are those of Major General Michael 
Flynn, United States’ deputy chief of staff for 
intelligence in Afghanistan: see Flynn, Major Gen. 
Michael, Captain Matt Pottinger and Paul 
Batchelor, ‘Fixing Intel: A Blueprint for Making 
Intelligence Relevant in Afghanistan’, Center for a 
New American Security, Washington DC (2010), 
p.8. 
4. Wilder, Andrew, ‘A “weapons system” based on 
wishful thinking’, Boston Globe (16 September 
2009); Thompson, Edwina, Report on Wilton Park 
Conference 1022, Winning ‘Hearts and Minds’ in 
Afghanistan: Assessing the Effectiveness of 
Development Aid in COIN Operations, 11–14 March 
2010 (1 April 2010). 
5. S Philips, ‘Yemen: Developmental dysfunction and 
division in a crisis state’, (DLP Researhc paper 14, 
February 2011). 
6. Sheehan, Neil, A Bright Shining Lie: John Paul 
Vann and America in Vietnam, New York: Picador 
(1990); Bilton, Michael and Kevin Sim, Four Hours 
in My Lai, London: Penguin (1993); Hunt, David, 
‘Dirty Wars: Counterinsurgency in Vietnam and 
Today’, Politics and Society, 38:1 (2010), pp. 
35–66, p.36; Corson, William, The Betrayal, New 
York: W. W. Norton and Co. (1968). 
7. Berman, Bruce, ‘Bureaucracy and Incumbent 
Violence: Colonial Administration and the Origins 
of the “Mau Mau” Emergency in Kenya’, British 
Journal of Political Science, 6:2 (April 1976), pp. 
143–75. 
8. See, for example, D Keen, When ‘Do No Harm’ 
Hurts, 6 November 2013. 
9. Just as, according to Osama Bin Laden’s son it 
was ‘my father’s dream was to get America to 
invade Afghanistan’ (BBC2, Afghanistan: War 
Without End (22 June 2011), it is clear that Islamic 
State militants intended to provoke further direct 
military action in Iraq by Western powers through 
their beheading of Western citizens in 2014. 
10. See Greenhill, Kelly and Soloman Major, ‘The Perils 
of Profiling: Civil War Spoilers and the Collapse of 
Intrastate Peace Accords’, International Security, 
31, 3, (winter 2006/7), 7-40; Stedman, Stephen, 
‘Spoiler Problems in Peace Processes’, 
International Security, 22, 2, 5-53 (1997). 
11. See Saferworld, ‘Addressing conflict and violence 
from 2015 – Issue Paper 2: What are the key 
challenges? What works in addressing them?’, 
(November 2012). 
12. See Saferworld, ‘Community Security Handbook’, 
(Saferworld, 2014). 
68 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
The methodology for the Global Terrorism Index incorporates a lagged 
scoring system, in which a single terrorist incident is not only counted in 
the year that it was committed, but also for five years afterwards, in 
order to reflect the lingering emotional, social, structural, and economic 
impact of terrorism. This essay, from Action on Armed Violence, traces 
the long term impact of a suicide bombing in a busy marketplace, which 
occurred in Lahore, Pakistan in December 2009. 
ANATOMY OF A SUICIDE BOMBING 
MOON MARKET ATTACK, LAHORE, PAKISTAN 
Henry Dodd, Senior Weapons Researcher, Action on Armed Violence (AOAV) 
Edited by: Steven Smith MBE, Chief Executive, AOAV 
BACKGROUND THE BLAST 
For the last three years, Action on Armed 
Violence (AOAV) has been monitoring the 
levels of harm caused by explosive weapons 
around the world. In this time, we have 
watched the recorded toll continue to climb, 
year-on-year. Perhaps most startling is the fact 
that by far the greatest proportion of 
casualties are civilians. For example, in 2013, 
82% of the total reported casualties from 
explosive weapons were civilians. Another 
statistic of major concern is the rise in 
casualties attributable to improvised explosive 
devices (IEDs). While IEDs are often seen as 
being the weapons of choice for non-state 
actors against conventional military forces, the 
staggering fact is that they are far more likely 
to kill civilians than soldiers. In 2013, 73% of 
civilian casualties (22,829) from all forms of 
explosive violence were caused by IEDs.1 
But the bare casualty figures alone only show 
part of the picture. Reports in the immediate 
aftermath of attacks tend to provide the 
number of fatalities, sometimes the number 
of injured, a description of the scene of the 
blast, and some reaction quotes. Small attacks 
barely warrant a mention. Little or no focus is 
directed at the wider effects of explosive 
violence. What does it mean for a health system 
to receive over 100 trauma patients within just a 
few minutes? What happens to a market that 
has witnessed a major blast, and is forever 
associated with the tragedy? Who supports a 
family when they lose their principal earner, or 
when a relative suffers complex injuries? In 
order to answer these questions and more, 
AOAV returned to the scene of a double-suicide 
bombing attack that had been inflicted on a 
busy market in Lahore, Pakistan, in 2009. 
The Moon Market, in Iqbal, in the south-west 
of Lahore, is considered to be the second 
busiest market in the city after the more 
fashionable Liberty market. Stalls and shops 
are closely packed together, leaving a narrow 
pathway for shoppers to squeeze through. 
Spread across two floors, the top floor has a 
selection of beauty salons and a gym, as well 
as the upper storeys of the largest and most 
prosperous market businesses. The lower 
floor has a selection of shops selling fabrics, 
children’s clothes, jewellery, books, furniture, 
shoes, and pharmaceuticals. Each shop has 
around five or six stalls, most only a few feet 
wide, pitched in front. Stall owners pay a few 
rupees to hook a wire up to their shops to 
power a bare bulb over their wares. 
The scene is vibrant and congested. 
There had been warning signs before that 
69
the Moon Market might be a target for 
violence. The previous year, on 14 August 
—the eve of Pakistani Independence Day— 
a suicide bomber had approached a police 
line at the roundabout by the market and 
detonated his explosive vest. Eight people 
were killed, but it would have been more, had 
not a policeman bravely wrestled the bomber 
away from the crowd, losing his own life in 
the process.2 
2009 had been another violent year across 
Pakistan. Bomb blasts at a funeral in Dera 
Ishmail Khan, in February, had killed over 
thirty people, and left hundreds more 
injured.3 In October, 55 people were killed in 
a blast at the Khyber Bazaar in Peshawar. 
A few days later, the same city also saw over 
a hundred people killed by a car bomb at the 
Meena Bazaar.4 
Attacks like these, on targets seemingly 
unconnected to the sectarian violence in 
Pakistan, may have provided a warning to 
the Moon Market shoppers. However, even 
with such threats ever-present, people need 
to live their lives, buy clothes for their 
children, and prepare for weddings. 
The first blast happened at 8.40 pm on 
7 December 2009, when the market was at 
its busiest. At an intersection of three roads, 
the first bomber detonated a vest containing 
10kg of high explosive and ball bearings. 
As people ran from the area in panic, they 
were funnelled by the narrow streets into a 
tightly-packed crowd. Around a minute after 
the first explosion, a second bomber 
detonated an identical explosive vest outside 
the National Bank in the corner of the market. 
It was this second bomb, surrounded by 
people, unprotected, in the open, which 
caused the most casualties.5 
The first explosion started fires, which spread 
rapidly. Electrical points in the market are 
stuffed with wires, and the electrical fire 
moved quickly into shops and stalls. The fires 
were fed by the fuel of the many generators in 
the market and by the petrol in the hundreds 
of motorbikes parked nearby. Combined with 
the highly flammable clothes and textiles 
inside the shops and stalls, a massive blaze 
quickly started. People who sought shelter 
inside shops were trapped by flames, and 
many died from smoke inhalation.6 
At 20:42, the 1122 Rescue Service received 
a call reporting that there had been an 
explosion.7 There is a rescue station, with 
ambulances and fire engines, approximately 
100 metres from the market, so emergency 
responders were able to reach the scene 
within a minute of the call being received. 
That’s where the good luck ended. 
The fire engines were unable to reach the 
blast site, as shopkeepers had placed bollards 
and barricades around the market to prevent 
cars entering. The rescue services then had 
to use cranes to remove obstacles and cut 
through iron bars to get close to the fire. 
A collapsed electricity transformer meant that 
that the closest fire hydrants could not be 
used. Hoses had to be run to hydrants further 
away from the market. 
Rescue workers were further hampered by an 
uncooperative crowd. At one point, the crowd 
burst through the police cordon and 
demanded that the rescuers deal with the 
dead bodies that were being left behind. 
As families heard the news, they rushed to 
the scene, causing traffic jams that hampered 
rescue vehicles. It took two hours to put the 
fires out and another hour to rescue people 
from the rubble.8 
DEATHS AND INJURIES 
It is likely that around 60 people died as a 
result of the Moon Market bombings. The 
death toll was initially reported as 34, but this 
number quickly rose.9 The official record of 
casualties maintained by the City District 
Government documented 49 people killed 
and 131 injured. These figures were obtained 
from hospitals and mortuaries four days after 
the bombing. They do not include victims 
who did not seek treatment at hospitals. 
In addition to the 49 people officially 
recorded as being killed in the blast, 
there were a further three dead who were 
suspected as being perpetrators. In 
addition, the mortuary of King Edward’s 
Medical University received a shopping bag 
filled with limbs two days after the incident. 
These body parts were not counted in 
government records. 
After four days, around half of the injured 
(66) had been discharged from hospitals. 
However, some of those recorded as injured in 
the initial assessment eventually succumbed 
to their wounds. For example, at the Sheik 
Zayed hospital, a state hospital near the blast, 
which received the largest number of 
casualties, eight of those admitted died over 
the following weeks.10 
One family told AOAV that their son, Shahn, 
who owned a stall selling children’s clothes, 
could only be identified by his underwear. 
Shahn received burns to 70% of his body and 
had seven pieces of shrapnel in his chest. 
He was in hospital for 26 days before he 
eventually died following complications 
during his second surgery. 
Victims were taken to a variety of hospitals, 
with some of the closest facilities quickly 
overwhelmed and forced to divert casualties. 
Dr Sajud Sharif, the consultant in charge of 
the Accident and Emergency department at 
the Sheikh Zayed hospital, said the biggest 
challenge his department faced was keeping 
track of who had received what treatment. 
The situation was made more difficult by 
overcrowding. As well as receiving over 
50 casualties in just a few hours, the hospital 
was packed with families looking for relatives, 
and with media reporting on the attack. 
In Pakistan, it is quite normal for camera 
crews to come right inside the hospital to film 
victims receiving treatment. Zafari Iqbal, 
a security guard in the hospital, remembers 
having to break up scuffles between the 
crowds and trying to placate devastated 
families searching for someone to blame. 
Within this chaos was the additional challenge 
of tackling the complex nature of the wounds 
suffered by the victims. Professor Maheed, 
Trauma Surgeon at the Sheikh Zayed hospital, 
who operated on many of the injured, explained 
that bomb blasts present a particular series of 
challenges. Unlike in the case of gunshot 
victims, bomb blast patients arrive with multiple 
traumatic injuries. Their treatment is therefore 
more complicated and their condition harder to 
manage. Maheed also acknowledged that it is 
possible to miss injuries or trauma. 
Victims of the Moon Market blast in Sheikh 
Zayed hospital were treated for: penetrating 
injuries from ball bearings, and even from 
other people’s bone fragments; blunt trauma 
injuries; severe burns and smoke inhalation; 
collapsed lungs; amputations; eardrum 
damage and eye injuries.11 
Salman Zaib was a 21-year-old student at the 
time of the attack. He was at the Moon 
Market to collect money from a jeweller for 
his father, and was standing about a metre 
away from the second bomb when it 
detonated. He was spared almost certain 
death when a woman happened to walk in 
front of him just as it exploded. 
Zaib had to have stitches on his back for injuries 
from shrapnel and pieces of the woman’s 
bones. Both his legs were broken. They were so 
badly damaged that they required expensive 
plastic surgery and bone grafts. He was in bed 
for 4-5 months, and it took over one and a half 
years before he was able to walk again. Even 
70 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
four years later, he is unable to put in the same 
hours at his father’s furniture business or move 
around easily. 
The day after the bomb blast, Zaib was due to 
take the final exams for his accountancy 
qualification. The time he spent in hospital 
recovering from his injuries meant that he fell 
behind with his studies and eventually had to 
drop out.12 
PSYCHOLOGICAL HARM 
Other injuries can be less visible, but have 
equally devastating effects. Witnessing horrific 
violence and seeing the bloody aftermath can 
lead to psychological trauma and impact 
negatively on psycho-social wellbeing. 
Many of the people who AOAV spoke to had 
displayed symptoms associated with post-traumatic 
stress disorder (PTSD) at some point 
in the years following the bombing. People 
complained of unending headaches, reliving the 
event through flashbacks, and feeling 
constantly on guard. Some described the 
incident in vivid terms, and were clearly 
overwhelmed by the sudden change in their 
physical surroundings. Some people found their 
entire moods changed after the blast. 
Muhammad Arif Saleem was visiting the 
market with his wife to buy new school 
uniforms for his children, as the weather was 
getting colder. He received a deep cut to the 
head and damaged his hearing, but these 
physical injuries were treated within a week. 
Emotionally though, he was deeply disturbed. 
Saleem went back to working in a restaurant 
a few weeks after the bombing, but was still 
having nightmares about the attack. He found 
that his temper had changed since the 
incident, and lost his job as a result. His 
restaurant sent him home as he had clearly 
not fully recovered. When he came back after 
a few days, his job had been given to 
someone else.13 
INDIRECT EFFECTS 
ON HEALTHCARE 
Responding to bombings like the one in the 
Moon Market, and preparing for the possibility 
of future attacks, have deep consequences. 
These activities drain hospitals of resources 
and have knock-on effects on their patients. 
A few hours after the bombing, hospitals 
received calls from government officials 
telling them that treatment for all victims 
of the bombing should be provided free 
of charge. In most cases, this meant that 
victims received free treatment and 
medication, at least initially, unless they went 
to private hospital. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
In practice, this gesture is less generous than 
it first appears. The free treatment and 
medication provided by the hospitals was 
not met with extra money from the 
government. The additional costs that 
emerged had to be absorbed by the existing 
budgets. According to senior hospital 
officials, no additional funds were offered by 
the government to either the Jinnah or 
Sheikh Zayed hospitals, which had received 
the majority of victims after the Moon 
market bombing. 
In order to respond to future incidents of the 
scale of the Moon Market blast, hospitals 
have had to purchase specialist medical 
equipment for trauma patients, like chest 
tubes for up to 50 patients. Staff members 
have also had to receive extra training for 
responding to mass casualty disasters.14 
General concerns about the security situation 
in Pakistan mean that hospitals also invest 
heavily in defending themselves from 
potential attacks. For instance, the Sheikh 
Zayed hospital currently employs 104 
security guards, costing around 1% of its 
annual budget. Hospitals in Pakistan are 
further hampered by difficulties in retaining 
their best and brightest doctors, who are 
keen to move abroad because of the security 
situation across the whole of the country. 
Police search through the ashes of the market for evidence 
71
DAMAGE TO THE MARKET 
The Moon Market bombing had severe 
economic effects on both the businesses in 
the market and on families of victims. Before 
the attack, the Moon Market was one of the 
busiest markets in Lahore, with several 
hundred shops, stalls and restaurants. There 
are 18 plazas in the market, and each 
contains around 70-80 shops and stalls. 
Shoppers would travel from across the city 
to buy goods, conduct business and meet 
with friends. 
According to Abdul Jabar, President of the 
Traders’ Union in the market, 61 shops were 
damaged, along with 90 smaller stalls. Jabar 
was on the committee with government 
officials to determine how compensation was 
awarded to businesses in the market. He 
claimed that businesses in the market 
suffered for 3-6 months after the blast, when 
it was partially closed. He argued that they 
are now trading at roughly the same level as 
before the bombing. Part of the reason for 
this, he suggested, was that the Punjab 
provincial government awarded 
compensation ranging from Rs150,000 and 
Rs1.5 million (US$2,100 to US$21,000).15 
However, not everyone interviewed was as 
positive about the market’s recovery, and 
some were critical of the process for awarding 
compensation to businesses. Rao Mubarak, 
Executive Vice President of the rival Quami 
Tajir Ittehad traders’ Union, claimed that the 
money provided by the government was well 
short of the Rs500 million (US$6.9 million) of 
damage estimated by the District 
Coordinator’s Office. He claimed that some 
money was paid to bogus claimants. In 
Mubarak’s estimation, the market is trading at 
around 30% of the level it was before the 
bombing. While small eateries are doing well, 
the cloth and jewellery shops are suffering. 
Many traders would have left, but are forced 
to stay because the value of their assets has 
decreased so much that they do not want to 
sell for a loss.16 
Some relatives of the stall owners who were 
killed in the bombing missed out on the 
compensation to which they were entitled. 
The family of Shanh, the young stall-holder 
who was in hospital for 26 days before he 
died from his injuries, were told by the market 
union that they had applied late, and were not 
awarded any compensation for the 
approximate Rs300,000 (US$2,550) of stock 
which was lost. The family said that they were 
anxious not to appear greedy, or somehow 
not sufficiently mournful, at the death of their 
son, which is why they did not apply for 
money straight away, so missed the deadline 
for applications. 
LONG-TERM IMPACTS ON FAMILIES 
It was not just businesses in the Moon market 
that suffered economically after the blast. 
Many victims and their families were left with 
their primary earner either injured or killed. 
Some people lost jobs because they could no 
longer work. Despite help with initial medical 
treatment, most people also faced large 
medical bills for subsequent treatment. 
Victims of the bombing were entitled to 
compensation from the provincial 
government. Families who lost loved-ones 
received Rs500,000 (US$4,350). People who 
were severely injured received Rs200,000 
(US$1,650), and those with slight injuries 
Rs50,000 (US$450). Compensation was only 
given to those with physical injuries. 
Government officials acknowledge that this 
system of flat rates of compensation was 
imperfect, and did not address the fact that 
some injuries are more debilitating and 
long-lasting than others. However, it was 
felt that devising a new system based on 
needs would be subjective, overly 
complicated and expensive. 
For most of the families AOAV spoke to, the 
support offered did not come close to 
covering the losses and expenses they 
endured following the bombing. In 
particular, there was a collective failure by 
government and civil society to appreciate 
just how long-lasting the effects of the 
bombing were. The uncle of one victim said, 
‘You can’t give a man a meal for a day. After 
a week, he’ll starve.’ 
Abdul Qadir, who works at a stall selling 
children’s shoes in the market, received 
shrapnel injuries to his stomach, and his had 
was cut by broken glass. He had to have a 
colostomy operation, and his large intestine 
was shut down for 4-5 months. When AOAV 
visited, four years later, he was still in pain, 
and had recently been told that he needed 
more surgery. Most of the treatment that he 
received in the hospital was free, even in the 
months after the blast. However, he did have 
to pay around Rs4,000 (US$45) for the 
colostomy bags, which needed to be changed 
four times a week for several months. Qadir’s 
stall was completely destroyed in the blast, 
and he was awarded Rs100,000 (US$900) for 
the damage. He took the difficult decision to 
rebuild his stall. He started his business up 
again, but had to buy all his supplies on credit 
Rescuers were quick to the scene of the incident but faced a number of difficulties in fighting the fire 
72 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
and now works off a smaller stall that has 
cheaper rent.17 
Some victims AOAV spoke to found that after 
their recovery they had no jobs to return to or 
they were no longer able to perform them. 
THE PERPETRATORS 
Nearly four years after the bombing, no 
convictions have been made in relation to 
the Moon Market attacks. Pakistan has been 
widely criticised for failing to successfully 
prosecute people accused of involvement in 
bombings like the one at Moon Market.18 Out 
of the 559 cases brought against alleged 
terrorists in Punjab Province in 2012, 414 
(71%) were acquitted.19 
In part, these figures are misleading. Unlike in 
other countries, the Pakistani justice system does 
not allow for prosecutors to drop a case, even if 
they think the evidence is insufficient to go to 
trial. However, lawyers AOAV spoke to identified 
several areas that made securing convictions 
particularly difficult for prosecutors in Pakistan.20 
Firstly, they have repeatedly found that 
witnesses are reluctant to testify. With no 
witness protection programme in Pakistan, they 
are especially vulnerable to threats and 
intimidation by militant groups. 
Secondly, the quality of evidence obtained by 
police investigating the bombing is not of a 
high enough quality to be admissible. 
Sometimes, this is due to the high standards 
demanded of the evidence, but at other times, 
it is because the police are either under-resourced 
or poorly-trained. 
Finally, with the actual perpetrators of the 
bombing killed in the blast, it is difficult to 
link members of the same group to that 
particular incident. 
CONCLUSION 
AOAV’s research has shown that IED attacks 
in Pakistan have an impact far beyond the 
headline casualty figures. Alongside those 
directly killed and injured are the countless 
others who suffer psychologically and 
financially: the children who are terrified when 
a firework goes off; the hospital staff who 
cannot eat barbecued food again after 
smelling the burning flesh of the victims; the 
stall owner whose takings are down now that 
the market is less popular. 
The stories of the people impacted by the 
Moon Market bombings are just a few of 
thousands. There were 22 suicide bomb 
attacks in Pakistan in 2012; five of them 
occurred in markets. The whole of Pakistani 
society is impacted, and vital resources are 
having to be diverted to help victims and to 
prevent future violence. 
But this is not just Pakistan’s problem. It is one 
that is proliferating world-wide. The 
humanitarian harm to civilians is catastrophic, 
and states must take action to address it. 
Responses should not be restricted purely to 
preventative security measures; they should 
also embrace: stigmatisation; the robust 
application of international humanitarian law; 
better control of the trade in components, 
such as detonators and explosive materials; 
tighter stockpile controls; addressing the 
financing of non-state actors; ensuring that 
the needs of victims are properly met; and 
embarking on campaigns of education and 
outreach. The annual civilian deaths from IEDs 
world-wide already vastly exceed those from 
landmines. This is a global problem that needs 
to be addressed now. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
NOTES 
1. Dodd, H. and Perkins, R. (2014), Explosive Events, 
AOAV, April 2014, available at: http://aoav.org.uk/ 
wp-content/uploads/2014/05/AOAV-Explosive- 
Events-2013.pdf, accessed10 December 2013. 
2. Ali, Muhammad Faisal (2008), ‘Bomber draws 
blood on Independence Day eve’, DAWN, 14 
August 2008, available at: dawn.com/ 
news/316472/bomber-draws-blood-on-independence- 
day-eve, accessed 10 December 
2013. 
3. Shah, Pir Zubair (2009), ‘Pakistan bombing kills 
more than 30’, The New York Times, 20 February 
2009, available at: 
nytimes.com/2009/02/21/world/asia/21pstan. 
html, accessed 
10 December 2013. 
4. ‘Blast in Peshawar’. Geo TV, 30 October 2009, 
available at: 
geo.tv/important_events/2009/Peshawar_ 
blast28oct/pages/English_news.asp, accessed 
10 December 2013. 
5. Interviews with victims of the blast, conducted 
by AOAV in November 2013. 
6. Interview with the Civil Defence Department 
Headquarters, 
6 November 2013. 
7. Interview with the Punjab Emergency Service, 
6 November 2013. 
8. Interviews with victims of the blast, conducted 
by AOAV in November 2013 
9. Associated Press (2009), ‘Lahore bomb attack 
kills 34’, 
The Guardian, 7 December 2009, available at: 
theguardian.com/world/2009/dec/07/ 
lahore-maket-bomb-attack, accessed 
9 December 2013. 
10. AOAV examination of official records in the 
Sheikh Zayed Hospital. 
11. Interview with Professor Maeed, 9 November 
2013. 
12. Interview with Salman Zaib, November 2013. 
13. Interview with Muhammad Arif Saleem, November 
2013. 
14. Twenty-five hospital staff from across the Punjab 
were sent on 15-day training courses organised by 
the WHO in Nepal in 2011 and 2013. 
15. Interview with Abdul Jabar, November 2013. 
16. Interview with Rao Mubarak, November 2013. 
17. Interview with Abdul Qadir, November 2013. 
18. Nelson, D. (2011), ‘Pakistan incapable of 
prosecuting terror suspects’, The Telegraph, 
31 August 2011, available at: 
www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/asia/ 
pakistan/8733203/Pakistan-incapable-of-prosecuting- 
terrorists.html, accessed 
10 December 2013. 
19. Mir-Khan, Aetekah (2013), ‘Prosecuting terrorists: 
Out of 599 cases in 2012, suspects acquitted in 
414’, The Express Tribune, 
1 April 2013, available at: http://tribune.com.pk/ 
story/529353/prosecuting-terrorists-out-of-599- 
cases-in-2012-suspects-acquitted-in-414/ 
accessed 1 December 2013. 
20. Interview with the office of the Prosecutor- 
General of Punjab Province, 12 November 2013. 
73
The 2014 Global Terrorism Index tracks the rise and fall of the world’s 
largest terrorist organisations since 1998. Whilst the vast majority of 
terrorist groups are only responsible for a handful of deaths, a select 
few are responsible for the majority of death and destruction caused by 
terrorism in the last fifteen years. ISIL, which emerged out of Al-Qa’ida 
in Iraq, is one such group. In this essay, terrorism expert Ekaterina 
Stepanova from the Institute of World Economy  International 
Relations, outlines a shift in two main trends, the broader network 
fragmentation of the global jihadi movement and the shift from top-down 
to bottom-up regionalization of violent Islamic groups. She also 
tracks the complex evolution of ISIL as a regional force in the Middle 
East, and what its continued growth means for the world and region. 
TRANSNATIONAL ISLAMIST TERRORISM 
NETWORK FRAGMENTATION AND BOTTOM-UP REGIONALIZATION 
Ekaterina Stepanova, Head, Peace and Conflict Studies Unit, Institute of World 
Economy  International Relations (IMEMO) 
The rise of the Islamic State of Iraq and 
Levant (ISIL)1 occurred in the broader context 
of the dominance of radical Islamist 
organizations among the world’s most lethal 
militant-terrorist groups in the Middle East, 
Asia and Africa and the occasional outbreaks 
of homegrown, but transnationally inspired 
jihadist terrorism in the West. The ISIL 
phenomenon has also featured a higher-than-usual 
inflow of jihadists from other conflict 
hotspots and non-Muslim states. All this adds 
to the overall confusion about the different 
types and levels of transnational terrorism of 
radical Islamist bent and reinforces the 
demand for overly simplistic explanations. For 
instance, in official circles and media 
discourse both in the West and in the rest of 
the world the main direction of 
transnationalisation of Islamist terrorism is 
often still interpreted as the top-down 
regionalization of al-Qaeda-centered ‘global 
jihad’ movement. 
This article argues instead that the evolution 
of transnational Islamist terrorism is more 
complex and non-linear. Its cutting edge may 
be formed by two ideologically linked, but 
distinct and only partially overlapping 
processes: 
 the network fragmentation of the global 
jihad movement, including in the West; 
 the bottom-up, rather than top-down, 
regionalization of violent Islamism in the 
world’s heavily internationalized centers of 
militant-terrorist activity in the Greater 
Middle East. 
MAIN TRENDS IN TRANSNATIONAL 
TERRORISM 
Of all trends in contemporary terrorism, the 
following three are of particular relevance to 
the evolution of transnational Islamist 
terrorism. 
(1) Sharp increase in terrorist activity in the 
recent years, coupled with its 
disproportionately high concentration in two 
regions and two major trans-border conflict 
areas. No current international security crisis 
– from the outbreak of Ebola to the crisis 
around and conflict in Ukraine as the 
dominant European security issue – can undo 
or overshadow one simple fact: 2013 was the 
peak year in global terrorist activity not only 
in the early 21st century, but also for the entire 
period since 1970 that is covered by available 
74 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
statistics. Disturbingly, the previous highs for 
terrorist incidents were recorded in 2011 and 
2012 and for fatalities – in 2012.2 
While terrorist activity is at its historical peak 
and continues to increase, it is very unevenly 
distributed around the world, with the bulk of 
it concentrated in just a handful of countries. 
The post-9/11 global terrorism statistics is 
heavily dominated by two regions (the Middle 
East and South Asia). The bulk of terrorist 
activity there is, in turn, accounted for by two 
regional centers of gravity – major armed 
conflicts in Iraq and Afghanistan (and, more 
recently, in the broader Afghanistan-Pakistan 
and the Iraq-Syria contexts). The heavily 
internationalized wars in Iraq and Afghanistan 
both involved armed insurgent/terrorist 
movements in Muslim countries directed 
primarily against Western troops backing 
weak local governments. The Western 
withdrawal from Iraq and Afghanistan and 
changing forms of internationalization of the 
respective conflicts did not improve the 
situation. 
(2) The general dominance of region-based 
radical Islamist groups and movements 
among the most active and lethal militant-terrorist 
groups. In 2012, the top 6 terrorist 
groups – all of the radical Islamist type – 
accounted for almost half (around 5000) of 
all terrorist fatalities in the world.3 In 2013, all 
of the most lethal terrorist groups in the 
world were radical Islamist organizations, 
including the Taliban in Afghanistan, ISIL (in 
Iraq and Syria), “Tehrik-e-Taleban” (Pakistan), 
“Boko Haram” (Nigeria), “Lashkar-e-Jangvi” 
(Pakistan), “Djabhat an-Nusrah” (Syria), 
“ash-Shabab” (Somalia). Remarkably, these 
groups, in addition to the use of terrorist 
means, have also been active combatants – 
military parties to major armed conflicts in 
respective states. All of them have or acquire 
a major trans-border dimension and evolve in 
the direction of further regionalization of 
militant and terrorist activity. In contrast to 
these groups, for instance, al-Qaeda as such 
has not committed a single terrorist act in 
2012–2013. 
(3) Further transnationalisation of terrorism 
at different levels that could be 
distinguished primarily by the ultimate scale 
of a group’s end goal(s) – local, regional 
or global. At the present stage of 
globalization, terrorism at different levels of 
world politics from local to global differs 
more in terms of degree and quality of 
transnationalisation, than by whether or not it 
is transnationalised. Furthermore, 
transnationalisation primarily manifests itself 
in qualitative rather than quantitative terms. 
Despite the fact that out of a couple of 
thousands of terrorist groups tracked by the 
Global Terrorism Dataset (GTD) only few 
attack soft targets on foreign territory,4 the 
very boundary between ‘domestic’ and 
‘international’ terrorism gets increasingly 
blurred. Even terrorist groups with localized 
political agenda tend to increasingly 
transnationalise some or most of their 
logistics, fund-raising, propaganda and 
training activities. Terrorist actors of certain 
motivational/ideological types, such as the 
jihadist cells and individuals in the West, may 
address their terrorist acts to ‘the world as 
whole’ and act to advance explicitly 
transnationalised or global goals, even as they 
rely primarily or solely on local resources and 
do not necessarily travel out of their country 
of citizenship. In addition, in today’s 
globalized world, transnationalisation does 
not exclude – and is often dynamically 
interlinked with – the fragmentation of 
terrorism and other forms of collective 
violence. 
In sum, as all terrorism today is 
transnationalised to some degree, of critical 
importance is to distinguish between different 
levels and qualities of transnational terrorism. 
In the world where even a group with 
localized agenda can develop a wide 
transnational fund-raising network or hit 
citizens of many states by attacking civilians 
in major urban centers, the main criterion to 
establish the qualitative level of 
transnationalisation of terrorism is the scale 
of an organization’s ultimate goals and 
agenda – local, regional or global. 
NETWORK FRAGMENTATION OF 
‘GLOBAL JIHAD’ 
The bulk of terrorist activity in the world is 
accounted for by militant actors that pursue 
relatively limited goals in local or regional 
contexts. In contrast, the more recent 
phenomenon of ‘global terrorism’ associated 
primarily with al-Qaeda advances an explicitly 
universalist agenda and ultimately pursues 
existential, non-negotiable and unlimited 
goals. Such terrorism is truly extraterritorial: 
while it is not specifically tied to any single 
local or regional political context, it does not 
have to be global in its physical reach to have 
a global impact. Despite minimal number of 
incidents, operatives and ideologues, 
al-Qaeda continued to attract 
disproportionately high attention well after 
9/11. This may be partly explained by the fact 
that most of its high-profile targets have been 
either located in or associated with the 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
developed Western world, partly – by the 
significant anti-system potential of the 
supranational ideology of global jihad that 
offers a very radical and reactionary response 
to very modern challenges of a globalizing 
world. 
However, in the mid-2010s, following a 
massive anti-al-Qaeda campaign and 
liquidation of most of its first generation 
leaders, including Osama bin Laden, the 
following question seems appropriate. How 
come that the al-Qaeda-centred global jihad 
is still considered to pose the main terrorist 
threat to international security, if in the early 
2010s, al-Qaeda as such did not even make it 
into the top 20 most dangerous terrorist 
groups (in 2011, it was responsible just for one 
kidnapping out of over 5000 terrorist 
incidents5 and, in 2012-2013, did not commit 
any terrorist attacks)?6 The answer is complex 
and linked the dynamic structural 
transformation of the global jihad movement 
and its adaptation to changing circumstances. 
There are two main interpretations of the 
evolution of the global jihad movement. While 
both imply a degree of fragmentation of the 
original ‘al-Qaeda’, the first framework 
interprets this process as top-down 
regionalization. Since the late 2000s, this 
approach has prevailed in mainstream expert 
and political discourses in the United States 
and in the West at large. It disaggregates 
‘global jihad’ into three levels. First, it leaves 
some direct strategic command and control 
role to what remains of the ‘al-Qaeda core’ 
based in Pakistan/Afghanistan. Second, it 
argues that the movement’s main center of 
gravity has shifted towards several large, 
well-structured and organizationally coherent 
regional affiliates in Muslim regions 
(ultimately subordinate to ‘al-Qaeda Central’). 
This usually refers to ‘al-Qaeda in the Arabian 
Peninsula’, ‘al-Qaeda in the Lands of the 
Islamic Maghreb’, ‘al-Qaeda in Iraq’ and even 
‘al-Qaedas’ in the Horn of Africa and in 
Southeast Asia. The third level is formed by 
al-Qaeda’s ‘ideological adherents’ – small cells 
and individuals, most active in the West itself, 
who ‘know the group only through its 
ideology to carry out violence in its name.’7 
The loose network of these micro-cells, 
however, is commonly interpreted as a sign of 
al-Qaeda’s organizational degradation that is 
claimed to have resulted primarily from 
counterterrorist pressure by the United States 
and its allies. 
The alternative approach promoted in this 
article emphasizes the genuine ‘network 
fragmentation’ of global jihad as the cutting 
75
edge of the movement’s evolution.8 It denies 
residual strategic command functions for ‘the 
al-Qaeda core’ at the present stage, beyond 
the symbolic and inspirational role of its 
ideology and remaining leaders such as 
Ayman az-Zawahiri. This approach does not in 
principle deny the existence of al-Qaeda’s 
regional affiliates in Muslim regions (this role 
best fits ‘al-Qaeda in the Arabian peninsula’ 
that retains a genetic link with the original 
al-Qaeda and, to a lesser extent – ‘al-Qaeda in 
the Lands of the Islamic Maghreb’). It does, 
however, question the vision of global jihad as 
the ‘top down’, hierarchically integrated 
‘Islamist International’ clearly divided into 
large well-structured regional affiliates. It 
points at the fact that most of the so-called 
regional affiliates have long and solid local 
pre-history and strong homegrown roots. 
Their main agendas and priorities are 
inextricably tied to respective regional 
contexts and local/regional armed conflicts. 
When they upgrade and expand their activity 
to the regional level, it is by following the 
‘bottom-up’ logic rather than any ‘top-down’ 
impulse or command from some master HQs. 
These groups’ occasional statements of 
support or even pledges of loyalty to 
al-Qaeda have been more of a symbolic and 
declaratory than substantive nature. 
Instead, smaller autonomous cells9 that are 
linked by a loose ideological network, are 
active in several dozen countries and promote 
an explicitly globalist agenda are seen as the 
most committed ideological adepts of global 
jihad and as the cutting edge of the evolution 
of its organizational patterns. Such network 
fragmentation was best captured by Abu 
Musab as-Suri’s theory of ‘jihad by individual 
cells’ (and, in the West, by the ‘leaderless 
jihad’ theory).10 Network fragmentation does 
not imply aggressive recruitment into a 
pre-existing framework – rather, adepts are 
encouraged to start their own cells to further 
the shared ideology and the movement’s 
ends. The idea of starting a violent cell 
appeals as much to young people’s desire for 
glory and personal conscience as to their 
political or ideological beliefs. In contrast to 
Islamist groups and movements tied to the 
specific local/regional contexts and armed 
conflicts in the Middle East, Asia or Africa, this 
type of cell is truly extraterritorial in its 
outlook and goals, with most of such actors 
emerging in Western rather than Muslim 
states. These cells display diverse 
radicalization paths and are often not linked 
to one another in any formal way, but they 
share the ideology of global jihad and 
together form – and see themselves as part of 
– an adaptive and resilient transnational 
network-type movement. 
Despite its marginality, this movement can 
still pose a serious terrorist threat to 
international security in two main ways. 
First, there has been a gradual rise in 
homegrown jihadist terrorism in the West, 
despite continuing fragmentation of such 
violence underscored by dominance of 
mini-cells and the growing proportion of 
single actors. Some of them – the so-called 
‘lone wolves’ – act entirely on their own (e.g., 
Nidal Hasan in the 2010 Fort Hood shooting), 
others act either as network agents or on 
their own initiative, but with some operational 
or other network connections.11 Fragmented 
jihadist terrorism in the West is hard to track 
as individuals or cells may not be in contact 
with other/known terrorist actors, do not 
necessarily get external training, and often 
acquire weapons and materials independently 
and from open sources. However, it also tends 
to produce a mismatch between the Western 
jihadists’ high ideological ambition and their 
relatively limited capacity to launch terrorist 
attacks (they generally lack experience in 
violence unless a group involves a veteran/ 
returnee from a foreign armed conflict or 
have got some professional training). This 
mismatch often results in failure and partly 
explains why, while half of jihadist plots in the 
West involved plans to cause mass casualties, 
very few have led to actual mass-casualty 
attacks.12 
Secondly, the fragmented network of ‘global 
jihad’ adepts forms a natural pool for influx of 
Western jihadist fighters to various conflicts in 
the Muslim world. More limited connections 
– a few foreign contacts and visits to 
conflict-torn regions for ideological 
inspiration, sometimes also in hope to get 
some training – while not a must for 
jihadists13 in the West, have not been 
uncommon either. The two-way nature of 
such flows and links has become more 
disturbing than ever in view of the rise of 
radical Islamist organizations in the Iraq-Syria 
context (such as ‘Jabhat an-Nusrah’ and, 
above all, ISIL). They have attracted more 
foreign Islamist fighters than any other 
theater since Afghanistan in the 1980s, with 
Western, mainly European, fighters 
comprising no less than a quarter of all 
foreign jihadists – a disproportionately high 
share. For the West, this has alarming 
implications. Possible return of some of these 
seasoned fighters could stimulate new 
extremist networks and do a lot to bridge the 
mismatch between jihadists terrorists’ 
ambition and qualification (even as only a 
limited percentage of such returnees from 
previous conflicts have turned back to 
terrorism so far).14 
While certainly a serious concern, the network 
fragmentation of global jihad (that manifests 
itself more in the West than anywhere else) is 
a less critical international security problem 
than the challenge posed by the bottom-up 
regionalization of Islamist militancy and 
terrorism. 
BOTTOM-UP REGIONALIZATION: 
ISIL 
Regionalization of territorially based 
insurgent-terrorist Islamist groups could be 
traced in various regions. However, it only 
tends to become an issue of major 
international concern in regional contexts 
characterized by a combination of chronic 
state weakness or failure, protracted major 
conflicts and all-out civil wars and high 
degree of transnationalisation and/or even 
formal internationalization (foreign military 
presence). It is in these conditions that 
regionalization of a more localized movement 
is coupled with consolidation rather than 
fragmentation of its military-political potential 
and with a qualitative upgrade of its militant/ 
terrorist activity, rather than decline in its 
intensity. Nowhere does this trend manifest 
itself better than in the context of the 
ongoing crisis in and around Iraq and the 
trans-border ISIL phenomenon. 
Iraq has led the list of countries most affected 
by terrorism since the mid-2000s – well 
before ISIL has taken full shape (in the first 
post-9/11 decade Iraq alone accounted for 
over third of all terrorism-related fatalities 
worldwide).15 However, a decade later, it is 
the activity of ISIL and some smaller radical 
Islamist groups in the extended, cross-border 
Iraq-Syria context that has become the main 
impulse and driver of anti-government 
militancy, terrorism and sectarian violence in 
the region. Acting in two (semi-)failed state 
contexts – in Iraq as a chronically failing 
post-intervention state and in Syria seriously 
weakened by an ongoing bloody civil war – 
ISIL provides an even more impressive 
example of the full regionalization of a 
militant-terrorist movement with a powerful 
ideology, major state-building ambitions and 
quasi-state potential than the cross-border 
activity and phenomenon of the Taliban in the 
Afghanistan-Pakistan context. 
The emergence and evolution of ISIL in the 
direction of ‘bottom-up regionalization’ has to 
be addressed in two main contexts: (1) 
76 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
internal dynamics and conflicts in Iraq and 
Syria, including the overlap with intra-regional 
dimension and (2) broader links and 
connections to transnational Islamism. 
First, no other major regionalizing Islamist 
movement has been so strongly driven by 
intra-state and intra-regional factors, even as 
these dynamics were partly distorted, 
stimulated or set in motion by previous 
external intervention in Iraq. The informal 
transnationalisation of a civil war in Syria on 
both sides has also largely, although not 
exclusively, been a product of intra-regional 
dynamics. 
Of all the factors and conditions that can 
explain the rise of ISIL and its major military 
and modest state-building successes since 
the summer of 2014, the more specific and 
directly relevant ones are internal to the 
countries and the region in question. They 
include the genuine discontent by very 
diverse groups of Iraqi Sunnis – from the 
former Baathists to tribal groups to radical 
Islamists – with their growing political and 
socio-economic marginalization and 
repression. This rising discontent had earlier 
helped feed the anti-U.S. insurgency, but 
continued to accumulate during the rule of 
the increasingly sectarian al-Maliki 
government. That was coupled with the 
general limited functionality and low 
legitimacy of the unpopular, but increasingly 
authoritarian Iraqi regime inherited from the 
times of the foreign security presence. The 
bloody civil war that erupted in the 
neighboring Syria provided an ideal ‘window 
of opportunity’ to ISIL as the most radical 
part of the Iraqi Sunni opposition to get a 
haven, secure the second country-base, 
continue fighting and acquire financial 
self-sufficiency through control of the 
cross-border smuggling of oil and almost 
anything else, even before it shifted its main 
center of activity back to Iraq. 
Not surprisingly, the worst and most direct 
implications of the ISIL activity once it has 
taken its full shape affect, first and foremost, 
the region itself. The ISIL phenomenon 
threatens to deal a massive, if not necessarily 
final, blow to at least two already failing or 
seriously weakened states at once, adding 
new quality to the broader destabilization in 
the region that has already for over a decade 
been the world’s main center of terrorist and 
militant activity. 
Second, ISIL’s links to transnational Islamist 
terrorism remain a contested issue. In policy 
and media circles ISIL, as well as its previous 
‘editions’, are often portrayed not as 
self-sufficient organizations but as a branch 
of al-Qaeda-inspired ‘global jihad’. This 
interpretation usually emphasizes two issues: 
(a) ISIL’s pre-history in Iraq, with a focus on 
the so-called ‘al-Qaeda in Iraq’ and (b) the 
unprecedentedly large presence of foreign 
jihadist fighters among ISIL’s command and 
rank-and-file alike. 
The Islamist core of what is now known as 
ISIL (and was previously known as Islamic 
State in Iraq and earlier as ‘al-Qaeda in Iraq’) 
formed in the aftermath of the 2003 US-led 
intervention in the course of escalating and 
radicalizing resistance to foreign forces and 
their local allies. A few statements of support 
and loyalty to al-Qaeda made by the group’s 
first leader Abu Musab az-Zarqawi (a 
controversial figure with ambiguous 
connections in and beyond jihadist circles), 
the reference to al-Qaeda in the group’s name 
under Zarkawi (removed shortly after his 
death in 2006) and his increasing reliance on 
demonstrative use of mass-casualty terrorist 
sufficed to degrade the group to little but 
‘al-Qaeda off shoot’. While this might have 
served well to discredit the genuine nature of 
the armed Sunni opposition to the US 
presence in Iraq, it did not reflect the real 
nature and composition of the group. Its main 
goal remained the liberation of Iraq and the 
establishment of an Islamist state in Iraq and 
the overwhelming majority of militants and 
commanders were Iraqi (while the proportion 
of foreign fighters did not exceed 4–10 per 
cent).16 By the end of 2006, the group 
became one of the largest insurgency forces 
in Iraq, formed the core of the coalition of the 
anti-government Islamist actors and renamed 
itself into Islamic State of Iraq. 
The intensifying pressure by the US forces 
and some loyal Sunni tribes, as part of the 
‘surge’ campaign of the late 2000s, and later 
also by the government and its Shia allies 
pushed part of the movement out of Iraq to 
the neighboring Syria. The escalating civil war 
there since 2011 gave the group a major boost 
and upgraded it to one of the largest forces 
on the radical Islamist flank of the armed 
opposition. While the group had joined the 
Syrian civil war on the side of the jihadist part 
of the opposition, after it upgraded itself to 
the Islamic State of Iraq and Levant and tried 
to unite other Islamist groups under its 
control, it fell out with the another largest 
jihadist organization ‘Jabhat an-Nusrah’. 
Remarkably, in the conflict between ISIL and 
‘an-Nusrah’ in Syria the political and 
ideological support of ‘al-Qaeda Central’ was 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
not on the ISIL side. As the ISIL shifted the 
main focus of its activity back to Iraq and 
seized upon the rising tensions between the 
al-Maliki government and the Iraqi Sunnis, 
al-Qaeda’s main voice Ayman az-Zawahiri 
formally denied any support or affiliation to 
ISIL in February 2014, months before its 
victorious march deeper into Iraq.17 
The absence of al-Qaeda blessing did not 
stop thousands of foreign fighters (some of 
whom switched the front from Syria) from 
joining ISIL, increasingly well-funded and well-organized 
militarily. Their overall numbers, 
proportion and composition are dynamic and 
yet to be clarified, but two preliminary 
conclusions can be made even on the basis of 
available information. First, while the ISIL 
army-style combat potential is largely 
attributed to the presence of the Iraqi 
ex-Baathist professional security and military 
cadre (who may comprise up to a third of 
ISIL’s leader al-Baghdadi’s deputies), foreign 
jihadists appear to play a disproportionately 
large role in the ISIL terrorist attacks and 
other atrocities, including beheadings. 
Second, it is the influx of ‘global jihad’ fighters 
from the West in particular, with their 
distinctively universalist agenda, that may 
provide the region-based ISIL with its main 
link to a truly globalized agenda. In this 
respect, they may play an even larger role 
than either the ideological symbolism of the 
historical al-Qaeda core or the influence of 
jihadists from other local/regional ‘fronts’ 
(that range from major conflicts in failed 
states such as Afghanistan, Somalia or Yemen 
to peripheral Islamist/separatist insurgencies 
in many fully functional states in Asia and 
Eurasia). 
*** 
Obsessive attempts to trace or link any 
Islamist insurgency/terrorist movements in 
areas of heavily transnationalised armed 
conflicts to the ‘core al-Qaeda’ in line with the 
strict ‘top-down regionalization’ scheme 
might have played their own part in 
overlooking the rise of ISIL. This trans-border, 
regional movement is not only extremely 
radical in ideological outlook and methods, 
but also efficient in combat and, potentially, 
basic governance and quick to adapt to the 
limited anti-ISIL air campaign launched by the 
US-led coalition of Western and Arab states. 
The regionalization of ISIL largely followed 
the ‘bottom-up’ rather than ‘top-down’ 
pattern and was primarily driven by intra-regional 
dynamics, state weakness and 
sectarianism (exacerbated by previous 
international interventions). ISIL’s main link to 
77
the ‘global jihad’ agenda and ideology is 
provided by the significant presence of 
foreign fighters, especially Western jihadists 
with their markedly universalist outlook. 
However, in contrast to al-Qaeda or ‘global 
jihad’ adepts in and beyond the West, ISIL 
does not appear to pursue or prioritize totally 
abstract and utopian global goals. It is 
precisely the fact that ISIL is fully mired in the 
regional context, sets up more tangible and 
realistic goals and does not (dis)miss a 
chance of building a trans-border regional 
Islamic state here and now that makes it 
today a no lesser, or even a greater, challenge 
to international security than al-Qaeda and its 
direct off-shoots and self-generating 
micro-clones. 
Whether the ISIL phenomenon is more of an 
outlier or signals a broader trend may yet to 
be seen. However, some of the deadliest 
Islamist militant-terrorist groups in the world’s 
worst conflicts (ranging from the Afghan and 
Pakistani Taliban to ‘Boko Haram’ in Nigeria or 
‘ash-Shabab’ in Somalia) – appear to or may 
evolve in the same direction, especially if a 
combination of dysfunctional or failing states, 
deep regional divisions and unsuccessful past 
of present external interventions is in place. 
This provides sufficient grounds to consider 
the ‘bottom-up regionalization’ as one of the 
most potentially disturbing trends in 
transnational Islamist terrorism. 
NOTES 
1. On 29 June 2014, the movement changed the 
name to Islamic State (IS), but is more widely 
known in English as ISIL or ISIS – Islamic State of 
Iraq and Sham (the Arabic for Levant) or Islamic 
State of Iraq and Syria. 
2. 2013 is the last year for which full GTD statistics 
was available at the time of writing. Global 
Terrorism Database (GTD) / National Consortium 
for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to 
Terrorism (START), University of Maryland. http:// 
www.start.umd.edu/data/gtd. 
3. Testimony by W. Braniff, Executive Director, 
START, University of Maryland, before the U.S. 
House Armed Services Committee Hearing on the 
State of Al Qaeda, its Affiliates, and Associated 
Groups: View From Outside Experts. Washington, 
DC: United States House of Representatives, 4 
Feb. 2014, P. 3. 
4. Global Terrorism Database 2014. 
5. Global Terrorism Index: Capturing the Impact of 
Terrorism in 2002-2011 (Sydney; N.Y.: Institute for 
Economics and Peace, 2012), p. 6 http://www. 
visionofhumanity.org/sites/default/files/2012_ 
Global_Terrorism_Index_Report.pdf 
6. Testimony by W. Braniff. p. 3. 
7. National Strategy for Counterterrorism 
(Washington D.C.: The White House, 28 June 
2011), p. 19. 
8. Stepanova E., ‘The evolution of the al-Qaeda-type 
terrorism: networks and beyond’, in L. Bossi et al. 
(ed.), Dynamics of Political Violence: A 
Process-Oriented Perspective on Radicalization 
and the Escalation of Political Conflict (Farnham, 
VA: Ashgate, 2014), pp. 288–305. 
9. Al-Suri A.M., The Call to Global Islamic Resistance. 
CENTRA Technology, Inc. / trans. From Arabic 
(DCIA Counterterrorism Center, Office of 
Terrorism Analysis, 2004), pp. 1367–1368. 
10. Sageman M. Leaderless Jihad: Terror Networks in 
the Twenty-First Century (Philadelphia: University 
of Pennsylvania Press, 2007). 
11. See, e. g., Nesser P., ‘Single actor terrorism: scope, 
characteristics and explanations’, in Perspectives 
on Terrorism, vol. 6, no. 6 (2012), pp. 61–73. 
12. There were only 4 rarely successful mass-casualty 
jihadist attacks in the West after 2001: the 2004 
Madrid bombings, the 2005 London bombings, 
the 2009 Fort Hood shooting and the 2013 
Boston Marathon bombings. 
13. For numbers on Syria, see Zelin A.Y., ‘Up to 11,000 
foreign fighters in Syria; steep rise among 
Western Europeans’, ICSR Insight, 17 December 
2013. Estimated numbers for foreign fighters in 
ISIL in the Iraq-Syria context are higher, but vary 
significantly. 
14. For more detail, see Hegghammer T., “Should I 
stay or should I go? Explaining variation in 
Western jihadists’ choice between domestic and 
foreign fighting,” in American Political Science 
Review, vol. 107, no. 1 (Feb. 2013), p. 10. 
15. Global Terrorism Index 2012, p. 12. 
16. Baker J., Hamilton L. The Iraq Study Group Report 
(Washington D.C.: Iraq Study Group, 2006). 
17. Bayoumi A., Harding L., “Mapping Iraq’s fighting 
groups”, Al-Jazeera (27 June 2014); The Evolution 
of the Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL): 
Relationships 2004-2014, START Fact Sheet, June 
2014. 
78 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
Terrorism in all its forms is a major threat to national security. Nuclear 
terrorism however is the most serious possible terrorist threat. Samantha 
Pitts-Kiefer from the Nuclear Threat Initiative, outlines the history and 
current reality of a nuclear terrorist threat, highlighting the urgent need 
to better strengthen global nuclear security. This contribution 
summarises the key global initiatives focused on this task and how the 
NTI Nuclear Materials Security Index aims to provide better evidence to 
measure amongst countries of the world, the quantities, security and 
control measures, global norms, domestic commitments and capacity 
and risk environment for nuclear materials. 
NUCLEAR NIGHTMARES 
Samantha Pitts-Kiefer, Senior Project Officer, Nuclear Threat Initiative (NTI) 
Thirteen years after the 9/11 attacks stunned 
the world and nearly a decade after the 
subsequent attacks in London, Madrid, and 
Bali made global terrorism a painful reality, 
public concern and awareness about the 
terrorist threat had started to fade. But the 
emergence this year of the Islamic State of 
Iraq and the Levant (ISIL), most notably with 
gruesome videotaped beheadings, has once 
again captured the attention of citizens across 
the globe. 
Images of the barbaric ritualistic killings of 
American journalists and British aid workers 
sparked international outrage. At the same 
time, however, in many parts of the world, a 
sense remains that these kinds of deeply 
troubling events take place only in remote and 
far-off lands, and pose little threat closer to 
home. Unfortunately, it is naïve to think so. ISIL 
has tens of thousands of fighters, is well-financed, 
pays little respect to international 
borders and, in addition to individual acts of 
barbarism, engages in large-scale attacks on 
civilians. Al Qaeda leaders made it clear they 
were seeking weapons of mass destruction, 
including nuclear weapons. What if ISIL 
decides it too wants them? World leaders and 
their publics have a duty to ask such 
“what-ifs.” What if ISIL, al Qaeda, or some 
other yet-as-unknown terrorist group obtained 
nuclear materials and fashioned a crude 
improvised nuclear device? What if they were 
able to ship it, undetected, through one of the 
world’s porous ports? What if they succeeded 
in detonating it in one of the world’s cities? 
This is not just the stuff of Hollywood. Such 
“what-ifs” must be treated in capitals with 
seriousness and resolve from Washington, DC, 
to Moscow and beyond. World leaders, 
including U.S. presidents Barack Obama and 
George W. Bush, have identified nuclear 
terrorism as the number one security threat 
and have taken steps to address the threat 
through the Nuclear Security Summit process 
and other programs such as the Global 
Initiative to Combat Nuclear Terrorism and the 
G8 Global Partnership Against the Spread of 
Weapons and Materials of Mass Destruction. 
But much more needs to be done. Until all the 
materials needed to make a bomb are 
properly secured, the world will not be safe 
from terrorists bent on unleashing 
unimaginable horror. 
THE THREAT OF NUCLEAR 
TERRORISM 
During the Cold War, the United States and 
the Soviet Union built up vast amounts of 
nuclear weapons and materials. The Cuban 
Missile Crisis heightened fears that the nuclear 
arms race could result in destruction on a 
massive scale, whether as a result of an 
intentional or accidental launch and 
detonation of a nuclear bomb. As the Cold 
War came to a close, a new threat emerged: 
nuclear terrorism. With the disintegration of 
the Soviet Union, nuclear weapons and 
79
materials were left scattered across hundreds 
of sites in former Soviet states prompting 
urgent concern that smugglers or terrorists 
would steal enough material for a bomb. 
Russia and the United States worked together, 
through the Nunn-Lugar Cooperative Threat 
Reduction Program, to dismantle and destroy 
thousands of weapons and to ensure that the 
nuclear materials from those weapons were 
disposed of safely. Despite all that has been 
achieved, the security of weapons-usable 
nuclear materials remains an urgent concern, 
while at the same time terrorist groups have 
grown more sophisticated and more adept at 
carrying out mass-casualty attacks. 
So, today’s leaders and citizens face a chilling 
prospect: the detonation of a crude nuclear 
weapon built by terrorists with materials 
stolen or purchased on the black market. 
Though the al Qaeda that attacked the United 
States on 9/11 has been much diminished, al 
Qaeda affiliates in the Arabian Peninsula and 
Northern Africa, ISIL, and terrorist 
organizations like al-Shabaab in Somalia 
remind us that the terrorist threat is dynamic, 
constantly evolving, and, most of all, enduring. 
At the same time, the materials needed to 
build a bomb are spread around the world. 
Globally, there are approximately 2,000 metric 
tons of weapons-usable nuclear material 
(plutonium and highly enriched uranium or 
HEU) located at hundreds of sites—some of 
them poorly secured—scattered across 
twenty-five countries. Building one bomb 
requires only enough HEU to fill a five-pound 
bag of sugar or a quantity of plutonium the 
size of a grapefruit. Terrorists also have 
access to the technology and know-how 
needed to build a crude nuclear device, and a 
number of terrorist groups have in the past 
stated a desire to acquire and use a nuclear 
bomb. The consequences of detonating such a 
bomb in a major city would be staggering: 
hundreds of thousands of casualties; 
long-lasting environmental damage; economic 
losses in the hundreds of billions; and 
considerable political and social ramifications. 
No matter where a bomb is detonated, the 
consequences would reverberate around the 
globe. 
To build a bomb the biggest challenge 
terrorists face is obtaining enough HEU or 
separated plutonium. Every step after 
acquiring the material—building the bomb, 
transporting it, and detonating it—is easier for 
terrorists to take and harder for the 
international community to stop. So it is 
imperative that terrorists don’t get a hold of 
the materials. 
Today, there are myriad ways that a well-organized 
and sufficiently-funded terrorist 
group could seize the materials they need to 
build an improvised nuclear device that would 
destroy the heart of a city. They could send a 
team of armed assailants to overwhelm guards 
at an understaffed nuclear facility or to attack 
a convoy transporting weapons-usable nuclear 
materials from one facility to another. A 
terrorist or criminal network could corrupt 
insiders or use a cyberattack to defeat 
security controls. 
That is why ensuring that all weapons-usable 
nuclear material is properly secured to the 
highest standards is the key to preventing 
nuclear terrorism. 
BUILDING A STRENGTHENED 
GLOBAL NUCLEAR SECURITY 
SYSTEM 
The Nuclear Security Summits, launched by 
the United States in 2010, have brought 
high-level attention to the threat of nuclear 
terrorism and have catalyzed actions by the 
54 participating states to strengthen their own 
security and work collectively to strengthen 
global security. As a result of the Summit 
process, states have strengthened their 
nuclear security laws and regulations, signed 
on to international treaties that require them 
to secure nuclear materials and criminalize 
acts of nuclear terrorism, and provided 
financial or other assistance to states to help 
them secure their materials. Significantly, since 
the Summit process was launched in 2009, 
twelve countries have eliminated all of their 
inventories of these dangerous materials. 
Yet, despite these important efforts, there is 
still no global system for securing all material. 
Incredibly, the security of some of the world’s 
most dangerous material is not subject to any 
common international standards or “rules of 
the road” that all states must follow. Indeed, 
security practices vary widely across states. 
While several elements for guiding states’ 
nuclear security practices do exist, they fall 
short of what is needed. In particular: 
The international legal agreement for 
securing nuclear materials—the Convention 
on the Physical Protection of Nuclear 
Material (CPPNM) and its 2005 
Amendment—does not define standards 
and best practices and the 2005 
Amendment, which strengthens the overall 
scope of the CPPNM, has not yet entered 
into force. Entry into force must be a 
priority and the United States, which has 
so far failed to complete ratification of the 
2005 Amendment, must act swiftly to 
do so. 
Nuclear security recommendations and 
guidelines issued by the International 
Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) are not 
mandatory and are implemented 
inconsistently. 
Existing legal agreements and guidelines 
cover only 15 percent of all global stocks of 
weapons-usable nuclear material: those 
used in civilian programs. The remaining 
85% are considered “military material” and 
are not subject even to those limited 
practices. 
Not only is the current system devoid of an 
agreed-upon set of international standards or 
best practices, there is no governing body 
tasked with holding states accountable for lax 
security and no expectation that states should 
take steps to build confidence in others that 
they are effectively securing their materials. 
Even though poor security in one state can 
result in the detonation of a nuclear bomb 
anywhere else in the world, many states still 
consider nuclear security solely a sovereign, 
not a shared, responsibility, and continue to 
simply say, “Trust me.” 
NUCLEAR SECURITY LAGS BEHIND 
OTHER INDUSTRIES 
The lack of global standards, information 
sharing, or accountability mechanisms in 
nuclear security is in stark contrast to other 
high-risk global enterprises, such as civil 
aviation, where public safety and security is at 
stake and where states understand and accept 
that all parties have an interest in the 
performance of others. In the case of aviation, 
for example, almost all states are members of 
the International Civil Aviation Organization 
(ICAO), which sets safety and security 
standards for all airlines, conducts audits, and 
shares security concerns with others states. 
Yet with weapons-usable nuclear materials, 
where poor security can lead to a nuclear 
catastrophe with global consequences, there 
is no shared system of standards, assurance, 
or accountability. 
If the threat of nuclear terrorism is to be taken 
seriously and all weapons-usable nuclear 
material secured, there must be a global 
system of international standards and best 
practices that covers all materials, including 
military materials, and provides mechanisms 
for states to be held accountable and to build 
confidence in their security practices. In 
addition, sates must reduce risk by minimizing 
and, where possible, eliminating their stocks of 
80 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
weapons-usable nuclear materials, for 
example by converting power and research 
reactors that use HEU fuel to low enriched 
uranium fuels. 
STRENGTHENING GLOBAL 
NUCLEAR SECURITY 
Securing vulnerable nuclear materials has 
been a priority at the Nuclear Threat Initiative 
(NTI) since its founding in 2001. In recent 
years, NTI’s work in this area has followed two 
tracks: a public initiative that focused 
worldwide attention on the status of nuclear 
materials security, and a separate effort to 
engage governments and experts to shape the 
agendas and outcomes of the Nuclear 
Security Summits. 
In January 2014, NTI published the second 
edition of the NTI Nuclear Materials Security 
Index (NTI Index), a unique public assessment 
of nuclear security conditions in 176 countries. 
The NTI Index provides a framework for 
analysis that has sparked international 
discussions about priorities for strengthening 
security. The NTI Index assesses 25 countries 
with one kilogram or more of weapons-usable 
nuclear material (HEU or separated plutonium) 
across five categories: 
Quantities and Sites: the quantities of 
material, number of sites at which the 
material is located, and whether material 
quantities are decreasing or increasing; 
Security and Control Measures: whether 
certain physical protection, control, and 
accounting measures are required by 
national laws and regulations; 
Global Norms: whether a state has joined 
international treaties, undertaken voluntary 
measures to support global efforts, and 
taken steps to build confidence in the 
security of its material; 
Domestic Commitments and Capacity: 
whether a state has implemented its 
international obligations; and 
Risk Environment: factors that though not 
directly related to the security of nuclear 
materials may still impact a state’s ability 
to maintain appropriate security, including 
political instability, ineffective governance, 
corruption, and the presence of groups 
interested in illicitly acquiring material. 
The NTI Index assesses an additional 151 
countries with less than one kilogram of 
weapons-usable nuclear materials, or none at 
all, on the last three of these categories. These 
states are included in the NTI Index because 
all states, not just those with materials, have a 
responsibility to prevent nuclear terrorism by 
ensuring that their territories are not used as 
safe havens, staging grounds, or transit points 
for terrorist operations. NTI plans to release a 
third edition of the NTI Index in early 2016. 
SETTING PRIORITIES 
One of NTI’s recommendations in the 2012 NTI 
Index was the need for a dialogue on priorities 
for securing nuclear materials. Although the 
2010 Summit had resulted in important 
commitments by states to strengthen their 
own security and support global nuclear 
security efforts, these commitments were not 
driven by an agreed set of priorities. To 
address this challenge, in July 2012, NTI 
convened the first of a series of meetings 
called the Global Dialogue on Nuclear Security 
Priorities, a Track 1.5 dialogue among 
government officials, experts, nuclear security 
practitioners, and other stakeholders to build 
consensus on the need for a strengthened 
global nuclear security system and the 
elements of that system. Leading up to the 
2014 Nuclear Security Summit, participants in 
the Global Dialogue developed the following 
set of principles that define such a system: 
Comprehensiveness: All weapons-usable 
nuclear materials and facilities should be 
covered by the system, including the 85% 
of all global stocks that are military 
materials. 
International Standards and Best 
Practices: All states and facilities with 
those materials should adhere to 
international standards and best practices. 
Building Confidence: States should help 
build confidence in the effectiveness of 
their security practices and take reassuring 
actions to demonstrate that all nuclear 
materials and facilities are secure (e.g., 
through peer review, best practice 
exchanges, and sharing of non-sensitive 
security information). 
Material Minimization and Elimination: 
States should work to reduce risk through 
minimizing or, where feasible, eliminating 
weapons-usable nuclear materials stocks 
and the number of locations where they 
are found. 
The 2014 Summit Communiqué made 
significant headway on several of these fronts, 
calling for a strengthened international nuclear 
security architecture and emphasizing the 
value of countries building the confidence of 
others in the security of their weapons-usable 
nuclear materials. In addition, 35 countries 
(two-thirds of Summit participants) agreed to 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
put principles into practice by joining the 
“Strengthening Nuclear Security 
Implementation” initiative, pledging to meet 
the intent of the IAEA’s voluntary guidelines 
through implementing national regulations, 
committing to improve their nuclear security 
through internal assessments and peer 
reviews, and ensuring that those responsible 
for nuclear security are “demonstrably 
competent.” 
Despite this importance progress, challenges 
remain. The security of military material has 
largely remained unaddressed by the 
Summits. In addition, despite progress on 
minimizing stocks of HEU, discussions of the 
minimization and management of plutonium 
have been stymied by political and other 
challenges. Finally, at what is presumed to be 
the final Summit scheduled for 2016, leaders 
will need to agree on a way to sustain the 
nuclear security mission beyond 2016 or risk 
much of the positive work to strengthen 
nuclear security going unfinished or, worse, 
backsliding. To address these challenges, NTI 
has once again convened the Global Dialogue 
to continue our efforts to strengthen the 
global system in support of the 2016 Summit. 
LOOKING AHEAD 
Terrorism in all its forms presents a major 
threat to global security. Yet, the prospect of a 
terrorist using a nuclear bomb to destroy a 
city, killing and injuring hundreds of 
thousands, is the threat most likely to keep 
leaders and global experts awake at night. A 
nuclear nightmare like the kind seen in horror 
movies and television dramas could become a 
reality if the world does not do what we 
already know must and can be done to secure 
the materials that could be used in a nuclear 
bomb. 
With the final Nuclear Security Summit 
approaching, the window of opportunity to 
put in place the global system necessary to 
get the job done is closing. We cannot stand 
aside and let the window close. States must 
agree to a path forward for sustaining the 
nuclear security mission and for building a 
truly global system for securing all nuclear 
materials—a system where materials are 
secured according to international standards 
and best practices, where states take actions 
to build the confidence of others that they are 
properly securing their materials, and where 
states continue to minimize and eventually 
eliminate stockpiles of weapons-usable 
nuclear materials. 
81
APPENDIX 
APPENDIX A: GTI RANKS 
AND SCORES, 2014 
GTI 
RANK 
COUNTRY 2014 GTI SCORE 
(OUT OF 10) 
CHANGE IN SCORE 
(ACTUAL YEAR 
2012 TO 2013) 
1 Iraq 10 0.5 
2 Afghanistan 9.39 0.26 
3 Pakistan 9.37 0.23 
4 Nigeria 8.58 0.34 
5 Syria 8.12 0.6 
6 India 7.86 0.01 
7 Somalia 7.41 0.17 
8 Yemen 7.31 0.15 
9 Philippines 7.29 0.56 
10 Thailand 7.19 0.03 
11 Russia 6.76 -0.09 
12 Kenya 6.58 0.52 
13 Egypt 6.5 1.63 
14 Lebanon 6.4 1.97 
15 Libya 6.25 1.54 
16 Colombia 6.24 -0.15 
17 Turkey 5.98 -0.12 
18 Dem. Rep. of the Congo 5.9 -0.05 
19 Sudan 5.77 -0.15 
20 South Sudan 5.6 1.28 
21 Algeria 5.52 0.23 
22 Mali 5.29 1.42 
23 Bangladesh 5.25 1.27 
24 Nepal 5.23 0.28 
GTI 
RANK 
COUNTRY 2014 GTI SCORE 
(OUT OF 10) 
CHANGE IN SCORE 
(ACTUAL YEAR 
2012 TO 2013) 
25 China 5.21 0.38 
26 Central African Republic 5.19 1.35 
27 United Kingdom 5.17 0.72 
28 Iran 4.9 -0.1 
29 Greece 4.73 0.44 
30 United States 4.71 0.85 
31 Indonesia 4.67 0.03 
32 Israel 4.66 -0.46 
32 Mexico 4.66 1.53 
34 Bahrain 4.41 0.89 
35 Myanmar 4.24 0.02 
36 Mozambique 4.01 2.89 
36 Sri Lanka 4.01 -0.76 
38 Rwanda 4 0.04 
39 Burundi 3.97 -0.41 
40 Cote d’Ivoire 3.76 -0.37 
41 Tanzania 3.71 3.65 
42 Ethiopia 3.7 -0.38 
43 Paraguay 3.63 1.61 
44 Norway 3.57 -0.68 
45 Senegal 3.55 -0.12 
46 Tunisia 3.29 1.56 
47 Ireland 3.09 0.15 
48 Malaysia 3.04 1.13 
48 South Africa 3.04 0.79 
50 Peru 2.96 0.17 
51 Ukraine 2.95 -0.18 
52 Uganda 2.93 -0.78 
53 Belarus 2.85 -0.73 
54 Kosovo 2.73 0.22 
55 Saudi Arabia 2.71 -0.17 
56 France 2.67 -0.41 
57 Guatemala 2.61 1.02 
58 Chile 2.59 0.33 
58 Niger 2.59 0.57 
60 Bulgaria 2.58 -0.57 
60 Georgia 2.58 -0.43 
62 Italy 2.55 -0.09 
63 Eritrea 2.45 -0.71 
64 Honduras 2.38 0.99 
65 Kazakhstan 2.37 -0.47 
66 Cyprus 2.3 2.14 
67 Morocco 2.11 -0.69 
68 Tajikistan 1.99 -0.67 
69 Spain 1.84 -0.53 
70 Jordan 1.76 -0.28 
82 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
GTI 
RANK 
COUNTRY 2014 GTI SCORE 
(OUT OF 10) 
CHANGE IN SCORE 
(ACTUAL YEAR 
2012 TO 2013) 
71 Argentina 1.73 0.3 
72 Brazil 1.72 1.02 
73 Republic of the Congo 1.59 1.59 
74 Trinidad and Tobago 1.54 1.54 
75 Cameroon 1.45 -0.45 
75 Macedonia (FYR) 1.45 -0.77 
77 Switzerland 1.34 0.87 
78 Madagascar 1.26 0.16 
79 Ecuador 1.18 0.69 
80 Zimbabwe 1.16 0.52 
81 Guinea 1.12 1.12 
82 Sweden 1.07 -0.7 
83 Germany 1.02 -0.7 
84 Canada 0.95 0 
85 Czech Republic 0.81 0.55 
86 Bosnia and Herzegovina 0.76 0.17 
87 Burkina Faso 0.7 0.7 
87 Montenegro 0.7 0.7 
89 Netherlands 0.58 -0.71 
89 Serbia 0.58 -0.84 
91 Mauritania 0.56 -0.7 
92 Venezuela 0.54 -0.72 
93 Belgium 0.53 -0.68 
94 Dominican Republic 0.47 0.47 
95 Angola 0.41 -0.6 
95 Australia 0.41 -0.62 
97 Guinea-Bissau 0.35 -0.47 
98 Cambodia 0.31 0.25 
99 Taiwan 0.31 0.29 
100 United Arab Emirates 0.29 0.03 
101 Moldova 0.28 -0.31 
102 Armenia 0.27 0.19 
103 Austria 0.24 -0.43 
103 Bolivia 0.24 -0.24 
105 Croatia 0.23 0.19 
105 Portugal 0.23 -0.24 
107 Albania 0.19 0.13 
107 Denmark 0.19 0.11 
109 Bhutan 0.16 -0.38 
109 Estonia 0.16 -0.15 
111 Uzbekistan 0.14 -0.13 
112 Kyrgyzstan 0.1 -0.1 
113 Iceland 0.08 -0.08 
113 Laos 0.08 -0.08 
113 Liberia 0.08 -0.08 
116 Hungary 0.07 -0.11 
GTI 
RANK 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
COUNTRY 2014 GTI SCORE 
(OUT OF 10) 
CHANGE IN SCORE 
(ACTUAL YEAR 
2012 TO 2013) 
117 Azerbaijan 0.06 -0.29 
118 Chad 0.05 -3.48 
119 Kuwait 0.04 -0.04 
119 Panama 0.04 -0.04 
121 Equatorial Guinea 0.01 -0.01 
121 Japan 0.01 -0.05 
121 Lesotho 0.01 -0.01 
124 Benin 0 0 
124 Botswana 0 0 
124 Costa Rica 0 0 
124 Cuba 0 0 
124 Djibouti 0 0 
124 El Salvador 0 0 
124 Finland 0 -0.03 
124 Gabon 0 0 
124 Gambia 0 0 
124 Ghana 0 0 
124 Guyana 0 -0.42 
124 Haiti 0 0 
124 Jamaica 0 0 
124 Latvia 0 0 
124 Lithuania 0 0 
124 Malawi 0 0 
124 Mauritius 0 0 
124 Mongolia 0 0 
124 Namibia 0 0 
124 New Zealand 0 -0.05 
124 Nicaragua 0 0 
124 North Korea 0 0 
124 Oman 0 0 
124 Papua New Guinea 0 0 
124 Poland 0 0 
124 Qatar 0 0 
124 Romania 0 -0.02 
124 Sierra Leone 0 0 
124 Singapore 0 0 
124 Slovakia 0 0 
124 Slovenia 0 0 
124 South Korea 0 0 
124 Swaziland 0 -0.03 
124 Timor-Leste 0 -0.07 
124 Togo 0 0 
124 Turkmenistan 0 0 
124 Uruguay 0 0 
124 Vietnam 0 0 
124 Zambia 0 0 
83
APPENDIX B: 50 WORST TERRORIST ATTACKS IN 2013 
RANK COUNTRY DATE CITY ORGANISATION F I WEAPON TYPE 
1 Nigeria 17/09/2013 Beni Shiek Boko Haram 142 0 Firearms 
2 Nigeria 24/10/2013 Damatura Boko Haram 125 0 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
3 Syria 22/07/2013 Khan al-Assal Al-Nusrah Front 123 0 Firearms 
4 Pakistan 10/01/2013 Quetta Lashkar-e-Jhangvi 119 219 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
5 Afghanistan 2/08/2013 Sherzad district Taliban 98 0 Firearms 
6 Pakistan 16/02/2013 Quetta Lashkar-e-Jhangvi 91 169 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
7 Pakistan 22/09/2013 Peshawar Jundallah 87 131 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
8 Afghanistan 18/08/2013 Gulistan district Taliban 82 22 Firearms 
9 Kenya 21/09/2013 Nairobi Al-Shabaab 72 201 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
10 Nigeria 20/12/2013 Bama Boko Haram 70 0 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
11 Syria 11/06/2013 Hatla Al-Nusrah Front 70 0 Firearms 
12 Algeria 16/01/2013 In Amenas al-Mua’qi’oon Biddam Brigade (Those who Sign with Blood) 69 8 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
13 Yemen 5/12/2013 Sanaa Al-Qa`ida in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP) 68 215 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
14 Syria 21/02/2013 Damascus Unknown 62 201 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
15 Pakistan 26/07/2013 Parachinar Mujahideen Ansar 61 151 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
16 Syria 6/02/2013 Al-Buraq Al-Nusrah Front 61 0 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
17 Nigeria 7/05/2013 Bama Boko Haram 55 0 Firearms 
18 Central African Rep. 5/12/2013 Bangui Anti-Balaka Militia 54 0 Firearms 
19 Turkey 11/05/2013 Reyhanli Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant 53 140 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
20 Afghanistan 3/04/2013 Farah Taliban 53 95 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
21 Syria 21/03/2013 Damascus Unknown 50 84 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
22 Lebanon 23/08/2013 Tripoli Islamic Unification Movement 47 300 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
23 Iraq 5/10/2013 Baghdad Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant 47 85 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
24 Nigeria 6/07/2013 Mamudo Boko Haram 46 4 Firearms 
25 Iraq 24/04/2013 Mosul Unknown 46 0 Firearms 
26 Pakistan 3/03/2013 Karachi Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) 45 151 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
27 Iraq 21/09/2013 Baghdad Unknown 45 80 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
28 Iraq 25/12/2013 Baghdad Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant 44 71 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
29 Nigeria 11/08/2013 Konduga Boko Haram 44 26 Firearms 
30 Pakistan 29/09/2013 Peshawar Unknown 43 101 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
31 Iraq 23/01/2013 Tuz Khormato Al-Qa`ida in Iraq 43 75 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
32 Iraq 12/07/2013 Kirkuk Unknown 42 35 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
33 Iraq 29/09/2013 Musayyib Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant 41 50 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
34 Syria 1/08/2013 Homs Liwa al-Haqq 40 160 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
35 Iraq 17/05/2013 Baqubah Unknown 40 57 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
36 Nigeria 29/09/2013 Gujba Boko Haram 40 18 Firearms 
37 Dem. Rep. of Congo 25/12/2013 Kamango Allied Democratic Forces (ADF) 40 16 Firearms 
38 Nigeria 18/03/2013 Kano Boko Haram 39 75 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
39 Pakistan 8/08/2013 Quetta Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) 39 50 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
40 Somalia 13/04/2013 Mogadishu Al-Shabaab 38 58 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
41 Mexico 31/01/2013 Mexico City Individuals Tending Toward Savagery 37 101 Incendiary 
42 Iraq 20/10/2013 Baghdad Unknown 37 50 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
43 Iraq 3/02/2013 Kirkuk Al-Qa`ida in Iraq 36 70 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
44 Pakistan 18/06/2013 Mardan Unknown 35 43 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
45 Nigeria 19/08/2013 Baga Boko Haram 35 14 Incendiary 
46 Pakistan 2/02/2013 Serai Naurang Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) 35 8 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
47 Iraq 14/11/2013 Sadiyah Unknown 33 80 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
48 Pakistan 30/06/2013 Quetta Lashkar-e-Jhangvi 32 55 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
49 Iraq 14/03/2013 Baghdad Al-Qa`ida in Iraq 32 50 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
50 Pakistan 10/01/2013 Mingora Lashkar-e-Jhangvi 31 70 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 
* F= FATALITIES, I = INJURIES 
84 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
APPENDIX C: GLOBAL TERRORISM 
INDEX METHODOLOGY 
The GTI ranks 162 countries based on four indicators weighted 
over five years. The Occupied Palestinian Territories is the only 
region that records notable amounts of terrorism that is not 
included in the index.80 
The GTI score for a country in a given year is a based on a 
unique scoring system to account for the relative impact of 
incidents in the year. 
The four factors counted in each country’s 
yearly score, are: 
Total number of terrorist incidents in a given year 
Total number of fatalities caused by terrorists in 
a given year 
Total number of injuries caused by terrorists in a 
given year 
A measure of the total property damage from 
terrorist incidents in a given year. 
Each of the factors is weighted between zero and three and a 
five year weighted average is applied to try and reflect the 
latent psychological effect of terrorist acts over time. The 
weightings shown in Table 12 was determined by consultation 
with the GPI Expert Panel. 
The greatest weighting is attributed to a fatality. It should be 
noted the property damage measure is further disaggregated 
into four bands depending on the measured scope of the 
property damage inflicted by one incident. These bandings are 
shown in Table 13, whereby incidents causing less than US$1 
million are accorded a weighting of 1, between $1 million and $1 
billion a 2, and more than $1 billion a 3. It should be noted a 
great majority of incidents are coded in the GTD as ‘unknown’, 
thus scoring nil, with ‘catastrophic’ events being extremely rare. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
TABLE 12 INDICATOR WEIGHTS USED IN THE 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 
DIMENSION WEIGHT 
Total number of incidents 1 
Total number of fatalities 3 
Total number of injuries 0.5 
Sum of property damages 
measure 
Between 0 and 3 depending 
on severity 
TABLE 13 PROPERTY DAMAGE LEVELS AS 
DEFINED IN THE GTD AND WEIGHTS USED IN THE 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 
CODE/ WEIGHT DAMAGE LEVEL 
0 Unknown 
1 Minor (likely  $1 million) 
2 Major (likely between $1 million and $1 billion) 
3 Catastrophic (likely  $1 billion) 
TABLE 14 HYPOTHETICAL COUNTRY TERRORIST 
ATTACKS IN A GIVEN YEAR 
DIMENSION WEIGHT NUMBER OF RECORDS 
FOR THE GIVEN YEAR 
CALCULATED 
RAW SCORE 
Total number of 
incidents 
1 21 21 
Total number of 
fatalities 
3 36 108 
Total number of 
injuries 
0.5 53 26.5 
Sum of property 
damages measure 
2 20 40 
Total raw score 195.5 
HYPOTHETICAL EXAMPLE OF A COUNTRY’S GLOBAL 
TERRORISM INDEX SCORE 
To assign a relative number to how a country has been directly 
impacted by terrorism in any given year, for every incident 
recorded the GTI calculates a weighted sum of all indicators. To 
illustrate, assume Table 14 depicts a hypothetical country’s 
records for a given year. 
Given these indicator values, the country for that year would be 
assessed as having an impact of terrorism of 195.5. 
85
FIVE YEAR WEIGHTED AVERAGE 
To account for the lingering effect terrorist attacks have on a 
society in terms of fear and subsequent security response, the 
GTI takes into consideration the events of previous years as 
having a bearing on a country’s score in the current year. For 
instance, the scale of the 2011 terrorist attacks in Norway will 
continue to have a psychological impact on the population for 
many years to come. The scoring system presented here is a 
simple attempt to account for this by weighting the country’s 
previous scores using the values shown in Table 15. 
LOGARITHMIC BANDING SCORES ON A SCALE OF 1-10 
The impact of terrorism is not evenly distributed throughout 
the world; there are a handful of countries with very high levels 
of terrorism compared to many countries which experience 
only very small amounts, if not zero terrorism. Hence, the GTI 
uses a base 10 logarithmic banding system between 0 and 10 at 
0.5 intervals. 
As shown in Table 16, mapping the scores in this way yields the 
total number of 21 bands. This maps all values to a band of size 
0.5 within the scale of 0-10. In order to band these scores the 
following method is used: 
1. Define the Minimum GTI score across all countries as 
having a banded score of 0 
2. Define the Maximum GTI score across all countries as 
having a banded score 10 
3. Subtract the Minimum from the Maximum GTI scores 
and calculate r by: 
a. root = 2*(Highest GTI banded score - Lowest 
GTI banded score) = 20*(10-0) =20 
b. Range = 2*(Highest recorded GTI raw score – 
Lowest recorded GTI raw score) 
c. r = root ȼ Range 
The mapped band cut-off value for bin n is 
calculated by rn. 
Following this method produces mapping of GTI scores to the 
set bands as defined in Table 16. 
In following this method of scoring, weighting and banding, the 
GTI can be seen as a relative indicator of how terrorism impacts 
a country compared to all other countries in the GTD. This 
importantly recognises that there are diminishing returns to 
terrorism in terms of its psychological, economic, political and 
cultural impact. Simply, a terrorist incident killing one person is 
likely to have a greater psychological impact in a country with 
zero terrorist incidents than in a country like Iraq where 
terrorism is a regular, if not daily occurrence. 
YEAR WEIGHT % OF SCORE 
Current year 16 52% 
Previous year 8 26% 
Two years ago 4 13% 
Three years ago 2 6% 
Four years ago 1 3% 
TABLE 15 TIME WEIGHTING OF HISTORICAL SCORES 
YEAR WEIGHT % OF SCORE 
Current year 16 52% 
Previous year 8 26% 
Two years ago 4 13% 
Three years ago 2 6% 
Four years ago 1 3% 
TABLE 16 BANDS USED IN THE GTI 
BAND NUMBER BANDS BAND CUT OFF 
VALUES 
1 0 0.00 
2 0.5 1.64 
3 1 2.69 
4 1.5 4.42 
5 2 7.25 
6 2.5 11.89 
7 3 19.52 
8 3.5 32.03 
9 4 52.55 
10 4.5 86.23 
11 5 141.48 
12 5.5 232.15 
13 6 380.93 
14 6.5 625.06 
15 7 1025.63 
16 7.5 1682.91 
17 8 2761.41 
18 8.5 4531.07 
19 9 7434.84 
20 9.5 12199.51 
21 10 20017.65 
86 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
APPENDIX D: VERIFYING THE INCREASE 
IN TERRORISM FROM 2011 TO 2012 
Until 2011 data collection for this exercise was largely a manual 
process with START employing many people to trawl through 
media articles and code each terrorist event by hand into the 
database. Since 2012 however, START began using automated 
machine coding to add new events to the database. This new 
technology not only increased the efficiency of the data entry 
process but also allowed more sources to be searched 
increasing coverage of terrorism at the global scale. While 
this new technology means that the GTD is now a more 
comprehensive data source, the change in the data collection 
methodology does create difficulties in analysing 
longitudinal trends. 
There has been a large increase in the number of incidents since 
1998. There has been a patricularly significant increase in the 
number of recorded terrorist events since 2011. However, the 
change of methodology offers two possible reasons for such an 
increase. 
1. The increase is a reflection of real-world events or 
2. The increase is a product of more efficient database coding. 
In regards to this, START report that their analysis suggests a 
combination of these two factors are the explanation for the 
dramatic increase in recorded terrorist events. The problem is 
how to estimate the percentage that can be attributed to factors 
(1) and (2). In turn an estimate can be assigned to the “real 
world” proportional increase in terrorism. 
It is not possible to say exactly how much terrorism has 
increased given the changed methodology, however it is 
possible to give statistical estimates to this increase by only 
using data from 2012 that would have been collected in 2011 
using the old methodology. What the analysis finds is that the 
dramatic increase from 2012 to 2013 is valid and that there is 
strong evidence indicating a large increase in terrorism from 
2011 to 2013. 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
To estimate what the increase could have been based on the 
previous methodology, IEP used geospatial analysis to filter out 
events in regions of the world that previously had never been 
covered prior to the change in methodology. This represents a 
lower bound estimate because events in previously uncovered 
regions may actually be real increases, however, given the 
change of methodology it is not possible to say for certain. 
The GTD geo-codes events with a latitude and longitude 
wherever possible. For data prior to 2011, around 75 per cent of 
the events within GTD are geocoded. Where the GTD has not 
geo-coded events, IEP has assigned a latitude and longitude to 
an event by the following process: 
1. Matched the city name where the event occurred 
with two separate large world city databases to 
estimate a location for each event (19 per cent of 
events coded in this step). 
2. Where (1) is not possible, IEP locates the event to 
the centre of the country that it occurred 
(remaining six per cent of events coded in this step). 
Figure 29 highlights the results of this geocoding process for 
events between 1998 and 2011. During this period events were 
coded manually and so offer the baseline coverage to compare 
data from 2012 onwards. The assumption here is that if an 
incident occurs in 2012 that is near any other incident that was 
coded prior to 2012, then it would have been coded even if 
START had not introduced the more efficient data collection 
method. If an incident occurs in 2012 that is in a completely new 
location that has never before seen terrorist activity, there is no 
precedent to assume that it would have been included using the 
old data collection methodology. This technique has been 
developed by IEP and is referred to as the geospatial filtering 
approach (GFA). 
87
SELECTING A FILTERING RADIUS 
To implement the GFA all incidents recorded in 2012 have been 
compared to the incident closest to it from the set of all 
incidents occurring between 1998 and 2011. This process follows 
the steps: 
Select Incident A from 2012 GTD 
Select the closest incident to Incident A from all 
incidents recorded in the GTD between 1998 and 
2011, call this Incident B 
If A is within x kms of B then include Incident A in 
the calculation of the percentage increase in 
terrorism between 2011 and 2012 
If A is greater than x kms away from B, exclude A 
from further analysis 
Repeat for all incidents recorded in 2012. 
TABLE 17 CONVERGENCE OF THE GFA WITH 
PREVIOUS KNOWN YEAR ON YEAR PERCENTAGE 
YEAR GFA FILTER RADIUS TO CONVERGE TO WITHIN 5% OF 
TRUE PERCENTAGE INCREASE (KMS) 
2001 90 
2002 44 
2003 60 
2004 22 
2005 41 
2006 28 
2007 21 
2008 52 
2009 19 
2010 21 
2011 26 
There are shortfalls with this. Namely, it ignores the possibility 
of terrorism arising in new parts of the globe. While 
methodologically this is an issue, in regards to the nature of 
terrorism and the data collection from media, this is not believed 
to be a significant factor due to the following reasons: 
1. Since 2002, most terrorism has occurred in five 
countries, all of which have had good coverage in 
the GTD throughout the period. 
2. What would be generally termed “Black Swan” 
events occur in countries where terrorism is not a 
constant threat. The Madrid and London train 
bombings and the 2011 Norway attacks are 
examples of these. However, countries such as 
these have good media coverage and so it is very 
unlikely that these would be excluded using the 
geospatial filtering approach. 
Before applying the GFA it is therefore necessary to define what 
distance radius is to be used as the filtering mechanism. In 
essence this step makes an assumption of the coverage of 
media sources used in the GTD prior to 2012. To do this trials 
were run over all known year on year increases since 2000 using 
distances between 0 and 100 kms. Table 17 shows the filtering 
distance that provided an estimate that was within 5 per cent of 
the known year on year increase. The most restrictive filtering 
radii occurred in 2009 when 95 per cent of the increase in 
terrorism occurred within 19 kms of attacks that occurred in 
2008. 
Figure 29 plots the results from applying the GFA to 2011 to 
2012 data and the baseline case of 2008 - 2009. If we assume 
that the GFA converges to within 5 per cent of the true increase 
at the baseline radii 19km, then the estimated like for like 
increase in terrorism between 2011-2012 is around 20% + 
5% = 25%. 
While the GFA only provides an estimate, it does suggest that a 
large part of the calculated increase in terrorism between 2011 
and 2012 is due to real world events. These results concur with 
START’s analysis.81 However, Table 18 shows that even if a 
conservative approach is taken by assuming there was no 
increase between 2011 and 2012, terrorism would still have 
increased fivefold since 2000. Using a 45 per cent increase 
between 2011 and 2012, this statistic rises to being seven fold. 
88 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
FIGURE 29 CONVERGENCE OF THE GFA FOR 2011-2012. 
The Geospatial Filtering Approach estimates a 25% increase in terrorist incidents between 2011-2012. 
50% 
40% 
30% 
20% 
10% 
0% 
-10% 
-20% 
-30% 
Source: GTD 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
At a radius of 19km filtering the GFA converges to the correct increase of 20% between 2011-2012 
RADIUS USED FOR ESTIMATE (KMS) 
ESTIMATE INCREASE IN TERRORISM 2011-2012 
Estimated Baseline Increase of 25% in 2011-2012 
At a radius of 19km filtering the GFA converges to the correct increase of 0% between 2008-2009 
-40% 
GFA applied to 2011-2012 Increase 
GFA applied to 2008-2009 Increase 
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 
YEAR ASSUME NO INCREASE IN 
2011 TO 2012 (6) 
ASSUME 25% INCREASE IN 
2011 TO 2012 (6) 
ASSUME 45% INCREASE IN 
2011 TO 2012 (6) 
2012 Use 0.00% - conservative Use 25.00% - GFA estimate Use 45.00% -upper bound 
Total % estimate of increase since 2011 
44% 59% 109% 
Formula = ʌ (1+6)-100% for all year on year changes since 2000 
Terrorism in 2013 as a percentage of 2000 
Formula = ʌ (1+6) % for all year on year changes since 2000 
475% 
(approximately five fold) 
594% 
(approximately six fold) 
689% 
(approximately seven fold) 
TABLE 18 ESTIMATES OF THE INCREASE OF TERRORISM SINCE 2000 
Estimates of the increase in terrorism range from five to seven fold since 2000. 
89
1. Global Terrorism Database, ‘Codebook: Inclusion Criteria and Variables’, 
National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism 
(START), http://www.start.umd.edu/gtd/downloads/Codebook.pdf, 2012, 
(accessed 3 October 2014). 
2. See methodological note. 
3. Masters, J.  Laub, Z., ‘Al-Qaeda in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP)’, Council on 
Foreign Relations, 22 August 2013, http://www.cfr.org/yemen/al-qaeda-arabian- 
peninsula-aqap/p9369, (accessed 3 October 2014). 
4. Terrorism Research and Analysis Consortium (TRAC), Thailand threat 
assessment, http://www.trackingterrorism.org/region/threatened/1062, 
(accessed 7 October, 2014). 
5. Global Terrorism Database, ‘Terrorist Group Profiles’, http://www.start.umd. 
edu/tops/, (accessed 7 October 2014). 
6. Atran. S., ‘The Moral Logic and Growth of Suicide Terrorism’, The Washington 
Quarterly, vol. 29, no.2, 2006, p. 132. 
7. Ibid. 
8. The International Centre for the study of Radicalisation and Political Violence, 
Countering Radicalisation and Political Violence, London, 2014, http://icsr. 
info/2013/12/icsr-insight-11000-foreign-fighters-syria-steep-rise-among-western- 
europeans/, (accessed 3 October 2014). 
9. U.S. Department of State, Country Reports on Terrorism, 2013, http://www. 
state.gov/j/ct/rls/crt/2013/224829.htm, (accessed 3 October 2014). 
10. Ibid. 
11. Teich, S., Trends and Developments in Lone Wolf Terrorism in the Western 
World, International Institute for Counter Terrorism, 2013, http://i-hls.com/ 
wp-content/uploads/2013/11/Lone-Wolf-Sarah-Teich-2013.pdf (accessed 24 
October 2014). 
12. Phillips, L., ‘Nanotechnology: Armed Resistance’, Nature, Vol 488 No. 7413, 
2012, http://www.nature.com/news/nanotechnology-armed-resistance-1.11287, 
(accessed 24 October 2014). 
13. ‘Por sobres-bomba y homicidio de académico: Van por ala terrorista de 
anarquistas’, Diario 24 Horas, 26 February 2013. 
14. U.S. Department of State, Country Reports on Terrorism, 2013, http://www. 
state.gov/j/ct/rls/crt/2013/224829.htm, (accessed 3 October 2014). 
15. Ibid. 
16. US Department of State Overseas Advisory Council, Message for U.S. Citizens: 
Ankara (Turkey): Embassy will open and Additional Security Information, 
Istanbul, 2013, https://www.osac.gov/pages/ContentReportDetails. 
aspx?cid=13550, (accessed 3 October 2014). 
17. Gupta, D., ‘Exploring roots of terrorism’, in Bjorgo, T.,(ed.), Root Causes of 
Terrorism: Myths, reality and ways forward, New York, Routledge,2005. 
18. Maleckova, J., ‘Impoverished terrorists: stereotype or reality?’, in Bjorgo, 
T.,(ed.), Root Causes of Terrorism: Myths, reality and ways forward, New York, 
Routledge,2005. 
19. Ibid 
20. Centre for Systemic Peace (CSP), ‘Major episodes of political violence, 
1946-2013’, 2013, www.systemicpeace.org/warlist/warlist.htm, (accessed 3 
October 2014). This dataset assesses the severity of each instance of political 
violence on an eleven point scale with 0 being no political violence and 10 
being “annihilation and extermination”. On this scale terrorist campaigns such 
as Northern Ireland and the Cuban Revolution are assessed as being severity 
score 2. Analysis provided uses all incidents ranked above a level 2 in this 
dataset. 
21. Political Instability Task Force, ‘State Failure Dataset 1955-2013’, 2013, http:// 
www.systemicpeace.org/inscr/PITFProbSetCodebook2013.pdf, (accessed 3 
October 2014). 
22. Terrorist attacks from 1996 was selected due to data availability of political 
terror and group cohesion measures. A major terrorist attack is defined by one 
that claims the lives of over five people. 
23. International Institute of Social Studies, Intergroup Cohesion, http://www. 
indsocdev.org/intergroup-cohesion.html, (Accessed 6th October 2014). 
24. Gibney, M.  M. Dalton, ‘The Political Terror Scale’ In David L. C. (ed.), Human 
Rights and Developing Countries, Greenwich: JAI,1996. 
25. International Institute of Social Studies. Intergroup Cohesion, http://www. 
indsocdev.org/intergroup-cohesion.html, (Accessed 6th October 2014). 
26. UNODC, Global Study on Homicide, http://www.unodc.org/documents/gsh/ 
pdfs/2014_GLOBAL_HOMICIDE_BOOK_web.pdf, 2013, (accessed 7 October 
2014). 
27. Frey, B. et al., ‘Calculating tragedy: Assessing the costs of Terrorism’, Journal of 
Economic Surveys, vol.21, no.1, 2007. 
28. International Monetary Fund, World Economic Outlook: The Global Economy 
After September 11, Washington DC, 2001. 
29. Rose, A. Z.  B. S. Blomberg,’Total Economic Consequences of Terrorist 
Attacks: Insights from 9/11’, Create Homeland and Security Center, Paper 190, 
2010, http://research.create.usc.edu/published_papers/190, (accessed 7 
October 2014 ). 
30. Kaufman, A, F, and M. I., Meltzer, and G., P., Schmid, ‘The economics impact of a 
bioterrorist attack: Are prevention and Postattack Intervention programs 
justifiable?’, Emerging Infection Diseases, Vol 3 Number 2, 83-94. 
31. Stiglitz, J. E.  L. J. Bilmes, The three trillion dollar war: The true cost of the 
Iraq conflict, WW Norton  Company, 2008. 
32. Enders, W. et al., ‘The Impact of Transnational Terrorism on U.S. Foreign Direct 
Investment’, Create Homeland and Security Center, Paper 55, 2006, http:// 
research.create.usc.edu/published_papers/55, (accessed 7 October 2014 ). 
33. World Bank Data 
34. Enders, W.  T., Sandler, ‘Terrorism and Foreign Direct Investment in Spain and 
Greece’, Kyklos, vol. 49, no.3, 1996, pp.331-52. 
35. Adebayo, A.A., ‘Implications of Boko Haram Terrorism on National 
Development in Nigeria’, Mediterranean Journal of Social Sciences, vol.5, no.16, 
2014. 
36. Calculations from World Bank data. 
37. Kunreuther, H and M, Erwann, ‘Policy Watch: Challenges for terrorism risk 
insurance in the United States’, http://www.nber.org/papers/w10870.pdf, 
(accessed 3 October 2014). 
38. International Crisis Group, ‘Curbing Violence in Nigeria (II): The Boko Haram 
Insurgency’, Africa Report 216, 3 April 2014. 
39. Doom, R.  K. Vlassenroot, ‘Kony’s Message: A New Koine? The Lord’s 
Resistance Army In Northern Uganda’, African Affairs, vol. 98, no.390, 1999, 
pp.5-36. 
40. The Economist, ‘The many names of ISIS’, The Economist, 28 September 2014, 
http://www.economist.com/blogs/economist-explains/2014/09/economist-explains- 
19, (accessed 7 October 2014). 
41. Kirkpatrick, D., ‘ISIS Harsh Brand of Islam Is Rooted in Austere Saudi Creed’, 
The New York Times, 24 September 2014. 
42. Marcel, V., ‘ISIS and the Dangers of Black Market Oil’, Chatham House, 21 July 
2014, http://www.chathamhouse.org/expert/comment/15203, (accessed 7 
October, 2014). 
43. Johnson, K., ‘The Islamic State Is the Newest Petrostate’, The Foreign Policy, 28 
July 2014, http://www.foreignpolicy.com/articles/2014/07/28/baghdadis_ 
hillbillies_isis_iraq_syria_oil_terrorism_islamic_state , (accessed 7 October 
2014 ). 
44. Shatz, H.J., ‘How ISIS funds its Reign of Terror’, RAND, 8 September 2014, 
http://www.rand.org/blog/2014/09/how-isis-funds-its-reign-of-terror. 
html,(accessed 7 October 2014). 
45. Opperman, J., ‘Leadership Structure of Islamic State’, Terrorism Research and 
Analysis Consortium (TRAC), http://www.trackingterrorism.org/chatter/ 
leadership-structure-islamic-state , 2014, (accessed 7 October 2014). 
46. ‘Islamic State fighter estimate triples-CIA’, BBC, 12 September 2014,http:// 
www.bbc.com/news/world-middle-east-29169914 ,(accessed 7 October 2014). 
ENDNOTES 
90 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
47. U.S. Department of State, Country Reports on Terrorism 2011, 31 July 2012. 
http://www.state.gov/j/ct/rls/crt/2011/195553.htm#AQI ,(accessed 7 October 
2014 ). 
48. Chulov, M., ‘Syrian city of Raqqa gripped by fear of US air strikes on Isis’, The 
Guardian, 16 September 2014, http://www.theguardian.com/world/2014/ 
sep/15/syria-raqqa-fear-us-air-strikes-isis , (accessed 7 October 2014). 
49. Barrett, R., ‘Foreign Fighters in Syria’, The Soufan Group, http://soufangroup. 
com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/TSG-Foreign-Fighters-in-Syria.pdf pp.6, 
24, (accessed 7 October 2014). 
50. Opperman, J. ‘Leadership Structure of Islamic State’, Terrorism Research and 
Analysis Consortium (TRAC), http://www.trackingterrorism.org/chatter/ 
leadership-structure-islamic-state,2014 ,(accessed 7 October 2014). 
51. Walker, A., ‘What is Boko Haram?’, United States Institute of Peace Special 
Report, no. 308, 2012. 
52. Bederka, A., ‘Wahhabism and Boko Haram’, Student Center for African 
Research and Resolutions, 2014, http://www.scarrdc.org/ 
uploads/2/6/5/4/26549924/bederkawahhabism.pdf , (accessed 7 October 
2014). 
53. The American Foreign Policy Council, ‘Boko Haram’, 21 August 2013, http:// 
almanac.afpc.org/sites/almanac.afpc.org/files/Boko%20Haram%20August%20 
2014_0.pdf, (accessed 7 October 2014). 
54. Bederka, A., ‘Wahhabism and Boko Haram’, Student Center for African 
Research and Resolutions, 2014, http://www.scarrdc.org/ 
uploads/2/6/5/4/26549924/bederkawahhabism.pdf , (accessed 7 October 
2014). 
55. Anyadike, O., ‘Boko Haram and National Security Challenges in Nigeria; Causes 
and Solutions’, Journal of Economics and Sustainable Development, Vol 4, No. 
5, 2013, http://iiste.org/Journals/index.php/JEDS/article/viewFile/4849/4927, 
(accessed 7 October 2014). 
56. National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism 
(START), Background Report: Boko Haram Recent Attacks, http://www.start. 
umd.edu/pubs/STARTBackgroundReport_BokoHaramRecentAttacks_ 
May2014_0.pdf, 2014. 
57. Anyadike, O., ‘Analysis: Carrot or Stick?-Nigerians divided over Boko Haram’, 
IRIN,16 July 2012, http://www.irinnews.org/report/95874/analysis-carrot-or-stick- 
nigerians-divided-over-boko-haram , (accessed 7 October 2014). 
58. http://www.fatf-gafi.org/media/fatf/documents/reports/tf-in-west-africa.pdf 
p.17 
59. Financial Action Task Force (FATF), Terrorist Financing in West Africa, http:// 
www.fatf-gafi.org/media/fatf/documents/reports/tf-in-west-africa.pdf, 
p.17,2013. 
60. United States Department of State, ‘Country Reports on Terrorism 2013’, 
United States Department of State, April 2014, http://www.state.gov/ 
documents/organization/225886.pdf, (accessed 7 November 2014). 
61. Freeman, C., ‘Al-Qaeda map: Isis, Boko Haram and other affiliates’ strongholds 
across Africa and Asia’, The Telegraph, 12 June 2014, http://www.telegraph.co. 
uk/news/worldnews/al-qaeda/10893889/Al-Qaeda-map-Isis-Boko-Haram-and-other- 
affiliates-strongholds-across-Africa-and-Asia.html, (accessed 7 October 
2014). 
62. Adebayo, A.A., ‘Implications of Boko Haram Terrorism on National 
Development in Nigeria’, Mediterranean Journal of Social Sciences, 
vol.5,no.16,2014. 
63. Agbiboa, D.E. and B. Maiangwa, ‘Nigeria united in grief; divided in response: 
Religious terrorism, Boko Haram, and the dynamics of state response’, African 
Journal on Conflict Resolution, vol.14, no.1, 2014. 
64. MI5 Security Service, Al Qaida’s Ideology, https://www.mi5.gov.uk/home/ 
the-threats/terrorism/international-terrorism/the-nature-of-the-threat/ 
al-qaidas-ideology.html , (accessed 3 October 2014). 
65. Blanchard, C.M., ‘CRS Report for Congress Al Qaeda: Statements and Evolving 
Ideology’, 9 July 2007, Congressional Research Service, http://fas.org/sgp/crs/ 
terror/RL32759.pdf ,(accessed 3 October 2014). 
66. Peters, G., ‘How Opium Profits the Taliban’, United States Institute of Peace: 
Peaceworks, no. 62, 2009, pp.11-15. 
67. Callimachi, R., ‘Paying Ransoms, Europe Bankrolls Qaeda Terror’, The New York 
Times, 29 July 2014, http://www.nytimes.com/2014/07/30/world/africa/ 
ransoming-citizens-europe-becomes-al-qaedas-patron.html,(accessed 8th 
October, 2014). 
GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 
68. Hoffman, B., ‘Al Qaeda’s Uncertain Future’, Studies in Conflict  Terrorism, vol. 
36, no. 8, 2013. pp. 635-653. 
69. Freeman, C., ‘Al-Qaeda map: Isis, Boko Haram and other affiliates’ strongholds 
across Africa and Asia’, The Telegraph, 12 June 2014, http://www.telegraph.co. 
uk/news/worldnews/al-qaeda/10893889/Al-Qaeda-map-Isis-Boko-Haram-and-other- 
affiliates-strongholds-across-Africa-and-Asia.html, (accessed 7 October 
2014).; Terrorism Research and Analysis Consortium (TRAC), al Shabaab, 
TRAC, http://www.trackingterrorism.org/region/threatened/1062, (accessed 9 
November 2014). 
70. Jenkins, B., ‘The Dynamics of Syria’s Civil War’, RAND Corporation, 2014. 
http://www.rand.org/content/dam/rand/pubs/perspectives/PE100/PE115/ 
RAND_PE115.pdf, (accessed 10 October 2014); United States Department of 
State, ‘Country Reports on Terrorism 2013’, United States Department of State, 
April 2014, http://www.state.gov/documents/organization/225886.pdf, 
(accessed 7 November 2014); Masters, J.  Laub, Z., ‘Al-Qaeda in the Arabian 
Peninsula (AQAP)’, Council on Foreign Relations, 22 August 2013, http://www. 
cfr.org/yemen/al-qaeda-arabian-peninsula-aqap/p9369, (accessed 3 October 
2014).; The National Counterterrorism Center, ‘Al-Qa‘ida in the Lands of the 
Islamic Maghreb (AQIM)’, The National Counterterrorism Center, http://www. 
nctc.gov/site/groups/aqim.html, (accessed 10 November 2014).; Masters, J., 
‘Al-Shabab’, Council on Foreign Relations, 5 September 2014, http://www.cfr. 
org/somalia/al-shabab/p18650, (accessed 10 November 2014). 
71. Hayat, A., ‘Reconstruction in Post-Taliban Afghanistan: Women and Education’, 
Resources for Feminist Research, vol. 30, no.3/4, 2003. 
72. Brahimi, A., ‘The Taliban’s Evolving Ideology’, London School of Economics 
Global Governance, 2010. 
73. UNODC, Afghanistan Opium Survey 2013, http://www.unodc.org/documents/ 
crop-monitoring/Afghanistan/Afghan_report_Summary_Findings_2013.pdf , 
(accessed 3 October 2014). 
74. Rashid, A., ‘The Taliban: exporting extremism’. Foreign Affairs, vol.22, 
no.35,1999. 
75. Stanekzai, M.M., ‘Thwarting Afghanistan’s insurgency.” A Pragmatic Approach 
toward Peace and Reconciliation’, United States Institute of Peace Special 
Report, no. 212, 2008. 
76. Bruno, G. and L. Beehner, ‘Iran and the Future of Afghanistan’, Council on 
Foreign Relations, 30 March 2009, http://www.cfr.org/iran/iran-future-afghanistan/ 
p13578, (accessed 3 October 2014). 
77. Starkey, J., ‘Major-General Richard Barrons puts Taliban fighter numbers at 
36,000’, The Times, 3 March 2010. 
78. Giustozzi, A., ‘Taliban networks in Afghanistan’, Center on Irregular Warfare 
and Armed Groups, Newport, Rhode Island, 2012, 84. 
79. Bajoria, J., ‘The Taliban in Afghanistan’, Council on Foreign Relations, 6 
October 2011, http://lindblomeagles.org/ourpages/auto/2012/2/11/58143717/ 
terrorism%20background%20readings.pdf, (accessed 3 October 2014). 
80. This follows Global Peace Index convention. 
81. Jensen, M., ‘Discussion Point: The Benefits and Drawbacks of Methodological 
Advancements in Data Collection and Coding: Insights from the Global 
Terrorism Database’, National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and 
Responses to Terrorism (START), 25 November 2013, http://www.start.umd. 
edu/news/discussion-point-benefits-and-drawbacks-methodological-advancements- 
data-collection-and-coding, (accessed 7 October, 2014). 
Icons sourced from The Noun Project (see p. 54,55) include: 
Firecracker by Maximilian Becker from The Noun Project 
Book by Mateo Zlatar from The Noun Project 
People by Wilson Joseph from The Noun Project 
91

More Related Content

PDF
2015 global-terrorism-index-report
PDF
Global terrorism index 2015
PDF
Global terrorism index report 2014
PDF
Global terrorism-index-2017
PDF
Global terrorism-index-2016.2
PDF
Global Terrorism Index 2014
PDF
2014 global peace index report
PDF
Global peace index 2016 full report
2015 global-terrorism-index-report
Global terrorism index 2015
Global terrorism index report 2014
Global terrorism-index-2017
Global terrorism-index-2016.2
Global Terrorism Index 2014
2014 global peace index report
Global peace index 2016 full report

What's hot (13)

PDF
Глобальний індекс миролюбності
PDF
Global peace index report 2015
PDF
Informe de Paz global. Chile el mejor de Sudamerica.
PDF
Gpi 2019-web003
PDF
Terrorism and political violence in South East Asia
PDF
Terrorism in South Asia: Anatomy and the Root Causes
PDF
MINISUB Personal
PDF
2013 Global Peace Index Report
PDF
Global peace-index-2018-2
PDF
Global peace-index-2018-2
PDF
CTTA-April-2015
PPTX
Suicide attacks in africa
PDF
2018 Security Outlook
Глобальний індекс миролюбності
Global peace index report 2015
Informe de Paz global. Chile el mejor de Sudamerica.
Gpi 2019-web003
Terrorism and political violence in South East Asia
Terrorism in South Asia: Anatomy and the Root Causes
MINISUB Personal
2013 Global Peace Index Report
Global peace-index-2018-2
Global peace-index-2018-2
CTTA-April-2015
Suicide attacks in africa
2018 Security Outlook
Ad

Similar to Global terrorism index report 2014 (20)

PDF
Global peace index report 2015
PDF
2013 global peace_index_report
PPTX
Gpi8 brighton presentation
PDF
GLOBAL PEACE INDEX 2023
PPTX
turkish attack in sirya ander some sircumstanses .pptx
PDF
Global Peace Index 2019
PPTX
Global-Terrorism-Index-2023-OFFICIAL.pptx
PDF
2014 Global Peace Index Report
PDF
2014 global peace index report
PDF
2014 Global Peace Index Report
PDF
2014 global peace index report
PPTX
HLEG thematic workshop on measuring economic, social and environmental resili...
PDF
Global disturbed peace reasons and remedies
PDF
الدول الاكثر امان في العالم
PPTX
IEP_GPI_2020_Presentation.pptx
PPTX
Global-Peace-Index-2021.pptx
PDF
«Глобальный индекс миролюбия» 2016
PPTX
International Terrorism As a World Political Issue
PDF
Terrorism and Globalization- Grifka
PDF
Challenges of global terrorism strategies, dimensions and response in search...
Global peace index report 2015
2013 global peace_index_report
Gpi8 brighton presentation
GLOBAL PEACE INDEX 2023
turkish attack in sirya ander some sircumstanses .pptx
Global Peace Index 2019
Global-Terrorism-Index-2023-OFFICIAL.pptx
2014 Global Peace Index Report
2014 global peace index report
2014 Global Peace Index Report
2014 global peace index report
HLEG thematic workshop on measuring economic, social and environmental resili...
Global disturbed peace reasons and remedies
الدول الاكثر امان في العالم
IEP_GPI_2020_Presentation.pptx
Global-Peace-Index-2021.pptx
«Глобальный индекс миролюбия» 2016
International Terrorism As a World Political Issue
Terrorism and Globalization- Grifka
Challenges of global terrorism strategies, dimensions and response in search...
Ad

More from Investors Europe (Mauritius) Limited (20)

PDF
United nations considers mauritius best country in africa for eservices
PDF
20161211 Marie Pierre Bertrand Boulle appointed Director of Diamond Fields I...
PDF
2015 World Bank Doing business efficiency Mauritius
PDF
Invest Europe the voice of private capital annual report 2015-16
PDF
19940702 PIERRE BERTRAN BOULLE IN EXPRESSO
PDF
19950300 Pierre BertraNd Boulle - DIARIO ECONOMICO
PDF
19941200 DIARIO ECONOMICO PORTUGAL
PDF
19950300 EXPANSAO MAGASINE PORTUGAL
PDF
19941200 DIARIO ECONOMICO PORTUGAL
PDF
19940900 DIARIO ECONOMICO PORTUGAL FINA
PDF
20000112 Pierre Boulle in Correio da Manha Portugal
PDF
Euro Area economy : A plane flying on only one engine: bank financing.
PDF
International gas union : 2014 world LNG report
PDF
'Paying Taxes 2015' :189 Jurisdictions
PDF
Mines and money mauritius
PDF
Mozambique the emergence of a giant in natural gas
PDF
2014 : Africa the Developing Tiger - Ernst and Young Africa attractiveness re...
PDF
FATF guidance on politically exposed persons 'PEPS'
PDF
UK : HMRC 2013 Revenue and Accounts
PDF
Logo storyboardgraph.pdf 2
United nations considers mauritius best country in africa for eservices
20161211 Marie Pierre Bertrand Boulle appointed Director of Diamond Fields I...
2015 World Bank Doing business efficiency Mauritius
Invest Europe the voice of private capital annual report 2015-16
19940702 PIERRE BERTRAN BOULLE IN EXPRESSO
19950300 Pierre BertraNd Boulle - DIARIO ECONOMICO
19941200 DIARIO ECONOMICO PORTUGAL
19950300 EXPANSAO MAGASINE PORTUGAL
19941200 DIARIO ECONOMICO PORTUGAL
19940900 DIARIO ECONOMICO PORTUGAL FINA
20000112 Pierre Boulle in Correio da Manha Portugal
Euro Area economy : A plane flying on only one engine: bank financing.
International gas union : 2014 world LNG report
'Paying Taxes 2015' :189 Jurisdictions
Mines and money mauritius
Mozambique the emergence of a giant in natural gas
2014 : Africa the Developing Tiger - Ernst and Young Africa attractiveness re...
FATF guidance on politically exposed persons 'PEPS'
UK : HMRC 2013 Revenue and Accounts
Logo storyboardgraph.pdf 2

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Elias Salame Uses Fake Trades to Make Real Money Disappear.pptx
PDF
Opher Bryer-The Rise and Fall of Opher Bryer How an AI Startup Turned from Pr...
PDF
Mindanao Debate Lecture Presentation Outline 1.General Facts 2.Mindanao Histo...
PDF
How India’s First AI-Powered Anganwadi in Nagpur is Changing Education – As F...
PDF
Naidu Pushes for Rs 36 Crore Subsidy to Support Farmers in Need
PDF
Naya Bharat Vision 2047_ Key Takeaways from This Year’s Independence Day Them...
PDF
4th-president-of-the-Philippines-_20250 812_103637_0000.pdf
PDF
424926802-1987-Constitution-as-Basis-of-Environmental-Laws.pdf
PDF
History ppt on World War 2 and its consequences
PDF
Samaya Jyothi Live News Telugu | Breaking & Trusted Updates
PDF
The Blogs_ Hamas’s Deflection Playbook _ Andy Blumenthal _ The Times of Israe...
PDF
9th-President-of-the-Philippines_lecture .pdf
PPTX
POLY[1]....pptxtheiowqt4h3ioth4iofhe2toh42i0fhe2io3
DOC
BU毕业证学历认证,阿什兰大学毕业证文凭证书
PDF
Jim Stone Freelance Voterig August 13, 2025.pdf
DOCX
Memecoin memecoinist news site for trends and insights
PPTX
Pakistan movement part 2: story about Pakistan Movement
PPTX
Rhythms of Freedom_ India Day Shines at Battery Dance Festival 2025.
PDF
Pancasila & Citizen Resume PPT - Guest lecture
PDF
Reviving Regional Truths: AI-Powered Journalism in Bangladesh
Elias Salame Uses Fake Trades to Make Real Money Disappear.pptx
Opher Bryer-The Rise and Fall of Opher Bryer How an AI Startup Turned from Pr...
Mindanao Debate Lecture Presentation Outline 1.General Facts 2.Mindanao Histo...
How India’s First AI-Powered Anganwadi in Nagpur is Changing Education – As F...
Naidu Pushes for Rs 36 Crore Subsidy to Support Farmers in Need
Naya Bharat Vision 2047_ Key Takeaways from This Year’s Independence Day Them...
4th-president-of-the-Philippines-_20250 812_103637_0000.pdf
424926802-1987-Constitution-as-Basis-of-Environmental-Laws.pdf
History ppt on World War 2 and its consequences
Samaya Jyothi Live News Telugu | Breaking & Trusted Updates
The Blogs_ Hamas’s Deflection Playbook _ Andy Blumenthal _ The Times of Israe...
9th-President-of-the-Philippines_lecture .pdf
POLY[1]....pptxtheiowqt4h3ioth4iofhe2toh42i0fhe2io3
BU毕业证学历认证,阿什兰大学毕业证文凭证书
Jim Stone Freelance Voterig August 13, 2025.pdf
Memecoin memecoinist news site for trends and insights
Pakistan movement part 2: story about Pakistan Movement
Rhythms of Freedom_ India Day Shines at Battery Dance Festival 2025.
Pancasila & Citizen Resume PPT - Guest lecture
Reviving Regional Truths: AI-Powered Journalism in Bangladesh

Global terrorism index report 2014

  • 1. 2014 MEASURING AND UNDERSTANDING THE IMPACT OF TERRORISM
  • 2. QUANTIFYING PEACE AND ITS BENEFITS The Institute for Economics and Peace (IEP) is an independent, non-partisan, non-profit think tank dedicated to shifting the world’s focus to peace as a positive, achievable, and tangible measure of human well-being and progress. IEP achieves its goals by developing new conceptual frameworks to define peacefulness; providing metrics for measuring peace; and uncovering the relationships between business, peace and prosperity as well as promoting a better understanding of the cultural, economic and political factors that create peace. IEP has offices in Sydney, New York and Oxford. It works with a wide range of partners internationally and collaborates with intergovernmental organizations on measuring and communicating the economic value of peace. For more information visit www.economicsandpeace.org SPECIAL THANKS to the National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START) headquartered at the University of Maryland for their cooperation on this study and for providing the Institute for Economics and Peace with their Global Terrorism Database (GTD) datasets on terrorism.
  • 3. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 2 ABOUT THE GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 8 RESULTS 12 Global Terrorism Index Map 8 Terrorist Incidents Map 10 Global Levels of Terrorism 12 Ten Countries Most Impacted by Terrorism 15 TRENDS 26 Largest Increases and Decreases in Terrorism, 2012 to 2013 26 Patterns and Characteristics of Terrorist Activity since 2000 29 Trends and Patterns of Suicide Attacks 32 Terrorism in the OECD 35 ASSESSING TERRORISM RISK 38 Terrorism in Countries with Ongoing Conflict 40 Terrorism in Countries without Ongoing Conflict 40 'Black Swan' Attacks 42 Economic Costs of Terrorism 45 TERRORIST GROUP CASE STUDIES 48 Comparing Terrorist Organisations 50 Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) 52 Boko Haram 53 Al-Qa’ida 54 Taliban 55 CORRELATES OF TERRORISM 59 Global Terrorism Index vs. Global Peace Index 60 Multivariate Analysis 63 EXPERT CONTRIBUTIONS 64 Larry Attree, Saferworld & David Keen, London School of Economics Envisaging more Constructive Alternatives to the Counter-Terror Paradigm 64 Henry Dodd & Steven Smith, Action on Armed Violence Anatomy of a Suicide Bombing 69 Ekaterina Stepanova, Institute of World Economy & International Relations Transnational Islamist Terrorism 74 Samantha Pitts-Kiefer, Nuclear Threat Initiative Nuclear Nightmares 79 APPENDICES 82 Appendix A: GTI Ranks and Scores, 2014 82 Appendix B: 50 Worst Terrorist Attacks, 2013 84 Appendix C: Global Terrorism Index Methodology 85 Appendix D: Verifying the Increase in Terrorism from 2011 to 2012 87 Endnotes 90 1
  • 4. OTHER PUBLICATIONS FROM THE INSTITUTE FOR ECONOMICS AND PEACE 2014 Global Peace Index Report Institute for Economics and Peace – February 2014 The 2014 GPI Report analyses the state of peace around the world and identifies countries most at risk of becoming less peaceful. The Economic Cost of Violence Containment Institute for Economics and Peace – February 2014 A new methodology that calculates the cost of preventing and containing violence in over 150 countries. Mexico Peace Index Institute for Economics and Peace – November 2013 The Mexico Peace Index measures the state of peace in all 32 Mexican states analysing trends and drivers of peace over the last ten years. Pillars of Peace Institute for Economics and Peace – September 2013 Pillars of Peace is a new conceptual framework for understanding and describing the factors that create a peaceful society. Global Peace Index 2013 Institute for Economics and Peace – June 2013 The 2013 GPI Report analyses the state of peace around the world, identifying trends in violence and conflict, as well as the key drivers of peace. GLOBAL PEACE INDEX 2013 /01/ RESULTS, FINDINGS & METHODOLOGY 1 GLOBAL PEACE INDEX 2013 MEASURING THE STATE OF GLOBAL PEACE United Kingdom Peace Index 2013 Institute for Economic and Peace – April 2013 The UK Peace Index report analyses the fabric of peace in the UK over the last decade and has found that since 2003 the UK has become more peaceful. Global Terrorism Index 2012 Institute for Economic and Peace – December 2012 The Global Terrorism Index is the first index to systematically rank and compare 158 countries according to the impact of terrorism. Violence Containment Spending in the United States Institute for Economics and Peace – September 2012 Violence Containment Spending provides a new methodology to categorise and account for the public and private expenditure on containing violence. Global Peace Index 2012 Institute for Economics and Peace – June 2012 The Global Peace Index is the world’s preeminent measure of peacefulness. This is the 6th edition of the Global Peace Index. United States Peace Index 2012 Institute for Economics and Peace – April 2012 The 2012 United States Peace Index has found that the U.S. is more peaceful now than at any other time over the last twenty years. Economic Consequences of War on the U.S. Economy Institute for Economics and Peace – February 2012 The Economic Consequences of War on the U.S. Economy analyses the macroeconomic effects of U.S. government spending on wars since World War II. Measuring Peace in the Media 2011 Institute for Economics and Peace and Media Tenor – January 2012 For the second year, IEP and Media Tenor have jointly analysed global television networks’ coverage of peace and violence issues; it covers over 160,000 news items from 31 news and current affairs programs that air on four continents. Available for download at www.economicsandpeace.org
  • 5. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY This is the second edition of the Global Terrorism Index (GTI) report which provides a comprehensive summary of the key global trends and patterns in terrorism over the last 14 years beginning in 2000 and ending in 2013. Produced by the Institute for Economics and Peace (IEP), the GTI is based on data from the Global Terrorism Database (GTD) which is collected and collated by the National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START). The GTD is considered to be the most comprehensive dataset on terrorist activity globally and has codified over 125,000 terrorist incidents. The report summarises trends in terrorism over time and analyses its changing patterns in terms of geographic activity, methods of attack, organisations involved and the national economic and political context. The index has also been compared to a range of socio-economic indicators to determine the key factors most closely associated with terrorism. In 2013 terrorist activity increased substantially with the total number of deaths rising from 11,133 in 2012 to 17,958 in 2013, a 61 per cent increase. Over the same period, the number of countries that experienced more than 50 deaths rose from 15 to 24. This highlights that not only is the intensity of terrorism increasing, its breadth is increasing as well. Terrorism is both highly concentrated as well as a globally distributed phenomenon. Over 80 per cent of the lives lost to terrorist activity in 2013 occurred in only five countries - Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria and Syria. However, another 55 countries recorded one or more deaths from terrorist activity. Since 2000 there has been over a five-fold increase in the number of deaths from terrorism, rising from 3,361 in 2000 to 17,958 in 2013. However for four years, starting in 2007, there had been modest decreases in terrorist deaths and also a slight decrease in the number of countries experiencing greater than 50 deaths from terrorism per annum. The latest jump in terrorist activity coincided with the start of the Syrian civil war in 2011. The threat of terrorist activity is a major if not the major national security risk for many countries. The recent rise of ultra-violent groups such as ISIL in Syria and Iraq is underpinned by greater territorial ambitions in the Levant which include the countries of Syria, Lebanon, Israel, Jordan, Palestine, as well as Southern Turkey, thereby increasing the risk of further destabilisation in the Middle East region. The majority of claimed deaths from terrorist attacks, 66 per cent in 2013, are claimed by only four terrorist organisations; ISIL, Boko Haram, the Taliban and al-Qa’ida and its affiliates. Variations of religious ideologies based on extreme interpretations of Wahhabi Islam are the key commonality for all four groups; however their strategic goals are not necessarily the same. To counteract the rise of religious extremism, moderate Sunni theologies need to be cultivated by credible forces within Islam. The current political context underscores the importance of moderate Sunni countries SINCE 2000 THERE HAS BEEN OVER A FIVE-FOLD INCREASE IN THE NUMBER OF PEOPLE KILLED BY TERRORISM. 82% KILLED IN TERRORIST ATTACKS WERE IN JUST FIVE COUNTRIES: IRAQ AFGHANISTAN PAKISTAN NIGERIA SYRIA 2 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 6. and not outside influences leading such a response. One such example was the Forum for Promoting Peace in Muslim Societies led by Shaykh Abdallah Bin Bayyah in March 2014 which brought together 250 Islamic scholars to promote a unified peaceful response to the current violence issuing a Fatwa in response to ISIL. Religious ideology as the motivation for terrorism is only partly a global phenomenon. While it is predominant in Sub-Saharan Africa, MENA and South Asia, in the rest of the world terrorism is more likely to be driven by political or nationalistic and separatist movements. These forms of terrorism have remained fairly constant over the last 14 years and are still substantial. While drivers of terrorist activity are often complex and multidimensional, there are several generalised and significant socio-economic correlates of terrorism. Countries with higher levels of terrorism were found to have three statistically significant factors: Greater social hostilities between different ethnic, religious and linguistic groups, lack of intergroup cohesion and high levels of group grievances. Presence of state sponsored violence such as extrajudicial killings, political terror and gross human rights abuses. Higher levels of other forms of violence including deaths from organised conflict, likelihood of violent demonstrations, levels of violent crime and perceptions of criminality. Importantly, poverty and many other economic factors have little explanatory power on the onset of terrorism. This includes several broader development factors such as mean years of schooling and life expectancy. This underpins the fact that weak political systems, a lack of political legitimacy and the presence of state-sponsored violence are more influential for explaining the rise of terrorist organisations than the broader economic environment. The strong relationship between terrorism and other forms of violence underlines how the persistent targeting of police forces and instability generated by terrorist activity can undermine the rule of law and lead to increases in other forms of violence. There are many peaceful Muslim majority countries that do not suffer from terrorism such as Qatar, the U.A.E. and GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 Kuwait, underscoring how there are other social, political and geopolitical factors at play other than religion in breeding terrorist activity. The findings in this report are also helpful in providing guidance for assessing the risk of future terrorist attacks in countries where there are currently low levels of activity. By measuring and comparing various political, social and violence indicators, countries at risk of a substantial increase in terrorism can be identified. This report has highlighted 13 countries as being at risk. These countries are Angola, Bangladesh, Burundi, Central African Republic, Cote d’Ivoire, Ethiopia, Iran, Israel, Mali, Mexico, Myanmar, Sri Lanka and Uganda. The two most successful strategies for ending terrorist groups since the late 1960s have been either policing or the initiation of a political process. These strategies were the main reason for the ending of over 80 per cent of terrorist organisations that ceased operation. Only ten per cent of terrorist groups could be said to have achieved their goals and only seven per cent were eliminated by full military engagement. Over the last 14 years five per cent of all terrorist deaths have occurred in OECD countries. Excluding the United States on September 11, Turkey and Israel experienced the highest number of deaths. There were eight OECD countries that experienced deadly attacks in 2013, this compares to 20 OECD countries which have had deadly attacks since 2000. Although terrorism is on the increase and a major concern compared to other forms of violence, it is relatively small when compared to the 437,000 people killed by homicides in 2012, this being 40 times greater. The findings of this report emphasise the increasing intensity and spread of terrorist activity globally and highlight the key underlying factors that give rise to terrorism. Short term counter-terrorism and policing strategies can often be critical to prevent the potential of large and unexpected acts of mass violence; however, longer term approaches are essential. These longer term priorities include the need to address group grievances, ending gross physical rights abuses by the state and improving access to justice and the rule of law. Extremist Islamic movements that encourage the use of terrorism need to be counteracted with moderate theologies within Islam that advocate other non-violent methods of addressing legitimate political grievances. 3
  • 7. Correlates of terrorism From thousands of socio-economic, governance and attitudinal variables analysed, three groupings of indicators show a multivariate significant relationship with the GTI: —Political stability —Intergroup cohesion —Legitimacy of the state There is no systematic link to poverty measures, nor to several broader economic development factors such as the Human Development Index or its subcomponents such as mean years of schooling, or life expectancy. Similarly economic indicators such as year to year GDP growth do not correlate. Trade as a percentage of GDP is the only economic indicator to show moderate correlation at R= -0.40. Tactics and patterns The primary target of terrorism has consistently been private property and citizens. 60 per cent of all attacks involve the use of explosives, 30 per cent use firearms and 10 per cent used other tactics including incendiary devices, melee attacks and sabotage of equipment. Religion as a driving ideology for terrorism has dramatically increased since 2000. Prior to 2000 nationalist separatist agendas were the biggest drivers of terrorist organisations. Political and national separatist movements are still significant in 2013 but have seen little change over the 14 year period. Explosives accounted for the majority of attacks, while suicide bombings accounted for less than five per cent of all terrorist attacks since 2000. Risk of terrorism IEP has identified the following 13 countries as being at risk of increased terrorist activity from current levels: —Angola —Israel —Bangladesh —Mali —Burundi —Mexico —Central African Republic —Myanmar —Cote d’Ivoire —Sri Lanka —Ethiopia —Uganda —Iran Putting terrorism in context Around five per cent of all the 107,000 terrorist fatalities since 2000 have occurred in OECD countries. Homicide claims 40 times more people globally than terrorism with 437,000 lives lost due to homicide in 2012, compared to 11,000 terrorist deaths in 2012. Approximately 50 per cent of terrorist attacks claim no lives. The long term indirect costs of terrorism can be 10 to 20 times larger than the direct costs. Key trends In 2013 more than 80 per cent of the lives lost to terrorism occurred in only five countries; Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria and Syria. The largest year-on-year increase in deaths from terrorism was recorded between 2012 and 2013 increasing from 11,133 to 17,958. 102 of 162 countries covered in this study experienced no deaths from terrorism in 2013, while 60 countries recorded one or more deaths from terrorism. 87 countries experienced a terrorist incident in 2013, slightly up from 81 in 2012. The number of countries experiencing over 50 deaths in one year hit an all-time high in 2013 at 24, five greater than the previous high of 19 countries in 2008. 4 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 8. The Results Section summarises overall trends in terrorism and includes detailed country profiles for the ten countries with the highest levels of terrorist activity in 2013. These countries experienced 90 per cent of global terrorist activity. This section also provides an overview of the global trends in terrorism and details the significant increases since 2000. The Trends Section highlights the countries that have had the largest improvements and deteriorations in terrorist activity and maps in detail the patterns and characteristics of terrorist activity in terms of its targets, weapons used and ideological drivers. This section includes a brief statistical summary of the patterns and prevalence of suicide attacks as a terrorist tactic, trends in terrorist activity among OECD countries, and also compares this to other forms of violent activity. The key terrorist actors operating in OECD nations are also mapped and summarised. The Risk Section assesses the risk of countries experiencing high levels of terrorism. The research utilises GTI data and other existing datasets to statistically analyse the future likelihood of terrorist activity based on an analysis of the socio-economic conditions most closely associated with terrorism. A brief literature review assesses the economic costs of terrorism and the potential direct and indirect costs as well as an analysis of the effects of terrorism on foreign direct investment. The Terrorist Group Case Studies Section focuses on the four major terrorist groups covering their ideology, history, capacity and resources with key networks described as well. The numbers of foreign fighters from several OECD countries and the Middle East are outlined based on existing research highlighting both high and low estimates. This section also references existing research on how terrorist groups end and the tactics and strategies that have been successful for addressing this form of violence in the past. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 The Correlates of Terrorism Section uses multivariate statistical analysis and other statistical techniques to derive the key socio-economic correlations associated with terrorism and to better understand the factors most closely associated with terrorist environments. The Expert Contributions Section includes four essays from leading academics and applied researchers in the fields of development, public policy, peace and conflict and terrorism studies. Larry Attree from Saferworld and David Keen from the London School of Economics, outline a series of counter-terrorism approaches that should be scaled back and present six constructive alternatives that could help reverse the alarming rise in global terrorism. Henry Dodd and Steve Smith from Action on Armed Violence, provide an important contribution from another perspective to the research provided in this report. They detail the horrific human impact of a single suicide attack in a Pakistan marketplace in 2009, contextualising the broader physical, psychological and financial consequences of this form of violence. Ekaterina Stepanova from the Institute of World Economy International Relations, outlines a shift in two main trends, the broader network fragmentation of the global jihadi movement and shift from top-down to bottom-up regionalization of violent Islamic groups. She also tracks the complex evolution of ISIL as a regional force in the Middle East, and what its continued growth means for the world and region. Finally, Samantha Pitts-Kiefer from the Nuclear Threat Initiative, outlines the history and current reality of a nuclear terrorist threat, suggesting approaches for strengthening global nuclear security, highlighting the urgent need to improve global nuclear security. ABOUT THE REPORT 5
  • 9. ABOUT THE GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX The Global Terrorism Index (GTI) is a comprehensive study that accounts for the direct and indirect impact of terrorism in 162 countries in terms of lives lost, injuries, property damage and the psychological after-effects of terrorism. This study covers 99.6 per cent of the world’s population. It aggregates the most authoritative data source on terrorism today, the Global Terrorism Database (GTD) into a composite score in order to provide an ordinal ranking of nations on the negative impact of terrorism. The GTD is unique in that it consists of systematically and comprehensively coded data on domestic as well as international terrorist incidents and now includes more than 125,000 cases. Given the resources committed to counter-terrorism efforts internationally, it is important to analyse and aggregate available data related to terrorism to better understand its various properties such as: The differing socio-economic conditions under which it occurs. The geopolitical drivers associated with terrorism and ideological aims of terrorists groups. The types of strategies deployed, tactical terrorist targets and how these evolve over time. In this context, one of the key aims of the GTI is to examine these trends to help inform a positive and practical debate about the future of terrorism and the required policy responses. The GTI was developed in consultation with the GPI Expert Panel, and in particular with the advice of Expert Panel member and terrorism expert Dr Ekaterina Stepanova, Head of the Peace and Conflict Studies Unit at the Institute of World Economy International Relations. Defining terrorism is not a straightforward matter. There is no single internationally accepted definition of what constitutes terrorism, and the terrorism literature abounds with competing definitions and typologies. IEP accepts the terminology and definitions agreed to by the authors of the GTD, the National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START) researchers and its advisory panel. The GTI therefore defines terrorism as “the threatened or actual use of illegal force and violence by a non-state actor to attain a political, economic, religious, or social goal through fear, coercion, or intimidation.” This definition recognises that terrorism is not only the physical act of an attack, but also the psychological impact it has on a society for many years after. In order to be included as an incident in the GTD the act has to be: “an intentional act of violence or threat of violence by a non-state actor.” This means an incident has to meet three criteria in order for it to be counted as a terrorist act: 6 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 10. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 THE GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX IS A COMPREHENSIVE STUDY THAT ACCOUNTS FOR THE DIRECT AND INDIRECT IMPACT OF TERRORISM IN 162 COUNTRIES IN TERMS OF LIVES LOST, INJURIES, PROPERTY DAMAGE AND THE PSYCHOLOGICAL AFTER-EFFECTS OF TERRORISM. THIS STUDY COVERS 99.6 PER CENT OF THE WORLD’S POPULATION. 1. The incident must be intentional – the result of a conscious calculation on the part of a perpetrator. 2. The incident must entail some level of violence or threat of violence — including property violence, as well as violence against people. 3. The perpetrators of the incidents must be sub-national actors. This database does not include acts of state terrorism. In addition to this baseline definition, two of the following three criteria have to be met in order to be included in the START database from 1997: The violent act was aimed at attaining a political, economic, religious, or social goal. The violent act included evidence of an intention to coerce, intimidate, or convey some other message to a larger audience (or audiences) other than the immediate victims. The violent act was outside the precepts of international humanitarian law. In cases where there is insufficient information to make a definitive distinction about whether it is a terrorist incident within the confines of the definition, the database codes these incidents as ‘doubt terrorism proper’. In order to only count unambiguous incidents of terrorism, the GTI does not include doubted incidents. It is important to understand how incidents are counted. According to the GTD codebook: “incidents occurring in both the same geographic and temporal point will be regarded as a single incident, but if either the time of the occurrence of the incidents or their locations are discontinuous, the events will be regarded as separate incidents.” Illustrative examples from the GTD codebook are as follows:1 Four truck bombs explode nearly simultaneously in different parts of a major city. This represents four incidents. A bomb goes off, and while police are working on the scene the next day, they are attacked by terrorists with automatic weapons. These are two separate incidents, as they were not continuous, given the time lag between the two events. A group of militants shoot and kill five guards at a perimeter checkpoint of a petroleum refinery and then proceeds to set explosives and destroy the refinery. This is one incident since it occurred in a single location (the petroleum refinery) and was one continuous event. A group of hijackers diverts a plane to Senegal and, while at an airport in Senegal, shoots two Senegalese policemen. This is one incident, since the hijacking was still in progress at the time of the shooting and hence the two events occurred at the same time and in the same place. 7
  • 11. 1 Iraq 10 2 Afghanistan 9.39 3 Pakistan 9.37 4 Nigeria 8.58 5 Syria 8.12 6 India 7.86 7 Somalia 7.41 8 Yemen 7.31 9 Philippines 7.29 10 Thailand 7.19 11 Russia 6.76 12 Kenya 6.58 13 Egypt 6.5 14 Lebanon 6.4 15 Libya 6.25 16 Colombia 6.24 17 Turkey 5.98 18 Democratic Republic of the Congo 5.9 19 Sudan 5.77 20 South Sudan 5.6 21 Algeria 5.52 22 Mali 5.29 23 Bangladesh 5.25 24 Nepal 5.23 25 China 5.21 26 Central African Republic 5.19 27 United Kingdom 5.17 28 Iran 4.9 29 Greece 4.73 30 United States 4.71 31 Indonesia 4.67 32 Israel 4.66 32 Mexico 4.66 34 Bahrain 4.41 35 Myanmar 4.24 36 Mozambique 4.01 36 Sri Lanka 4.01 38 Rwanda 4 39 Burundi 3.97 40 Cote d’Ivoire 3.76 41 Tanzania 3.71 42 Ethiopia 3.7 43 Paraguay 3.63 44 Norway 3.57 45 Senegal 3.55 46 Tunisia 3.29 47 Ireland 3.09 48 Malaysia 3.04 48 South Africa 3.04 50 Peru 2.96 51 Ukraine 2.95 52 Uganda 2.93 53 Belarus 2.85 54 Kosovo 2.73 55 Saudi Arabia 2.71 56 France 2.67 10 8 6 4 57 Guatemala 2.61 58 Chile 2.59 58 Niger 2.59 60 Bulgaria 2.58 60 Georgia 2.58 62 Italy 2.55 63 Eritrea 2.45 64 Honduras 2.38 65 Kazakhstan 2.37 66 Cyprus 2.3 67 Morocco 2.11 68 Tajikistan 1.99 69 Spain 1.84 70 Jordan 1.76 71 Argentina 1.73 72 Brazil 1.72 73 Republic of the Congo 1.59 74 Trinidad and Tobago 1.54 75 Cameroon 1.45 75 Macedonia (FYR) 1.45 77 Switzerland 1.34 78 Madagascar 1.26 79 Ecuador 1.18 80 Zimbabwe 1.16 81 Guinea 1.12 82 Sweden 1.07 83 Germany 1.02 84 Canada 0.95 RANK COUNTRY SCORE .01 0 Highest impact of terrorism Lowest impact of terrorism No impact of terrorism 2 No records GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 8 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 12. 85 Czech Republic 0.81 86 Bosnia and Herzegovina 0.76 87 Burkina Faso 0.7 87 Montenegro 0.7 89 Netherlands 0.58 89 Serbia 0.58 91 Mauritania 0.56 92 Venezuela 0.54 93 Belgium 0.53 94 Dominican Republic 0.47 95 Angola 0.41 95 Australia 0.41 97 Guinea-Bissau 0.35 98 Cambodia 0.31 98 Taiwan 0.31 100 United Arab Emirates 0.29 101 Moldova 0.28 102 Armenia 0.27 103 Austria 0.24 103 Bolivia 0.24 105 Croatia 0.23 105 Portugal 0.23 107 Albania 0.19 107 Denmark 0.19 109 Bhutan 0.16 109 Estonia 0.16 111 Uzbekistan 0.14 112 Kyrgyzstan 0.1 113 Iceland 0.08 113 Laos 0.08 113 Liberia 0.08 116 Hungary 0.07 117 Azerbaijan 0.06 118 Chad 0.05 119 Kuwait 0.04 119 Panama 0.04 121 Equatorial Guinea 0.01 121 Japan 0.01 121 Lesotho 0.01 124 Benin 0 124 Botswana 0 124 Costa Rica 0 124 Cuba 0 124 Djibouti 0 124 El Salvador 0 124 Finland 0 124 Gabon 0 124 Gambia 0 124 Ghana 0 124 Guyana 0 124 Haiti 0 124 Jamaica 0 124 Latvia 0 124 Lithuania 0 124 Malawi 0 124 Mauritius 0 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 10 8 6 4 124 Mongolia 0 124 Namibia 0 124 New Zealand 0 124 Nicaragua 0 124 North Korea 0 124 Oman 0 124 Papua New Guinea 0 124 Poland 0 124 Qatar 0 124 Romania 0 124 Sierra Leone 0 124 Singapore 0 124 Slovakia 0 124 Slovenia 0 124 South Korea 0 124 Swaziland 0 124 Timor-Leste 0 124 Togo 0 124 Turkmenistan 0 124 Uruguay 0 124 Vietnam 0 124 Zambia 0 RANK COUNTRY SCORE .01 0 Highest impact of terrorism Lowest impact of terrorism No impact of terrorism 2 No records GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 9
  • 13. All attacks since 2000 scaled by number of fatalities Worst attacks in 2013 TERRORIST INCIDENTS MAP 2000-2013 DATE COUNTRY LOCATION F* I* GROUP DESCRIPTION 17/09/2013 Nigeria Beni Shiek 142 - Boko Haram Gunmen dressed in military uniforms set up illegal checkpoints and shot civilians. 22/07/2013 Syria Khan Al-Assal 123 - Al-Nusrah Front Assailants attacked soldiers and civilians in the town of Khan al-assal. 10/01/2013 Pakistan Quetta 107 169 Lashkar-E-Jhangvi Suicide bombers detonated inside of a snooker hall and attacked responders to the first explosion. 16/08/2013 Pakistan Quetta 91 169 Lashkar-E-Jhangvi An explosives-laden water tanker detonated in a vegetable market. 22/09/2013 Pakistan Peshawar 87 131 Jundallah Two suicide bombers detonated outside of all saints church in Peshawar City. 2/08/2013 Afghanistan Sherzad District 82 - Taliban Assailants ambushed a joint military and police convoy. 18/08/2013 Afghanistan Gulistan District 82 22 Taliban Assailants attacked a police convoy in Gulistan district. 21/09/2013 Kenya Nairobi 72 201 Al-Shabaab Assailants with automatic weapons and grenades attacked the westgate mall in Nairobi and held patrons hostage. 11/06/2013 Syria Hatla 70 - Al-Nusrah Front Gunmen attacked the shiite village of Hatla. 20/12/2013 Nigeria Bama 70 - Boko Haram 300 Assailants attacked a Nigerian army barracks and kidnapped some soldiers. 16/01/2013 Algeria In Amenas 69 8 Al-Mua’qi’oon Biddam Brigade (Those who Sign with Blood) Terrorists seized a British Petroleum gas complex and held 800 people hostage. THE 20 WORST ATTACKS OF 2013 * F= FATALITIES, I = INJURIES 10 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 14. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 All attacks since 2000 scaled by number of fatalities Worst attacks in 2013 TERRORIST INCIDENTS MAP 2000-2013 DATE COUNTRY LOCATION F* I* GROUP DESCRIPTION 5/12/2013 Yemen Sanaa 68 215 Al-Qa'ida in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP) A suicide bomber then 12 gunmen attacked the Ministry of Defense. 21/02/2013 Syria Damascus 62 201 Unknown A car bomb exploded near the baath party offices in Damascus City. 6/02/2013 Syria Al-Buraq 61 - Al-Nusrah Front An explosives-laden vehicle detonated at a bus stop near a military factory killing civilian employees. 5/12/2013 Central African Republic Bangui 54 - Anti-Balaka Militia Gunman attacked a mosque in km-five neighborhood, Bangui City. 3/04/2013 Afghanistan Farah 53 95 Taliban A suicide bomber and nine assailants dressed as soldiers and armed with guns and grenades attacked a courthouse. 21/03/2013 Syria Damascus 50 84 Unknown A suicide bomber detonated himself at al-eman mosque in Damascus City. 24/04/2013 Iraq Mosul 46 - Unknown Assailants attacked a police headquarters and held 17 hostage. 6/07/2013 Nigeria Mamudo 46 4 Boko Haram Assailants set fire to a school and shot at students and staff who were fleeing the burning building. 3/03/2013 Pakistan Karachi 45 151 Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) An explosives-laden car detonated in outside a shiite mosque. * F= FATALITIES, I = INJURIES 11
  • 15. RESULTS In total there have been over 48,000 terrorist incidents over the last 14 years claiming over 107,000 lives. Terrorism has increased dramatically with even conservative estimates suggesting a fivefold surge since the year 2000. 2 In 2013 alone, almost 10,000 terrorist incidents were recorded, resulting in approximately 18,000 deaths. The significant majority of these incidents, over 60 per cent, occurred in Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria and Syria. The increase is due mainly to terrorist activity within these five countries. As a consequence, these countries have experienced a dramatic increase in the loss of life in 2013 with fatalities reaching 14,722 collectively. Excluding these five countries in 2013, there were almost 4,000 attacks in the rest of the world killing 3,236 people. This represents an increase of 54 per cent over the prior year. Other than the five most affected countries, the trend over the last 14 years is upward with terrorist attacks substantially increasing by 180 per cent. Furthermore, terrorists are largely successful in carrying out their tactical objectives. Figure 3 shows that in 2013 the success rate was over 85 per cent. However this does represent a decrease since 2011 when over 90 per cent of attacks were successful. The rise in terrorist activity coincided with the US invasion of Iraq. This created large power vacuums in the country allowing different factions to surface and become violent. Despite the fact that a government was formed and elections held, the country and region has been unstable ever since. In 2006 Nouri al-Maliki was appointed Prime Minister of Iraq. In the following year amid sectarian tensions Iraq suffered the worst year of terrorist activity recorded since 2000. It was only in 2013 with the rise of ISIL that Iraq suffered this same level of terrorism again. Terrorism has also been increasing on the borders of Pakistan and Afghanistan where the Taliban has escalated attacks over the last three years. Tensions in Pakistan escalated in 2007 when Presidential candidate Benazir Bhutto was assassinated, and deaths have increased by 20 per cent over the last two years. In India, there remains significant terrorist activity, including on the border between India and Pakistan. The rise of terrorism in Nigeria is largely centred around the terrorist group Boko Haram which started to engage in significant violence from 2009 onwards. As a result, Nigeria has had the fourth highest number of deaths from terrorism over the last three years. Figure 1 plots these events against trends in terrorism since 2000. GLOBAL LEVELS OF TERRORISM COUNTRIES WITH GREATER THAN 50 TERRORIST DEATHS In 2013 the number of countries that lost over 50 lives to terrorist attacks reached 24, the most it has been in the 14 years covered in this report. It also represents an additional nine countries when compared to 2012. These countries are Algeria, Central African Republic, China, Egypt, Lebanon, Libya, Mali, Sudan and South Sudan. This is a notable change from the 2008 trend that showed that the number of countries with greater than 50 deaths had been decreasing while the overall 12 year trend to 2012 was basically flat. Terrorism is a global phenomenon and in 2013 attacks were carried out in 87 countries with 60 of these experiencing deaths from terrorism. 12 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 16. FIGURE 1 DEATHS FROM TERRORISM, 2000–2013 The number people who have died from terrorist activity has increased fivefold since the year 2000. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 Usama bin Ladin killed. Syrian Civil War begins. Bhutto assasinated in Pakistan. YEAR 20,000 16,000 12,000 8,000 4,000 0 Global total Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria Syria ISIL capture large parts Source: GTD Notes: The dashed part of the trend line represents a change in data collection methodology for terrorist acts. The methodology change did not materially alter the results as the increase in terrorism is verifiable, see methodological note in Appendix C for further details. FIGURE 2 TERRORIST INCIDENTS, 2000–2013 In 2013, 60 per cent of all attacks occurred in five countries; Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria and Syria. However the rest of the world suffered a 54 per cent increase in terrorist incidents in 2013. YEAR 10,000 8,000 6,000 4,000 2,000 Source: GTD 0 NUMBER OF INCIDENTS Global total Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, Nigeria Syria Rest of the world 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 NUMBER OF DEATHS Rest of the world 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 of Syria and Iraq September 11. War begins in Afghanistan. Iraq Prime Minister appointed. War begins in Iraq. Arab Uprising. Precursor of ISIL begin to launch attacks in Syria and Iraq. 13
  • 17. FIGURE 3 SUCCESS RATES OF TERRORIST ATTACKS In 2013 over 85 per cent of all recorded incidents were successful. This represents an improvement from 2011 when over 90 per cent of attacks were successful. 100% 12,000 YEAR 10,000 8,000 6,000 4,000 2,000 0 90% 70% 60% 30% Percentage of successful incidents Total Successful Source: GTD Note: Success is defined in respect to the tangible effects of an incident, not the overall strategic goal. For example, a bomb attack is deemed successful if the bomb is detonated regardless of whether the detonation achieves greater aims such as destroying a building or killing a specific person. FIGURE 4 NUMBER OF COUNTRIES THAT EXPERIENCE SEVERE LOSSES FROM TERRORISM The number of counties that have lost more than 50 lives hit an all-time high in 2013. 20 10 Source: GTD YEAR 25 15 5 0 NUMBER OF COUNTRIES WITH GREATER THAN 50 DEATHS FROM TERRORISM 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 80% 50% 40% 20% 10% 0% PERCENTAGE OF SUCCESSFUL ATTACKS NUMBER OF INCIDENTS 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 14 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 18. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 TEN COUNTRIES MOST IMPACTED BY TERRORISM The ten countries ranked at the top of the 2014 Global Terrorism Index have all suffered from terrorism for many years. Every one of the ten most affected countries, with the exception of Syria, has had terrorist attacks consecutively for at least fifteen years. In 2013 the most impacted five countries accounted for more than 80 per cent of all terrorist deaths. The overwhelming majority of deaths from terrorism in 2013 occurred in Iraq, accounting for 35 per cent of all deaths. In nine out of the last ten years Iraq has been the country with the most deaths from terrorism. The only exception was in 2012 when Afghanistan had 300 more deaths than Iraq. Syria is the country that has had the largest percentage increase in terrorism, with a combined total of 27 deaths from 1998 to 2010. Since the start of the Syrian civil war in 2011, Syria has had over a hundred deaths from terrorism in both 2011 and 2012, jumping to over 1,000 deaths in 2013. FIGURE 5 COUNTRIES WITH THE HIGHEST NUMBER OF DEATHS BY TERRORISM, PERCENTAGE OF GLOBAL TERRORIST DEATHS FOR 2013 Five countries account for more than 80 per cent of global terrorist deaths. 18,000 16,000 14,000 12,000 10,000 8,000 4,000 2,000 Source: GTD 0 NUMBER OF DEATHS 35.4% Iraq 17.3% Afghanistan 13.1.% Pakistan 10.2% Nigeria 6% Syria 2.3% Somalia 2.2% India 1.6% Philippines 1.6% Yemen 1.1% Rest of the world Thailand 10% 15
  • 19. 2,492 INCIDENTS IRAQ DEAD 6,362 Private citizens property Police Government (general) Other Iraq continues to be the country that is most impacted by terrorism. Terrorist incidents have increased significantly in Iraq in 2013 with the number of deaths rising 162 per cent from 2012. No group claimed responsibility for the majority of terrorist activity. However, six terrorist groups were responsible for the 1,670 claimed deaths. These groups are all Islamic extremist with relatively short histories. 77 per cent of attacks for which a group claimed responsibility were conducted by ISIL. The oldest group, Ansar al-Islam, was formed in 2001 but has subsequently joined ISIL. Some of the groups are relatively new such as Mukhtar Army, a Shia Iraqi militia group formed in early 2013, and Al-Nusrah Front, a branch of al-Qa'ida formed in 2012. The majority of terrorist groups in Iraq are Sunni and are opposed to the Shia dominated government. In the 2014 parliamentary elections 53 per cent of the seats were won by Shia parties as opposed to just 11 per cent of seats for Sunni parties. The remaining seats were won by Kurds or secular parties. The demographic split between Shia and Sunni is 66 per cent and 34 per cent respectively. As is characteristic of terrorist attacks generally, the majority of incidents were not claimed by any group. In 2013, 4,660 people were killed by terrorist acts by unknown actors, representing 73 per cent of all attacks. The tactics used by terrorist groups in Iraq remain almost exclusively confined to bombings and explosions. This method was responsible for 87 per cent of deaths and 97 per INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 +6,352 2002 2014 cent of injuries. Suicide attacks also continue to be used with a very high cost on human lives, with an average of over seven deaths per suicide attack. There were 232 suicide attacks, which were responsible for 27 per cent of fatalities. ISIL took responsibility for the majority of suicide bombings, averaging nearly 10 deaths and 18 injuries per attack. Political assassinations were less likely to be successful, accounting for nearly half of the 165 failed terrorist attacks. There were more than 430 casualties from attempted political assassinations. The majority of assassinations targeted political figures, but police, private citizens and leaders of other terrorist groups were also targeted. Of all terrorist attacks, 25 per cent took place in Baghdad, with Mosul, Baqubah, Kirkuk and Tuz Khormato also experiencing considerable activity. There were 135 cities that had one terrorist attack and 115 cities that had two or more attacks. This demonstrates how widespread terrorism is across the country. Of the 19 provinces in Iraq, 17 experienced terrorism. The two provinces without terrorism were both in the Iraqi Kurdistan region. There were 1,424 attacks and 3,414 deaths in the four provinces of Al Anbar, Diyala, Nineveh and Saladin. These four provinces also had more than twice as many terrorist attacks than the capital of Baghdad. The number of attacks in these provinces doubled in 2013 while the number of deaths was two and a half times higher. Unknown Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant Al-Qa’ida in Iraq Other INJURED 14,947 WORST ATTACK 47 killed and 85 injured when a suicide bomber targeted Shiite pilgrims. ISIL suspected. GTI RANK: 1 GTI SCORE: 10/10 MAJOR ATTACK 16 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 20. Police Private citizens property Government (general) Other Terrorism is increasing in Afghanistan, with ten per cent more terrorist attacks and 13 per cent more fatalities in 2013 than 2012. Whilst there were seven different terrorist groups active in Afghanistan, one group, the Taliban, was responsible for the majority of attacks and casualties. The Taliban remains one of the most deadly terrorist groups in the world. In both 2012 and 2013 the Taliban was responsible for 75 per cent of all terrorist fatalities in Afghanistan. In 2013 unknown actors accounted for 23 per cent of deaths by terrorism. The remainder of fatalities were claimed by six terrorist groups. In 2013 there were terrorist acts in over 440 different cities in Afghanistan, clearly highlighting the breadth of terrorism across the country. However 304 cities suffered only one terrorist attack. There were 36 attacks in the capital Kabul and 25 attacks in the old capital of Kandahar. Police are the targets of most attacks, being targeted 46 per cent of the time and suffering 53 per cent of the deaths. Private citizens are the second biggest target group, with 21 per cent of attacks and 19 per cent of deaths. Although attacks on schools and educational institutions account for only two per cent of attacks they result in one of the highest injury rates per attack averaging nearly ten injuries but only one death. The Taliban is opposed to the education of girls and when in power banned girls above the age of eight from attending school. In 2013 the Taliban conducted at least seven MAJOR ATTACK attacks targeting girls attending school, mostly in the north, resulting in over 160 casualties. Bombings and explosions were the most common tactic used in Afghanistan, accounting for over half of all attacks and fatalities. A quarter of all terrorist attacks were armed assaults, with 37 per cent of deaths attributed to this tactic. Almost all armed assaults were with firearms, although there were a few instances of knives and axe attacks with at least 19 beheadings. There were over 100 suicide bombings in 2013, mostly by the Taliban. Suicide bombings were very deadly, averaging five deaths and ten injuries per attack. AFGHANISTAN Taliban Unknown Hizb-i-Islami Other DEAD 3,111 INJURED 3,721 INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 +3,057 2002 2014 GTI RANK: 2 GTI SCORE: 9.39/10 1,148 INCIDENTS WORST ATTACK 98 killed when the Taliban targeted a tribal elder and security personnel who responded to the scene. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 17
  • 21. 1,933 INCIDENTS PAKISTAN DEAD 2,345 GTI RANK: 3 INJURED 5,035 GTI SCORE: 9.37/10 Private citizens property Police Government (general) Other Terrorism in Pakistan is strongly influenced by its proximity to Afghanistan with most attacks occurring near the border involving the Taliban. Like in Afghanistan, terrorism increased significantly in Pakistan in 2013, with a 37 per cent increase in deaths and 28 per cent increase in injuries since 2012. Nearly half of all attacks had no groups that have claimed responsibility. The deadliest group in Pakistan in 2013, responsible for almost a quarter of all deaths and 49 per cent of all claimed attacks, is Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP), the Pakistani Taliban. Terrorism in Pakistan has a diverse array of actors. In 2013 there were 23 different terrorist groups, down from 29 groups in 2012. However, 11 groups account for the majority of the 270 claimed attacks. While many of these groups are Islamist there are also other organisations such as separatist movements for Baloch, the Bettani tribe and Sindhi people. Over 60 per cent of fatalities were from bombings and explosions and around 26 per cent from firearms. A quarter of targets and deaths were against private citizens, with police accounting for 20 per cent of targets and deaths. The deadliest attacks were against religious figures and institutions which, on average, killed over five people and injured over 11 per attack. This includes the killing of 87 people attending All Saints Church in Peshawar city from two suicide bombs by a sub-group of the Pakistani Taliban. MAJOR ATTACK The Pakistani Taliban also, like the Taliban in Afghanistan, is opposed to the western education and the education of girls and has targeted schools and advocates of equal education. This issue gained worldwide recognition in October 2012 when a 15 year old school girl and advocate of female education, Malala Yousafzai, was shot by gunmen from the Pakistani Taliban on a school bus in the northwest. In 2014 Malala Yousafzai, along with the Indian activist Kailash Satyarthi campaigning against forced childhood labour, were awarded the Nobel Peace Prize. Despite the international attention brought to the issue, violence continues and in 2013 there were over 100 attacks on educational institutions, with a total of 150 casualties. Suicide bombings were used by the Pakistani Taliban and three other groups, all of which have some affiliation with the Pakistani Taliban. In 2013 there were 71 suicide attacks responsible for around 2,740 casualties. More than 500 cities in Pakistan had at least one terrorist incident in 2013, with two or more incidents occurring in 180 cities. Of all attacks 16 per cent occurred in the largest city of Karachi in the south. However, the majority of attacks occurred in the north closer to the border with Afghanistan. This includes cities such as Peshawar, Quetta and Jamrud, which combined, had more attacks than Karachi. The city of Parachinar in the Federally Administered Tribal Areas, the closest point in Pakistan to Kabul in Afghanistan, has among the highest rates of deaths per incident in Pakistan with 87 people killed from seven incidents. Unknown Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) Lashkar-e-Jhangvi Other INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 +2,243 2002 2014 WORST ATTACK 119 killed and 219 injured when two suicide bombers targeted a crowd. Lashkar-e-Jhangvi responsible. 18 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 22. Private citizens property Police Government (general) Other The dramatic increase in terrorism in Nigeria can be attributed to the rise of Boko Haram. Boko Haram can be translated to mean ‘western education is forbidden’. In 2013 this Islamist terrorist group killed at least 1,587 people and claimed responsibility for nearly 90 per cent of all terrorist acts in Nigeria. They are one of the most deadly terrorist groups in the world with an average of close to eight deaths per terrorist attack. The nature of terrorism in Nigeria is different to Iraq, Afghanistan and Pakistan. Terrorist activity in Nigeria has more in common with the tactics of organised crime and gangs, focusing on armed assaults using firearms and knives than the bombing or suicide tactics of other large terrorist groups. Armed assault has claimed 85 per cent of deaths in Nigeria while bombings or explosions account for five per cent of deaths. Suicide attacks are very rare, approximately 12 per cent of terrorist attacks are kidnappings or hostage takings. The majority of these kidnappings are by Boko Haram. In 2013 targets included business leaders such as the Manager of the Nigerian Flour Mills; senior police officers such the Divisional Police Officer of Borno State; people with government connections like the former minister of Petroleum Resources; DEAD 1,826 MAJOR ATTACK GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 members of the military; and women and children. This includes the more than 200 Chibok girls kidnapped in northern Nigeria in early 2014 from their school. Boko Haram announced the girls were to become slaves and wives for their members. Most terrorist attacks were in the northeast of Nigeria where Boko Haram is based, with 16 per cent of attacks in the regional capital of Maiduguri. Apart from Boko Haram, six other terrorist groups were responsible for attacks in 2013. Three of these groups are Islamist and the other groups are separatists or oppositional groups. One of the largest terrorist groups in Nigeria, with an estimated membership of 15,000, is the Movement for the Emancipation of the Niger Delta, who were responsible for 14 fatalities in 2013. This group has been active since 2004 and aims to force oil revenues to be shared with impoverished regions. Whilst they have a larger membership than Boko Haram, they are responsible for fewer deaths, killing 268 people since 2006. NIGERIA GTI RANK: 4 GTI SCORE: 8.58/10 303 INCIDENTS INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 +1,812 2002 2014 Boko Haram Unknown Fulani militants Other INJURED 457 WORST ATTACK 142 killed and 100 shops damaged when gunmen attacked civilians in a village. Boko Haram responsible. 19
  • 23. Private citizens property Journalists media Government (general) Other The dramatic rise of terrorism in Syria is a direct result of the Syrian civil war. There were no recorded acts of terrorism in the two years prior to the civil war commencing in 2011. By 2012 there were 136 terrorist attacks and over 600 deaths. In 2013, this has increased to 217 attacks and over 1,000 deaths. There are at least ten different terrorist groups active in Syria, many of which are Sunni and opposed to the Alawite Assad regime. It is estimated that the civil war has led to between 180,000 and 260,000 deaths and the displacement of over 35 per cent of the population of the country. The majority of these deaths are classified as a result of conventional warfare rather than acts of terrorism. However, terrorism has been deployed as a tactic by some of the rebel forces to bring about a political, economic, religious, or social goal rather than purely military objectives. It is unknown which group was responsible for half of the terrorist attacks in Syria in 2013, and as a result of the civil war the number of attacks may be underreported. Some of the biggest groups in Syria include ISIL, the Free Syrian Army, Hizballah and Popular Front for the Liberation of Palestine, Gen Cmd (PFLP-GC). The Sunni and al-Qa’ida linked Al-Nusra Front claimed responsibility for more than 40 per cent of deaths from terrorism in 2013. This group regularly uses suicide attacks, employing suicide bombing in nearly a third of their attacks. They are also one of the most deadly groups, averaging nearly 19 deaths per attack. The most common form of terrorist attacks are bombings or explosions, which account for 70 per cent of attacks that are generally targeted at private citizens. Kidnappings account for 18 per cent of all incidents. Most of the kidnappings are of journalists, although NGO workers and UN Peacekeepers have all been kidnapped in 2013. Syria is the only country among those most impacted by terrorism where journalists are a major target of terrorist attacks. Nearly 70 per cent of all journalists killed last year in Syria were Syrian citizens. In 2013 at least 16 European journalists were kidnapped, including Danish, French, Italian, Polish, Spanish and Swedish journalists. Two American journalists who were kidnapped in Syria, James Foley and Steven Sotloff, were both murdered in late 2014 by ISIL. Although the entire country is affected by a very severe civil conflict, terrorism is largely centralised. There were 57 cities that had a terrorist attack, of which only 16 cities had more than one attack. Terrorism is largely concentrated around large cities, with 42 per cent of attacks taking place in the capital of Damascus and 12 per cent in the largest city of Aleppo. SYRIA MAJOR ATTACK WORST ATTACK 123 killed when assailants attacked soldiers and civilians in a town centre. Known as the Khan al-Assal massacre. Al-Nusrah Front responsible. Unknown Al-Nusrah Front Liwa al-Haqq Other DEAD 1,078 INJURED 1,776 INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 +1,078 2002 2014 GTI RANK: 5 GTI SCORE: 8.12/10 217 INCIDENTS 20 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 24. 624 INCIDENTS GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 DEAD 404 INJURED 719 2002 2014 MAJOR ATTACK Police Private citizens property Government (general) Other Terrorism increased by 70 per cent in India from 2012 to 2013, with the number of deaths increasing from 238 to 404. The number of attacks also increased, with 55 more attacks in 2013 than 2012. However, the majority of terrorist attacks in India have low casualties. In 2013 around 70 per cent of attacks were non-lethal. There were attacks by 43 different terrorist groups who can be categorised into three groups: Islamists; separatists; and communists. Communist terrorist groups are by far the most frequent perpetrators and the main cause of deaths in India. Three Maoist communist groups claimed responsibility for 192 deaths in 2013, which was nearly half of all deaths from terrorism in India. Police are overwhelmingly the biggest targets of Maoists, accounting for half of all deaths and injuries. This is mainly through armed assaults, which killed 85, and bombings and explosions, which killed 43. Kidnapping is also a common tactic of the Maoists where it is often used as political tool to force the government to release Maoist prisoners. The majority of Maoist attacks occurred in the provinces of Bihar, Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand. Generally, the dispute with Pakistan over Jammu and Kashmir is the source of Islamic terrorism. In 2013 three Islamist groups were responsible for around 15 per cent of deaths. This includes Hizbul Mujahideen, an Islamist group allegedly based in Pakistan with a membership of around 15,000. This group was the only group in India to use suicide tactics in 2013. Islamist groups in India commonly use armed assaults targeting the police or bombings targeting private citizens. The majority of attacks occur in Hyderabad in the south, a city with a 40 per cent Muslim population, and Jammu and Kashmir in the north, an area which is nearly two thirds Muslim. In September 2014 al-Qa’ida announced a presence in India, hoping to unite other Islamist groups. India’s north east region has for the last three decades seen continual ethno-political unrest from ethnic secessionist movements. Separatist groups including in Assam, Bodoland, Kamtapur and Meghalaya were responsible for 16 per cent of deaths. Targeting private citizens, police and businesses, attacks are generally restricted to the geographic region as most of these groups are relatively small and have local claims. INDIA Maoists Communist Party of India - Maoist (CPI-M) Unknown Other WORST ATTACK 17 killed and 32 injured when 100 gunmen ambushed and kidnapped government officials. The Communist Party of India - Maoist (CPI-M) responsible. DECREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 -87 GTI RANK: 6 GTI SCORE: 7.86/10 21
  • 25. 197 INCIDENTS SOMALIA INJURED 492 MAJOR ATTACK Government (general) Private citizens property Military Other Somalia continues to face violence in the south with rebel forces and terrorist groups using terrorist tactics. The number of people killed in Somalia from terrorism increased by 32 per cent from 2012 to 2013. 2013 has been the deadliest year of the past 14 years with 405 people killed, up from 307 in 2012. In 2013, the Al-Shabaab group was responsible for all claimed attacks. This militant group is allied with Al-Qa’ida and has an estimated 4,000 to 6,000 soldiers. Unlike some other Al-Qa’ida affiliates, there has been infighting in Al-Shabaab over whether it should focus on local and regional objectives rather than transcontinental jihad. Notably, this was one of the reasons why the American recruit to Al-Shabaab, Abu Mansoor Al-Amriki, was killed by Al-Shabaab in 2013 as he criticised the group for being too focused on Somalian outcomes to the detriment of international jihad. Nevertheless, Al-Shabaab has attracted foreign fighters and has partnered with other groups. Al-Shabaab was responsible for the Westgate shopping mall attack in September 2013 in Kenya, which resulted in 67 deaths and 175 injuries. This was reportedly in retaliation for the involvement of the Kenyan military in a military operation to eradicate the group in Somalia. The leadership of Al-Shabaab contains many Somalis trained in the Iraq and Afghani conflicts. Many of the organisation’s leaders have been killed, including the overall leader, Moktar Ali Zubeyr killed by a U.S. drone strike in September 2014. There have been reports that members of Al-Shabaab and Boko Haram have trained together. Al-Shabaab has controlled several areas of Somalia including the capital Mogadishu in 2010. In recent times African Union support for the Somalia government has restricted their military operations. Al-Shabaab generally uses guerrilla warfare and is structured as an insurgency force in three parts: intelligence gathering; law enforcement; and a military arm. Most of the attacks are bombings or explosions which average around two and a half deaths per attack. One in ten attacks are suicide bombings. Suicide assault teams have become a feature in attacks by Al-Shabaab. Suicide bombings are much more deadly than other explosions, with an average of nine and a half deaths per attack. Such attacks have been used primarily against the government but also the military and police. Private citizens are generally not the target of suicide bombings. Armed assaults are used nearly 20 per cent of the time and are mainly used against private citizens. Southern Somalia has 90 per cent of attacks, with most of the remaining attacks occurring in Puntland in the north-east. Somaliland to the north-west saw the least terrorist activity. Almost half of all attacks were in the largest city and capital Mogadishu and 15 per cent of attacks in the port city of Kismayo in the south. Al-Shabaab announced it would further target the government in Puntland, with terrorist attacks in the Bari region increasing threefold from 2012 to 2013. Al-Shabaab Unknown DEAD 405 WORST ATTACK 38 killed and 58 injured when an explosives-laden vehicle detonated outside a courthouse. Al-Shabaab responsible. INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 +399 2002 2014 GTI RANK: 7 GTI SCORE: 7.41/10 22 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 26. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 MAJOR ATTACK WORST ATTACK 68 killed, 215 injured when a suicide bomber detonated an explosives-laden vehicle at the entrance of a government building. Al-Qa’ida in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP) responsible. Government (general) Utilities Police Other Terrorist attacks and injuries increased by 50 per cent between 2012 and 2013. However, the attacks were less fatal with a 15 per cent reduction in fatalities to 291. Whilst there were nine different groups active in Yemen in 2013, two major terrorist groups committed over 80 per cent of terrorist acts. The other groups include tribesmen and separatists. It is unknown who committed 16 per cent of attacks in 2013. The two most active terrorist groups are the Houthis and al-Qa’ida in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP). The Houthis are the smaller group and claimed responsibility for 20 per cent of deaths in 2013 with 18 separate attacks, whereas AQAP claimed responsibility for 60 per cent of attacks in 2013 with 83 separate attacks. Both groups in Yemen are in conflict with the government and deploy terrorist tactics. Despite this, the Houthis and AQAP are opposed to each other and are based in separate parts of the country. AQAP is an al-Qa’ida affiliate which is currently being led by Nasir al-Wuhayshi who was Usama bin Ladin’s former secretary. The group was responsible for the bombing of the USS Cole in 2000 which resulted in the deaths of 17 U.S. soldiers. It is considered to be one of the most active al-Qa’ida affiliates.3 AQAP mainly has operated in the south of Yemen and has been the target of U.S. predator drone attacks since 2002. AQAP are responsible for over 850 deaths from 300 terrorist attacks in the last four years. In 2013 they killed 177 people and they were the only group in Yemen to use suicide bombings. Suicide bombings were very INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 deadly, with an average of 11 deaths and nearly 30 injuries per attack. These bombings overwhelmingly targeted the government. This includes the bombing of the Ministry of Defence in Sana’a city, which resulted in 68 deaths and 215 injuries. AQAP focused attacks on Sana’a and the city of Dhamar in south-west Yemen. The other major terrorist group, the Houthis, is a militant Islamist insurgency made up of followers of a Shia sect known as Zaydi. The Houthis are in conflict with the Yemen government opposing the Sunni-majority government and military. In September of 2014, the Houthis invaded the capital city demanding a change of government. The Houthis are also opposed to AQAP, a Sunni group, and there have been several major battles between the two groups. Since 2009 the Houthis have killed 200 people in terrorist attacks from 28 separate attacks. The Houthis are a deadly terrorist group averaging over six deaths per attack. Their most deadly attack occurred in 2010 when 30 people were killed when they attacked pro-government Bin Aziz tribesmen. Most attacks by the Houthis target the capital city Sana’a, with all but one attack in 2013 occurring in Sana’a or in the administrative centre of Amanat Al Asimah. In late 2014 the Houthis had administrative control over parts of north-west Yemen including partial or full control over the governorates of Al Jawf, Al Mahwit, ‘Amran, Hajjah, Saada and Sana’a. YEMEN Al-Qa’ida in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP) Houthis Unknown Other DEAD 291 INJURED 583 2002 2014 +287 295 INCIDENTS GTI RANK: 8 GTI SCORE: 7.31/10 23
  • 27. Government (general) Business Private citizens property Other Terrorism has increased significantly in the Philippines between 2012 and 2013, with almost twice as many incidents. The number of deaths has also more than doubled in this period increasing from 122 to 292. Terrorism in the Philippines is intrinsically tied with nationalist and separatist claims by people living in provinces in southern Philippines. However, terrorism is spread across the country. There were 438 cities that suffered a terrorist attack in 2013 of which only 104 had one attack. The city that saw the highest number of terrorist attacks was Cotabato City in Mindanao with 11 separate attacks that killed 11 people. 83 per cent of the 81 provinces of the Philippines had at least one terrorist attack in 2013. Whilst there were seven known groups that carried out a terrorist act in 2013 most activity is carried out by the New People’s Army, Moro Islamic Liberation Front (MILF) and the Abu Sayyaf Group (ASG). The largest individual group was the New People’s Army, a communist organisation, which claimed responsibility for 30 per cent of deaths in 2013. Armed assault represented nearly half of all fatalities, followed by assassinations, which constituted a quarter of all fatalities. This differs from many other parts of the world where use of explosives and bombings are more common. 499 INCIDENTS Assassinations were prominent with 56 per cent of attempts successful. In total, 103 people were killed by assassinations in 2013 which is more than five times higher than 2012. The use of these tactics and targets demonstrates that many of the terrorist groups in the Philippines are seeking to directly change the political system. Around 34 per cent of deaths from terrorist attacks were targeting the government, with business leaders, private citizens and police representing between ten and seventeen per cent of deaths. Only the Islamist Abu Sayyaf Group (ASG) engaged in suicide bombing. PHILIPPINES Unknown New People’s Army (NPA) Bangsamoro Islamic Freedom Movement (BIFM) Other DEAD 292 WORST ATTACK 9 killed and 7 injured when police were targeted with a bomb and shooting. New People’s Army (NPA) suspected. INJURED 444 INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 +210 2002 2014 GTI RANK: 9 GTI SCORE: 7.29/10 MAJOR ATTACK 24 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 28. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 THAILAND DEAD 131 INJURED 398 Business Government (general) Police Other In 2013 Thailand saw the lowest number of deaths from terrorism since 2005. The number of deaths from 2012 to 2013 decreased from 171 to 131. However, there were 116, or 54 per cent more terrorist attacks over this period. Three quarters of terrorist attacks were not claimed nor attributed to any group. Terrorist activity is overwhelmingly confined to the south of the country where there is an ongoing insurgency between Muslim separatists and the Thai government, with Malay Muslims opposed to the Thai Buddhist minority and supporters of the government. This conflict has been ongoing since 2004 with estimates of 5,000 deaths and 10,000 casualties. The majority of attacks have historically occurred in the four southern border provinces of Narathiwat, Pattani, Songkhla and Yala. Terrorist activity is so localised that out of the seventy-six provinces of Thailand, only 11 suffered from attacks. Five provinces only had one attack and six provinces had more than one attack. Peace talks hosted in Malaysia resumed in August 2014 after leaders of the Barisan Revolusi Nasional (BRN) called to continue dialogue. WORST ATTACK 6 killed and 1 injured when 4 gunmen on motorcycles opened fire on a grocery store. Unknown, but Barisan Revolusi Nasional suspected. It is suspected that the majority of attacks are committed by a group of young independent militants not tied to any particular group. Militants are often young and are accordingly called Juwae. Older and more organised groups rarely claim responsibility for attacks. There is less evidence of groups working together, with groups appearing to be more fractured than in previous years.4 Only four terrorist groups are known to have committed terrorist attacks in 2013. BRN is the largest of these groups. Operating in the South, BRN is a separatist group with a membership estimated at 1,000. This group was responsible for 12 deaths from four attacks in 2013. Other separatist groups active in Southern Thailand include the Aba Cheali Group and Runda Kumpalan Kecil, both splinter groups of BRN. Armed assaults were much more deadly than bombings or explosions. The number of bombings increased 50 per cent between 2012 and 2013, with 170 separate bomb attacks. However, the majority of bomb attacks resulted in no fatalities with 44 total deaths as opposed to 77 deaths by firearms. The biggest targets were businesses followed by police. The majority of terrorist attacks in Thailand have relatively low death rates, with an average of 1.2 deaths per attack. No attack killed more than six people in 2013. Unknown Separatists Barisan Revolusi Nasional (BRN) Other INCREASE IN DEATHS SINCE 2002 2002 2014 +115 332 INCIDENTS GTI RANK: 10 GTI SCORE: 7.19/10 MAJOR ATTACK 25
  • 29. TRENDS LARGEST INCREASES AND DECREASES IN TERRORISM 2012 TO 2013 Analysis of the year-to-year trends in terrorist attacks underscores its dynamic nature showing it can quickly intensify yet also fall away. As has been highlighted in the results section, the majority of terrorist attacks are concentrated in a small number of countries and this is where most of the year-to-year change is observed. While this section focuses on number of deaths, this is not always perfectly reflective of changes in overall terrorist impact as some countries may experience more incidents but fewer deaths, as was the case in Yemen in 2013. In 2013, 102 of the 162 countries included in this report did not experience a fatal terrorist attack. Of the remaining 60 countries, 40 experienced an increase in the number of fatalities when comparing 2012 to 2013. Conversely, there were 26 countries that had fewer deaths from terrorism in 2013 than 2012. Eighty-seven countries experienced a terrorist incident in 2013, only slightly up from 81 in the 2012. This trend has remained fairly stable over the last 14-year period reflecting the fact that many terrorist incidents can manifest themselves in very small, non-lethal attacks. The five countries with the biggest increases in deaths from 2012 to 2013 are also the countries most impacted by terrorism. The number of deaths in these five countries has increased by 52 per cent over this period. The country with the biggest increase in deaths was Iraq, which saw nearly 4,000 more fatalities from terrorism in 2013 than 2012, representing a 164 per cent increase. The reason for the increase in Iraq is largely due to the actions of ISIL. The country with the second largest increase in the numbers of deaths was Pakistan. However, Pakistan saw a much smaller increase than Iraq with 520 more deaths in 2013 than 2012. Pakistan saw a substantial increase in the number of deaths per attack. In particular, the second and third biggest terrorist groups, Lashkar-e-Jhangvi and Jundallah, averaged 20 more fatalities per attack in 2013 than the previous year. This highlights the growing lethality of the groups. Syria saw the third largest increase in the number of deaths between 2012 and 2013, increasing by 71 per cent. The increase in deaths in Syria is partly a result of the ongoing civil war which has displaced millions since its start in 2011. Most of the deaths in Syria have been classified as war deaths rather than terrorist deaths. The increase in terrorism in Nigeria is due to Boko Haram which has increased in both members and resources. There was a significant increase in terrorism from 2009 after the founder and leader of Boko Haram, Mohammed Yusuf, was killed. The country with the fifth largest increase in deaths from terrorism is Afghanistan, where there was an increase of 13 per cent or 350 deaths from 2012 to 2013. This increase is largely due to further activity by the Taliban, which killed almost 2,350 in 2013 up from 2,050 in 2012. 26 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 30. FIGURE 6 LARGEST INCREASES IN DEATHS FROM 2012 TO 2013 The five biggest increases in deaths were in the countries where terrorism has the biggest impact. 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 INCREASE IN DEATHS FROM TERRORISM +3956 +354 +519 +449 +422 Country Iraq Pakistan Syria Nigeria Afghanistan Source: GTD 164% Percentage change 28% 71% 30% 13% FIGURE 7 LARGEST REDUCTIONS IN DEATHS FROM 2012 TO 2013 Countries with the largest reduction in deaths from terrorism have all had relatively high historical rates of terrorism. Percentage change -48% -43% -23% -85% Country Yemen Colombia Turkey Thailand Cote d’Ivoire -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 DECREASE IN DEATHS FROM TERRORISM Source: GTD -15% -52 -22.5 -50 -43 -40 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 27
  • 31. The five countries with the biggest decrease in deaths from 2012 to 2013 still maintain high levels of terrorist activity, with Yemen and Thailand being amongst the ten countries suffering the most from terrorism. The country with the biggest fall in deaths was Yemen, falling by 52, or 15 per cent. However, that does not mean that terrorism is no longer a significant threat. There were nearly 100 more attacks in 2013 than 2012. Similarly, the number of injuries from terrorism in Yemen increased from 2012 by 56 per cent to nearly 600. Yemen continues to confront a dual terrorist threat from the Houthis in the north of the country and al-Qa’ida in the Arab Peninsula (AQAP) in the south. Colombia experienced the second biggest improvement, with the death rate decreasing by 48 per cent to 55 deaths from 105 in 2012. This represents a substantial improvement over the decade average which was three times higher, averaging approximately 150 per year. The Revolutionary Armed Forces of Colombia (FARC), the largest terrorist group, have been in peace talks with the Colombian Government since 2013 and have substantially reduced the number of people they have killed. The third biggest improvement was seen in Turkey, which experienced 57 deaths from terrorism in 2013, down from 100 in 2012. The decline in Turkey was largely due to the Kurdistan Workers’ Party (PKK) decreasing terrorist attacks in Turkey in 2013. In 2012 the PKK killed 86 people, whereas in 2013 the PKK was responsible for only one death. However, the emergence of ISIL, which killed at least 53 people in Turkey in 2013, is a significant concern. The fourth biggest improvement occurred in Thailand which saw 23 per cent less deaths in 2013 than 2012. At 131 deaths, 2013 was the lowest number of fatalities from terrorism in Thailand since 2005. The fifth biggest improvement occurred in Cote d’Ivoire, which saw deaths decrease by 85 per cent with only four fatalities in 2013 compared to 27 in 2012. 2012 was the deadliest year for terrorists in Cote d’Ivoire since 2005. Terrorism in Cote d’Ivoire sometimes takes the form of periodic attacks with high casualties. This was the case in 2012 when a group loyal to the former President Gbagbo, who was arrested and imprisoned by the International Criminal Court, attacked a UN peacekeeping patrol and killed ten people. FIGURE 8 TARGETS OF TERRORISM, 2000-2013 The primary target of terrorism has historically been private property and citizens. However since 2009 there has been a substantial proportional upsurge in incidents targeting police. 40% 35% 30% 25% 20% 15% 10% 5% Source: GTD Religious figures/institutions YEAR PROPORTIONS OF ANNUAL ATTACKS 0 Private citizens property Police Business Government Transportation 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 28 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 32. PATTERNS AND CHARACTERISTICS OF TERRORIST ACTIVITY SINCE 2000 This section summarises the overarching patterns and characteristics of terrorist activity over the last 14 years in terms of targets, weapons used, tactics, lethality, ideology and location. The primary target of terrorism has been private property and citizens, followed by attacks on police. In MENA and South Asia explosives are primarily used, while in Central America, the Caribbean and Sub-Saharan Africa, firearms are more regularly used. In North America, incendiary devices/firebombs are common. Suicide attacks have been used in five per cent of all incidents since 2000. Most terrorist attacks do not result in heavy loss of life. In 2013 over 50 per cent of all attacks claimed no fatalities and only 10 per cent claimed more than five lives. The most lethal terrorism occurs in MENA, South Asia and Sub- Saharan Africa. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 Around five per cent of all deaths from terrorism since 2000 have occurred in OECD countries. Over the past 14 years there has been a large increase in religion as the motivator for terrorist activity. However in 2000, nationalist separatist movements were a more prominent motivation for terrorism than religion. Today, political and national separatist aims are still a significant driver of terrorism but unlike religion, they have seen comparatively little change over the period. Figure 8 highlights that the primary target of most terrorist attacks has been private property and citizens, however from 2009 onwards the preferred target group gradually switched to police. These two groups in 2013 accounted for around 50 per cent of all incidents. Attacks on private property and citizens decreased from 35 per cent of total attacks to 25 per cent, while attacks on police increased from 10 per cent of total attacks in 2009 to 24 per cent in 2013. The trends of these two target groups show large fluctuations since 2000 rising and falling with subsequent events in Iraq, Afghanistan and Pakistan. FIGURE 9 WEAPONS TRENDS IN TERRORISM, 2000-2013 The proportion of weapons used in terrorist acts has remained relatively constant globally with approximately 60 per cent of all attacks using explosives, 30 per cent using firearms and 10 per cent using other weapons. Explosives Firearms All others Suicide attacks 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 YEAR PROPORTIONS OF INCIDENTS 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0 Source: GTD Note: Suicide attacks are dashed to indicate that they are included regardless of weapon used and therefore should not be included when adding proportions to total 100 per cent. 29
  • 33. FIGURE 10 WEAPONS TYPES IN TERRORIST INCIDENTS BY REGION, 2000-2013 Explosive weapons are the predominant tactic used by terrorists in South America, MENA, Russia and the CIS, South Asia and Europe. Terrorists in Central America, the Caribbean and Sub-Saharan Africa largely use firearms. 100% 80% 60% 40% 20% PROPORTIONS OF INCIDENTS 0 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite Firearms Incendiary Other Over the 14-year period attacks on business, transportation and religious figures have all been significant but proportionally have remained roughly the same. These trends are once again largely driven by events in the five countries with the highest levels of terrorism. Figure 9 highlights that explosives have consistently been the most prevalent type of weapon used in attacks accounting for over 60 per cent of all incidents globally. Firearms are the next most common weapon being used around 30 per cent of the time. Only 10 per cent of attacks used some other form of weapon in 2013. Once again these global trends are highly dependent on the five countries with the highest levels of terrorism. In North America, for example, incendiary weapons have been the primary mode of attack, with 132 instances since 2000. In Sub-Saharan Africa, firearms are far more prominent than explosives. This is highlighted with the recent upsurge in Boko Haram, which has used firearms in over 50 per cent of their attacks since 2009. Figure 9 also highlights that only five per cent of all terrorist attacks in 2013 have been suicide attacks. Suicide attacks peaked in 2007 largely due to unrest in Iraq between terrorist groups and the then recently-formed Maliki Government, where 13 per cent of all terrorist incidents were suicide attacks. Europe South America Central America Caribbean Whilst the total number of attacks using suicide bombing, as well as the numbers of terrorist attacks in general has risen substantially in 2012 and 2013, suicide attacks have decreased as a proportion of total attacks. In 2012 and 2013 suicide attacks constituted five and six per cent respectively of all terrorist incidents compared to 2007 when suicide attacks accounted for 11 per cent of all attacks. Figure 12 highlights the changes in ideological drivers of terrorist organisations since 2000. Grouping over 350 of the most active organisations in the world into either religious, political or nationalist separatist groups shows that religious organisations have seen the largest rise in activity over the period.5 The prevalence of nationalist separatist and political terrorist organisations has remained relatively stable by comparison. Notably, religious ideology in the year 2000 was less a motivation for terrorism than nationalist separatism. Once again, these global trends are dominated by the five countries with the highest levels of terrorism. Figure 13 highlights that each region has its own profile. Since 2000, Source: GTD South Asia MENA Asia-Pacific Sub-Saharan Africa Russia CIS North America 30 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 34. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 FIGURE 11 LETHALITY TRENDS IN TERRORISM, 2000-2013 Since 2007, there have been proportionally fewer incidents recorded that have killed more than five people while the per cent of non-fatal attacks has increased. 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% Source: GTD YEAR PROPORTIONS OF FATALITIES IN AN INCIDENT 0 No fatalities 1–5 fatalities 5 fatalities 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 FIGURE 12 TRENDS IN TERRORIST GROUP IDEOLOGY, 2000-2013 Religion as a driving ideology for terrorism has dramatically increased since 2000. However, in 2000 Nationalist Separatist movements were more prominent. Political and National Separatist movements are still significant in 2013 but have seen little change in activity over the period. Religious Political Nationalist separatist 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 YEAR NUMBERS OF INCIDENTS 2000 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 0 Source: GTD Note: Only 358 of the most active terrorist organisations have been classified in this analysis. Therefore, the number of incidents will not match the total numbers shown in previous figures. 31
  • 35. FIGURE 13 TRENDS IN REGIONAL TERRORIST IDEOLOGIES, 2000-2013 Religious ideologies as a motivation for terrorism is not a global phenomenon. While it is predominant in Sub-Saharan Africa, MENA and South Asia, in the rest of the world terrorism is more likely to be driven by political or nationalistic and separatist movements. PROPORTIONS OF INCIDENTS Source: GTD South Asia MENA Sub-Saharan Africa Asia-Pacific Political Religious Nationalist separatist Europe Russia CIS South America Central America Caribbean North America 100% 80% 60% 40% 20% 0 terrorist activity in Europe, Central and South America has been almost entirely due to nationalist separatist movements and political organisations. Due to the conflict with Chechnya and Georgia, terrorism in Russia has been largely separatist in nature. In China and the Asia-Pacific, terrorist activity is approximately evenly split between all three ideological strains. Domestic terrorist incidents in North America have been primarily of a political nature. TRENDS AND PATTERNS OF SUICIDE ATTACKS Suicide attacks in general are confined to only a few countries. Figure 14 shows that of the 2,500 suicide attacks since 2000, over 90 per cent occurred in MENA and South Asia. In these two regions, suicide attacks average between 11 and 13 fatalities per incident. These are the highest averages for all regions with the exception of North America due to the attacks of September 11. Overall, suicide attacks average 11 deaths per attack while other terrorist attacks average two. By these numbers it can be derived that suicide attacks are on average four and a half times more lethal than other forms of terrorism. Statistically, suicide bombing assassination attempts are less successful than other forms, with 56 per cent of assassination attempts using suicide bombing ending in failure. Six per cent of suicide attacks are assassination attempts. However, suicide attacks are much more deadly than other forms of terrorism. RELIGION AS A DRIVING IDEOLOGY FOR TERRORISM HAS INCREASED SINCE 2000. 32 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 36. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 FIGURE 14 SUICIDE ATTACKS BY REGION FROM 2000 TO 2013 Since 2000, only five per cent of all incidents have been suicide attacks. Of these 2,500 events, over 90 per cent of attacks occurred in South Asia and MENA. Source: GTD Suicide attacks 2% 1% MENA Sub-Saharan Africa South Asia Russia CIS Other Southeast Asia 4% 3% 53% 37% All other attacks TABLE 1 NUMBER OF SUICIDE ATTACKS BY ORGANISATION FROM 2000 TO 2013 The Taliban, al-Qa’ida and ISIL have claimed the most suicide attacks in the period. However Hamas has proportionally used suicide attacks the most since 2000. ORGANISATION LAST ATTACK HAMAS (ISLAMIC RESISTANCE MOVEMENT) AL-AQSA MARTYRS BRIGADE AL-QA’IDA IN IRAQ ISLAMIC STATE OF IRAQ AND THE LEVANT AL-QA`IDA IN THE ARABIAN PENINSULA (AQAP) TEHRIK-I-TALIBAN PAKISTAN (TTP) LIBERATION TIGERS OF TAMIL EELAM (LTTE) AL-SHABAAB BOKO HARAM SUICIDE ATTACKS SINCE 2000 195 152 579 492 298 778 499 630 750 46 35 105 84 42 97 35 43 37 24% 23% 18% 17% 14% 12% 7% 7% 5% 2008 2008 2013 2013 2013 2013 2009 2013 2013 Total number of attacks Number of suicide attacks Percentage 33
  • 37. The Taliban, al-Qa’ida and its affiliates and ISIL have used suicide bombing the most since 2000, with a combined total of approximately 2,000 attacks. For these groups this represents between 12 and 18 per cent of their total attacks. All three of these organisations used suicide attacks in 2013. Whilst suicide attacks constitute a minority of total terrorist attacks, different terrorist groups use it as a tactic proportionally more than others. Hamas has historically had the highest prevalence of suicide attacks in their operations with 24 per cent of all incidents being suicide attacks. The Al-Aqsa Martyrs Brigade, another group based in the West Bank and Gaza, have used suicide attacks the second most at 23 per cent. However, neither Hamas nor the Al-Aqsa Martyrs Brigade has used this tactic since 2008. The majority of suicide attacks have been committed by jihadist groups in the Middle East. Whilst many of the groups which employ suicide tactics are associated with al-Qa’ida in some way, suicide bombing is not necessarily directed by al-Qa’ida.6 Many jihadists follow their family and peers rather than orders from afar.7 Over the last 14 years the numbers of suicide attacks have increased and the areas where the majority of attacks occurred have changed. From 2000 to 2003 the majority of suicide attacks occurred in Israel, the West Bank and Gaza. A truce started in 2003 and led to the gradual decline of attacks and it wasn’t till 2006 when Hamas won a majority in the Palestinian legislative election and denounced the use of suicide bombing that the tactic ended. In 2003, with the invasion of Iraq and subsequent war, suicide bombing started in Iraq. Iraq accounts for 43 per cent of all deaths from suicide attacks in the last decade. Proportionally however suicide attacks still remain low. SINCE 2000, OVER 90% OF SUICIDE ATTACKS TOOK PLACE IN MENA AND SOUTH ASIA. FIGURE 15 NUMBER OF DEATHS FROM SUICIDE ATTACKS, 2000 - 2013 After 2002 the number of suicide attacks in Israel, the West Bank and Gaza significantly declined, whereas the attacks that occurred in Iraq drastically increased. 500 400 300 200 100 Source: GTD Iraq YEAR DEATHS FROM SUICIDE ATTACKS 0 Total attacks Israel, West Bank Gaza 2000 2002 2004 2006 2008 2010 2012 2014 34 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 38. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 TABLE 2 DEATHS FROM TERRORISM IN 2013 FOR OECD COUNTRIES Terrorism killed 57 people in Turkey and 40 people in Mexico in 2013. The United States, United Kingdom, Greece, Israel, Chile and the Czech Republic also had fatal terrorist attacks, collectively losing 16 lives. ATTACKS DEATHS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 COUNTRY ATTACKS DEATHS COUNTRY Turkey 34 57 Germany 0 0 Mexico 4 40 Netherlands 0 0 United States 9 6 Belgium 0 0 UK* 131 3 Australia 0 0 Greece 53 2 Austria 0 0 Israel 28 2 Portugal 0 0 Chile 4 2 Estonia 0 0 Czech Republic 1 1 Iceland 0 0 Ireland 24 0 Hungary 0 0 Italy 7 0 Japan 0 0 France 5 0 Finland 0 0 Spain 5 0 New Zealand 0 0 Canada 3 0 Poland 0 0 Switzerland 2 0 Slovakia 0 0 Denmark 1 0 Slovenia 0 0 Norway 0 0 South Korea 0 0 Sweden 0 0 TERRORISM IN THE OECD Since 2000, seven per cent of all terrorist incidents and five per cent of all fatalities have occurred in OECD countries resulting in 4,861 deaths from 3,151 attacks. Excluding the September 11 attacks, OECD countries on average suffered approximately 229 attacks annually and lost on average 130 lives per year to terrorist acts. The U.S. accounted for the largest loss of life with 3,042 fatalities, however the September 11 attacks accounted for 2,996 of these deaths. Israel was the country with next highest number of fatalities at 841 representing 17 per cent of total fatalities followed by Turkey with 445 fatalities, representing 9 per cent of OECD fatalities. Excluding the September 11 attacks, there were still 1,865 deaths from terrorism in OECD countries over the 14 years from 2000 to 2013. Luxembourg is the only OECD country not to be covered by the GTI. Although OECD countries represent a minority of terrorist attacks globally, they have suffered from several of the most deadly attacks of the last 14 years. This includes the September 11 attacks which killed nearly 3,000 people, the Madrid train bombings which killed 191, the Norwegian massacre which killed 77 and the London bombings which killed 56. As the security situation varies from nation to nation, this report does not provide a detailed analysis of each individual country; instead it analyses the overall level of activity in OECD countries, which organisations historically have presented the greatest FIGURE 16 TERRORIST FATALITIES IN OECD COUNTRIES, 2000-2013 Five per cent of all 107,000 terrorist fatalities since 2000 have occurred in OECD countries. Source: GTD Rest of the world 95% OECD 5% risks and what are the most common types of attacks. In 2013 Turkey and Mexico were the countries in the OECD with the highest number of deaths from terrorism losing 57 and 40 lives respectively; however the UK recorded the highest number of incidents at 131 of which 88 per cent occurred in Northern Ireland. Other countries which suffered fatalities from terrorism were the United States, United Kingdom, Greece, Israel, Chile and the Czech Republic, collectively losing a total of 16 lives. Terrorist incidents were much higher in European OECD countries than North American and Latin American countries with 244 and 20 incidents recorded respectively in 2013. According to data from the International Centre for the Study of Radicalisation and Political Violence (ICSR), of the 34 OECD countries, 20 are believed to have citizens fighting in Syria against the Assad Government.8 Figure 26 (on page 57) summarises available data from a variety of sources on foreign fighters. 35
  • 39. THE MOST ACTIVE TERRORIST GROUPS IN THE OECD This section of the report covers the last five years in which 447 people died from terrorism in the OECD from 1,284 incidents. During the five years from 2009 to 2013, terrorism in the OECD was predominately concentrated in two countries, Turkey and Mexico, which had 58 per cent of all deaths over the last five years. Lone individuals who were not affiliated with any terrorist group accounted for 25 per cent of the deaths in OECD countries over the last five years with for 113 fatalities. The four groups covered below as well as individual actors accounted for 338 deaths or 76 per cent of all deaths from terrorism in OECD countries over the last five years. Kurdistan Workers’ Party (PKK) OECD countries attacked in last five years: Turkey Incidents in last five years in OECD countries: 156 Fatalities in last five years in OECD countries: 129 Injuries in last five years in OECD countries: 303 The PKK are responsible for the most terrorist deaths in the OECD in the last five years. They were established in 1978 and initially sought an independent Kurdish state.9 However, in recent years the group has focussed more or Kurdish autonomy within a Turkish state. Operating primarily in Turkey and Iraq, waves of violence waged by the PKK in the 1990’s are estimated to have caused approximately 40,000 casualties.10 In the past five years the PKK has been responsible for 29 per cent of all deaths from terrorism in the OECD. Individual Actors OECD countries attacked in last five years: Belgium, France, Great Britain, Norway, Sweden and the United States. Incidents in last five years: 35 Fatalities in last five years: 113 Injuries in last five years: 144 Individual actors are the second major cause of terrorist deaths in the OECD in the last five years. They are people who are not formally members of a terrorist group but may work in cooperation with one. In the last five years individual actors have been responsible for over a quarter of all terrorist deaths in OECD countries. These individuals could either be attempting to promote their own cause or to support another group. One prominent example of lone wolf terrorism occurred in Norway in July 2011 when a right-wing extremist killed 77 and injured over 300 in two attacks in part to promote his manifesto. Another example is in 2013 with the Boston Marathon Bombing on April 15 which was conducted by two brothers who learned ideology and terrorist tactics from al-Qa’ida publications.11 36 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 40. Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) OECD countries attacked in last five years: Turkey Incidents in last five years in OECD countries: 2 Fatalities in last five years in OECD countries: 53 Injuries in last five years in OECD countries: 140 Over the last five years ISIL was responsible for a quarter of all deaths from terrorism in Turkey. This makes them the fourth most active group in the OECD. What is striking is that they have not been active in Turkey for long and in a short period of time have replaced the PKK as the most deadly group in the country killing 53 people in 2013. It is important to note that these numbers only count up to the end of 2013. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 Devrimci Halk Kurtulus Cephesi (DHKP/C) OECD countries attacked in last five years: Turkey Incidents in last five years in OECD countries: 10 Fatalities in last five years in OECD countries: 6 Injuries in last five years in OECD countries: 16 The DHKP/C, a Marxist-Leninist party formed in Turkey in 1978 is the fifth most active terrorist group in the OECD over the past five years.14 It aims to establish a socialist state within Turkey and is strongly opposed to the United States, NATO and Turkish establishment.15 They have claimed responsibility for the suicide bombing outside the U.S. Embassy in Ankara in 2013 which killed an embassy guard and injured one.16 Individualidades Tendiendo a lo Salvaje (Individuals Tending Toward Savagery) OECD countries attacked in last five years: Mexico Incidents in last five years in OECD countries: 2 Fatalities in last five years in OECD countries: 37 Injuries in last five years in OECD countries: 102 This group, based in Mexico, have branded themselves as anarchist eco-terrorists opposed to nanotechnology.12 They have claimed responsibility for an explosion at the Pemex state oil company offices which killed 37 people in January 2013. They have also claimed responsibility of shooting a biotechnology researcher, Ernesto Mendez Salinas to death in 2011.13 If responsible for both attacks then they are the fourth most deadly terrorist group in the OECD in the last five years. Deaths from the drug wars which have been active in Mexico over the last decade are not classified as terrorism because they are organised criminal groupings without unified political or ideological objectives. LONE INDIVIDUALS WHO WERE NOT AFFILIATED WITH ANY TERRORIST GROUP ACCOUNTED FOR 25 PER CENT OF THE DEATHS IN OECD COUNTRIES. 37
  • 41. ASSESSING TERRORISM RISK This section describes how the results of the statistical analysis carried out for the GTI can be used to develop a quantitative understanding of the future risk of terrorism. Using terrorist incidents and events data dating back to 1970 and comparing it to over 5,000 socio-economic, political and conflict indicators, three groups of factors related to terrorist activity have been identified. Countries that are weak on these factors and do not have high levels of terrorism are assessed as being at risk. The correlations section of this report details the most significant socio-economic correlates with terrorism. There are three groups of factors: Social hostilities between different ethnic, religious and linguistic groups, lack of intergroup cohesion and group grievances. Measures of state repression such as extrajudicial killings, political terror and gross human rights abuses. Other forms of violence such violent crime, organised conflict deaths and violent demonstrations. Terrorism risk can be clearly grouped into three categories or contexts: 1. The risk of terrorism in the context of a larger ongoing conflict. 2. The risk of terrorism in countries without conflict. 3. The risk of ‘black swan’ attacks. This analysis finds that meaningful risk factors can be identified for two of the three risk categories, (1) risk of terrorism in a context of a larger conflict, and (2) risk of terrorism in countries without conflict. ‘Black Swan’ events are by their nature very difficult to predict, but statistical analysis can provide important context to their overall likelihood. The methodology for conceptualising each category of risk is detailed further within this section. Understanding the statistical patterns of terrorist activity and its socio-economic drivers is a useful starting point for conceptualising the key risk factors. Over 5,000 datasets, indexes and attitudinal surveys were statistically compared to the GTI to find the most significant socio-economic factors linked to terrorist activity. This process identified several key indicators which were significantly correlated to terrorism. These factors were compared to the literature on the conditions that are considered conducive for breeding terrorist violence. There was significant overlap between the IEP statistical analysis and the literature.17 Several key variables were then chosen and a multivariate analysis was performed to understand key causal factors. This process is further detailed in the correlations section. Key factors analysed were: Weak state capacity. Illegitimate and corrupt governments. Powerful external actors upholding corrupt regimes. Extremist ideologies. Historical violence and conflict. Inequality in power. Repression by foreign occupation or colonial powers. Discrimination based on ethnic or religious origin. Failure of the state to integrate dissident groups of emerging social classes. Social injustice. To determine which countries are most at risk of a large increase in terrorism, the 162 countries covered in the GTI were compared to these factors to find which countries performed poorly on these measures and were not already suffering from high levels of terrorism. 38 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 42. KEY FINDINGS Based on measuring these factors IEP has identified the following 13 countries as being at risk of substantial increased terrorist activity from current levels: —Angola —Bangladesh —Burundi —Central African Republic —Cote d’Ivoire —Ethiopia —Iran —Israel —Mali —Mexico —Myanmar —Sri Lanka —Uganda Countries with higher levels of terrorism perform significantly worse on the Pillars of Peace, a framework developed by IEP to assess the positive peace factors that create peaceful societies. The ten countries with the most deaths from terrorism in 2013 performed 26 per cent worse on the Pillars of Peace compared to the international average. These countries performed particularly poorly on three out of the eight Pillars of Peace. These three Pillars are: Free flow of information, which captures the extent to which citizens can gain access to information, whether the media is free and independent. Peaceful countries tend to have free and independent media, which disseminate information in a way that leads to greater openness and helps individuals and civil society work together. This leads to better decision-making and rational responses in times of crisis. Good relations with neighbours, which refers to the relations between individuals and between communities as well as to cross-border relations. Some of the countries with the highest levels of terrorism border each other. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 Acceptance of the rights of others, which includes both the formal laws that guarantee basic freedoms as well as the informal social and cultural norms that relate to behaviours of citizens. Yemen is the worst performing country in this Pillar, with Nigeria and Pakistan also performing in the bottom ten. The countries with the highest rates of terrorism also have certain commonalities in behaviours and attitudes. Corruption is generally higher among the 10 countries with the highest number of deaths from terrorism. According to the Gallup World Values Survey, these countries experience 11 per cent more people facing a bribe situation than the international average. All ten countries have significant Muslim populations and there are relatively more people expressing the view that the West is in conflict with the Muslim world. The rates of political terror and political instability are also significantly higher in these ten countries than the international average. BOX 1 TERRORIST ACTIVITY AND THE PILLARS OF PEACE One of the most important findings in this report is that there is not a strong statistical link between poverty and terrorism.18 Many people who join terrorist groups in wealthy countries are well educated and come from middle class families.19 A detailed understanding of what is statistically associated with terrorism is contained in the correlates section of this report. Other measures which didn’t correlate include life expectancy, mean years of schooling and economic factors such as GDP growth. In comparison to other forms of violence, in 2012 the number of people killed by homicide was 40 times greater than those killed by terrorism. Furthermore, terrorist incidents that kill more than 100 people are rare and represent only 1 in 1000 terrorist incidents. The required resources and the planning needed to conduct such attacks are more likely to be outside the capabilities of most existing groups. 39
  • 43. TERRORISM IN COUNTRIES NOT IN CONFLICT TERRORISM IN THE COUNTRIES WITH ONGOING CONFLICT In contrast to countries immersed in significant conflict, there are terrorist activities in countries where there is no ongoing conflict. Two factors with a strong statistical relationship in these environments are political terror and low levels of intergroup cohesion. To further explore these linkages, IEP has compared the levels of political terror and intergroup cohesion of countries since 1996 that have suffered a major terrorist attack.22 Of the 6,100 major terrorist acts analysed, over 90 per cent occurred in countries which at the time were in the lowest quartile of societal group cohesion as measured by the Indices of Social Development.23 A similar statistic exists when looking at political terror with over 90 per cent of the countries that suffered major terrorist incidents having the highest levels of political terror and political instability. High levels of extrajudicial killings and disappearances were common in about 70 per cent of the countries targeted by major terrorist attacks. The most common context for the onset of terrorist violence is within an ongoing conflict. According to the GTD there were around 40,000 terrorist attacks in which at least one person was killed between 1970 and 2013. This number spans 178 countries. Of these 40,000 terrorist attacks, around 70 per cent occurred in countries that were at the time already immersed in serious political, civil, ethnic or international conflicts.20 This statistic remains true even if you remove terrorist attacks that have occurred in MENA and South Asia. Table 3 lists countries that are currently suffering from ongoing conflict of this nature.21 Of these, only six are not in the twenty countries with the highest levels of terrorism, Central African Republic, Ethiopia, Israel, Mali, Mexico and Myanmar. TABLE 3 COUNTRIES THAT MAY EXPERIENCE INCREASES IN TERRORISM DUE TO ONGOING CONFLICT The following countries are currently suffering from ongoing conflict. Of these only six are not in the twenty countries with the highest levels of terrorism as measured by the GTI. These six are determined at risk of increases in terrorist activity. COUNTRY Afghanistan Myanmar* Central African Republic* Nigeria Colombia Pakistan Democratic Republic of the Congo Philippines Egypt Russia Ethiopia* Somalia India South Sudan Iraq Sudan Israel* Syria Mali* Thailand Mexico* Turkey Yemen *Note: not in the twenty countries with the highest levels of terrorism as measured by the GTI. FIGURE 17 PER CENT OF TERRORIST ATTACKS DURING ONGOING CONFLICT 1970-2012 Over 70 per cent of terrorist attacks occur within a country during periods of major conflict. During a period of major conflict. 72% Outside of a period of major conflict. 28% Source: GTD and Center for Systemic Peace, Major Episodes of Political Violence, 1946-2013 40 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 44. BOX 2 DISTINGUISHING BETWEEN TERRORIST ACTIVITY AND WARTIME ACTIVITY The Global Terrorism Database (GTD) and the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START) classify terrorism as actions outside the context of legitimate warfare activities. That means only acts which are contrary to international humanitarian law, such as the deliberate targeting of civilians, conducted by sub-national actors are viewed as terrorism. The actions of governments do not get counted in the GTD and are therefore not included in the GTI. The GTD and START do not count state terrorism and only record incidents by sub-national actors. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 Battle deaths when state actors are involved are not defined as acts of terrorism, but rather the result of war. As such, a group such as ISIL attacking a Syrian Army regiment would not be classified as terrorism by either side but as a wartime activity. Terrorism often invokes a distinct political or ideological message to be conveyed to a larger audience than the immediate victims, which is another reason that battle conflicts are not regarded as terrorism. Political terror refers to human and physical rights abuses as measured by Amnesty International and the U.S. State Department. This includes violations of human rights, state-sanctioned killings, torture and political imprisonment.24 Intergroup cohesion refers to relations of cooperation and respect between identity groups within a society.25 A breakdown of this social fabric increases the risk of violent conflict between groups within a country. Importantly, poverty and other development indicators do not show strong relationships to high levels of terrorism. Both of these findings are corroborated with literature in the field. By analysing the countries that are in a state of peace but have high levels of political terror and low levels of intergroup cohesion it is possible to identify countries that have the risk of increased terrorist activity. IEP has analysed the most up-to-date data on these factors globally. Table 4 lists countries that are currently not in outright war or conflict but have the characteristics of those countries that suffer from high levels of terrorism and are outside of the 20 countries with the highest levels of terrorism in the GTI 2014. TABLE 4 COUNTRIES NOT IN CONFLICT BUT AT RISK OF HIGHER LEVELS OF TERRORISM The following countries exhibit traits that are normally associated with countries with higher levels of terrorism. COUNTRY EXTRAJUDICIAL KILLING LACK OF WOMEN’S POLITICAL RIGHTS LACK OF INTERGROUP COHESION POLITICAL INSTABILITY RANK IN GTI 2014 Bangladesh 9 9 9 9 23 Iran 9 9 9 28 Sri Lanka 9 9 9 9 37 Burundi 9 9 9 39 Cote d’Ivoire 9 9 9 9 40 Uganda 9 9 9 9 52 Angola 9 9 9 9 95 *Note: ticks show where countries score in the bottom 25 per cent globally. 41
  • 45. Not all terrorist incidents are equally devastating, and not all terrorist groups are equally effective. ‘Black Swan’ events are by their nature, unknown, unpredictable and devastating. Understanding the statistical properties and patterns of these attacks in the context of all terrorist attacks can provide information that can help with prediction and risk assessment. Whilst the fear of large scale and unpredicted black swan terrorist incidents loom large in the public imagination, the reality is that most terrorist incidents result in no deaths. Only one terrorist attack has resulted in more than a thousand deaths, that being the attacks of September 11th, with 49 attacks resulting in more than one hundred deaths. Just over half of all terrorist attacks recorded in the GTI led to one or more deaths, with the vast majority of those resulting in less than ten deaths. The majority of terrorist organisations are relatively ineffective, with the vast majority of deaths from terrorism being the responsibility of the four largest terrorist organisations in the world, each of which has the resources, manpower, experience, and expertise in order to carry out successful attacks. Even with these resources, most large terrorist organisations have had very limited success in pulling off large scale attacks, especially beyond the territories in which they operate. By analysing the distribution and intensity of terrorist activity it can be seen that the majority of deaths from terrorism occur from a relatively small percentage of attacks. Figure 18 shows in fact around 50 per cent of all incidents claim no lives and most of the remainder claim less than ten. By analysing the cumulative distribution of deaths Figure 19 shows that 80 per cent of all deaths were caused by only 17 per cent of all the attacks since 2000. Such statistical properties lead to the observation that deaths from terrorism follows a power-law probability distribution. Based on purely mathematical assumption of the power-law distribution there may even have been slightly fewer terrorist attacks claiming between 100 and 1000 casualties than expected. Logical explanations for this include successful counter-terrorism efforts, or that large scale terrorist organisations focus on encouraging either small or independent terrorist cells to pursue smaller scale attacks. If deaths from terrorism do follow a power-law distribution, it is expected to see a logarithmic relationship between deaths in a given incident and the number of incidents with at least that many deaths. This is indeed what is observed, as shown in figure 20. Large scale terrorist attacks like the September 11 attacks, 7/7 London attack, the Madrid train bombing, or the Beslan hostage crisis are rare but not completely unexpected. Terrorism as a tactic of sustained mass destruction on a large scale is mostly ineffective. However, large scale explosions and mass deaths cause large, unpredictable and unintended consequences whereas individual deaths have much smaller flow-on effects. Therefore comparing ‘black swan’ events with smaller incidents is difficult as these large events can be profoundly course changing and result in significant domestic and international consequences well beyond their initial impact. ‘BLACK SWAN’ ATTACKS FIGURE 18 NUMBER OF INCIDENTS CATEGORISED BY DEATHS. Just half of all terrorist incidents result in no fatalities. 100–1000 Deaths 1,000 Deaths No deaths 24,413 10–100 Deaths 2,427 1–10 Deaths 22,470 49 1 Source: GTD 42 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 46. FIGURE 19 CUMULATIVE DEATHS FROM TERRORISM SINCE 2000 80 per cent of all deaths have occurred from only 17 per cent of all attacks. ATTACK RANK BASED ON FATALITIES 60% FIGURE 20 NUMBER OF DEATHS PER INCIDENT VS NUMBER OF INCIDENTS WITH AT LEAST THAT MANY DEATHS Terrorist incidents with extremely high casualties rarely occur. 100,000 10,000 1,000 100 10 1 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 1 10 100 1,000 10,000 NUMBER OF ATTACKS WITH AT LEAST THIS MANY DEATHS Source: GTD Note: Log Scale NUMBER OF DEATHS IN A SINGLE INCIDENT 100% 80% 40% 20% 0% 1 8330 24413 49360 PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL FATALITIES Four fifths of all fatalities since 2000 were caused by the top 8,330 most lethal terrorist attacks. Therefore 80 per cent of fatalities come from about 17 per cent of the attacks. 43
  • 47. Comparing the number of deaths from homicide versus the number of deaths from terrorism from 2000 to 2011 in the four countries that experienced ‘black swan’ events it is possible to compare the ratio between homicides and terrorism. Four examples of significant ‘black swan’ incidents since 2000 include the 2011 Norway attack, the 2004 Madrid bombings, the 2005 7/7 London attacks and September 11. A comparison of deaths from these four events to national homicides of each country over the period of 2000 to 2011 is shown in Table 5. What is apparent is that even in countries which have experienced a devastating terrorist attack in the last ten years; significantly more people were killed by homicide than by terrorism over the period. At the global level, the difference between deaths from intentional homicide and terrorism is very significant. Figure 21 shows that in 2012 a total of around 437,000 lives were lost due to homicide, by contrast in the same year, a total of 11,000 people were killed from terrorism representing a number 40 times less than homicide.26 Therefore the likelihood of being killed through intentional homicide is much greater than being killed in a terrorist attack. Of course while it should be noted that while terrorism may claim fewer lives, its effect on a community is traumatic, creating fear, changing daily habits and producing substantial economic costs. x40 TOTAL NUMBER OF DEATHS 2000 - 2011 FIGURE 21 NUMBER OF DEATHS BY HOMICIDES VS. TERRORISM GLOBALLY, 2012 Around 40 times more people were killed globally by homicide than terrorism in 2012. DEATHS IN 2012 500,000 400,000 300,000 200,000 100,000 0 437,000 Homicides Terrorism Source: GTD, UNODC Global Study on Homicide 2013 11,000 COMPARING HOMICIDE TO TERRORIST DEATHS TABLE 5 DEATHS BY HOMICIDE VS. DEATHS FROM FOUR LARGE ‘BLACK SWAN’ EVENTS Even in countries which have experienced a devastating terrorist attack in the last ten years; significantly more people were killed by homicide than by terrorism over the 2000-2011 period. Country Deaths from terrorism (T) Homicides (H) [1] Ratio = (H – T)/ (T) Norway 75 518 1:6 Spain 249 5,897 1:23 United Kingdom 57 10,776 1:188 United States 3029 195,948 1:64 Source: UNODC, Homicide Statistics, http://www.unodc.org/gsh/en/data.html ,2013, (accessed 7 October 2014). AN INDIVIDUAL IS 40 TIMES MORE LIKELY TO BE A VICTIM OF HOMICIDE THAN BE KILLED IN A TERRORIST ATTACK. 44 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 48. The economic costs of terrorism go further than the destruction of property and the loss of life. The increased costs of security, military expenditure and insurance often outweigh the original attack. Further, terrorist activities increase uncertainty in the market, decrease foreign investment, alter trade and change consumption and savings behaviour.27 Long run effects can be long lasting and have a significantly larger effect on the economies of developing economies. In 2001 the IMF estimated that terrorism cost the U.S. 0.75 per cent of GDP or approximately US$75 billion per year, while increases in terrorism in Nigeria in 2010 was associated with a decline of Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) by 30 per cent the following year.28 The total costs of terrorism can be divided into two categories, primary or direct costs and secondary or indirect costs. Primary costs refer to the immediate damage caused by an act of terrorism. For example, the primary costs include the loss of life, injury and damage to infrastructure. These are the immediate costs in the aftermath of an event. Secondary costs are more complicated and can span a greater time period. These are disruptions to an economy due to a terror event or threat. This may take the form of increased security costs, changed consumption patterns, decreased FDI, decreased trade, and decreased tourism. Trying to quantify the total global cost of terrorism is difficult. While direct costs of terrorism are largely agreed upon in the literature, secondary costs, however, are wide ranging. For example, studies trying to assess the cost of the September 11 attack have estimates ranging from $35 billion to $109 billion.29 In addition, terrorism as a term covers such a vast array of attacks that generalisation is almost impossible. For example a bioterrorist attack could be delivered using a poison, virus or bacteria, each of which would have varying degrees of damage. The estimated economic cost of such an attack could range from $477.7 million to $26.2 billion for every 100,000 persons exposed.30 Other economic costs of terrorism included in a report published by the Australian Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade which estimated in 2013 the extra trade costs due to terrorism alone could be as high as $180 billion. A report by RAND published in 2011 outlined three different levels of terrorism and associated costs within the U.S. These were moderate, severe and nuclear. Table 6 is a rough estimate of the associated direct costs of each category of an attack according to their calculations. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 TABLE 6 RAND ESTIMATED DIRECT COSTS OF TERRORIST ATTACKS WITHIN THE U.S. A RAND study published in 2011, estimated the costs of terrorist attacks on the US economy by dividing attacks into three groups. Severe attacks such as the 9/11 bombings are estimated to cost the economy 1 per cent of GDP, while a nuclear attack would double this. These are rough estimations and the location of the attack would have major effects on the outcome. MODERATE SEVERE NUCLEAR Cost per year $11 billion $183 billion $465 billion Cost of life $4 million per person $4 million per person $4 million per person Cost of injury $40,000 per person $40,000 per person $40,000 per person Annual resource cost $10 billion $200 billion $300 billion GDP 0.05% 1% 2% The primary costs of terrorism can incur huge totals, especially large scale events such as the London and Madrid bombings and the September 11 attacks. The large loss of life and destruction of infrastructure from September 11 totalled $55 billion in New York alone, while secondary effects such as increased security ($589 billion), decreased economic activity ($123 billion) and other costs have been totalled to as much as $3.3 trillion.31 ECONOMIC COST OF TERRORISM THE LONG TERM INDIRECT COSTS OF TERRORISM CAN BE TEN TO 20 TIMES LARGER THAN THE DIRECT COSTS. 45
  • 49. Trade and FDI are negatively affected by acts of terrorism. However there are exceptions, single incidents, even when major events, do not seem to affect FDI. Studies have shown that the 9/11 terrorist attacks had little effect on U.S. FDI,32 while FDI in Spain actually increased by $6 billion in 2005 following the 2004 Madrid train bombings and by another $11 billion in 2006.33 Decreased FDI flows due to terrorism were recorded in Greece and Spain in the 1980s and 1990s and were worth up to half a billion for each nation.34 The effect has been more dramatic in Nigeria where it has been estimated that FDI flows dropped $6.1 billion in 2010 due to Boko Haram’s acts of terrorism.35 This represents a decline of almost 30 per cent from the previous fiscal year. This is shown in Figure 22. As developing economies or fragile states are generally more volatile, investment comes at a higher risk. As a result, terrorism in high risk countries drastically lowers investment. These acts also increase the security premium, further increasing the cost of economic activity and leading investors to look elsewhere. This is one reason why acts of terror within developing nations have a more drastic effect on FDI than in developed nations. The average FDI within the ten countries most affected by terrorism is less than half of that of OECD countries. Trade as a per cent of GDP is 51 per cent for these countries, while OECD countries are on average 87.5 per cent.36 As many developing economies depend on trade flows with the developed world and rely on FDI inflows, these decreases have substantial long-term economic and developmental effects. Figure 23 shows the correlation between terrorist incidents and trade activity as a per cent of GDP in Colombia. While not all change can be attributed terrorism, it demonstrates there can be a notable potential impact. TERRORISM, INVESTMENT AND TRADE Increased costs of insurance Following the 9/11 attacks, insurance premiums on large infrastructure within the U.S. skyrocketed, Chicago’s O’Hare airport annual insurance policy increased in cost from $125,000 to $6.9 million while its insurance coverage for terrorism decreased from $750 million to $150 million per annum.37 This resulted on the creation of the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act (TRIA), which was passed resulting in the government reimbursing up to 85 per cent of losses due to acts of terrorism. Similar policies have been seen in Australia following the Bali bombings, the UK, Germany and France. GDP Decrease Changes in consumer behaviour, decreased investment, and decreased trade, destruction of human and physical capital all combine to decrease a country’s GDP. Increased government spending Governments often have to take on the financial burden of any terrorist acts which result in damage to property or people. The opportunity cost of such large scale expenditure has the potential to take funding away from other infrastructure investments and social investments in education, the health sector, transport and RD. Changes in consumer behaviour The way people act within an economy changes as a result of terrorism. Consumption patterns change, people invest more wealth into insurance which as a result is diverted from other expenditure. In extreme cases individuals are reluctant to move in public spaces due to the fear of attack thereby decreasing expenditure and economic activity. BOX 3 OTHER FLOW-ON COSTS OF TERRORISM 46 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 50. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 FIGURE 22 CHANGES IN FDI AS A PER CENT OF GDP IN NIGERIA AND BENIN, 2006-2013 Since increased violence from Boko Haram in 2009, FDI in Nigeria has decreased sharply from five per cent of GDP to just one per cent, while FDI in neighbouring Benin has shown increases. 5 4 3 0 Source: World Bank Boko Haram increases in activity. FDI (NET INFLOWS) PER CENT OF GDP Benin 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2 1 -1 Nigeria YEAR FIGURE 23 COLOMBIA: TERRORIST INCIDENTS COMPARED TO TRADE AS PER CENT OF GDP, 2008–2013 While a large drop in trade in 2008 was attributed to the global financial crisis, there is a significant statistical relationship between trade and terrorism of –R=0.79 over the last 6 years. TRADE AS PER PER CENT OF GDP 160 120 80 40 0 Source: World Bank Data, GTD 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 ACTS OF TERRORISM r=0.79 Trade as % of GDP Acts of terrorism 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 47
  • 51. TERRORIST GROUP CASE STUDIES In 2013 four terrorist groups were responsible for 66 per cent of all deaths from claimed terrorism incidents. These four groups are the most deadly terrorist groups in the last fifteen years, and have killed at least 25,000 people in a decade. The deadliest terrorist group is the Taliban and the TTP, which has killed over 12,000 people, closely followed by al-Qa’ida and its major affiliates that have killed at least 8,585 people. The two other largest terrorist groups have shorter histories. Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) and Boko Haram both became more active in 2009, which was the first year that either group killed over 300 people. Based on data up to the end of 2013, these two groups have killed in excess of 3,000 people in four years, half of which was in 2013 alone. The ten largest terrorist groups have varying agendas and are a combination of religiously motivated groups, separatist movements and ideological groups wanting a change of system. The four most deadly organisations all ascribe broadly to the Wahhabi sect of Sunni Islam and have an association with al-Qa’ida. The origins of al-Qa’ida can be traced to the Soviet war in Afghanistan, where they were one of the many groups fighting the Soviet Union. Similarly, the Taliban was involved in opposing Soviet forces in Afghanistan. The two groups have had close ties since 1996 when they trained together in Afghanistan. In recent times al-Qa’ida has decentralised and its direct affiliates continue to be significant. Of its major branches or affiliated organisations al-Qa’ida in Iraq (AQI) has been responsible for the most deaths. Following the death of AQI’s leader and a split over tactics, Islamic State of Iraq (ISI) emerged from AQI. ISI was renamed Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) and is the biggest terrorist group operating in Iraq today. It has since adopted the name of Islamic State, but this report uses the ISIL designation. Other large affiliates of al-Qa’ida include al-Qa’ida in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP) based in Yemen which has been responsible for nearly 1,000 deaths and al-Qa’ida in the Lands of the Islamic Maghreb (AQLIM) based in Algeria and 48 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 52. responsible for over 500 deaths. There have been reports that Boko Haram is affiliated with al-Qa’ida, with founding member Mohamad Yusuf reportedly receiving early funding from Usama bin Ladin.38 There are only two other terrorist groups among the ten most deadly groups which are also motivated by religion. The Lord’s Resistance Army in Uganda and South Sudan is driven in part by Christian fundamentalism.39 The other religiously motivated group, Al-Shabaab in Somalia, is an al-Qa’ida affiliate. Al Qa’ida affiliates are defined as either being an ally or as having a familial relationship to al-Qa’ida. The activity of these 30 organisations span South Asia, MENA, Europe, Africa, North America and the Asia-Pacific and have claimed 27,169 lives over the period. Activity since 2009 has been largely in Afghanistan, Syria, Iraq, Yemen, Algeria and Nigeria. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 The changing name of ISIL reflects the many changes of the organisation. Originally al-Qa’ida in Iraq (AQI), the group changed their name to Islamic State in Iraq (ISI) when they split off from al-Qa’ida. In April 2013 the group changed its name to Islamic state of Iraq and Syria (ISIS) to reflect that it was engaged in the Syrian civil war. Due to translation ambiguities it is also known as the Islamic State of or Iraq and the Levant (ISIL). In June 2014 the group solely referred to itself as the Islamic State or IS reflecting its shift of focus from a regime change in Syria to a desire to create a ‘caliphate’ or sovereign state. It has been referred to as Da’ish (or Daesh) as that is the Arabic acronym, although ISIL supporters dislike this name in part because it sounds similar to unpleasant words in Arabic.40 This report uses the ISIL designation. FIGURE 24 10 MOST DEADLY TERRORIST ORGANISATIONS BY NUMBERS KILLED (2000-2013) The four biggest terrorist groups in 2013 are also the deadliest groups of the last fifteen years. Taliban* Boko Haram Indian Maoists 8,000 4,000 Source: GTD Note: Taliban includes Afghanistan and Pakistan Taliban. Al-Shabaab Revolutionary Armed Forces of Colombia (FARC) 12,000 10,000 6,000 2,000 0 FATALITIES Al-Qa'ida ISIL (all major affiliates) Lord's Resistance Army Tamil Tigers Chechen Rebels BOX 4 THE MANY NAMES OF ISIL 49
  • 53. COMPARING TERRORIST ORGANISATIONS INCIDENTS, DEATHS INJURIES In 2013 these four groups are responsible for 66 per cent of all deaths from terrorist attacks in which the perpetrator is known. Deaths from other groups operating in Pakistan, Syria, Somalia, India, and Kenya account for a further 21 per cent of deaths in the same year. Prominent groups operating in these countries include the Al-Nusrah Front in Syria, Al-Shabaab in Somalia and Kenya, Lashkar-e-Jhangvi in Pakistan and Maoists in India. Al-Qa’ida 66% Taliban * ISIL Boko Haram Of all attacks in 2013 in which the perpetrator was known, these four groups were responsible for 66 per cent of all resulting deaths. *Includes both Afghanistan and Pakistan Taliban. 9115 12185 3111 Al-Qa’ida Taliban Boko Haram ISIL 8081 492 3440 1759 750 8763 2757 8585 1089 Total, 2000-2013 Incidents Deaths Injuries TRENDS, 2000-2013 Boko Haram ISIL Al-Qa'ida (all major affiliates) YEAR NUMBER OF DEATHS 3,000 2,500 2,000 1,500 1,000 500 0 Taliban 2001 2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 50 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 54. TARGETS TACTICS, 2000-2013 FREQUENCY AND TYPES OF ATTACKS / / / Al-Qa’ida Taliban 740 /268 / 81 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 Firearms Explosives Others Key 1 icon = 50 incidents TARGETS OF ATTACKS / / / / ISIL 420 / 51 / 21 270 / 375 / 105 622 / 1612 133 / 390 Boko Haram Al-Qa’ida 289 / 520 / 35 / 245 Taliban Taliban ISIL Al-Qa’ida Note: al-Qa’ida includes al-Qa’ida and all major affiliates. * Sources detailed in endnotes. Boko Haram 156 / 307 150 / 137 1345 / 966 / 446 ISIL 219 / 158 30 / 85 Private citizens property Government, police military Others Educational religious institutions CAPACITY, NUMBER OF FIGHTERS* 0 20,000 40,000 36,000-60,000 20,000-30,500 3,700-19,000 500-9000 60,000 Boko Haram High Estimate Low Estimate NUMBER OF FIGHTERS 51
  • 55. ISLAMIC STATE OF IRAQ AND THE LEVANT (ISIL) Iraq’s wheat growing land. The second main source of revenue is through foreign investors.44 The third revenue stream is through looting and controlling resources. Kidnapping and extortion, as well as the charging of electricity, fines and religious taxes, are also major revenue streams for ISIL.45 MEMBERSHIP Recent estimates suggest that ISIL has access to up to 31,500 soldiers.46 This represents up to a fifteen fold increase on the numbers of AQI in 2011 which the U.S. Department of State estimated at 1,000 to 2,000.47 The majority of these soldiers are from Syria and Iraq, attracted in part by steady wages. ISIL reportedly pays soldiers $400 per month and a bonus every year with added premiums for a dependant which is a good wage for the region.48 ISIL actively recruits foreign fighters, posting on social media in multiple languages and publishing its propaganda magazine, Dabiq, in English. The war in Syria has attracted at least 12,000 foreign fighters. As the Syrian civil war has continued, foreign fighters have been more attracted to extremist groups like ISIL over more mainstream rebel groups.49 ACTIVITIES The military and intelligence wings remain significant as ISIL attempt to gain and maintain control over land. Military operations include training camps as well as military incursions and terrorist activity. Terrorist activity takes the form of bombings targeting private citizens, police and businesses. In 2013 there were 350 terrorist attacks by ISIL which killed 1,400 people and injured 3,600. ISIL conducted over 50 suicide bombings which killed an average of nine and injured 17 people. ISIL is both an insurgency and a quasi-government for the regions it controls in both Iraq and Syria. ISIL has developed a governing bureaucracy since shifting its focus from overthrowing the Assad regime in Syria to establishing a state. There are departments which draft and implement ISIL policies. Responsibilities include developing laws, recruitment, controlling financial matters including a 410 page annual report and oil and weapon sales, propaganda and media outreach. As well as internal organisational roles, councils have adopted governance responsibilities including the establishment of Islamic courts as well as policing and punishment. There are also reports that ISIL have taken on service delivery functions including electricity, repairing roads, food kitchens and, in some areas, post offices.50 HISTORY The Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) has emerged as the largest Sunni terrorist organisation active in the Middle East. The group was originally al-Qa’ida in Iraq (AQI). However following the death of the head of AQI, Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, and disagreements over tactics, a group split from AQI and formed the Islamic State in Iraq (ISI). ISIL became known for extreme violence and terror tactics as a major actor in the Syrian civil war in 2013 and with its rapid expansion into Syria and then Iraq in 2014. In February 2014 al-Qa’ida formally broke ties with ISIL, with leader Ayman al-Zawahiri stating ISIL disobeyed directions from al-Qa’ida to kill fewer civilians. IDEOLOGY ISIL is an extremist Wahhabi insurgency with the primary goal of establishing a regional caliphate, or state, under Salafist oriented Islamic law.41 The group promotes violence to those who do not adhere to its interpretations. ISIL aspires to control the Levant region which includes Israel, Iraq, Jordan, Lebanon and Syria. It is opposed to the Alawite Assad regime and the Shia Iraqi Government of both former Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki and his successor Haider al-Abadi. ISIL has also claimed to be fighting a holy war against Shia Muslims, Christians and Yezidis, a Kurdish ethno-religious group in Iraq and Syria. LEADERSHIP The entire organisation is led by Abu Bakr al Baghdadi who is known as the Caliph or political successor. The ‘governor’ of the Syrian territories of ISIL is run by Abu Ali al-Anbari, a former Major General under the Hussein regime. The ‘governor’ of the Iraqi territories of ISIL is run by another former army General under Hussein, Abu Muslim al Turkmani. Both men engage in military strategy and govern areas through the oversight of local councils. FUNDING ISIL has emerged as one of the wealthiest terrorist organisations, with at least three main revenue streams. The first is through selling what they have captured. This includes oil sales to local consumers, the Syrian regime and black marketers as well as exporting crude oil to Turkey.42 It is believed that ISIL controls a dozen oil fields and refineries in Iraq and Syria generating revenues of between one to three million U.S. dollars per day.43 ISIL captured some of the oil fields from Al-Nusrah Front in 2014. As well as oil, it is believed that ISIL has access to 40 per cent of 52 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 56. BOKO HARAM GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 HISTORY Boko Haram is a Nigerian based terrorist group founded in 2002. The name has been interpreted to mean ‘Western education is sin’ or ‘Western Civilisation is forbidden.’ The group began as members of a mosque in the north-east which sought to implement a separatist community under Wahhabi principles.51 Boko Haram was founded as a Sunni Islamic fundamentalist sect advocating a strict form of sharia law and developed into a Salafist-jihadi group in 2009, influenced by the Wahhabi movement.52 After a dispute with police which killed 70 members, a new group was formed under Imam Mohamad Yusuf who built a new mosque for the group. Following the death of Mohammed Yusuf while he was in police custody in 2009 the group became markedly more violent. Before 2009 the group engaged in few acts of violence, but it has been responsible for 3,500 civilian deaths since.53 IDEOLOGY The group is Sunni Islamist and seeks to abolish the secular system of government to implement Wahhabi interpretations of Sharia law in Nigeria.54 Sharia law is fully implemented in nine and partially implemented in three of the 36 states of Nigeria, all of which are in northern Nigeria. However, Boko Haram is seeking full implementation of Sharia throughout the entire country. They aim to use acts of terror to further the social divide between Muslim, Christian groups and the Federal Government. As such, they have issued an ultimatum to Christians living in north-east Nigeria to ‘leave or die.’55 The group is against any Western influence and, like the Taliban, attacks educational institutions to highlight its opposition to western education.56 LEADERSHIP After the death of founder Mohamad Yusuf in 2009, deputy leader Abubakar Shekau took over until he was killed by Nigerian forces on 26 September 2014. The group is largely decentralised. Different states host cells which often have little communication with each other. Hence it is difficult to dissect the organisational structure, size and leadership. What is known is that Boko Haram has two main sections: the larger section is focused on discrediting the Nigerian government; whereas the smaller section is more focused on conducting increasingly sophisticated and lethal attacks.57 FUNDING Boko Haram has multiple revenue streams. This includes the sale of goods, extracting the profits of supportive businesses, child beggars which are also used as spies for the organisation, extorting local traders and cross-border smuggling of arms and cash.58 They also receive funding from wealthy members and supportive benefacttors. There are also major narcotic trafficking routes to Europe in West Africa and it is suspected that Boko Haram has links with al-Qa’ida in the Islamic Maghreb (AQIM) in trafficking narcotics as another major source of revenue.59 MEMBERSHIP The exact number of Boko Haram members is unknown60 however higher estimates are around 9,000.61 Recruitment has targeted disaffected youths in the poorest areas of Nigeria, namely Yobe, Kano, Bauchi, Borno and Kaduna all in the north. The 12 most northern states where Boko Haram operates have almost double the poverty rates and four times the child malnutrition rates of the rest of the country.62 Members are often disaffected youths, unemployed graduates and members of Almajiris which are homeless youth supposedly under religious guidance. ACTIVITIES Boko Haram wants to bring about Sharia law rather than control areas and service delivery. As such, the majority of its activity is aimed at destabilising the Nigerian Government and increasing religious tensions rather than becoming the government. Apart from recruitment, fundraising and increasing political influence, Boko Haram is predominantly engaged in terrorist activity. The group has been increasing its deadliness each year, with 2013 being four times as deadly as 2009. In the period between 2009 and 2012, over 3,500 Nigerians have been killed by the group through shootings and bombings.63 Around 60 per cent of attacks and fatalities are armed assaults using guns, with a quarter of attacks and fatalities from bombings. They have used at least 35 suicide bombings, 28 of which occurred in 2012. Suicide bombings account for five per cent of all attacks. Boko Haram is known for instigating sectarian violence between Christian and Muslim groups and has attacked both churches and mosques in an attempt to instigate hatred and unrest among the two groups. In 2013 Boko Haram killed 64 people who were attending services in mosques and 16 attending church services in over 11 separate attacks. In 2013 there were 11 private citizens who were beheaded. Like other large terrorist groups, Boko Haram shows concern over the way it is depicted in the media. The group has specific journalists which they contact directly to claim responsibility for various attacks. They regularly release videos online, including in response to the international ‘Bring Back Our Girls’ campaign which was started in protest of the school girls kidnapped in Chibok. 53
  • 57. AL-QA’IDA HISTORY Al-Qa’ida was formed in 1988 by Usama bin Ladin, a Saudi Arabian who was killed in 2011, and Abdullah Azzam, a Palestine Sunni scholar who was killed in 1989. The group, like the Taliban, rose during the Soviet war in Afghanistan. It strives for international jihad, and is the only international jihadi group to have successfully conducted large scale attacks in the West. The group was responsible for large scale attacks in New York, London and Madrid and were a main target of the NATO-led War on Terror following September 11. As a result, many of al-Qa’ida’s leadership have been killed and al-Qa’ida now adopts a decentralised structure using regional cells and affiliated organisations instead of a centrally controlled organisation. While direct acts of terrorism attributed to al-Qa’ida have been relatively lower since 2011, activity by al-Qa’ida affiliated groups has risen. IDEOLOGY Al-Qa’ida is a Salafi jihadist group inspired by the teachings of Wahhabism and seeks to use armed conflict to advance Islam. The group is opposed to other forms of Islam including Shia, and other major religions well as Judaism. Al-Qa’ida also views the West as allied to Israel, and determines this relationship as responsible for the poverty of many Muslim countries.64 The organisation seeks to rid the Muslim world of any western influence and implement an Islamic caliphate, or state, under sharia law.65 LEADERSHIP Following the capture or assassination of many of the group’s leaders, the structure and leadership of the organisation has decentralised into regional cells. The current leader is Ayman al-Zawahiri, who reportedly was one of the architects of the September 11 attacks and served as bin Ladin’s physician in the 1980s. His whereabouts have remained unknown since he went into hiding following the overthrow of the Taliban. Nasser Abdul Karim al-Wahuyshi is the leader of al-Qa’ida in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP), the most active franchise of al-Qa’ida. Khalid al-Habib was named as the organisation’s military commander after it was falsely believed he had been killed in U.S. drone strokes in 2006. He is believed to oversee internal operations in Afghanistan and Pakistan. FUNDING Originally the organisation was funded by bin Ladin’s personal wealth and fundraising as well as through the opium trade.66 Recently, ransoms for hostages have been a major source of revenue for al-Qa’ida. According to a New York Times report, al-Qa’ida has raised $125 million from ransoms since 2008, with $66 million from 2013 alone.67 The source of the majority of ransom payments is reportedly European governments and companies. MEMBERSHIP The size of al-Qa’ida is hard to measure as many significant leaders from al-Qa’ida have been killed or imprisoned and the organisation is largely decentralised. The central organisation has decreased in size in recent years, with the former CIA Director, Leon Panetta, claiming in mid-2010 that there were fewer than 100 al-Qa’ida members in Afghanistan. However, its affiliation with other organisations and reach, especially in Africa, has increased.68 Al-Qa'ida and its affiliates are estimated to have 3,700 to around 19,000 members. 69 70 While the organisation is split into sects such as al-Qa’ida in the Islamic Maghreb, al-Qa’ida in Syria, al-Qa’ida in Somalia, al-Qa’ida in the Indian Subcontinent and al-Qa’ida in the Arabian Peninsula, the organisation is also indirectly affiliated with at least 18 other terrorist groups and has connections with Boko Haram and Al-Shabaab. ACTIVITIES Prior to the death of bin Ladin the group were responsible for a number of high profile attacks within western countries such as September 11, the London and Madrid bombings, as well as a string of smaller attacks. However, recently it hasn’t committed large scale acts of terror. This may be because of the much reduced organisational capacity. Other attacks such as suicide bombings, armed attacks, IEDs, kidnapping and hijackings have also been employed by the organisation. The number of terrorist attacks attributed to al-Qa’ida dropped significantly in 2013 to 166 from 405 in 2012, while the organisation was still responsible for the death of 559 people and injury of 1,245 others. 54 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 58. TALIBAN HISTORY Founded in 1994 by Mohamad Omar, the group were originally a mixture of Mujahedeen who fought against the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan in the 1980s and a group of Pashtun tribesmen. The Taliban took control of Afghanistan in 1996 and ruled until 2001, when they were overthrown by the American-led invasion of Afghanistan. They have since regrouped as an insurgency movement to fight the now former Karsai administration and the NATO-led International Security Forces (ISAF). Now known as the ‘Neo-Taliban’ or the Quetta Shura Taliban due to the current location of their leadership, the organisation has rebranded itself as an independence movement in an attempt to gain support as it endeavours to recapture and take control of Afghanistan. IDEOLOGY Its beliefs are a mixture of Wahhabism, Deobandi, a form of Hanafi Sunni Islam, and Pashtun local tribe codes known as Pashtunwali.71 The group has rebranded itself as an independence movement rather than a fundamentalist organisation.72 The new structure forcibly recruits men and children into their ranks. LEADERSHIP Since the collapse of the Islamic Emirate of Afghanistan in 2001, the leadership of the Taliban is based in Quetta, Pakistan, known as the Quetta Shura Taliban. Mullah Omar who began his involvement with the Taliban in 1996 is said to head the organisation. While there have been several reports of his death, none have been confirmed. FUNDING Al-Qa’ida had provided the Taliban with financial support and imported fighters from Arab countries and Central Asia. While also dependant on smuggling and drug trafficking, opium and heroin production is believed to be the equivalent to four per cent of Afghanistan’s GDP and the global heroin trade has historically been a major source of revenue for the Taliban.73 74 In 2008 it was estimated that the opium trade financed as much as 40 per cent of the Taliban’s activities.75 The U.S. has also accused Iran for supplying militants with Iranian-made weapons including road side bombs, one of the main forms of attacks used by the Taliban.76 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 MEMBERSHIP In 2010 the estimated size of the Taliban was said to be 36,000 to 60,000.77 78 ACTIVITIES While the Taliban has been responsible for 75 per cent of civilian casualties in Afghanistan since 2010, its main targets are government administration, police and military personnel, specifically targeting coalition and Afghan forces as it stages an insurgency campaign to recapture the state. In 2013 the Taliban were responsible for 649 acts of terrorism with 234 associated deaths. While suicide bombings are used for around 10 per cent of attacks the majority of Taliban incidents have been via roadside bombs, explosive devices or armed attacks. There has been an increase in targeting of military and police in recent years. Major attacks in 2013 included: A suicide bomber detonated a bomb outside of Kabul’s Supreme Court killing 17 and wounding 40. In December 2013 an armed assault on Afghan security forces in Jurn district, Badakhshan province, Afghanistan killed a total of 19 people including two soldiers. In November of 2013 an assault on the national army in Bala Morgab district, Badgis province, Afghanistan killed eight people including two soldiers and injuring 23 others. No group claimed responsibility; however the attack was attributed to the Taliban. The organisation has been using Twitter and text messages to communicate with the media and claim responsibility for attacks as well as operating a clandestine radio station “voice of the Shariat” to claim responsibility for attacks and spread their agenda.79 55
  • 59. BOX 5 FOREIGN FIGHTERS IN SYRIA Following the beginning of the Syrian war there is growing interest surrounding the increases in foreign fighters, particularly ‘western’ born jihadists. Central to this interest is the concern that foreign fighters returning from the conflicts in Iraq and Syria will commit terrorist attacks once they have returned to their country of origin. Statements made by ISIL have said that they wish to encourage ‘lone wolf’ terrorism committed by fighters once they return home. As a result of these concerns, there has been a great deal of debate regarding the number of foreign fighters currently fighting for ISIL. Estimates vary depending on sources, with some counting total numbers, including those killed in action or those who have returned home, whilst others try to estimate only the number of currently active fighters only. Figure 26 shows an estimate of the total number of active foreign fighters in Syria based on government reports and the International Centre for the Study of Radicalism (ICSR). High and low estimates are provided by ICSR as well as a comprehensive account of how these estimates were derived. The vast majority of foreign fighters in Syria came from surrounding Middle Eastern countries. Low estimates suggest that there were four times as many foreign fighters from the Middle East and North Africa, compared to Western European countries. BOX 6 HOW TERRORIST GROUPS END Comprehensive counter-terrorism efforts are concerned not only with stopping specific terrorist attacks, but also disrupting, breaking up, and eventually ending terrorist groups. Thus, it is important to understand how, historically, terrorist groups come to an end in order to hasten the demise of currently active terrorist groups. A report by the RAND Corporation, which looked at terrorist groups over a forty year period, found that the majority of terrorist groups ended by either joining the political process, meaning either the whole organisation, or via a political wing of the organisation and becoming became a legitimate political party, or were destroyed by policing and intelligence agencies breaking up the group and either arresting or killing key members. Military force in of itself was rarely responsible for ending terrorist groups, as shown in Figure 25. The report also found that the manner in which a terrorist organisation developed was closely related to the goals of that organisation. Terrorist groups with narrow goals were much less likely to engage in widespread violence, were more likely to find common ground or at least negotiate a settlement with the acting government, and thus more likely to seek legitimisation through the political process. Conversely, groups with broad goals or those groups with an international focus and a religious orientation were much less likely to achieve their goals, and are more likely to continue operating, increase in size, and need military intervention to halt them. Of all the terrorist groups tracked in the report between 1968 and 2006, 62 per cent ended, but of these only 32 per cent of religious terrorist groups ceased operating. FIGURE 25 HOW TERRORIST GROUPS END, 268 TERRORIST GROUPS (1968-2006) Political engagement and policing were the most successful strategies in combating terrorist groups in the long run. Military force Achieved goals Source: RAND Politicisation 43% Policing 40% 10% 7% 56 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 60. FIGURE 26 ACTIVE FOREIGN FIGHTERS IN SYRIA Most foreign fighters come from surrounding Middle-Eastern countries. 0 500 1000 1500 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 2000 2500 3000 NEAR NEIGHBOURS ICSR Low estimate (Dec 2013) ICSR High estimate (Dec 2013) Govt. Agency Estimates (Feb-April 2014) 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Tunisia Saudi Arabia Jordan Morocco Lebanon Libya Turkey Egypt Iraq Algeria Palestine Sudan Kuwait Qatar U.A.E. Bahrain Mauritania Oman Russia France UK Belgium Germany Netherlands Kosovo Denmark Spain Sweden United States Austria Indonesia Italy Norway Finland Ireland Canada Switzerland Kyrgyzstan Luxembourg Singapore 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 6664 1846 1930 396 Europe MENA FOREIGN FIGHTERS ICSR Low estimate (Dec 2013) ICSR High estimate (Dec 2013) Govt. Agency Estimates (Feb-April 2014) Source: ICSR Data. Report: ICSR Insight: Up to 11,000 Foreign Fighters in Syria; Steep Rise Among Western Europeans (http://icsr.info/2013/12/icsr-insight-11000-foreign-fighters- syria-steep-rise-among-western-europeans/); Govt. Agency Data. Report: Foreign Fighters in Syria, The Soufan Group (http://soufangroup.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/TSG-Foreign-Fighters-in-Syria.pdf). Note: Data refers to fighters in total, does not subtract for fighters who have been killed, or who have returned to their home countries. Other estimates exist in the media, these two sources represent the most reliable estimates at the time of publication. Not every foreign fighter in Syria is a terrorist or joined with the explicit desire to fight for ISIL. However, as the conflict has gone, foreign fighters have tended to become more radical. 57
  • 61. THE RISE AND FALL OF TERRORIST GROUPS SINCE SEPTEMBER 11 The RAND study on how terrorist groups end focuses on the period 1968 to 2006 as outlined in Box 6 on page 56. However, there has been a tremendous growth in the total level of terrorist activity in the last decade with a shift from small nationalist and ethnic terrorist groups towards large scale groups or even insurgencies with broad religious and political based goals. Despite this increase, there are some large terrorist groups that have seen significant declines in terrorist activity over the last six years, when compared to total terrorist activity in the prior six years from 2002 to 2007. Of the 20 terrorist groups which saw the largest declines in activity over this period: Ten are still active to some degree, although most of them are operating with much reduced capacity. Nationalist and separatist terrorist groups had the biggest decreases in terrorist activity, the key developments were: —FARC in Colombia have seen large declines in activity by partially entering a political process. —The Tamil Tigers were defeated by the military in Sri Lanka. —Activity by the Chechen Rebels has declined partly due to military intervention but also due to the dispersion of members into other terrorist groups. —In Israel, a combination of political process and counterterrorism activities has led to a significant reduction in terrorist activity from Hamas, the Al-Asqa Martyr’s Brigade, and Palestinian Islamic Jihad. This is based on data up to the end of 2013. —There was also a significant reduction in terrorism in India by Maoist separatists but that trend has since plateaued. However, most of the religiously motivated terrorist groups with broad goals which had large decreases in terrorist activity either merged with other terrorist groups or morphed into slightly different organisations. For instance: Tawid and Jihad, a terrorist organisation founded by al-Zarqawi in 1999, began operating in Iraq in 2002 before becoming known as Al-Qa’ida in Iraq. It has merged with other groups several times, and was the precursor to ISIL. Similarly, the Salafist Group for Preaching and Combat (GSPC) which was active in Algeria from 1998 to 2006, became known as Al-Qa’ida in the Islamic Maghreb in 2007, after a loss of popular support saw its resources dwindle. The pattern of terrorist group declines in the last decade follows the outline suggested in the RAND study on how terrorist groups end. Nationalist groups have either partially entered a political process or been completely defeated, whilst those groups with mixed ideologies and broad goals have mutated or merged with other groups. In some areas, ethnically motivated groups have been displaced by religious groups with links to broader terrorist networks, and even when efforts to quell these groups have been successful, they have been able to draw upon networks of likeminded groups to rebrand and help rebuild resources and capacity. IN THE LAST DECADE THERE HAS BEEN A SHIFT FROM SMALL NATIONALIST AND ETHNIC TERRORIST GROUPS TOWARDS LARGE GROUPS WITH BROAD RELIGIOUS AND POLITICAL GOALS. 58 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 62. CORRELATES OF TERRORISM The most significant socio-economic correlates with terrorism can be grouped into three main factors. Measures of social hostilities between different ethnic, religious and linguistic groups, lack of intergroup cohesion and group grievances. Measures of state sponsored violence such as extrajudicial killings, political terror scale and poor human rights. Measures of other forms of violence including perceptions of criminality, violent demonstrations and levels of violent crime. Importantly, there is no systematic link to poverty measures, and several broader economic development factors such as the Human Development Index or its subcomponents such as mean years of schooling or life expectancy. Similarly, economic indicators such as GDP growth also do not correlate. When conducting a more in-depth multivariate analysis it can be seen that the measures of violence, state-sponsored violence, social hostility indicators and governance indicators have the most significant explanatory relationship with the GTI. This suggests, as shown in the previous correlations, that political violence in combination with social hostilities is the dominating factor which influences the level of terrorism within a country. Table 7 highlights the correlations of the 2014 GTI with a range of indexes and indicators associated with the level of terrorism. Social hostilities and political violence are the key correlates of terrorism. While these figures only show correlation, not causation, the results provide evidence as to the factors that are associated with terrorist activity. Social hostilities, ongoing conflict, a lack of social cohesion, and a lack of political stability have a strong statistical relationship to the GTI. Terrorism can be linked to a range of factors which span economic, social and political dimensions. However there is not one predominant variable responsible for spawning terrorist activity. There are a range of factors which jointly develop the climate for terrorist activity to thrive. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 TABLE 7 THE MOST SIGNIFICANT CORRELATIONS WITH THE GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX The most statistically significant correlates with terrorism include measures of social hostilities and lack of intergroup cohesion and group grievances, but also measures of state sponsored violence such as extrajudicial killings, political terror scale and poor human rights. INDICATOR STRENGTH OF CORRELATION NUMBER OF COUNTRIES Social Hostilities Index 0.75 155 Political stability -0.72 162 Ongoing conflict 0.7 162 Intergroup cohesion -0.69 153 Security effectiveness 0.68 161 Deaths in conflict 0.68 151 Global Peace Index 0.65 162 Security legitimacy 0.61 161 Extrajudicial killing -0.61 160 Political Terror Scale 0.6 162 Were there crimes, malicious acts or 0.59 161 violence motivated by religious hatred or bias? Physical Integrity Rights Index -0.59 160 Guerrilla acts per capita (log) 0.59 158 Did organised groups use force or coercion 0.58 161 in an attempt to dominate public life with their perspective on religion, including preventing some religious groups from operating in the country? Was there mob violence related to religion? 0.56 161 Were there acts of sectarian or communal violence between religious groups? 0.55 161 Group grievances 0.54 157 Religious tensions rating -0.53 133 Order and security -0.52 96 59
  • 63. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX VS GLOBAL PEACE INDEX: HOW DOES TERRORISM RELATE TO OTHER FORMS OF VIOLENCE? When the GTI is correlated with the indicators in the Global Peace Index (GPI), other forms of violence which are related to acts of terrorism can be further assessed. Out of the 22 indicators used to calculate the GPI, several are highly significant with the GTI. As would be expected, levels of terrorism correlates strongly with internal deaths from conflict and levels of political terror. Levels of internal organised conflict, likelihood violent demonstrations, violent crime, and deaths from conflict are all significantly related to levels of terrorism. This highlights how the persistent targeting of police forces and instability generated by terrorism can possibly undermine rule of law and lead to the increase in other forms of violence. Table 8 continued. POLITICAL TERROR AND EXTRAJUDICIAL KILLINGS The level of political violence and terror that a country experiences in a particular year is measured by the Political Terror Scale developed by Wood and Gibney based on U.S. State Department and Amnesty International human rights reports. The data is presented on a 1 to 5 ‘terror scale’, 5 being the highest level of political terror. Terrorism correlates significantly with the Political Terror Scale with r= 0.59. This can be viewed in two ways. Either increased terrorism leads governments to implement stricter, authoritarian and illegal acts toward its citizens through torture or state violence, or the repression results in terrorist acts as TABLE 8 CHANGE IN CORRELATION BETWEEN GTI AND GLOBAL PEACE INDEX INDICATORS. The correlation between the GPI and GTI is very strong indicating the link between terrorism and broader societal peacefulness. GLOBAL PEACE INDICATORS CORRELATION 2013 CORRELATION 2014 CHANGE IN CORRELATION 2013-2014 Safety security 0.53 0.51 -0.02 Militarization 0.43 0.45 0.02 Ongoing conflict 0.66 0.65 -0.01 Internal peace 0.59 0.58 -0.02 External peace 0.48 0.50 0.02 Deaths from conflict (internal) 0.66 0.70 0.04 Political terror scale 0.63 0.59 -0.04 Level of organised conflict (internal) 0.56 0.57 0.00 Likelihood of violent demonstrations 0.33 0.38 0.05 Level of violent crime 0.37 0.38 0.01 Perceptions of criminality in society 0.32 0.36 0.04 Access to small arms and light weapons 0.43 0.35 -0.07 Nuclear and heavy weapons capability 0.26 0.33 0.07 Military expenditure (% of GDP) 0.11 0.33 0.22 Displaced people (% population) 0.32 0.33 0.01 Deaths from conflict (external) 0.13 0.32 0.19 Relations with neighbouring countries 0.29 0.32 0.02 Total conflicts (internal and external) 0.33 0.31 -0.02 Political instability 0.29 0.27 -0.02 Homicide rate (per 100,000 people) 0.28 0.18 -0.10 UN peacekeeping data 0.16 0.11 -0.05 Armed services personnel 0.10 0.10 0.01 (per 100,000 people) Police (per 100,000 people) -0.01 0.01 0.01 Incarceration rate (per 100,000 people) -0.02 -0.01 0.01 Weapons exports (per 100,000 people) -0.03 -0.02 0.00 Weapons imports (per 100,000 people) -0.03 -0.08 -0.05 OVERALL GPI SCORE 0.65 0.64 -0.01 60 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 64. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 FIGURE 27 GROUP GRIEVANCES VS. GTI Group Grievances are positively correlated with the GTI. This shows increased tension and violence between ethnic, religious and social groups isrelated to increased levels of terrorism. Colombia Greece Indonesia Ukraine Mexico Philippines Syria Germany Hungary Norway Switzerland Japan 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 NO TERRORISM GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX (GTI) LOW HIGH 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Source: IEP, Failed States Index HIGH LEVELS OF TERRORISM GROUP GRIEVANCES 2 1 r=0.54 United Kindgom United States Mozambique Iran Nepal Egypt Russia India Nigeria Pakistan Afganistan Israel South Sudan Sri Lianka Chad Serbia Jordan Spain Canada Denmark Portugal Iceland Sweden Ireland retaliation. This can create a vicious cycle of violence making it difficult to clearly identify causality. Extrajudicial killings measured by the CIRI data project hold a significant correlation of r=-0.61 with the GTI. Extrajudicial killings measure the killings by government officials without due process of law. This also includes murders by private groups that have been instigated by the government. SOCIAL FACTORS, SOCIAL COHESION, GROUP GRIEVANCES The group grievance indicator correlates significantly with the GTI with an r= 0.54. The positive correlation means that high levels of group grievances are associated with higher levels of terrorism. Conversely, low levels of group grievances are associated with low levels of terrorism. The intergroup cohesion indicator is compiled by the Institute of Social Studies (ISS). The indicator measures the relations of cooperation with respect between identity groups within a society. When cooperation breaks down between prominent identity groups, there is the potential for conflict including killings, assassinations, rioting, and acts of terrorism. ISS measures intergroup cohesion using composite data on ‘inter-group disparities, perceptions of being discriminated against, and feelings of distrust against members of other groups’. DEVELOPMENT INDICATORS While countries that record high levels of terrorism tend to be under-developed, development indicators do not correlate with levels of terrorism globally. This suggests that while these characteristics such as poor life expectancy, educational attainment and GNI per capita may be common in areas with increased levels of terrorism, they are not unique to them. TABLE 9 CORRELATION WITH HUMAN DEVELOPMENT INDICATORS AND THE GTI While a negative relationship is shown, suggesting that high levels of terrorism are related to low development, none of the relationships are significant, suggesting that development is not a major contributor to the development of terrorist activity. HDI INDICATORS CORRELATION Human Development Index (HDI) -0.20 Life expectancy at birth -0.14 Mean years of schooling -0.27 Expected years of schooling -0.21 Gross national income (GNI) per capita -0.24 61
  • 65. TABLE 10 CORRELATION BETWEEN GTI AND KEY ECONOMIC STATISTICS, 2012 - 2014 While the GTI shows negative relationships with the economic statistics below, the correlations are not significant. However, trade as a per cent of GDP notably correlates. ECONOMIC STATISTICS 2012 2014 FDI net inflows 0.10 -0.07 Trade as a % of GDP -0.41 -0.40 Natural resources as a % of GDP (2012) -0.06 -0.09 Youth unemployment -0.14 -0.02 Male youth unemployment -0.18 -0.08 GDP growth -0.01 -0.05 FINANCE AND TRADE While the table below shows a negative relationship with the GTI for five of the six economic, trade and investment indicators, there is only one moderately strong statistical relationship; trade as a per cent of GDP with a R= -0.40. The 2012 GTI was correlated with 2013 economic statistics to see if terrorist activity has an effect on future economic indicators. While there was a stronger relationship between the GTI and decreased levels of economic activity, the relationships were not significant. FIGURE 28 TRADE AS A PERCENT OF GDP VS. GTI Trade as a per cent of GDP shows a negative correlation with the level for terrorism. While this is not overly significant, it does suggest that acts of terrorism could affect trade. Afganistan Canada 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 NO TERRORISM GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX (GTI) HIGH LEVELS OF TERRORISM TRADE AS PER CENT OF GDP 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 0 Source: IEP, World Bank r=-0.40 Belgium Malaysia Ukraine United Kindgom Columbia Philippines India Nigeria Pakistan Iraq Lebanon Thailand Mozambique Chile Argentina Australia Saudi Arabia 62 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 66. MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS This section seeks to explore what explanatory power a range of variables have on the GTI. This is done through multivariate regression analysis, a statistical tool which enables comparison against multiple variables. The multivariate regression analysis reveals the interplay between the GTI and 11 different variables, such as economic performance, governance and violence, demonstrating the nature of the relationship between various indicators. IEP does not suggest that these are the only indicators which affect the level of terrorism, these were selected due to the strength of statistical relationship with the GTI and the literature review of the factors that create terrorism. The economic indicators used in the analysis are foreign direct investment (net inflows) and trade as a per cent of GDP. Both indicators are taken form the World Bank data bank. Political stability, legitimacy of the state, the level of human rights and the number of refugees and IDPs are taken from a range of sources. The police rate, homicide rate and incarceration rate per 100,000 people are based on GPI data. Of the indicators used in this analysis, only three show a multivariate significant relationship with the GTI: Political stability Intergroup cohesion Legitimacy of the state Surprisingly, while none of the violence or economic indicators are significant, three political indicators are significantly related to terrorism. This suggests that a weak political system and a lack of legitimacy of the government combined with group grievances may be more influential in the rise of terrorist organisations than economic performance or violence. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 TABLE 11 MULTIVARIATE REGRESSION ANALYSIS Governance and intergroup cohesion related indicators are the only indicators to show a significant relationship with the GTI. This suggests that the political climate in combination with intergroup cohesion is the dominating factor which influences the level of terrorism within a country. GTI ESTIMATE (Intercept) 9.48E+00*** Trade as a present of GDP -4.40E-03 FDI -2.68E-12 Political stability -1.88E+00** Intergroup cohesion -8.26E+00* Refugees and IDPs -2.46E-01 Group grievance 2.47E-01 Legitimacy of the state -5.65E-01** Human rights 2.50E-01 Police per 100.000 people 1.40E-03 Homicide rate per 100.000 people. -7.12E-03 Incarceration rate per 100.000 people 3.72E-05 Adjusted R-squared 0.71 A WEAK POLITICAL SYSTEM AND A LACK OF LEGITIMACY OF THE GOVERNMENT COMBINED WITH GROUP GRIEVANCES ARE MORE INFLUENTIAL IN THE RISE OF TERRORIST ORGANISATIONS THAN ECONOMIC PERFORMANCE OR EXISTING LEVELS OF VIOLENCE. 63
  • 67. EXPERT CONTRIBUTIONS According to the findings of the Global Terrorism Index, the level of global terrorist activity has greatly increased in the last decade. Most of the public conversation about terrorism has focused on conventional counter-terrorism efforts: intelligence gathering, policing, and military force. However, such efforts are often ineffective, and even counterproductive. In this essay, Larry Attree from Saferworld and David Keen from the London School of Economics, outline six conventional approaches that should be scaled back and six constructive alternatives to conventional counter-terrorism that could help reverse the alarming rise in global terrorism. ENVISAGING MORE CONSTRUCTIVE ALTERNATIVES TO THE COUNTER-TERROR PARADIGM Larry Attree, Head of Policy, Saferworld David Keen, Political Economist and Professor of Complex Emergencies, London School of Economics ‘Terrorism’ has come to dominate current affairs in the western world, and dealing with it is one of the foremost priorities on the domestic and foreign policy agendas of western nations. As IEP’s valuable work has highlighted, the urgency surrounding the agenda has not always facilitated sober reflection on the available facts regarding the nature of the problem and what they show us. The urgent priority afforded to counter-terror has impacted on the actions of practitioners in many walks of public life. Particularly affected by the imperatives of counter-terrorism and its conceptual framing have been stabilisation and statebuilding—those emerging fields poised at the intersection of defence, foreign affairs, intelligence, peacebuilding and development. Building on a forthcoming discussion paper prepared for Saferworld by Prof. David Keen (LSE), this paper identifies some key questions about how counter-terrorism, and related stabilisation and statebuilding efforts, are being pursued, and suggests some constructive peacebuilding alternatives. The public debate on how to respond to ‘terrorist’ threats tends to revolve around the most horrific outrages and sensational crises. Whether the option in question is to bomb a reviled spoiler, to arm those opposing an evil regime, or to sponsor a regional partner to take on the dangerous militants, public debate tends to focus minds on apparently simple choices between action and inaction. In this climate, the pressure on leaders to appear strong and act decisively—especially in the face of violent provocation—is very powerful. However, when the media directs its fickle gaze to newer stories, the success or failure of policy responses to ‘terrorism’ threats overseas over the long term is rarely publicly discussed. For this reason, it is perhaps not widely known that: In Somalia, thousands of weapons and hundreds of vehicles and high-frequency radios provided by the international community as security assistance during the 1990s ended up in the hands of local militias. In addition, from 2004 onwards over 14,000 Somali soldiers trained by Ethiopia reportedly defected or deserted with their weapons and uniforms, while UN-trained police were implicated in violent abuses against civilians;1 In Iraq, heavy handed military action, such as the assault on Falluja in the wake of the INTRODUCTION 64 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 68. lynching of four American security contractors in April 2004, resulted in the deaths of hundreds of people, including many women and children, and served to fuel further insurgency;2 In Afghanistan, because of local codes of revenge in Pashtun areas, killing insurgents has often served ‘to multiply enemies rather than subtract them’.3 Studies have also ‘found little evidence that aid projects are “winning hearts and minds”’ in the country: ‘instead of contributing to stability, in many cases aid is contributing to conflict and instability’;4 In Yemen, external counter terror support served to reduce the Saleh regime’s need to be responsive to its own constituents and institute reforms.5 It is remarkable that such failures have led neither to detailed public debate on how peace can best be achieved in the wake of ‘terrorist’ violence, nor to any serious accountability for the leaders and officials that presided over them. But what is even more striking is that the mistakes of the present echo those of past decades: for example, the practice of bombing large swathes of the countryside and the diversion of aid to corrupt purposes that fed public support for the Viet Cong in Vietnam;6 or the government emergency measures, including the attempt to use ‘development’ and forced relocation as instruments of counterinsurgency, that strongly fuelled the Mau Mau insurgency under British rule in Kenya during the 1950s.7 While such problems are, tragically, familiar to scholars and experts working to document the track record of counter-terror, stabilisation and statebuilding approaches around the world, attention to the lessons of the past is strikingly absent from the public debate on how to do better in future. In recent months, Saferworld has attempted to take the long view on efforts to deal with conflicts related to rebel or ‘terrorist’ groups and their sponsors in past decades, considering contexts as diverse as Afghanistan, Cambodia, DRC, Indonesia, Iraq, Kenya, Pakistan, Sierra Leone, Somalia, Sri Lanka, Uganda, Vietnam, and Yemen. Despite the investment of huge resources in such contexts by Western governments, the results have been mixed at best: the current long-term instability of the Middle East, North and East Africa, Afghanistan and Pakistan, the spread of al-Qa’ida into multiple new regions, and the mushrooming of other transnational militant groups suggest that something is seriously wrong with the Western response to such problems. Long-standing problems appear to lie in three main areas. Firstly, by setting national security above human security objectives the West has – whether directly or through proxies— too frequently responded to the threat of ‘terrorism’ with the use of violence. Such violence has, all too often, been indiscriminate, and has had a tendency to exacerbate conflict dynamics rather than contribute to sustainable peace. Secondly, counter-terrorism efforts and related actions taken under the label of ‘stabilisation’ and ‘statebuilding’ have often failed to address drivers of conflict in meaningful ways. In fact, they often clumsily reinforce the most serious drivers of conflict – especially patterns of abusive and exclusive governance and corruption. Thirdly, the Western response has typically neglected to focus on sustainable solutions to conflict that involve and respond to the concerns, priorities and potentials of conflict-affected people in constructive ways. There is much detail that could be added to this critique, and many examples that could be offered of these shortcomings in action and their impacts. If policy alternatives are to be brought to the fore, more thorough analysis is needed to examine why similar shortcomings are repeated from one decade to the next with diminishing public scrutiny. However, what is perhaps more challenging, and more useful, is to envisage what constructive alternatives are available. One caveat before discussing these alternatives: all approaches to peacebuilding have shortcomings, and the challenges of conflict frequently present choices between a range of sub-ideal alternatives. The policy directions that are set out in this paper are neither a call to side with the ‘enemy’, nor to evade the imperatives to respond to conflict swiftly and effectively. Instead, they are a call for the lessons of the past and the available alternatives to be more carefully considered, with the overarching objective of working towards long term peace in mind. SIX THINGS TO DO LESS OFTEN 1 THINKING SHORT TERM There needs to be more effort to avoid investing in short-term reactions with no clear long-term solution in mind—especially when there are clear risks of contributing to long-term drivers of conflict through short-term action. Similarly, more thought needs to be put into whether approaches GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 require long-term commitment to be sustainable, and whether such commitment is feasible. 2 REINFORCING POOR GOVERNANCE AND CORRUPTION Governance deficits are perhaps the single most significant factor in driving conflict. This means that support for repressive and corrupt actors and regimes needs, as a priority, to be avoided because of its potential to lessen accountability and worsen governance deficits. Governance deficits known to have a significant role in driving conflict include corruption, violations of human rights and international humanitarian law, and exclusive political systems. Importantly, where international actors support leaders, governments and security forces that are not committed to addressing these failures, they reduce the pressure on them to be inclusive, accountable, responsive and fair toward their own societies. This in turn tends to fuel conflict. The apparent strategic advantage to be gained from alliances with regimes not committed to inclusive, fair, responsive and accountable governance is often illusory—not least because such alliances typically stoke the grievances that fuel insecurity. 3 MISTAKING PARTNERS’ MOTIVES Past experience shows that assumptions about the motives and behaviours of apparent ‘allies’ in counter-terror, stabilisation and state-building endeavours need to be interrogated more deeply. The consequences of working with allies whose motives differ from one’s own have included appalling abuses against civilian populations, the diversion of money, arms and other resources into fuelling conflict, and the reinforcement of corruption, bad governance and grievances. All of these are known drivers of conflict. One of the clearest lessons from past failures is that the motives of ‘allies’ are hard to understand clearly: they may differ between individuals and across institutions, and can shift over time. An expressed aim of defeating terrorism, for example, may differ dramatically from the actual aims of any given actor. Importantly, the actions of ‘allies’ are also affected by the resources on offer for counter-terror, stabilisation and statebuilding processes, which may even serve as an incentive for prolonging conflict. Conflict sensitivity requires much more careful monitoring of these issues 65
  • 69. and more determination to minimise harm by factoring this better into decision-making. 4 USING AID IN THE SERVICE OF COUNTER-TERRORISM Casual assumptions about aid contributing to counter-terrorism, stabilisation and statebuilding objectives are called into question by the significant evidence that the use of aid to reinforce military action and stabilisation efforts has in many contexts proved either ineffective or harmful. In particular there is a need to revisit the assumption that local action to address socio-economic drivers of radicalisation can provide an adequate solution when wider structural drivers of conflict are not simultaneously addressed— including the role of international actors and their proxies in contributing to grievances and injustice. While development processes are likely part of the solution to the conflicts that are being defined as problems of ‘terrorism’, ‘radicalisation’ and ‘extremism’, the holistic pursuit of positive peace should include a wider range of measures, including avoidance of policies and actions that create the grievances that fuel conflict. A related issue is the tendency to overlook the way in which aid and other resources (such as military equipment) provided to allies is diverted for harmful or corrupt purposes by conflict actors. Because corruption is known to be such a visible driver of conflict, and diversion of resources away from their intended purpose is such a common failing, corruption and diversion need to be more systematically prevented and monitored – even when they involve apparent ‘allies’ of the international community. Too often, declaring a particular government to be an ‘ally’ has given it a green light for corruption and abuse. In practice, there has often been much more concern about the way aid might be misused by ‘terrorists’ than the way it is being misused by governments.8 Attempts to co-opt aid agencies into support for any particular side in a conflict—as providers of intelligence, as offering relief and assistance only to one group or side – are also counterproductive: they compromise the principle of impartiality, render assistance ineffective, alienate the local population, and make aid agencies a target for attack. 5 USING FORCE International actors should be much less ready to use force to resolve conflict. In particular, more caution is needed in designating any particular actor as a ‘spoiler’. The staying power of ‘spoilers’ needs to be assessed much more realistically, and greater awareness is needed of the potential for conflict dynamics to spin out of control as a result of intervention. In particular, military force should not be used simply to demonstrate the resolve or power to retaliate in response to violent provocation—indeed, military responses of this kind often play into the intentions of ‘terrorists’.9 6 LACK OF ACCOUNTABILITY FOR ABUSES Significant efforts are also needed to strengthen adherence to international humanitarian and human rights law by international actors and those they co-operate with: torture and indiscriminate use of violence are not only wrong in principle – they also deepen the grievances that can fuel violence and make sustainable peace much harder to achieve. Demonstrating full accountability for irresponsible use of force and abuses that have taken place is vital to efforts to minimise grievances. SIX DIRECTIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIVE ALTERNATIVES 1 A DIFFERENT CONCEPTUAL FRAMING AND APPROACH The first and most important shift in the pursuit of constructive alternatives to the counter-terrorism paradigm should be to reaffirm long-term sustained peace for all actors involved as the overall objective— rather than ‘victory’ over a particular enemy or ‘national security’ defined in narrow terms. To construct a strategy oriented towards lasting and positive peace it is then crucial – especially in relation to conflicts involving the most reviled of ‘spoilers’— to develop an impartial picture of all dimensions of the conflict. One key starting point for achieving this is perhaps offered by developing a conflict analysis. Conflict analysis can provide an important opportunity to avoid biased actor analysis and narrow analysis of the causes of a conflict. In the counter-terrorism paradigm, designating certain actors as ‘spoilers’, ‘radicals’, ‘terrorists’ or ‘extremists’ risks framing the problem from the outset as lying with those actors alone – the solution being to change their wrong-thinking (or physically eliminate them) rather than seeking to identify what all relevant actors—including national, regional and international governments—can change to contribute towards lasting peace. Similarly, approaching conflict as a problem of ‘extremism’ or ‘radicalisation’ has sometimes encouraged a focus on the socio-economic disadvantages experienced by the individuals who perpetrate acts of violence. Looking at local poverty or unemployment may be helpful, but it must not preclude a focus on other causes of conflict – including the actions of governments enjoying various degrees of immunity to international criticism. Grievances created by powerful political actors at national, regional or international levels may well prove especially important in driving conflicts defined as ‘terrorism’, ‘radicalisation’ and ‘extremism’. Framing the problem impartially as one of ‘conflict’ may enable much more comprehensive identification of causes that require fresh approaches – not only by extremists and local actors but also by national, regional and international leaders, governments, security forces and so on. Conflict analysis may also provide an opportunity to connect apparently local or national dynamics to transnational factors: it may be crucial to recognise that ‘extremism’ is not only driven by the transnational spread of problematic ideologies based on misperceptions, but also by the moral objection of conflict actors in one country to policies and actions taken in other countries, which are indeed unjust or unlawful and which they feel powerless to change through constructive means. Peacebuilding strategies in such contexts could valuably include the creation of effective channels for grievances to be constructively raised and addressed. Given the need to avoid the common challenges of short-term thinking, failure to learn from past mistakes and incoherence between development, diplomatic, economic and military-security approaches, conflict analysis also provides opportunities to consider how different responses to conflict will play out through the development of forward-looking scenarios, examine lessons from past engagement, and facilitate diverse actors to recognise their roles and responsibilities within a shared long-term peacebuilding strategy. 66 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 70. 2 CHANGING INTERNATIONAL AND NATIONAL POLICIES THAT HAVE FUELLED GRIEVANCES If conflicts defined as stemming from ‘extremism’, ‘radicalisation’ or ‘terrorism’ are driven in part by moral objections to policies and actions which are unjust or unlawful, part of the strategy for achieving sustainable peace should be to reconsider those policies and actions. Just as apartheid needed to be brought to an end, and many former colonies were awarded their independence following struggles by rebel organisations now viewed as liberation movements, in the same way there is a need to examine the justice of policies that are the focus of rebellion and protest around the world. Such unjust policies may be military (indiscriminate use of violence, military aid to actors who are perpetrating abuses), economic (sanctions perceived to be unjust, failure to regulate markets in goods and resources from conflict-affected countries, imposition of unequal trade rules, or prioritisation of natural resource access over other priorities), diplomatic (support for allies who are violating human rights and/or international law), or developmental (further support for such allies). A greater effort to demonstrate consistent support for international law and human rights is surely one of the most promising options for reducing the grievances of the victims of unjust international policies and practices, and those who claim to represent them. 3 SEEKING TO NEGOTIATE PEACE – AND BUILDING TOWARDS INCLUSIVE AND JUST POLITICAL SETTLEMENTS There are many challenges inherent in deciding whether and how to negotiate peace. Overall, however, negotiating solutions is currently a less favoured option than it was during the 1990s. Clearly it is neither desirable nor practical to welcome every militant or rebel group into a power-sharing deal. Both inviting and excluding rebel movements to the dialogue table has incentivised armed violence in the past. At the same time, long-term peace can of course be undermined when only a relatively narrow and elite group is accepted into negotiations and into the political settlement that results. While the dilemmas involved are complex, the counter-terrorism paradigm has in certain contexts ruled out the possibility of negotiation with (or even assistance to) large sections of whole societies (as in Somalia and Afghanistan). In this context, it seems important to reflect that long-term peace will eventually be sustainable only if those who survive the conflict are prepared to accept the eventual settlement that is made. Moreover, as Greenhill and Solomon argue, even an apparently ‘implacable’ spoiler may sometimes change – in new circumstances – into a less violent entity.10 In this context, alongside the inclusion in peace processes of those who have not resorted to violence, and ongoing efforts to ensure broader inclusion in political settlements of the public, including women, youth and any marginalised groups, more effort is needed to pursue communication with and understand all actors involved in any given conflict – even those ‘terrorists’, ‘violent extremists’, ‘radicalised groups’ and ‘spoilers’ that are most reviled. 4 USING LEGAL-JUDICIAL RESPONSES AND TARGETED SANCTIONS An important option for approaching conflict is to use the law (national or international) to punish and deter violence and to protect those who may otherwise feel marginalized and resort to violence as a last resort. Legal approaches to insecurity are complex, and only a few points can be made here. Prosecutions offer the prospect of reducing impunity, deterring violence (both within a particular country and more broadly), and of course incarcerating those responsible for violence (and thus taking them ‘out of the game’). In many cases, a policing response to disorder (apprehending and trying criminal suspects) will be more appropriate than a military response. Sometimes, it is a heavy-handed military response that turns a small rebellion into a large one or gives life to a weakening ‘terrorist’ movement. When due process is applied and the rights of defendants to fair trials are visibly upheld, legal approaches offer the considerable advantage of guaranteeing rights of defendants and their equal treatment before the law—thereby helping to dispel perceptions of discrimination against particular groups. The option to deploy sanctions comes with certain drawbacks. Sanctions can be used by those targeted to shore up their GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 economic advantages and their political support base. They can also do great harm to the general population and create grievances among those they were intended to help. Yet, when they are carefully targeted, sanctions can offer an important option for pressurising conflict actors, including armed groups, to change their approach. 5 SUPPORTING TRANSFORMATIVE GOVERNANCE EFFORTS Of course, governance reforms are explicitly part of the stabilisation and statebuilding policy agenda. However, this policy agenda is typically coloured by the imperatives provided by counter-terrorism to boost a counterinsurgency or a new political order with external aid or military support. Likewise, the international discourse on peacebuilding and statebuilding enshrines ownership of processes by nation states in a way that tends towards the exclusion of other actors and far-reaching reforms in practice. The ‘mainstream’ approach to all three (counter-terrorism, stabilisation and statebuilding) thus leans visibly towards aligning behind and reinforcing the capacities of the state as it is (including states recently installed by military action) rather than prioritising wider social empowerment models that seek to transform the state from within and foster lasting and positive peace. Peace indeed cannot be built in the absence of institutional capacities, but these capacities also need to be oriented towards beneficial purposes. This makes the objective of achieving wider reform and the transformation of state-society relations (widely acknowledged in policy discourse but rarely pursued effectively in practice) absolutely central to efforts to respond to conflicts labelled as ‘terrorism’, ‘radicalisation’ and ‘extremism’. After all, such conflicts often emerge from the grievances and injustice that are created by poor governance, and prove difficult to manage in the wake of institutional breakdown and civic unrest. Past research by Saferworld11 suggests that to support lasting peace, transformative governance reform should include significant efforts to: Ensure inclusive political dialogue and decision making Provide people-focused security and justice 67
  • 71. Reduce corruption and bribery in conflict-sensitive ways Offer fair access to social services, resources and opportunities to all social groups Resolve grievances and disputes constructively An example of the shift that is needed can be found in the security sector. While much development work is oriented to social empowerment and community driven models, when it comes to responding to conflict and insecurity, bottom-up approaches are not pursued on the scale that is required to achieve a transformative effect. Thus ‘Security Sector Reform’ and efforts to negotiate peace settlements tend to be relatively top-down and exclusionary. Therefore, to a certain extent, they tend to lack the legitimacy to be both successful and sustainable. Application of ‘community security’ approaches at a greater scale has the potential to deliver a different kind of result.12 6 BRINGING A PEACEBUILDING PERSPECTIVE TO THE FORE IN PUBLIC DEBATE One of the challenges inherent in trying to move beyond mainstream approaches is the way in which problems of ‘rogue regimes’, ‘terrorism’, ‘radicalisation’ and ‘extremism’ and relevant responses are presented in public debate. Leaders, journalists and news outlets are in some ways responsible for establishing prevailing notions of enmity, while at the same time public interest and public opinion has a role in shaping and underpinning policy directions that leaders come under pressure to adopt. Thus the success of peace efforts partly depends on much more systematic questioning of the fault-lines of conflict, the prevailing definitions of the enemy, and the impacts of potential policy responses. Demonising particular enemies too often serves as ‘cover’ for those claiming to confront them; but those making these claims may not only be failing to confront these enemies but even actively reinforcing them in various ways. In many contexts, the declaration of a ‘war on terror’ remains a convenient banner to call for public unity in support of a common enemy, bolstering the power base of political leaders. When the status of an ‘enemy’ has been well established in public discourse, this seems to lead to journalistic failures to question the tactics to be used, the allies to be supported, and the coherence of longer term strategies. A further problem is that, especially within conflict-affected contexts, those who oppose an officially-approved persecution or question the approved ‘fault-lines’ in a conflict, risk themselves being labelled as ‘enemies’, ‘terrorists’ and so on—and sometimes face intimidation, violence or prosecution as a result. This affects the willingness to speak out not only of journalists, the public and local activists but also international aid agencies and multilateral bodies. Particular definitions of the enemy have often been ‘policed’ in this way, and those who are in a position to question these definitions have a particular responsibility to do so. While politicians, diplomats and human rights organisations tend to remain vigilant and critical regarding human rights in conflict situations, much more systematic efforts are needed to question the definitions of enmity that create—and recreate—mass violence, as well as to challenge the methods that are justified through this discourse at different levels. CONCLUSION This paper has offered a summary of constructive alternatives to the counter-terrorism paradigm and to some of the approaches taken to stabilisation and statebuilding under the influence of this paradigm. Alongside these, it is important to mention one further option, noting: that in some cases ‘terrorist’ atrocities frequently produce a sense of revulsion even among those the terrorists claim to represent; that if conflict resolution demands reform (as suggested above), the best way to encourage this may in some circumstances be not to provide support to the current leadership and institutions in conflict-affected contexts; and that international actors may not be able to influence the dynamics of each and every conflict effectively. Given these points, in some contexts choosing not to engage should be considered a valid option. These issues will be discussed in more detail in Saferworld’s forthcoming research studies on constructive alternatives to counter-terrorism in a range of different country contexts. NOTES 1. Bryden M, ‘Somalia Redux’, (CSIS, August 2013), pp 9-10, citing M Bryden et al, ‘‘Report of the Monitoring Group on Somalia pursuant to Security Council resolution 1811 (2008)’, (New York, UN Security Council, 10 Dec 2008), p.12. 2. Hills, Alice, ‘Fear and Loathing in Falluja’, Armed Forces and Society, 32 (2006), 623-639; Barnard A, ‘Death toll near 500 in Fallujah, Baghdad’, Boston Globe, 22 April 2004; Dodge, Toby, testimony to US Committee on Foreign Relations on ‘The Iraq Transition’ (20 April 2004). 3. The words are those of Major General Michael Flynn, United States’ deputy chief of staff for intelligence in Afghanistan: see Flynn, Major Gen. Michael, Captain Matt Pottinger and Paul Batchelor, ‘Fixing Intel: A Blueprint for Making Intelligence Relevant in Afghanistan’, Center for a New American Security, Washington DC (2010), p.8. 4. Wilder, Andrew, ‘A “weapons system” based on wishful thinking’, Boston Globe (16 September 2009); Thompson, Edwina, Report on Wilton Park Conference 1022, Winning ‘Hearts and Minds’ in Afghanistan: Assessing the Effectiveness of Development Aid in COIN Operations, 11–14 March 2010 (1 April 2010). 5. S Philips, ‘Yemen: Developmental dysfunction and division in a crisis state’, (DLP Researhc paper 14, February 2011). 6. Sheehan, Neil, A Bright Shining Lie: John Paul Vann and America in Vietnam, New York: Picador (1990); Bilton, Michael and Kevin Sim, Four Hours in My Lai, London: Penguin (1993); Hunt, David, ‘Dirty Wars: Counterinsurgency in Vietnam and Today’, Politics and Society, 38:1 (2010), pp. 35–66, p.36; Corson, William, The Betrayal, New York: W. W. Norton and Co. (1968). 7. Berman, Bruce, ‘Bureaucracy and Incumbent Violence: Colonial Administration and the Origins of the “Mau Mau” Emergency in Kenya’, British Journal of Political Science, 6:2 (April 1976), pp. 143–75. 8. See, for example, D Keen, When ‘Do No Harm’ Hurts, 6 November 2013. 9. Just as, according to Osama Bin Laden’s son it was ‘my father’s dream was to get America to invade Afghanistan’ (BBC2, Afghanistan: War Without End (22 June 2011), it is clear that Islamic State militants intended to provoke further direct military action in Iraq by Western powers through their beheading of Western citizens in 2014. 10. See Greenhill, Kelly and Soloman Major, ‘The Perils of Profiling: Civil War Spoilers and the Collapse of Intrastate Peace Accords’, International Security, 31, 3, (winter 2006/7), 7-40; Stedman, Stephen, ‘Spoiler Problems in Peace Processes’, International Security, 22, 2, 5-53 (1997). 11. See Saferworld, ‘Addressing conflict and violence from 2015 – Issue Paper 2: What are the key challenges? What works in addressing them?’, (November 2012). 12. See Saferworld, ‘Community Security Handbook’, (Saferworld, 2014). 68 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 72. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 The methodology for the Global Terrorism Index incorporates a lagged scoring system, in which a single terrorist incident is not only counted in the year that it was committed, but also for five years afterwards, in order to reflect the lingering emotional, social, structural, and economic impact of terrorism. This essay, from Action on Armed Violence, traces the long term impact of a suicide bombing in a busy marketplace, which occurred in Lahore, Pakistan in December 2009. ANATOMY OF A SUICIDE BOMBING MOON MARKET ATTACK, LAHORE, PAKISTAN Henry Dodd, Senior Weapons Researcher, Action on Armed Violence (AOAV) Edited by: Steven Smith MBE, Chief Executive, AOAV BACKGROUND THE BLAST For the last three years, Action on Armed Violence (AOAV) has been monitoring the levels of harm caused by explosive weapons around the world. In this time, we have watched the recorded toll continue to climb, year-on-year. Perhaps most startling is the fact that by far the greatest proportion of casualties are civilians. For example, in 2013, 82% of the total reported casualties from explosive weapons were civilians. Another statistic of major concern is the rise in casualties attributable to improvised explosive devices (IEDs). While IEDs are often seen as being the weapons of choice for non-state actors against conventional military forces, the staggering fact is that they are far more likely to kill civilians than soldiers. In 2013, 73% of civilian casualties (22,829) from all forms of explosive violence were caused by IEDs.1 But the bare casualty figures alone only show part of the picture. Reports in the immediate aftermath of attacks tend to provide the number of fatalities, sometimes the number of injured, a description of the scene of the blast, and some reaction quotes. Small attacks barely warrant a mention. Little or no focus is directed at the wider effects of explosive violence. What does it mean for a health system to receive over 100 trauma patients within just a few minutes? What happens to a market that has witnessed a major blast, and is forever associated with the tragedy? Who supports a family when they lose their principal earner, or when a relative suffers complex injuries? In order to answer these questions and more, AOAV returned to the scene of a double-suicide bombing attack that had been inflicted on a busy market in Lahore, Pakistan, in 2009. The Moon Market, in Iqbal, in the south-west of Lahore, is considered to be the second busiest market in the city after the more fashionable Liberty market. Stalls and shops are closely packed together, leaving a narrow pathway for shoppers to squeeze through. Spread across two floors, the top floor has a selection of beauty salons and a gym, as well as the upper storeys of the largest and most prosperous market businesses. The lower floor has a selection of shops selling fabrics, children’s clothes, jewellery, books, furniture, shoes, and pharmaceuticals. Each shop has around five or six stalls, most only a few feet wide, pitched in front. Stall owners pay a few rupees to hook a wire up to their shops to power a bare bulb over their wares. The scene is vibrant and congested. There had been warning signs before that 69
  • 73. the Moon Market might be a target for violence. The previous year, on 14 August —the eve of Pakistani Independence Day— a suicide bomber had approached a police line at the roundabout by the market and detonated his explosive vest. Eight people were killed, but it would have been more, had not a policeman bravely wrestled the bomber away from the crowd, losing his own life in the process.2 2009 had been another violent year across Pakistan. Bomb blasts at a funeral in Dera Ishmail Khan, in February, had killed over thirty people, and left hundreds more injured.3 In October, 55 people were killed in a blast at the Khyber Bazaar in Peshawar. A few days later, the same city also saw over a hundred people killed by a car bomb at the Meena Bazaar.4 Attacks like these, on targets seemingly unconnected to the sectarian violence in Pakistan, may have provided a warning to the Moon Market shoppers. However, even with such threats ever-present, people need to live their lives, buy clothes for their children, and prepare for weddings. The first blast happened at 8.40 pm on 7 December 2009, when the market was at its busiest. At an intersection of three roads, the first bomber detonated a vest containing 10kg of high explosive and ball bearings. As people ran from the area in panic, they were funnelled by the narrow streets into a tightly-packed crowd. Around a minute after the first explosion, a second bomber detonated an identical explosive vest outside the National Bank in the corner of the market. It was this second bomb, surrounded by people, unprotected, in the open, which caused the most casualties.5 The first explosion started fires, which spread rapidly. Electrical points in the market are stuffed with wires, and the electrical fire moved quickly into shops and stalls. The fires were fed by the fuel of the many generators in the market and by the petrol in the hundreds of motorbikes parked nearby. Combined with the highly flammable clothes and textiles inside the shops and stalls, a massive blaze quickly started. People who sought shelter inside shops were trapped by flames, and many died from smoke inhalation.6 At 20:42, the 1122 Rescue Service received a call reporting that there had been an explosion.7 There is a rescue station, with ambulances and fire engines, approximately 100 metres from the market, so emergency responders were able to reach the scene within a minute of the call being received. That’s where the good luck ended. The fire engines were unable to reach the blast site, as shopkeepers had placed bollards and barricades around the market to prevent cars entering. The rescue services then had to use cranes to remove obstacles and cut through iron bars to get close to the fire. A collapsed electricity transformer meant that that the closest fire hydrants could not be used. Hoses had to be run to hydrants further away from the market. Rescue workers were further hampered by an uncooperative crowd. At one point, the crowd burst through the police cordon and demanded that the rescuers deal with the dead bodies that were being left behind. As families heard the news, they rushed to the scene, causing traffic jams that hampered rescue vehicles. It took two hours to put the fires out and another hour to rescue people from the rubble.8 DEATHS AND INJURIES It is likely that around 60 people died as a result of the Moon Market bombings. The death toll was initially reported as 34, but this number quickly rose.9 The official record of casualties maintained by the City District Government documented 49 people killed and 131 injured. These figures were obtained from hospitals and mortuaries four days after the bombing. They do not include victims who did not seek treatment at hospitals. In addition to the 49 people officially recorded as being killed in the blast, there were a further three dead who were suspected as being perpetrators. In addition, the mortuary of King Edward’s Medical University received a shopping bag filled with limbs two days after the incident. These body parts were not counted in government records. After four days, around half of the injured (66) had been discharged from hospitals. However, some of those recorded as injured in the initial assessment eventually succumbed to their wounds. For example, at the Sheik Zayed hospital, a state hospital near the blast, which received the largest number of casualties, eight of those admitted died over the following weeks.10 One family told AOAV that their son, Shahn, who owned a stall selling children’s clothes, could only be identified by his underwear. Shahn received burns to 70% of his body and had seven pieces of shrapnel in his chest. He was in hospital for 26 days before he eventually died following complications during his second surgery. Victims were taken to a variety of hospitals, with some of the closest facilities quickly overwhelmed and forced to divert casualties. Dr Sajud Sharif, the consultant in charge of the Accident and Emergency department at the Sheikh Zayed hospital, said the biggest challenge his department faced was keeping track of who had received what treatment. The situation was made more difficult by overcrowding. As well as receiving over 50 casualties in just a few hours, the hospital was packed with families looking for relatives, and with media reporting on the attack. In Pakistan, it is quite normal for camera crews to come right inside the hospital to film victims receiving treatment. Zafari Iqbal, a security guard in the hospital, remembers having to break up scuffles between the crowds and trying to placate devastated families searching for someone to blame. Within this chaos was the additional challenge of tackling the complex nature of the wounds suffered by the victims. Professor Maheed, Trauma Surgeon at the Sheikh Zayed hospital, who operated on many of the injured, explained that bomb blasts present a particular series of challenges. Unlike in the case of gunshot victims, bomb blast patients arrive with multiple traumatic injuries. Their treatment is therefore more complicated and their condition harder to manage. Maheed also acknowledged that it is possible to miss injuries or trauma. Victims of the Moon Market blast in Sheikh Zayed hospital were treated for: penetrating injuries from ball bearings, and even from other people’s bone fragments; blunt trauma injuries; severe burns and smoke inhalation; collapsed lungs; amputations; eardrum damage and eye injuries.11 Salman Zaib was a 21-year-old student at the time of the attack. He was at the Moon Market to collect money from a jeweller for his father, and was standing about a metre away from the second bomb when it detonated. He was spared almost certain death when a woman happened to walk in front of him just as it exploded. Zaib had to have stitches on his back for injuries from shrapnel and pieces of the woman’s bones. Both his legs were broken. They were so badly damaged that they required expensive plastic surgery and bone grafts. He was in bed for 4-5 months, and it took over one and a half years before he was able to walk again. Even 70 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 74. four years later, he is unable to put in the same hours at his father’s furniture business or move around easily. The day after the bomb blast, Zaib was due to take the final exams for his accountancy qualification. The time he spent in hospital recovering from his injuries meant that he fell behind with his studies and eventually had to drop out.12 PSYCHOLOGICAL HARM Other injuries can be less visible, but have equally devastating effects. Witnessing horrific violence and seeing the bloody aftermath can lead to psychological trauma and impact negatively on psycho-social wellbeing. Many of the people who AOAV spoke to had displayed symptoms associated with post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) at some point in the years following the bombing. People complained of unending headaches, reliving the event through flashbacks, and feeling constantly on guard. Some described the incident in vivid terms, and were clearly overwhelmed by the sudden change in their physical surroundings. Some people found their entire moods changed after the blast. Muhammad Arif Saleem was visiting the market with his wife to buy new school uniforms for his children, as the weather was getting colder. He received a deep cut to the head and damaged his hearing, but these physical injuries were treated within a week. Emotionally though, he was deeply disturbed. Saleem went back to working in a restaurant a few weeks after the bombing, but was still having nightmares about the attack. He found that his temper had changed since the incident, and lost his job as a result. His restaurant sent him home as he had clearly not fully recovered. When he came back after a few days, his job had been given to someone else.13 INDIRECT EFFECTS ON HEALTHCARE Responding to bombings like the one in the Moon Market, and preparing for the possibility of future attacks, have deep consequences. These activities drain hospitals of resources and have knock-on effects on their patients. A few hours after the bombing, hospitals received calls from government officials telling them that treatment for all victims of the bombing should be provided free of charge. In most cases, this meant that victims received free treatment and medication, at least initially, unless they went to private hospital. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 In practice, this gesture is less generous than it first appears. The free treatment and medication provided by the hospitals was not met with extra money from the government. The additional costs that emerged had to be absorbed by the existing budgets. According to senior hospital officials, no additional funds were offered by the government to either the Jinnah or Sheikh Zayed hospitals, which had received the majority of victims after the Moon market bombing. In order to respond to future incidents of the scale of the Moon Market blast, hospitals have had to purchase specialist medical equipment for trauma patients, like chest tubes for up to 50 patients. Staff members have also had to receive extra training for responding to mass casualty disasters.14 General concerns about the security situation in Pakistan mean that hospitals also invest heavily in defending themselves from potential attacks. For instance, the Sheikh Zayed hospital currently employs 104 security guards, costing around 1% of its annual budget. Hospitals in Pakistan are further hampered by difficulties in retaining their best and brightest doctors, who are keen to move abroad because of the security situation across the whole of the country. Police search through the ashes of the market for evidence 71
  • 75. DAMAGE TO THE MARKET The Moon Market bombing had severe economic effects on both the businesses in the market and on families of victims. Before the attack, the Moon Market was one of the busiest markets in Lahore, with several hundred shops, stalls and restaurants. There are 18 plazas in the market, and each contains around 70-80 shops and stalls. Shoppers would travel from across the city to buy goods, conduct business and meet with friends. According to Abdul Jabar, President of the Traders’ Union in the market, 61 shops were damaged, along with 90 smaller stalls. Jabar was on the committee with government officials to determine how compensation was awarded to businesses in the market. He claimed that businesses in the market suffered for 3-6 months after the blast, when it was partially closed. He argued that they are now trading at roughly the same level as before the bombing. Part of the reason for this, he suggested, was that the Punjab provincial government awarded compensation ranging from Rs150,000 and Rs1.5 million (US$2,100 to US$21,000).15 However, not everyone interviewed was as positive about the market’s recovery, and some were critical of the process for awarding compensation to businesses. Rao Mubarak, Executive Vice President of the rival Quami Tajir Ittehad traders’ Union, claimed that the money provided by the government was well short of the Rs500 million (US$6.9 million) of damage estimated by the District Coordinator’s Office. He claimed that some money was paid to bogus claimants. In Mubarak’s estimation, the market is trading at around 30% of the level it was before the bombing. While small eateries are doing well, the cloth and jewellery shops are suffering. Many traders would have left, but are forced to stay because the value of their assets has decreased so much that they do not want to sell for a loss.16 Some relatives of the stall owners who were killed in the bombing missed out on the compensation to which they were entitled. The family of Shanh, the young stall-holder who was in hospital for 26 days before he died from his injuries, were told by the market union that they had applied late, and were not awarded any compensation for the approximate Rs300,000 (US$2,550) of stock which was lost. The family said that they were anxious not to appear greedy, or somehow not sufficiently mournful, at the death of their son, which is why they did not apply for money straight away, so missed the deadline for applications. LONG-TERM IMPACTS ON FAMILIES It was not just businesses in the Moon market that suffered economically after the blast. Many victims and their families were left with their primary earner either injured or killed. Some people lost jobs because they could no longer work. Despite help with initial medical treatment, most people also faced large medical bills for subsequent treatment. Victims of the bombing were entitled to compensation from the provincial government. Families who lost loved-ones received Rs500,000 (US$4,350). People who were severely injured received Rs200,000 (US$1,650), and those with slight injuries Rs50,000 (US$450). Compensation was only given to those with physical injuries. Government officials acknowledge that this system of flat rates of compensation was imperfect, and did not address the fact that some injuries are more debilitating and long-lasting than others. However, it was felt that devising a new system based on needs would be subjective, overly complicated and expensive. For most of the families AOAV spoke to, the support offered did not come close to covering the losses and expenses they endured following the bombing. In particular, there was a collective failure by government and civil society to appreciate just how long-lasting the effects of the bombing were. The uncle of one victim said, ‘You can’t give a man a meal for a day. After a week, he’ll starve.’ Abdul Qadir, who works at a stall selling children’s shoes in the market, received shrapnel injuries to his stomach, and his had was cut by broken glass. He had to have a colostomy operation, and his large intestine was shut down for 4-5 months. When AOAV visited, four years later, he was still in pain, and had recently been told that he needed more surgery. Most of the treatment that he received in the hospital was free, even in the months after the blast. However, he did have to pay around Rs4,000 (US$45) for the colostomy bags, which needed to be changed four times a week for several months. Qadir’s stall was completely destroyed in the blast, and he was awarded Rs100,000 (US$900) for the damage. He took the difficult decision to rebuild his stall. He started his business up again, but had to buy all his supplies on credit Rescuers were quick to the scene of the incident but faced a number of difficulties in fighting the fire 72 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 76. and now works off a smaller stall that has cheaper rent.17 Some victims AOAV spoke to found that after their recovery they had no jobs to return to or they were no longer able to perform them. THE PERPETRATORS Nearly four years after the bombing, no convictions have been made in relation to the Moon Market attacks. Pakistan has been widely criticised for failing to successfully prosecute people accused of involvement in bombings like the one at Moon Market.18 Out of the 559 cases brought against alleged terrorists in Punjab Province in 2012, 414 (71%) were acquitted.19 In part, these figures are misleading. Unlike in other countries, the Pakistani justice system does not allow for prosecutors to drop a case, even if they think the evidence is insufficient to go to trial. However, lawyers AOAV spoke to identified several areas that made securing convictions particularly difficult for prosecutors in Pakistan.20 Firstly, they have repeatedly found that witnesses are reluctant to testify. With no witness protection programme in Pakistan, they are especially vulnerable to threats and intimidation by militant groups. Secondly, the quality of evidence obtained by police investigating the bombing is not of a high enough quality to be admissible. Sometimes, this is due to the high standards demanded of the evidence, but at other times, it is because the police are either under-resourced or poorly-trained. Finally, with the actual perpetrators of the bombing killed in the blast, it is difficult to link members of the same group to that particular incident. CONCLUSION AOAV’s research has shown that IED attacks in Pakistan have an impact far beyond the headline casualty figures. Alongside those directly killed and injured are the countless others who suffer psychologically and financially: the children who are terrified when a firework goes off; the hospital staff who cannot eat barbecued food again after smelling the burning flesh of the victims; the stall owner whose takings are down now that the market is less popular. The stories of the people impacted by the Moon Market bombings are just a few of thousands. There were 22 suicide bomb attacks in Pakistan in 2012; five of them occurred in markets. The whole of Pakistani society is impacted, and vital resources are having to be diverted to help victims and to prevent future violence. But this is not just Pakistan’s problem. It is one that is proliferating world-wide. The humanitarian harm to civilians is catastrophic, and states must take action to address it. Responses should not be restricted purely to preventative security measures; they should also embrace: stigmatisation; the robust application of international humanitarian law; better control of the trade in components, such as detonators and explosive materials; tighter stockpile controls; addressing the financing of non-state actors; ensuring that the needs of victims are properly met; and embarking on campaigns of education and outreach. The annual civilian deaths from IEDs world-wide already vastly exceed those from landmines. This is a global problem that needs to be addressed now. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 NOTES 1. Dodd, H. and Perkins, R. (2014), Explosive Events, AOAV, April 2014, available at: http://aoav.org.uk/ wp-content/uploads/2014/05/AOAV-Explosive- Events-2013.pdf, accessed10 December 2013. 2. Ali, Muhammad Faisal (2008), ‘Bomber draws blood on Independence Day eve’, DAWN, 14 August 2008, available at: dawn.com/ news/316472/bomber-draws-blood-on-independence- day-eve, accessed 10 December 2013. 3. Shah, Pir Zubair (2009), ‘Pakistan bombing kills more than 30’, The New York Times, 20 February 2009, available at: nytimes.com/2009/02/21/world/asia/21pstan. html, accessed 10 December 2013. 4. ‘Blast in Peshawar’. Geo TV, 30 October 2009, available at: geo.tv/important_events/2009/Peshawar_ blast28oct/pages/English_news.asp, accessed 10 December 2013. 5. Interviews with victims of the blast, conducted by AOAV in November 2013. 6. Interview with the Civil Defence Department Headquarters, 6 November 2013. 7. Interview with the Punjab Emergency Service, 6 November 2013. 8. Interviews with victims of the blast, conducted by AOAV in November 2013 9. Associated Press (2009), ‘Lahore bomb attack kills 34’, The Guardian, 7 December 2009, available at: theguardian.com/world/2009/dec/07/ lahore-maket-bomb-attack, accessed 9 December 2013. 10. AOAV examination of official records in the Sheikh Zayed Hospital. 11. Interview with Professor Maeed, 9 November 2013. 12. Interview with Salman Zaib, November 2013. 13. Interview with Muhammad Arif Saleem, November 2013. 14. Twenty-five hospital staff from across the Punjab were sent on 15-day training courses organised by the WHO in Nepal in 2011 and 2013. 15. Interview with Abdul Jabar, November 2013. 16. Interview with Rao Mubarak, November 2013. 17. Interview with Abdul Qadir, November 2013. 18. Nelson, D. (2011), ‘Pakistan incapable of prosecuting terror suspects’, The Telegraph, 31 August 2011, available at: www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/asia/ pakistan/8733203/Pakistan-incapable-of-prosecuting- terrorists.html, accessed 10 December 2013. 19. Mir-Khan, Aetekah (2013), ‘Prosecuting terrorists: Out of 599 cases in 2012, suspects acquitted in 414’, The Express Tribune, 1 April 2013, available at: http://tribune.com.pk/ story/529353/prosecuting-terrorists-out-of-599- cases-in-2012-suspects-acquitted-in-414/ accessed 1 December 2013. 20. Interview with the office of the Prosecutor- General of Punjab Province, 12 November 2013. 73
  • 77. The 2014 Global Terrorism Index tracks the rise and fall of the world’s largest terrorist organisations since 1998. Whilst the vast majority of terrorist groups are only responsible for a handful of deaths, a select few are responsible for the majority of death and destruction caused by terrorism in the last fifteen years. ISIL, which emerged out of Al-Qa’ida in Iraq, is one such group. In this essay, terrorism expert Ekaterina Stepanova from the Institute of World Economy International Relations, outlines a shift in two main trends, the broader network fragmentation of the global jihadi movement and the shift from top-down to bottom-up regionalization of violent Islamic groups. She also tracks the complex evolution of ISIL as a regional force in the Middle East, and what its continued growth means for the world and region. TRANSNATIONAL ISLAMIST TERRORISM NETWORK FRAGMENTATION AND BOTTOM-UP REGIONALIZATION Ekaterina Stepanova, Head, Peace and Conflict Studies Unit, Institute of World Economy International Relations (IMEMO) The rise of the Islamic State of Iraq and Levant (ISIL)1 occurred in the broader context of the dominance of radical Islamist organizations among the world’s most lethal militant-terrorist groups in the Middle East, Asia and Africa and the occasional outbreaks of homegrown, but transnationally inspired jihadist terrorism in the West. The ISIL phenomenon has also featured a higher-than-usual inflow of jihadists from other conflict hotspots and non-Muslim states. All this adds to the overall confusion about the different types and levels of transnational terrorism of radical Islamist bent and reinforces the demand for overly simplistic explanations. For instance, in official circles and media discourse both in the West and in the rest of the world the main direction of transnationalisation of Islamist terrorism is often still interpreted as the top-down regionalization of al-Qaeda-centered ‘global jihad’ movement. This article argues instead that the evolution of transnational Islamist terrorism is more complex and non-linear. Its cutting edge may be formed by two ideologically linked, but distinct and only partially overlapping processes: the network fragmentation of the global jihad movement, including in the West; the bottom-up, rather than top-down, regionalization of violent Islamism in the world’s heavily internationalized centers of militant-terrorist activity in the Greater Middle East. MAIN TRENDS IN TRANSNATIONAL TERRORISM Of all trends in contemporary terrorism, the following three are of particular relevance to the evolution of transnational Islamist terrorism. (1) Sharp increase in terrorist activity in the recent years, coupled with its disproportionately high concentration in two regions and two major trans-border conflict areas. No current international security crisis – from the outbreak of Ebola to the crisis around and conflict in Ukraine as the dominant European security issue – can undo or overshadow one simple fact: 2013 was the peak year in global terrorist activity not only in the early 21st century, but also for the entire period since 1970 that is covered by available 74 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 78. statistics. Disturbingly, the previous highs for terrorist incidents were recorded in 2011 and 2012 and for fatalities – in 2012.2 While terrorist activity is at its historical peak and continues to increase, it is very unevenly distributed around the world, with the bulk of it concentrated in just a handful of countries. The post-9/11 global terrorism statistics is heavily dominated by two regions (the Middle East and South Asia). The bulk of terrorist activity there is, in turn, accounted for by two regional centers of gravity – major armed conflicts in Iraq and Afghanistan (and, more recently, in the broader Afghanistan-Pakistan and the Iraq-Syria contexts). The heavily internationalized wars in Iraq and Afghanistan both involved armed insurgent/terrorist movements in Muslim countries directed primarily against Western troops backing weak local governments. The Western withdrawal from Iraq and Afghanistan and changing forms of internationalization of the respective conflicts did not improve the situation. (2) The general dominance of region-based radical Islamist groups and movements among the most active and lethal militant-terrorist groups. In 2012, the top 6 terrorist groups – all of the radical Islamist type – accounted for almost half (around 5000) of all terrorist fatalities in the world.3 In 2013, all of the most lethal terrorist groups in the world were radical Islamist organizations, including the Taliban in Afghanistan, ISIL (in Iraq and Syria), “Tehrik-e-Taleban” (Pakistan), “Boko Haram” (Nigeria), “Lashkar-e-Jangvi” (Pakistan), “Djabhat an-Nusrah” (Syria), “ash-Shabab” (Somalia). Remarkably, these groups, in addition to the use of terrorist means, have also been active combatants – military parties to major armed conflicts in respective states. All of them have or acquire a major trans-border dimension and evolve in the direction of further regionalization of militant and terrorist activity. In contrast to these groups, for instance, al-Qaeda as such has not committed a single terrorist act in 2012–2013. (3) Further transnationalisation of terrorism at different levels that could be distinguished primarily by the ultimate scale of a group’s end goal(s) – local, regional or global. At the present stage of globalization, terrorism at different levels of world politics from local to global differs more in terms of degree and quality of transnationalisation, than by whether or not it is transnationalised. Furthermore, transnationalisation primarily manifests itself in qualitative rather than quantitative terms. Despite the fact that out of a couple of thousands of terrorist groups tracked by the Global Terrorism Dataset (GTD) only few attack soft targets on foreign territory,4 the very boundary between ‘domestic’ and ‘international’ terrorism gets increasingly blurred. Even terrorist groups with localized political agenda tend to increasingly transnationalise some or most of their logistics, fund-raising, propaganda and training activities. Terrorist actors of certain motivational/ideological types, such as the jihadist cells and individuals in the West, may address their terrorist acts to ‘the world as whole’ and act to advance explicitly transnationalised or global goals, even as they rely primarily or solely on local resources and do not necessarily travel out of their country of citizenship. In addition, in today’s globalized world, transnationalisation does not exclude – and is often dynamically interlinked with – the fragmentation of terrorism and other forms of collective violence. In sum, as all terrorism today is transnationalised to some degree, of critical importance is to distinguish between different levels and qualities of transnational terrorism. In the world where even a group with localized agenda can develop a wide transnational fund-raising network or hit citizens of many states by attacking civilians in major urban centers, the main criterion to establish the qualitative level of transnationalisation of terrorism is the scale of an organization’s ultimate goals and agenda – local, regional or global. NETWORK FRAGMENTATION OF ‘GLOBAL JIHAD’ The bulk of terrorist activity in the world is accounted for by militant actors that pursue relatively limited goals in local or regional contexts. In contrast, the more recent phenomenon of ‘global terrorism’ associated primarily with al-Qaeda advances an explicitly universalist agenda and ultimately pursues existential, non-negotiable and unlimited goals. Such terrorism is truly extraterritorial: while it is not specifically tied to any single local or regional political context, it does not have to be global in its physical reach to have a global impact. Despite minimal number of incidents, operatives and ideologues, al-Qaeda continued to attract disproportionately high attention well after 9/11. This may be partly explained by the fact that most of its high-profile targets have been either located in or associated with the GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 developed Western world, partly – by the significant anti-system potential of the supranational ideology of global jihad that offers a very radical and reactionary response to very modern challenges of a globalizing world. However, in the mid-2010s, following a massive anti-al-Qaeda campaign and liquidation of most of its first generation leaders, including Osama bin Laden, the following question seems appropriate. How come that the al-Qaeda-centred global jihad is still considered to pose the main terrorist threat to international security, if in the early 2010s, al-Qaeda as such did not even make it into the top 20 most dangerous terrorist groups (in 2011, it was responsible just for one kidnapping out of over 5000 terrorist incidents5 and, in 2012-2013, did not commit any terrorist attacks)?6 The answer is complex and linked the dynamic structural transformation of the global jihad movement and its adaptation to changing circumstances. There are two main interpretations of the evolution of the global jihad movement. While both imply a degree of fragmentation of the original ‘al-Qaeda’, the first framework interprets this process as top-down regionalization. Since the late 2000s, this approach has prevailed in mainstream expert and political discourses in the United States and in the West at large. It disaggregates ‘global jihad’ into three levels. First, it leaves some direct strategic command and control role to what remains of the ‘al-Qaeda core’ based in Pakistan/Afghanistan. Second, it argues that the movement’s main center of gravity has shifted towards several large, well-structured and organizationally coherent regional affiliates in Muslim regions (ultimately subordinate to ‘al-Qaeda Central’). This usually refers to ‘al-Qaeda in the Arabian Peninsula’, ‘al-Qaeda in the Lands of the Islamic Maghreb’, ‘al-Qaeda in Iraq’ and even ‘al-Qaedas’ in the Horn of Africa and in Southeast Asia. The third level is formed by al-Qaeda’s ‘ideological adherents’ – small cells and individuals, most active in the West itself, who ‘know the group only through its ideology to carry out violence in its name.’7 The loose network of these micro-cells, however, is commonly interpreted as a sign of al-Qaeda’s organizational degradation that is claimed to have resulted primarily from counterterrorist pressure by the United States and its allies. The alternative approach promoted in this article emphasizes the genuine ‘network fragmentation’ of global jihad as the cutting 75
  • 79. edge of the movement’s evolution.8 It denies residual strategic command functions for ‘the al-Qaeda core’ at the present stage, beyond the symbolic and inspirational role of its ideology and remaining leaders such as Ayman az-Zawahiri. This approach does not in principle deny the existence of al-Qaeda’s regional affiliates in Muslim regions (this role best fits ‘al-Qaeda in the Arabian peninsula’ that retains a genetic link with the original al-Qaeda and, to a lesser extent – ‘al-Qaeda in the Lands of the Islamic Maghreb’). It does, however, question the vision of global jihad as the ‘top down’, hierarchically integrated ‘Islamist International’ clearly divided into large well-structured regional affiliates. It points at the fact that most of the so-called regional affiliates have long and solid local pre-history and strong homegrown roots. Their main agendas and priorities are inextricably tied to respective regional contexts and local/regional armed conflicts. When they upgrade and expand their activity to the regional level, it is by following the ‘bottom-up’ logic rather than any ‘top-down’ impulse or command from some master HQs. These groups’ occasional statements of support or even pledges of loyalty to al-Qaeda have been more of a symbolic and declaratory than substantive nature. Instead, smaller autonomous cells9 that are linked by a loose ideological network, are active in several dozen countries and promote an explicitly globalist agenda are seen as the most committed ideological adepts of global jihad and as the cutting edge of the evolution of its organizational patterns. Such network fragmentation was best captured by Abu Musab as-Suri’s theory of ‘jihad by individual cells’ (and, in the West, by the ‘leaderless jihad’ theory).10 Network fragmentation does not imply aggressive recruitment into a pre-existing framework – rather, adepts are encouraged to start their own cells to further the shared ideology and the movement’s ends. The idea of starting a violent cell appeals as much to young people’s desire for glory and personal conscience as to their political or ideological beliefs. In contrast to Islamist groups and movements tied to the specific local/regional contexts and armed conflicts in the Middle East, Asia or Africa, this type of cell is truly extraterritorial in its outlook and goals, with most of such actors emerging in Western rather than Muslim states. These cells display diverse radicalization paths and are often not linked to one another in any formal way, but they share the ideology of global jihad and together form – and see themselves as part of – an adaptive and resilient transnational network-type movement. Despite its marginality, this movement can still pose a serious terrorist threat to international security in two main ways. First, there has been a gradual rise in homegrown jihadist terrorism in the West, despite continuing fragmentation of such violence underscored by dominance of mini-cells and the growing proportion of single actors. Some of them – the so-called ‘lone wolves’ – act entirely on their own (e.g., Nidal Hasan in the 2010 Fort Hood shooting), others act either as network agents or on their own initiative, but with some operational or other network connections.11 Fragmented jihadist terrorism in the West is hard to track as individuals or cells may not be in contact with other/known terrorist actors, do not necessarily get external training, and often acquire weapons and materials independently and from open sources. However, it also tends to produce a mismatch between the Western jihadists’ high ideological ambition and their relatively limited capacity to launch terrorist attacks (they generally lack experience in violence unless a group involves a veteran/ returnee from a foreign armed conflict or have got some professional training). This mismatch often results in failure and partly explains why, while half of jihadist plots in the West involved plans to cause mass casualties, very few have led to actual mass-casualty attacks.12 Secondly, the fragmented network of ‘global jihad’ adepts forms a natural pool for influx of Western jihadist fighters to various conflicts in the Muslim world. More limited connections – a few foreign contacts and visits to conflict-torn regions for ideological inspiration, sometimes also in hope to get some training – while not a must for jihadists13 in the West, have not been uncommon either. The two-way nature of such flows and links has become more disturbing than ever in view of the rise of radical Islamist organizations in the Iraq-Syria context (such as ‘Jabhat an-Nusrah’ and, above all, ISIL). They have attracted more foreign Islamist fighters than any other theater since Afghanistan in the 1980s, with Western, mainly European, fighters comprising no less than a quarter of all foreign jihadists – a disproportionately high share. For the West, this has alarming implications. Possible return of some of these seasoned fighters could stimulate new extremist networks and do a lot to bridge the mismatch between jihadists terrorists’ ambition and qualification (even as only a limited percentage of such returnees from previous conflicts have turned back to terrorism so far).14 While certainly a serious concern, the network fragmentation of global jihad (that manifests itself more in the West than anywhere else) is a less critical international security problem than the challenge posed by the bottom-up regionalization of Islamist militancy and terrorism. BOTTOM-UP REGIONALIZATION: ISIL Regionalization of territorially based insurgent-terrorist Islamist groups could be traced in various regions. However, it only tends to become an issue of major international concern in regional contexts characterized by a combination of chronic state weakness or failure, protracted major conflicts and all-out civil wars and high degree of transnationalisation and/or even formal internationalization (foreign military presence). It is in these conditions that regionalization of a more localized movement is coupled with consolidation rather than fragmentation of its military-political potential and with a qualitative upgrade of its militant/ terrorist activity, rather than decline in its intensity. Nowhere does this trend manifest itself better than in the context of the ongoing crisis in and around Iraq and the trans-border ISIL phenomenon. Iraq has led the list of countries most affected by terrorism since the mid-2000s – well before ISIL has taken full shape (in the first post-9/11 decade Iraq alone accounted for over third of all terrorism-related fatalities worldwide).15 However, a decade later, it is the activity of ISIL and some smaller radical Islamist groups in the extended, cross-border Iraq-Syria context that has become the main impulse and driver of anti-government militancy, terrorism and sectarian violence in the region. Acting in two (semi-)failed state contexts – in Iraq as a chronically failing post-intervention state and in Syria seriously weakened by an ongoing bloody civil war – ISIL provides an even more impressive example of the full regionalization of a militant-terrorist movement with a powerful ideology, major state-building ambitions and quasi-state potential than the cross-border activity and phenomenon of the Taliban in the Afghanistan-Pakistan context. The emergence and evolution of ISIL in the direction of ‘bottom-up regionalization’ has to be addressed in two main contexts: (1) 76 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 80. internal dynamics and conflicts in Iraq and Syria, including the overlap with intra-regional dimension and (2) broader links and connections to transnational Islamism. First, no other major regionalizing Islamist movement has been so strongly driven by intra-state and intra-regional factors, even as these dynamics were partly distorted, stimulated or set in motion by previous external intervention in Iraq. The informal transnationalisation of a civil war in Syria on both sides has also largely, although not exclusively, been a product of intra-regional dynamics. Of all the factors and conditions that can explain the rise of ISIL and its major military and modest state-building successes since the summer of 2014, the more specific and directly relevant ones are internal to the countries and the region in question. They include the genuine discontent by very diverse groups of Iraqi Sunnis – from the former Baathists to tribal groups to radical Islamists – with their growing political and socio-economic marginalization and repression. This rising discontent had earlier helped feed the anti-U.S. insurgency, but continued to accumulate during the rule of the increasingly sectarian al-Maliki government. That was coupled with the general limited functionality and low legitimacy of the unpopular, but increasingly authoritarian Iraqi regime inherited from the times of the foreign security presence. The bloody civil war that erupted in the neighboring Syria provided an ideal ‘window of opportunity’ to ISIL as the most radical part of the Iraqi Sunni opposition to get a haven, secure the second country-base, continue fighting and acquire financial self-sufficiency through control of the cross-border smuggling of oil and almost anything else, even before it shifted its main center of activity back to Iraq. Not surprisingly, the worst and most direct implications of the ISIL activity once it has taken its full shape affect, first and foremost, the region itself. The ISIL phenomenon threatens to deal a massive, if not necessarily final, blow to at least two already failing or seriously weakened states at once, adding new quality to the broader destabilization in the region that has already for over a decade been the world’s main center of terrorist and militant activity. Second, ISIL’s links to transnational Islamist terrorism remain a contested issue. In policy and media circles ISIL, as well as its previous ‘editions’, are often portrayed not as self-sufficient organizations but as a branch of al-Qaeda-inspired ‘global jihad’. This interpretation usually emphasizes two issues: (a) ISIL’s pre-history in Iraq, with a focus on the so-called ‘al-Qaeda in Iraq’ and (b) the unprecedentedly large presence of foreign jihadist fighters among ISIL’s command and rank-and-file alike. The Islamist core of what is now known as ISIL (and was previously known as Islamic State in Iraq and earlier as ‘al-Qaeda in Iraq’) formed in the aftermath of the 2003 US-led intervention in the course of escalating and radicalizing resistance to foreign forces and their local allies. A few statements of support and loyalty to al-Qaeda made by the group’s first leader Abu Musab az-Zarqawi (a controversial figure with ambiguous connections in and beyond jihadist circles), the reference to al-Qaeda in the group’s name under Zarkawi (removed shortly after his death in 2006) and his increasing reliance on demonstrative use of mass-casualty terrorist sufficed to degrade the group to little but ‘al-Qaeda off shoot’. While this might have served well to discredit the genuine nature of the armed Sunni opposition to the US presence in Iraq, it did not reflect the real nature and composition of the group. Its main goal remained the liberation of Iraq and the establishment of an Islamist state in Iraq and the overwhelming majority of militants and commanders were Iraqi (while the proportion of foreign fighters did not exceed 4–10 per cent).16 By the end of 2006, the group became one of the largest insurgency forces in Iraq, formed the core of the coalition of the anti-government Islamist actors and renamed itself into Islamic State of Iraq. The intensifying pressure by the US forces and some loyal Sunni tribes, as part of the ‘surge’ campaign of the late 2000s, and later also by the government and its Shia allies pushed part of the movement out of Iraq to the neighboring Syria. The escalating civil war there since 2011 gave the group a major boost and upgraded it to one of the largest forces on the radical Islamist flank of the armed opposition. While the group had joined the Syrian civil war on the side of the jihadist part of the opposition, after it upgraded itself to the Islamic State of Iraq and Levant and tried to unite other Islamist groups under its control, it fell out with the another largest jihadist organization ‘Jabhat an-Nusrah’. Remarkably, in the conflict between ISIL and ‘an-Nusrah’ in Syria the political and ideological support of ‘al-Qaeda Central’ was GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 not on the ISIL side. As the ISIL shifted the main focus of its activity back to Iraq and seized upon the rising tensions between the al-Maliki government and the Iraqi Sunnis, al-Qaeda’s main voice Ayman az-Zawahiri formally denied any support or affiliation to ISIL in February 2014, months before its victorious march deeper into Iraq.17 The absence of al-Qaeda blessing did not stop thousands of foreign fighters (some of whom switched the front from Syria) from joining ISIL, increasingly well-funded and well-organized militarily. Their overall numbers, proportion and composition are dynamic and yet to be clarified, but two preliminary conclusions can be made even on the basis of available information. First, while the ISIL army-style combat potential is largely attributed to the presence of the Iraqi ex-Baathist professional security and military cadre (who may comprise up to a third of ISIL’s leader al-Baghdadi’s deputies), foreign jihadists appear to play a disproportionately large role in the ISIL terrorist attacks and other atrocities, including beheadings. Second, it is the influx of ‘global jihad’ fighters from the West in particular, with their distinctively universalist agenda, that may provide the region-based ISIL with its main link to a truly globalized agenda. In this respect, they may play an even larger role than either the ideological symbolism of the historical al-Qaeda core or the influence of jihadists from other local/regional ‘fronts’ (that range from major conflicts in failed states such as Afghanistan, Somalia or Yemen to peripheral Islamist/separatist insurgencies in many fully functional states in Asia and Eurasia). *** Obsessive attempts to trace or link any Islamist insurgency/terrorist movements in areas of heavily transnationalised armed conflicts to the ‘core al-Qaeda’ in line with the strict ‘top-down regionalization’ scheme might have played their own part in overlooking the rise of ISIL. This trans-border, regional movement is not only extremely radical in ideological outlook and methods, but also efficient in combat and, potentially, basic governance and quick to adapt to the limited anti-ISIL air campaign launched by the US-led coalition of Western and Arab states. The regionalization of ISIL largely followed the ‘bottom-up’ rather than ‘top-down’ pattern and was primarily driven by intra-regional dynamics, state weakness and sectarianism (exacerbated by previous international interventions). ISIL’s main link to 77
  • 81. the ‘global jihad’ agenda and ideology is provided by the significant presence of foreign fighters, especially Western jihadists with their markedly universalist outlook. However, in contrast to al-Qaeda or ‘global jihad’ adepts in and beyond the West, ISIL does not appear to pursue or prioritize totally abstract and utopian global goals. It is precisely the fact that ISIL is fully mired in the regional context, sets up more tangible and realistic goals and does not (dis)miss a chance of building a trans-border regional Islamic state here and now that makes it today a no lesser, or even a greater, challenge to international security than al-Qaeda and its direct off-shoots and self-generating micro-clones. Whether the ISIL phenomenon is more of an outlier or signals a broader trend may yet to be seen. However, some of the deadliest Islamist militant-terrorist groups in the world’s worst conflicts (ranging from the Afghan and Pakistani Taliban to ‘Boko Haram’ in Nigeria or ‘ash-Shabab’ in Somalia) – appear to or may evolve in the same direction, especially if a combination of dysfunctional or failing states, deep regional divisions and unsuccessful past of present external interventions is in place. This provides sufficient grounds to consider the ‘bottom-up regionalization’ as one of the most potentially disturbing trends in transnational Islamist terrorism. NOTES 1. On 29 June 2014, the movement changed the name to Islamic State (IS), but is more widely known in English as ISIL or ISIS – Islamic State of Iraq and Sham (the Arabic for Levant) or Islamic State of Iraq and Syria. 2. 2013 is the last year for which full GTD statistics was available at the time of writing. Global Terrorism Database (GTD) / National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START), University of Maryland. http:// www.start.umd.edu/data/gtd. 3. Testimony by W. Braniff, Executive Director, START, University of Maryland, before the U.S. House Armed Services Committee Hearing on the State of Al Qaeda, its Affiliates, and Associated Groups: View From Outside Experts. Washington, DC: United States House of Representatives, 4 Feb. 2014, P. 3. 4. Global Terrorism Database 2014. 5. Global Terrorism Index: Capturing the Impact of Terrorism in 2002-2011 (Sydney; N.Y.: Institute for Economics and Peace, 2012), p. 6 http://www. visionofhumanity.org/sites/default/files/2012_ Global_Terrorism_Index_Report.pdf 6. Testimony by W. Braniff. p. 3. 7. National Strategy for Counterterrorism (Washington D.C.: The White House, 28 June 2011), p. 19. 8. Stepanova E., ‘The evolution of the al-Qaeda-type terrorism: networks and beyond’, in L. Bossi et al. (ed.), Dynamics of Political Violence: A Process-Oriented Perspective on Radicalization and the Escalation of Political Conflict (Farnham, VA: Ashgate, 2014), pp. 288–305. 9. Al-Suri A.M., The Call to Global Islamic Resistance. CENTRA Technology, Inc. / trans. From Arabic (DCIA Counterterrorism Center, Office of Terrorism Analysis, 2004), pp. 1367–1368. 10. Sageman M. Leaderless Jihad: Terror Networks in the Twenty-First Century (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2007). 11. See, e. g., Nesser P., ‘Single actor terrorism: scope, characteristics and explanations’, in Perspectives on Terrorism, vol. 6, no. 6 (2012), pp. 61–73. 12. There were only 4 rarely successful mass-casualty jihadist attacks in the West after 2001: the 2004 Madrid bombings, the 2005 London bombings, the 2009 Fort Hood shooting and the 2013 Boston Marathon bombings. 13. For numbers on Syria, see Zelin A.Y., ‘Up to 11,000 foreign fighters in Syria; steep rise among Western Europeans’, ICSR Insight, 17 December 2013. Estimated numbers for foreign fighters in ISIL in the Iraq-Syria context are higher, but vary significantly. 14. For more detail, see Hegghammer T., “Should I stay or should I go? Explaining variation in Western jihadists’ choice between domestic and foreign fighting,” in American Political Science Review, vol. 107, no. 1 (Feb. 2013), p. 10. 15. Global Terrorism Index 2012, p. 12. 16. Baker J., Hamilton L. The Iraq Study Group Report (Washington D.C.: Iraq Study Group, 2006). 17. Bayoumi A., Harding L., “Mapping Iraq’s fighting groups”, Al-Jazeera (27 June 2014); The Evolution of the Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL): Relationships 2004-2014, START Fact Sheet, June 2014. 78 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 82. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 Terrorism in all its forms is a major threat to national security. Nuclear terrorism however is the most serious possible terrorist threat. Samantha Pitts-Kiefer from the Nuclear Threat Initiative, outlines the history and current reality of a nuclear terrorist threat, highlighting the urgent need to better strengthen global nuclear security. This contribution summarises the key global initiatives focused on this task and how the NTI Nuclear Materials Security Index aims to provide better evidence to measure amongst countries of the world, the quantities, security and control measures, global norms, domestic commitments and capacity and risk environment for nuclear materials. NUCLEAR NIGHTMARES Samantha Pitts-Kiefer, Senior Project Officer, Nuclear Threat Initiative (NTI) Thirteen years after the 9/11 attacks stunned the world and nearly a decade after the subsequent attacks in London, Madrid, and Bali made global terrorism a painful reality, public concern and awareness about the terrorist threat had started to fade. But the emergence this year of the Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL), most notably with gruesome videotaped beheadings, has once again captured the attention of citizens across the globe. Images of the barbaric ritualistic killings of American journalists and British aid workers sparked international outrage. At the same time, however, in many parts of the world, a sense remains that these kinds of deeply troubling events take place only in remote and far-off lands, and pose little threat closer to home. Unfortunately, it is naïve to think so. ISIL has tens of thousands of fighters, is well-financed, pays little respect to international borders and, in addition to individual acts of barbarism, engages in large-scale attacks on civilians. Al Qaeda leaders made it clear they were seeking weapons of mass destruction, including nuclear weapons. What if ISIL decides it too wants them? World leaders and their publics have a duty to ask such “what-ifs.” What if ISIL, al Qaeda, or some other yet-as-unknown terrorist group obtained nuclear materials and fashioned a crude improvised nuclear device? What if they were able to ship it, undetected, through one of the world’s porous ports? What if they succeeded in detonating it in one of the world’s cities? This is not just the stuff of Hollywood. Such “what-ifs” must be treated in capitals with seriousness and resolve from Washington, DC, to Moscow and beyond. World leaders, including U.S. presidents Barack Obama and George W. Bush, have identified nuclear terrorism as the number one security threat and have taken steps to address the threat through the Nuclear Security Summit process and other programs such as the Global Initiative to Combat Nuclear Terrorism and the G8 Global Partnership Against the Spread of Weapons and Materials of Mass Destruction. But much more needs to be done. Until all the materials needed to make a bomb are properly secured, the world will not be safe from terrorists bent on unleashing unimaginable horror. THE THREAT OF NUCLEAR TERRORISM During the Cold War, the United States and the Soviet Union built up vast amounts of nuclear weapons and materials. The Cuban Missile Crisis heightened fears that the nuclear arms race could result in destruction on a massive scale, whether as a result of an intentional or accidental launch and detonation of a nuclear bomb. As the Cold War came to a close, a new threat emerged: nuclear terrorism. With the disintegration of the Soviet Union, nuclear weapons and 79
  • 83. materials were left scattered across hundreds of sites in former Soviet states prompting urgent concern that smugglers or terrorists would steal enough material for a bomb. Russia and the United States worked together, through the Nunn-Lugar Cooperative Threat Reduction Program, to dismantle and destroy thousands of weapons and to ensure that the nuclear materials from those weapons were disposed of safely. Despite all that has been achieved, the security of weapons-usable nuclear materials remains an urgent concern, while at the same time terrorist groups have grown more sophisticated and more adept at carrying out mass-casualty attacks. So, today’s leaders and citizens face a chilling prospect: the detonation of a crude nuclear weapon built by terrorists with materials stolen or purchased on the black market. Though the al Qaeda that attacked the United States on 9/11 has been much diminished, al Qaeda affiliates in the Arabian Peninsula and Northern Africa, ISIL, and terrorist organizations like al-Shabaab in Somalia remind us that the terrorist threat is dynamic, constantly evolving, and, most of all, enduring. At the same time, the materials needed to build a bomb are spread around the world. Globally, there are approximately 2,000 metric tons of weapons-usable nuclear material (plutonium and highly enriched uranium or HEU) located at hundreds of sites—some of them poorly secured—scattered across twenty-five countries. Building one bomb requires only enough HEU to fill a five-pound bag of sugar or a quantity of plutonium the size of a grapefruit. Terrorists also have access to the technology and know-how needed to build a crude nuclear device, and a number of terrorist groups have in the past stated a desire to acquire and use a nuclear bomb. The consequences of detonating such a bomb in a major city would be staggering: hundreds of thousands of casualties; long-lasting environmental damage; economic losses in the hundreds of billions; and considerable political and social ramifications. No matter where a bomb is detonated, the consequences would reverberate around the globe. To build a bomb the biggest challenge terrorists face is obtaining enough HEU or separated plutonium. Every step after acquiring the material—building the bomb, transporting it, and detonating it—is easier for terrorists to take and harder for the international community to stop. So it is imperative that terrorists don’t get a hold of the materials. Today, there are myriad ways that a well-organized and sufficiently-funded terrorist group could seize the materials they need to build an improvised nuclear device that would destroy the heart of a city. They could send a team of armed assailants to overwhelm guards at an understaffed nuclear facility or to attack a convoy transporting weapons-usable nuclear materials from one facility to another. A terrorist or criminal network could corrupt insiders or use a cyberattack to defeat security controls. That is why ensuring that all weapons-usable nuclear material is properly secured to the highest standards is the key to preventing nuclear terrorism. BUILDING A STRENGTHENED GLOBAL NUCLEAR SECURITY SYSTEM The Nuclear Security Summits, launched by the United States in 2010, have brought high-level attention to the threat of nuclear terrorism and have catalyzed actions by the 54 participating states to strengthen their own security and work collectively to strengthen global security. As a result of the Summit process, states have strengthened their nuclear security laws and regulations, signed on to international treaties that require them to secure nuclear materials and criminalize acts of nuclear terrorism, and provided financial or other assistance to states to help them secure their materials. Significantly, since the Summit process was launched in 2009, twelve countries have eliminated all of their inventories of these dangerous materials. Yet, despite these important efforts, there is still no global system for securing all material. Incredibly, the security of some of the world’s most dangerous material is not subject to any common international standards or “rules of the road” that all states must follow. Indeed, security practices vary widely across states. While several elements for guiding states’ nuclear security practices do exist, they fall short of what is needed. In particular: The international legal agreement for securing nuclear materials—the Convention on the Physical Protection of Nuclear Material (CPPNM) and its 2005 Amendment—does not define standards and best practices and the 2005 Amendment, which strengthens the overall scope of the CPPNM, has not yet entered into force. Entry into force must be a priority and the United States, which has so far failed to complete ratification of the 2005 Amendment, must act swiftly to do so. Nuclear security recommendations and guidelines issued by the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) are not mandatory and are implemented inconsistently. Existing legal agreements and guidelines cover only 15 percent of all global stocks of weapons-usable nuclear material: those used in civilian programs. The remaining 85% are considered “military material” and are not subject even to those limited practices. Not only is the current system devoid of an agreed-upon set of international standards or best practices, there is no governing body tasked with holding states accountable for lax security and no expectation that states should take steps to build confidence in others that they are effectively securing their materials. Even though poor security in one state can result in the detonation of a nuclear bomb anywhere else in the world, many states still consider nuclear security solely a sovereign, not a shared, responsibility, and continue to simply say, “Trust me.” NUCLEAR SECURITY LAGS BEHIND OTHER INDUSTRIES The lack of global standards, information sharing, or accountability mechanisms in nuclear security is in stark contrast to other high-risk global enterprises, such as civil aviation, where public safety and security is at stake and where states understand and accept that all parties have an interest in the performance of others. In the case of aviation, for example, almost all states are members of the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO), which sets safety and security standards for all airlines, conducts audits, and shares security concerns with others states. Yet with weapons-usable nuclear materials, where poor security can lead to a nuclear catastrophe with global consequences, there is no shared system of standards, assurance, or accountability. If the threat of nuclear terrorism is to be taken seriously and all weapons-usable nuclear material secured, there must be a global system of international standards and best practices that covers all materials, including military materials, and provides mechanisms for states to be held accountable and to build confidence in their security practices. In addition, sates must reduce risk by minimizing and, where possible, eliminating their stocks of 80 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 84. weapons-usable nuclear materials, for example by converting power and research reactors that use HEU fuel to low enriched uranium fuels. STRENGTHENING GLOBAL NUCLEAR SECURITY Securing vulnerable nuclear materials has been a priority at the Nuclear Threat Initiative (NTI) since its founding in 2001. In recent years, NTI’s work in this area has followed two tracks: a public initiative that focused worldwide attention on the status of nuclear materials security, and a separate effort to engage governments and experts to shape the agendas and outcomes of the Nuclear Security Summits. In January 2014, NTI published the second edition of the NTI Nuclear Materials Security Index (NTI Index), a unique public assessment of nuclear security conditions in 176 countries. The NTI Index provides a framework for analysis that has sparked international discussions about priorities for strengthening security. The NTI Index assesses 25 countries with one kilogram or more of weapons-usable nuclear material (HEU or separated plutonium) across five categories: Quantities and Sites: the quantities of material, number of sites at which the material is located, and whether material quantities are decreasing or increasing; Security and Control Measures: whether certain physical protection, control, and accounting measures are required by national laws and regulations; Global Norms: whether a state has joined international treaties, undertaken voluntary measures to support global efforts, and taken steps to build confidence in the security of its material; Domestic Commitments and Capacity: whether a state has implemented its international obligations; and Risk Environment: factors that though not directly related to the security of nuclear materials may still impact a state’s ability to maintain appropriate security, including political instability, ineffective governance, corruption, and the presence of groups interested in illicitly acquiring material. The NTI Index assesses an additional 151 countries with less than one kilogram of weapons-usable nuclear materials, or none at all, on the last three of these categories. These states are included in the NTI Index because all states, not just those with materials, have a responsibility to prevent nuclear terrorism by ensuring that their territories are not used as safe havens, staging grounds, or transit points for terrorist operations. NTI plans to release a third edition of the NTI Index in early 2016. SETTING PRIORITIES One of NTI’s recommendations in the 2012 NTI Index was the need for a dialogue on priorities for securing nuclear materials. Although the 2010 Summit had resulted in important commitments by states to strengthen their own security and support global nuclear security efforts, these commitments were not driven by an agreed set of priorities. To address this challenge, in July 2012, NTI convened the first of a series of meetings called the Global Dialogue on Nuclear Security Priorities, a Track 1.5 dialogue among government officials, experts, nuclear security practitioners, and other stakeholders to build consensus on the need for a strengthened global nuclear security system and the elements of that system. Leading up to the 2014 Nuclear Security Summit, participants in the Global Dialogue developed the following set of principles that define such a system: Comprehensiveness: All weapons-usable nuclear materials and facilities should be covered by the system, including the 85% of all global stocks that are military materials. International Standards and Best Practices: All states and facilities with those materials should adhere to international standards and best practices. Building Confidence: States should help build confidence in the effectiveness of their security practices and take reassuring actions to demonstrate that all nuclear materials and facilities are secure (e.g., through peer review, best practice exchanges, and sharing of non-sensitive security information). Material Minimization and Elimination: States should work to reduce risk through minimizing or, where feasible, eliminating weapons-usable nuclear materials stocks and the number of locations where they are found. The 2014 Summit Communiqué made significant headway on several of these fronts, calling for a strengthened international nuclear security architecture and emphasizing the value of countries building the confidence of others in the security of their weapons-usable nuclear materials. In addition, 35 countries (two-thirds of Summit participants) agreed to GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 put principles into practice by joining the “Strengthening Nuclear Security Implementation” initiative, pledging to meet the intent of the IAEA’s voluntary guidelines through implementing national regulations, committing to improve their nuclear security through internal assessments and peer reviews, and ensuring that those responsible for nuclear security are “demonstrably competent.” Despite this importance progress, challenges remain. The security of military material has largely remained unaddressed by the Summits. In addition, despite progress on minimizing stocks of HEU, discussions of the minimization and management of plutonium have been stymied by political and other challenges. Finally, at what is presumed to be the final Summit scheduled for 2016, leaders will need to agree on a way to sustain the nuclear security mission beyond 2016 or risk much of the positive work to strengthen nuclear security going unfinished or, worse, backsliding. To address these challenges, NTI has once again convened the Global Dialogue to continue our efforts to strengthen the global system in support of the 2016 Summit. LOOKING AHEAD Terrorism in all its forms presents a major threat to global security. Yet, the prospect of a terrorist using a nuclear bomb to destroy a city, killing and injuring hundreds of thousands, is the threat most likely to keep leaders and global experts awake at night. A nuclear nightmare like the kind seen in horror movies and television dramas could become a reality if the world does not do what we already know must and can be done to secure the materials that could be used in a nuclear bomb. With the final Nuclear Security Summit approaching, the window of opportunity to put in place the global system necessary to get the job done is closing. We cannot stand aside and let the window close. States must agree to a path forward for sustaining the nuclear security mission and for building a truly global system for securing all nuclear materials—a system where materials are secured according to international standards and best practices, where states take actions to build the confidence of others that they are properly securing their materials, and where states continue to minimize and eventually eliminate stockpiles of weapons-usable nuclear materials. 81
  • 85. APPENDIX APPENDIX A: GTI RANKS AND SCORES, 2014 GTI RANK COUNTRY 2014 GTI SCORE (OUT OF 10) CHANGE IN SCORE (ACTUAL YEAR 2012 TO 2013) 1 Iraq 10 0.5 2 Afghanistan 9.39 0.26 3 Pakistan 9.37 0.23 4 Nigeria 8.58 0.34 5 Syria 8.12 0.6 6 India 7.86 0.01 7 Somalia 7.41 0.17 8 Yemen 7.31 0.15 9 Philippines 7.29 0.56 10 Thailand 7.19 0.03 11 Russia 6.76 -0.09 12 Kenya 6.58 0.52 13 Egypt 6.5 1.63 14 Lebanon 6.4 1.97 15 Libya 6.25 1.54 16 Colombia 6.24 -0.15 17 Turkey 5.98 -0.12 18 Dem. Rep. of the Congo 5.9 -0.05 19 Sudan 5.77 -0.15 20 South Sudan 5.6 1.28 21 Algeria 5.52 0.23 22 Mali 5.29 1.42 23 Bangladesh 5.25 1.27 24 Nepal 5.23 0.28 GTI RANK COUNTRY 2014 GTI SCORE (OUT OF 10) CHANGE IN SCORE (ACTUAL YEAR 2012 TO 2013) 25 China 5.21 0.38 26 Central African Republic 5.19 1.35 27 United Kingdom 5.17 0.72 28 Iran 4.9 -0.1 29 Greece 4.73 0.44 30 United States 4.71 0.85 31 Indonesia 4.67 0.03 32 Israel 4.66 -0.46 32 Mexico 4.66 1.53 34 Bahrain 4.41 0.89 35 Myanmar 4.24 0.02 36 Mozambique 4.01 2.89 36 Sri Lanka 4.01 -0.76 38 Rwanda 4 0.04 39 Burundi 3.97 -0.41 40 Cote d’Ivoire 3.76 -0.37 41 Tanzania 3.71 3.65 42 Ethiopia 3.7 -0.38 43 Paraguay 3.63 1.61 44 Norway 3.57 -0.68 45 Senegal 3.55 -0.12 46 Tunisia 3.29 1.56 47 Ireland 3.09 0.15 48 Malaysia 3.04 1.13 48 South Africa 3.04 0.79 50 Peru 2.96 0.17 51 Ukraine 2.95 -0.18 52 Uganda 2.93 -0.78 53 Belarus 2.85 -0.73 54 Kosovo 2.73 0.22 55 Saudi Arabia 2.71 -0.17 56 France 2.67 -0.41 57 Guatemala 2.61 1.02 58 Chile 2.59 0.33 58 Niger 2.59 0.57 60 Bulgaria 2.58 -0.57 60 Georgia 2.58 -0.43 62 Italy 2.55 -0.09 63 Eritrea 2.45 -0.71 64 Honduras 2.38 0.99 65 Kazakhstan 2.37 -0.47 66 Cyprus 2.3 2.14 67 Morocco 2.11 -0.69 68 Tajikistan 1.99 -0.67 69 Spain 1.84 -0.53 70 Jordan 1.76 -0.28 82 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 86. GTI RANK COUNTRY 2014 GTI SCORE (OUT OF 10) CHANGE IN SCORE (ACTUAL YEAR 2012 TO 2013) 71 Argentina 1.73 0.3 72 Brazil 1.72 1.02 73 Republic of the Congo 1.59 1.59 74 Trinidad and Tobago 1.54 1.54 75 Cameroon 1.45 -0.45 75 Macedonia (FYR) 1.45 -0.77 77 Switzerland 1.34 0.87 78 Madagascar 1.26 0.16 79 Ecuador 1.18 0.69 80 Zimbabwe 1.16 0.52 81 Guinea 1.12 1.12 82 Sweden 1.07 -0.7 83 Germany 1.02 -0.7 84 Canada 0.95 0 85 Czech Republic 0.81 0.55 86 Bosnia and Herzegovina 0.76 0.17 87 Burkina Faso 0.7 0.7 87 Montenegro 0.7 0.7 89 Netherlands 0.58 -0.71 89 Serbia 0.58 -0.84 91 Mauritania 0.56 -0.7 92 Venezuela 0.54 -0.72 93 Belgium 0.53 -0.68 94 Dominican Republic 0.47 0.47 95 Angola 0.41 -0.6 95 Australia 0.41 -0.62 97 Guinea-Bissau 0.35 -0.47 98 Cambodia 0.31 0.25 99 Taiwan 0.31 0.29 100 United Arab Emirates 0.29 0.03 101 Moldova 0.28 -0.31 102 Armenia 0.27 0.19 103 Austria 0.24 -0.43 103 Bolivia 0.24 -0.24 105 Croatia 0.23 0.19 105 Portugal 0.23 -0.24 107 Albania 0.19 0.13 107 Denmark 0.19 0.11 109 Bhutan 0.16 -0.38 109 Estonia 0.16 -0.15 111 Uzbekistan 0.14 -0.13 112 Kyrgyzstan 0.1 -0.1 113 Iceland 0.08 -0.08 113 Laos 0.08 -0.08 113 Liberia 0.08 -0.08 116 Hungary 0.07 -0.11 GTI RANK GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 COUNTRY 2014 GTI SCORE (OUT OF 10) CHANGE IN SCORE (ACTUAL YEAR 2012 TO 2013) 117 Azerbaijan 0.06 -0.29 118 Chad 0.05 -3.48 119 Kuwait 0.04 -0.04 119 Panama 0.04 -0.04 121 Equatorial Guinea 0.01 -0.01 121 Japan 0.01 -0.05 121 Lesotho 0.01 -0.01 124 Benin 0 0 124 Botswana 0 0 124 Costa Rica 0 0 124 Cuba 0 0 124 Djibouti 0 0 124 El Salvador 0 0 124 Finland 0 -0.03 124 Gabon 0 0 124 Gambia 0 0 124 Ghana 0 0 124 Guyana 0 -0.42 124 Haiti 0 0 124 Jamaica 0 0 124 Latvia 0 0 124 Lithuania 0 0 124 Malawi 0 0 124 Mauritius 0 0 124 Mongolia 0 0 124 Namibia 0 0 124 New Zealand 0 -0.05 124 Nicaragua 0 0 124 North Korea 0 0 124 Oman 0 0 124 Papua New Guinea 0 0 124 Poland 0 0 124 Qatar 0 0 124 Romania 0 -0.02 124 Sierra Leone 0 0 124 Singapore 0 0 124 Slovakia 0 0 124 Slovenia 0 0 124 South Korea 0 0 124 Swaziland 0 -0.03 124 Timor-Leste 0 -0.07 124 Togo 0 0 124 Turkmenistan 0 0 124 Uruguay 0 0 124 Vietnam 0 0 124 Zambia 0 0 83
  • 87. APPENDIX B: 50 WORST TERRORIST ATTACKS IN 2013 RANK COUNTRY DATE CITY ORGANISATION F I WEAPON TYPE 1 Nigeria 17/09/2013 Beni Shiek Boko Haram 142 0 Firearms 2 Nigeria 24/10/2013 Damatura Boko Haram 125 0 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 3 Syria 22/07/2013 Khan al-Assal Al-Nusrah Front 123 0 Firearms 4 Pakistan 10/01/2013 Quetta Lashkar-e-Jhangvi 119 219 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 5 Afghanistan 2/08/2013 Sherzad district Taliban 98 0 Firearms 6 Pakistan 16/02/2013 Quetta Lashkar-e-Jhangvi 91 169 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 7 Pakistan 22/09/2013 Peshawar Jundallah 87 131 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 8 Afghanistan 18/08/2013 Gulistan district Taliban 82 22 Firearms 9 Kenya 21/09/2013 Nairobi Al-Shabaab 72 201 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 10 Nigeria 20/12/2013 Bama Boko Haram 70 0 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 11 Syria 11/06/2013 Hatla Al-Nusrah Front 70 0 Firearms 12 Algeria 16/01/2013 In Amenas al-Mua’qi’oon Biddam Brigade (Those who Sign with Blood) 69 8 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 13 Yemen 5/12/2013 Sanaa Al-Qa`ida in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP) 68 215 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 14 Syria 21/02/2013 Damascus Unknown 62 201 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 15 Pakistan 26/07/2013 Parachinar Mujahideen Ansar 61 151 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 16 Syria 6/02/2013 Al-Buraq Al-Nusrah Front 61 0 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 17 Nigeria 7/05/2013 Bama Boko Haram 55 0 Firearms 18 Central African Rep. 5/12/2013 Bangui Anti-Balaka Militia 54 0 Firearms 19 Turkey 11/05/2013 Reyhanli Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant 53 140 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 20 Afghanistan 3/04/2013 Farah Taliban 53 95 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 21 Syria 21/03/2013 Damascus Unknown 50 84 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 22 Lebanon 23/08/2013 Tripoli Islamic Unification Movement 47 300 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 23 Iraq 5/10/2013 Baghdad Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant 47 85 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 24 Nigeria 6/07/2013 Mamudo Boko Haram 46 4 Firearms 25 Iraq 24/04/2013 Mosul Unknown 46 0 Firearms 26 Pakistan 3/03/2013 Karachi Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) 45 151 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 27 Iraq 21/09/2013 Baghdad Unknown 45 80 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 28 Iraq 25/12/2013 Baghdad Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant 44 71 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 29 Nigeria 11/08/2013 Konduga Boko Haram 44 26 Firearms 30 Pakistan 29/09/2013 Peshawar Unknown 43 101 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 31 Iraq 23/01/2013 Tuz Khormato Al-Qa`ida in Iraq 43 75 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 32 Iraq 12/07/2013 Kirkuk Unknown 42 35 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 33 Iraq 29/09/2013 Musayyib Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant 41 50 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 34 Syria 1/08/2013 Homs Liwa al-Haqq 40 160 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 35 Iraq 17/05/2013 Baqubah Unknown 40 57 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 36 Nigeria 29/09/2013 Gujba Boko Haram 40 18 Firearms 37 Dem. Rep. of Congo 25/12/2013 Kamango Allied Democratic Forces (ADF) 40 16 Firearms 38 Nigeria 18/03/2013 Kano Boko Haram 39 75 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 39 Pakistan 8/08/2013 Quetta Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) 39 50 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 40 Somalia 13/04/2013 Mogadishu Al-Shabaab 38 58 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 41 Mexico 31/01/2013 Mexico City Individuals Tending Toward Savagery 37 101 Incendiary 42 Iraq 20/10/2013 Baghdad Unknown 37 50 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 43 Iraq 3/02/2013 Kirkuk Al-Qa`ida in Iraq 36 70 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 44 Pakistan 18/06/2013 Mardan Unknown 35 43 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 45 Nigeria 19/08/2013 Baga Boko Haram 35 14 Incendiary 46 Pakistan 2/02/2013 Serai Naurang Tehrik-i-Taliban Pakistan (TTP) 35 8 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 47 Iraq 14/11/2013 Sadiyah Unknown 33 80 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 48 Pakistan 30/06/2013 Quetta Lashkar-e-Jhangvi 32 55 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 49 Iraq 14/03/2013 Baghdad Al-Qa`ida in Iraq 32 50 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite 50 Pakistan 10/01/2013 Mingora Lashkar-e-Jhangvi 31 70 Explosives/Bombs/Dynamite * F= FATALITIES, I = INJURIES 84 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 88. APPENDIX C: GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX METHODOLOGY The GTI ranks 162 countries based on four indicators weighted over five years. The Occupied Palestinian Territories is the only region that records notable amounts of terrorism that is not included in the index.80 The GTI score for a country in a given year is a based on a unique scoring system to account for the relative impact of incidents in the year. The four factors counted in each country’s yearly score, are: Total number of terrorist incidents in a given year Total number of fatalities caused by terrorists in a given year Total number of injuries caused by terrorists in a given year A measure of the total property damage from terrorist incidents in a given year. Each of the factors is weighted between zero and three and a five year weighted average is applied to try and reflect the latent psychological effect of terrorist acts over time. The weightings shown in Table 12 was determined by consultation with the GPI Expert Panel. The greatest weighting is attributed to a fatality. It should be noted the property damage measure is further disaggregated into four bands depending on the measured scope of the property damage inflicted by one incident. These bandings are shown in Table 13, whereby incidents causing less than US$1 million are accorded a weighting of 1, between $1 million and $1 billion a 2, and more than $1 billion a 3. It should be noted a great majority of incidents are coded in the GTD as ‘unknown’, thus scoring nil, with ‘catastrophic’ events being extremely rare. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 TABLE 12 INDICATOR WEIGHTS USED IN THE GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX DIMENSION WEIGHT Total number of incidents 1 Total number of fatalities 3 Total number of injuries 0.5 Sum of property damages measure Between 0 and 3 depending on severity TABLE 13 PROPERTY DAMAGE LEVELS AS DEFINED IN THE GTD AND WEIGHTS USED IN THE GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX CODE/ WEIGHT DAMAGE LEVEL 0 Unknown 1 Minor (likely $1 million) 2 Major (likely between $1 million and $1 billion) 3 Catastrophic (likely $1 billion) TABLE 14 HYPOTHETICAL COUNTRY TERRORIST ATTACKS IN A GIVEN YEAR DIMENSION WEIGHT NUMBER OF RECORDS FOR THE GIVEN YEAR CALCULATED RAW SCORE Total number of incidents 1 21 21 Total number of fatalities 3 36 108 Total number of injuries 0.5 53 26.5 Sum of property damages measure 2 20 40 Total raw score 195.5 HYPOTHETICAL EXAMPLE OF A COUNTRY’S GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX SCORE To assign a relative number to how a country has been directly impacted by terrorism in any given year, for every incident recorded the GTI calculates a weighted sum of all indicators. To illustrate, assume Table 14 depicts a hypothetical country’s records for a given year. Given these indicator values, the country for that year would be assessed as having an impact of terrorism of 195.5. 85
  • 89. FIVE YEAR WEIGHTED AVERAGE To account for the lingering effect terrorist attacks have on a society in terms of fear and subsequent security response, the GTI takes into consideration the events of previous years as having a bearing on a country’s score in the current year. For instance, the scale of the 2011 terrorist attacks in Norway will continue to have a psychological impact on the population for many years to come. The scoring system presented here is a simple attempt to account for this by weighting the country’s previous scores using the values shown in Table 15. LOGARITHMIC BANDING SCORES ON A SCALE OF 1-10 The impact of terrorism is not evenly distributed throughout the world; there are a handful of countries with very high levels of terrorism compared to many countries which experience only very small amounts, if not zero terrorism. Hence, the GTI uses a base 10 logarithmic banding system between 0 and 10 at 0.5 intervals. As shown in Table 16, mapping the scores in this way yields the total number of 21 bands. This maps all values to a band of size 0.5 within the scale of 0-10. In order to band these scores the following method is used: 1. Define the Minimum GTI score across all countries as having a banded score of 0 2. Define the Maximum GTI score across all countries as having a banded score 10 3. Subtract the Minimum from the Maximum GTI scores and calculate r by: a. root = 2*(Highest GTI banded score - Lowest GTI banded score) = 20*(10-0) =20 b. Range = 2*(Highest recorded GTI raw score – Lowest recorded GTI raw score) c. r = root ȼ Range The mapped band cut-off value for bin n is calculated by rn. Following this method produces mapping of GTI scores to the set bands as defined in Table 16. In following this method of scoring, weighting and banding, the GTI can be seen as a relative indicator of how terrorism impacts a country compared to all other countries in the GTD. This importantly recognises that there are diminishing returns to terrorism in terms of its psychological, economic, political and cultural impact. Simply, a terrorist incident killing one person is likely to have a greater psychological impact in a country with zero terrorist incidents than in a country like Iraq where terrorism is a regular, if not daily occurrence. YEAR WEIGHT % OF SCORE Current year 16 52% Previous year 8 26% Two years ago 4 13% Three years ago 2 6% Four years ago 1 3% TABLE 15 TIME WEIGHTING OF HISTORICAL SCORES YEAR WEIGHT % OF SCORE Current year 16 52% Previous year 8 26% Two years ago 4 13% Three years ago 2 6% Four years ago 1 3% TABLE 16 BANDS USED IN THE GTI BAND NUMBER BANDS BAND CUT OFF VALUES 1 0 0.00 2 0.5 1.64 3 1 2.69 4 1.5 4.42 5 2 7.25 6 2.5 11.89 7 3 19.52 8 3.5 32.03 9 4 52.55 10 4.5 86.23 11 5 141.48 12 5.5 232.15 13 6 380.93 14 6.5 625.06 15 7 1025.63 16 7.5 1682.91 17 8 2761.41 18 8.5 4531.07 19 9 7434.84 20 9.5 12199.51 21 10 20017.65 86 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 90. APPENDIX D: VERIFYING THE INCREASE IN TERRORISM FROM 2011 TO 2012 Until 2011 data collection for this exercise was largely a manual process with START employing many people to trawl through media articles and code each terrorist event by hand into the database. Since 2012 however, START began using automated machine coding to add new events to the database. This new technology not only increased the efficiency of the data entry process but also allowed more sources to be searched increasing coverage of terrorism at the global scale. While this new technology means that the GTD is now a more comprehensive data source, the change in the data collection methodology does create difficulties in analysing longitudinal trends. There has been a large increase in the number of incidents since 1998. There has been a patricularly significant increase in the number of recorded terrorist events since 2011. However, the change of methodology offers two possible reasons for such an increase. 1. The increase is a reflection of real-world events or 2. The increase is a product of more efficient database coding. In regards to this, START report that their analysis suggests a combination of these two factors are the explanation for the dramatic increase in recorded terrorist events. The problem is how to estimate the percentage that can be attributed to factors (1) and (2). In turn an estimate can be assigned to the “real world” proportional increase in terrorism. It is not possible to say exactly how much terrorism has increased given the changed methodology, however it is possible to give statistical estimates to this increase by only using data from 2012 that would have been collected in 2011 using the old methodology. What the analysis finds is that the dramatic increase from 2012 to 2013 is valid and that there is strong evidence indicating a large increase in terrorism from 2011 to 2013. GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 To estimate what the increase could have been based on the previous methodology, IEP used geospatial analysis to filter out events in regions of the world that previously had never been covered prior to the change in methodology. This represents a lower bound estimate because events in previously uncovered regions may actually be real increases, however, given the change of methodology it is not possible to say for certain. The GTD geo-codes events with a latitude and longitude wherever possible. For data prior to 2011, around 75 per cent of the events within GTD are geocoded. Where the GTD has not geo-coded events, IEP has assigned a latitude and longitude to an event by the following process: 1. Matched the city name where the event occurred with two separate large world city databases to estimate a location for each event (19 per cent of events coded in this step). 2. Where (1) is not possible, IEP locates the event to the centre of the country that it occurred (remaining six per cent of events coded in this step). Figure 29 highlights the results of this geocoding process for events between 1998 and 2011. During this period events were coded manually and so offer the baseline coverage to compare data from 2012 onwards. The assumption here is that if an incident occurs in 2012 that is near any other incident that was coded prior to 2012, then it would have been coded even if START had not introduced the more efficient data collection method. If an incident occurs in 2012 that is in a completely new location that has never before seen terrorist activity, there is no precedent to assume that it would have been included using the old data collection methodology. This technique has been developed by IEP and is referred to as the geospatial filtering approach (GFA). 87
  • 91. SELECTING A FILTERING RADIUS To implement the GFA all incidents recorded in 2012 have been compared to the incident closest to it from the set of all incidents occurring between 1998 and 2011. This process follows the steps: Select Incident A from 2012 GTD Select the closest incident to Incident A from all incidents recorded in the GTD between 1998 and 2011, call this Incident B If A is within x kms of B then include Incident A in the calculation of the percentage increase in terrorism between 2011 and 2012 If A is greater than x kms away from B, exclude A from further analysis Repeat for all incidents recorded in 2012. TABLE 17 CONVERGENCE OF THE GFA WITH PREVIOUS KNOWN YEAR ON YEAR PERCENTAGE YEAR GFA FILTER RADIUS TO CONVERGE TO WITHIN 5% OF TRUE PERCENTAGE INCREASE (KMS) 2001 90 2002 44 2003 60 2004 22 2005 41 2006 28 2007 21 2008 52 2009 19 2010 21 2011 26 There are shortfalls with this. Namely, it ignores the possibility of terrorism arising in new parts of the globe. While methodologically this is an issue, in regards to the nature of terrorism and the data collection from media, this is not believed to be a significant factor due to the following reasons: 1. Since 2002, most terrorism has occurred in five countries, all of which have had good coverage in the GTD throughout the period. 2. What would be generally termed “Black Swan” events occur in countries where terrorism is not a constant threat. The Madrid and London train bombings and the 2011 Norway attacks are examples of these. However, countries such as these have good media coverage and so it is very unlikely that these would be excluded using the geospatial filtering approach. Before applying the GFA it is therefore necessary to define what distance radius is to be used as the filtering mechanism. In essence this step makes an assumption of the coverage of media sources used in the GTD prior to 2012. To do this trials were run over all known year on year increases since 2000 using distances between 0 and 100 kms. Table 17 shows the filtering distance that provided an estimate that was within 5 per cent of the known year on year increase. The most restrictive filtering radii occurred in 2009 when 95 per cent of the increase in terrorism occurred within 19 kms of attacks that occurred in 2008. Figure 29 plots the results from applying the GFA to 2011 to 2012 data and the baseline case of 2008 - 2009. If we assume that the GFA converges to within 5 per cent of the true increase at the baseline radii 19km, then the estimated like for like increase in terrorism between 2011-2012 is around 20% + 5% = 25%. While the GFA only provides an estimate, it does suggest that a large part of the calculated increase in terrorism between 2011 and 2012 is due to real world events. These results concur with START’s analysis.81 However, Table 18 shows that even if a conservative approach is taken by assuming there was no increase between 2011 and 2012, terrorism would still have increased fivefold since 2000. Using a 45 per cent increase between 2011 and 2012, this statistic rises to being seven fold. 88 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 92. FIGURE 29 CONVERGENCE OF THE GFA FOR 2011-2012. The Geospatial Filtering Approach estimates a 25% increase in terrorist incidents between 2011-2012. 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0% -10% -20% -30% Source: GTD GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 At a radius of 19km filtering the GFA converges to the correct increase of 20% between 2011-2012 RADIUS USED FOR ESTIMATE (KMS) ESTIMATE INCREASE IN TERRORISM 2011-2012 Estimated Baseline Increase of 25% in 2011-2012 At a radius of 19km filtering the GFA converges to the correct increase of 0% between 2008-2009 -40% GFA applied to 2011-2012 Increase GFA applied to 2008-2009 Increase 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 YEAR ASSUME NO INCREASE IN 2011 TO 2012 (6) ASSUME 25% INCREASE IN 2011 TO 2012 (6) ASSUME 45% INCREASE IN 2011 TO 2012 (6) 2012 Use 0.00% - conservative Use 25.00% - GFA estimate Use 45.00% -upper bound Total % estimate of increase since 2011 44% 59% 109% Formula = ʌ (1+6)-100% for all year on year changes since 2000 Terrorism in 2013 as a percentage of 2000 Formula = ʌ (1+6) % for all year on year changes since 2000 475% (approximately five fold) 594% (approximately six fold) 689% (approximately seven fold) TABLE 18 ESTIMATES OF THE INCREASE OF TERRORISM SINCE 2000 Estimates of the increase in terrorism range from five to seven fold since 2000. 89
  • 93. 1. Global Terrorism Database, ‘Codebook: Inclusion Criteria and Variables’, National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START), http://www.start.umd.edu/gtd/downloads/Codebook.pdf, 2012, (accessed 3 October 2014). 2. See methodological note. 3. Masters, J. Laub, Z., ‘Al-Qaeda in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP)’, Council on Foreign Relations, 22 August 2013, http://www.cfr.org/yemen/al-qaeda-arabian- peninsula-aqap/p9369, (accessed 3 October 2014). 4. Terrorism Research and Analysis Consortium (TRAC), Thailand threat assessment, http://www.trackingterrorism.org/region/threatened/1062, (accessed 7 October, 2014). 5. Global Terrorism Database, ‘Terrorist Group Profiles’, http://www.start.umd. edu/tops/, (accessed 7 October 2014). 6. Atran. S., ‘The Moral Logic and Growth of Suicide Terrorism’, The Washington Quarterly, vol. 29, no.2, 2006, p. 132. 7. Ibid. 8. The International Centre for the study of Radicalisation and Political Violence, Countering Radicalisation and Political Violence, London, 2014, http://icsr. info/2013/12/icsr-insight-11000-foreign-fighters-syria-steep-rise-among-western- europeans/, (accessed 3 October 2014). 9. U.S. Department of State, Country Reports on Terrorism, 2013, http://www. state.gov/j/ct/rls/crt/2013/224829.htm, (accessed 3 October 2014). 10. Ibid. 11. Teich, S., Trends and Developments in Lone Wolf Terrorism in the Western World, International Institute for Counter Terrorism, 2013, http://i-hls.com/ wp-content/uploads/2013/11/Lone-Wolf-Sarah-Teich-2013.pdf (accessed 24 October 2014). 12. Phillips, L., ‘Nanotechnology: Armed Resistance’, Nature, Vol 488 No. 7413, 2012, http://www.nature.com/news/nanotechnology-armed-resistance-1.11287, (accessed 24 October 2014). 13. ‘Por sobres-bomba y homicidio de académico: Van por ala terrorista de anarquistas’, Diario 24 Horas, 26 February 2013. 14. U.S. Department of State, Country Reports on Terrorism, 2013, http://www. state.gov/j/ct/rls/crt/2013/224829.htm, (accessed 3 October 2014). 15. Ibid. 16. US Department of State Overseas Advisory Council, Message for U.S. Citizens: Ankara (Turkey): Embassy will open and Additional Security Information, Istanbul, 2013, https://www.osac.gov/pages/ContentReportDetails. aspx?cid=13550, (accessed 3 October 2014). 17. Gupta, D., ‘Exploring roots of terrorism’, in Bjorgo, T.,(ed.), Root Causes of Terrorism: Myths, reality and ways forward, New York, Routledge,2005. 18. Maleckova, J., ‘Impoverished terrorists: stereotype or reality?’, in Bjorgo, T.,(ed.), Root Causes of Terrorism: Myths, reality and ways forward, New York, Routledge,2005. 19. Ibid 20. Centre for Systemic Peace (CSP), ‘Major episodes of political violence, 1946-2013’, 2013, www.systemicpeace.org/warlist/warlist.htm, (accessed 3 October 2014). This dataset assesses the severity of each instance of political violence on an eleven point scale with 0 being no political violence and 10 being “annihilation and extermination”. On this scale terrorist campaigns such as Northern Ireland and the Cuban Revolution are assessed as being severity score 2. Analysis provided uses all incidents ranked above a level 2 in this dataset. 21. Political Instability Task Force, ‘State Failure Dataset 1955-2013’, 2013, http:// www.systemicpeace.org/inscr/PITFProbSetCodebook2013.pdf, (accessed 3 October 2014). 22. Terrorist attacks from 1996 was selected due to data availability of political terror and group cohesion measures. A major terrorist attack is defined by one that claims the lives of over five people. 23. International Institute of Social Studies, Intergroup Cohesion, http://www. indsocdev.org/intergroup-cohesion.html, (Accessed 6th October 2014). 24. Gibney, M. M. Dalton, ‘The Political Terror Scale’ In David L. C. (ed.), Human Rights and Developing Countries, Greenwich: JAI,1996. 25. International Institute of Social Studies. Intergroup Cohesion, http://www. indsocdev.org/intergroup-cohesion.html, (Accessed 6th October 2014). 26. UNODC, Global Study on Homicide, http://www.unodc.org/documents/gsh/ pdfs/2014_GLOBAL_HOMICIDE_BOOK_web.pdf, 2013, (accessed 7 October 2014). 27. Frey, B. et al., ‘Calculating tragedy: Assessing the costs of Terrorism’, Journal of Economic Surveys, vol.21, no.1, 2007. 28. International Monetary Fund, World Economic Outlook: The Global Economy After September 11, Washington DC, 2001. 29. Rose, A. Z. B. S. Blomberg,’Total Economic Consequences of Terrorist Attacks: Insights from 9/11’, Create Homeland and Security Center, Paper 190, 2010, http://research.create.usc.edu/published_papers/190, (accessed 7 October 2014 ). 30. Kaufman, A, F, and M. I., Meltzer, and G., P., Schmid, ‘The economics impact of a bioterrorist attack: Are prevention and Postattack Intervention programs justifiable?’, Emerging Infection Diseases, Vol 3 Number 2, 83-94. 31. Stiglitz, J. E. L. J. Bilmes, The three trillion dollar war: The true cost of the Iraq conflict, WW Norton Company, 2008. 32. Enders, W. et al., ‘The Impact of Transnational Terrorism on U.S. Foreign Direct Investment’, Create Homeland and Security Center, Paper 55, 2006, http:// research.create.usc.edu/published_papers/55, (accessed 7 October 2014 ). 33. World Bank Data 34. Enders, W. T., Sandler, ‘Terrorism and Foreign Direct Investment in Spain and Greece’, Kyklos, vol. 49, no.3, 1996, pp.331-52. 35. Adebayo, A.A., ‘Implications of Boko Haram Terrorism on National Development in Nigeria’, Mediterranean Journal of Social Sciences, vol.5, no.16, 2014. 36. Calculations from World Bank data. 37. Kunreuther, H and M, Erwann, ‘Policy Watch: Challenges for terrorism risk insurance in the United States’, http://www.nber.org/papers/w10870.pdf, (accessed 3 October 2014). 38. International Crisis Group, ‘Curbing Violence in Nigeria (II): The Boko Haram Insurgency’, Africa Report 216, 3 April 2014. 39. Doom, R. K. Vlassenroot, ‘Kony’s Message: A New Koine? The Lord’s Resistance Army In Northern Uganda’, African Affairs, vol. 98, no.390, 1999, pp.5-36. 40. The Economist, ‘The many names of ISIS’, The Economist, 28 September 2014, http://www.economist.com/blogs/economist-explains/2014/09/economist-explains- 19, (accessed 7 October 2014). 41. Kirkpatrick, D., ‘ISIS Harsh Brand of Islam Is Rooted in Austere Saudi Creed’, The New York Times, 24 September 2014. 42. Marcel, V., ‘ISIS and the Dangers of Black Market Oil’, Chatham House, 21 July 2014, http://www.chathamhouse.org/expert/comment/15203, (accessed 7 October, 2014). 43. Johnson, K., ‘The Islamic State Is the Newest Petrostate’, The Foreign Policy, 28 July 2014, http://www.foreignpolicy.com/articles/2014/07/28/baghdadis_ hillbillies_isis_iraq_syria_oil_terrorism_islamic_state , (accessed 7 October 2014 ). 44. Shatz, H.J., ‘How ISIS funds its Reign of Terror’, RAND, 8 September 2014, http://www.rand.org/blog/2014/09/how-isis-funds-its-reign-of-terror. html,(accessed 7 October 2014). 45. Opperman, J., ‘Leadership Structure of Islamic State’, Terrorism Research and Analysis Consortium (TRAC), http://www.trackingterrorism.org/chatter/ leadership-structure-islamic-state , 2014, (accessed 7 October 2014). 46. ‘Islamic State fighter estimate triples-CIA’, BBC, 12 September 2014,http:// www.bbc.com/news/world-middle-east-29169914 ,(accessed 7 October 2014). ENDNOTES 90 GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014
  • 94. 47. U.S. Department of State, Country Reports on Terrorism 2011, 31 July 2012. http://www.state.gov/j/ct/rls/crt/2011/195553.htm#AQI ,(accessed 7 October 2014 ). 48. Chulov, M., ‘Syrian city of Raqqa gripped by fear of US air strikes on Isis’, The Guardian, 16 September 2014, http://www.theguardian.com/world/2014/ sep/15/syria-raqqa-fear-us-air-strikes-isis , (accessed 7 October 2014). 49. Barrett, R., ‘Foreign Fighters in Syria’, The Soufan Group, http://soufangroup. com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/TSG-Foreign-Fighters-in-Syria.pdf pp.6, 24, (accessed 7 October 2014). 50. Opperman, J. ‘Leadership Structure of Islamic State’, Terrorism Research and Analysis Consortium (TRAC), http://www.trackingterrorism.org/chatter/ leadership-structure-islamic-state,2014 ,(accessed 7 October 2014). 51. Walker, A., ‘What is Boko Haram?’, United States Institute of Peace Special Report, no. 308, 2012. 52. Bederka, A., ‘Wahhabism and Boko Haram’, Student Center for African Research and Resolutions, 2014, http://www.scarrdc.org/ uploads/2/6/5/4/26549924/bederkawahhabism.pdf , (accessed 7 October 2014). 53. The American Foreign Policy Council, ‘Boko Haram’, 21 August 2013, http:// almanac.afpc.org/sites/almanac.afpc.org/files/Boko%20Haram%20August%20 2014_0.pdf, (accessed 7 October 2014). 54. Bederka, A., ‘Wahhabism and Boko Haram’, Student Center for African Research and Resolutions, 2014, http://www.scarrdc.org/ uploads/2/6/5/4/26549924/bederkawahhabism.pdf , (accessed 7 October 2014). 55. Anyadike, O., ‘Boko Haram and National Security Challenges in Nigeria; Causes and Solutions’, Journal of Economics and Sustainable Development, Vol 4, No. 5, 2013, http://iiste.org/Journals/index.php/JEDS/article/viewFile/4849/4927, (accessed 7 October 2014). 56. National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START), Background Report: Boko Haram Recent Attacks, http://www.start. umd.edu/pubs/STARTBackgroundReport_BokoHaramRecentAttacks_ May2014_0.pdf, 2014. 57. Anyadike, O., ‘Analysis: Carrot or Stick?-Nigerians divided over Boko Haram’, IRIN,16 July 2012, http://www.irinnews.org/report/95874/analysis-carrot-or-stick- nigerians-divided-over-boko-haram , (accessed 7 October 2014). 58. http://www.fatf-gafi.org/media/fatf/documents/reports/tf-in-west-africa.pdf p.17 59. Financial Action Task Force (FATF), Terrorist Financing in West Africa, http:// www.fatf-gafi.org/media/fatf/documents/reports/tf-in-west-africa.pdf, p.17,2013. 60. United States Department of State, ‘Country Reports on Terrorism 2013’, United States Department of State, April 2014, http://www.state.gov/ documents/organization/225886.pdf, (accessed 7 November 2014). 61. Freeman, C., ‘Al-Qaeda map: Isis, Boko Haram and other affiliates’ strongholds across Africa and Asia’, The Telegraph, 12 June 2014, http://www.telegraph.co. uk/news/worldnews/al-qaeda/10893889/Al-Qaeda-map-Isis-Boko-Haram-and-other- affiliates-strongholds-across-Africa-and-Asia.html, (accessed 7 October 2014). 62. Adebayo, A.A., ‘Implications of Boko Haram Terrorism on National Development in Nigeria’, Mediterranean Journal of Social Sciences, vol.5,no.16,2014. 63. Agbiboa, D.E. and B. Maiangwa, ‘Nigeria united in grief; divided in response: Religious terrorism, Boko Haram, and the dynamics of state response’, African Journal on Conflict Resolution, vol.14, no.1, 2014. 64. MI5 Security Service, Al Qaida’s Ideology, https://www.mi5.gov.uk/home/ the-threats/terrorism/international-terrorism/the-nature-of-the-threat/ al-qaidas-ideology.html , (accessed 3 October 2014). 65. Blanchard, C.M., ‘CRS Report for Congress Al Qaeda: Statements and Evolving Ideology’, 9 July 2007, Congressional Research Service, http://fas.org/sgp/crs/ terror/RL32759.pdf ,(accessed 3 October 2014). 66. Peters, G., ‘How Opium Profits the Taliban’, United States Institute of Peace: Peaceworks, no. 62, 2009, pp.11-15. 67. Callimachi, R., ‘Paying Ransoms, Europe Bankrolls Qaeda Terror’, The New York Times, 29 July 2014, http://www.nytimes.com/2014/07/30/world/africa/ ransoming-citizens-europe-becomes-al-qaedas-patron.html,(accessed 8th October, 2014). GLOBAL TERRORISM INDEX 2014 68. Hoffman, B., ‘Al Qaeda’s Uncertain Future’, Studies in Conflict Terrorism, vol. 36, no. 8, 2013. pp. 635-653. 69. Freeman, C., ‘Al-Qaeda map: Isis, Boko Haram and other affiliates’ strongholds across Africa and Asia’, The Telegraph, 12 June 2014, http://www.telegraph.co. uk/news/worldnews/al-qaeda/10893889/Al-Qaeda-map-Isis-Boko-Haram-and-other- affiliates-strongholds-across-Africa-and-Asia.html, (accessed 7 October 2014).; Terrorism Research and Analysis Consortium (TRAC), al Shabaab, TRAC, http://www.trackingterrorism.org/region/threatened/1062, (accessed 9 November 2014). 70. Jenkins, B., ‘The Dynamics of Syria’s Civil War’, RAND Corporation, 2014. http://www.rand.org/content/dam/rand/pubs/perspectives/PE100/PE115/ RAND_PE115.pdf, (accessed 10 October 2014); United States Department of State, ‘Country Reports on Terrorism 2013’, United States Department of State, April 2014, http://www.state.gov/documents/organization/225886.pdf, (accessed 7 November 2014); Masters, J. Laub, Z., ‘Al-Qaeda in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP)’, Council on Foreign Relations, 22 August 2013, http://www. cfr.org/yemen/al-qaeda-arabian-peninsula-aqap/p9369, (accessed 3 October 2014).; The National Counterterrorism Center, ‘Al-Qa‘ida in the Lands of the Islamic Maghreb (AQIM)’, The National Counterterrorism Center, http://www. nctc.gov/site/groups/aqim.html, (accessed 10 November 2014).; Masters, J., ‘Al-Shabab’, Council on Foreign Relations, 5 September 2014, http://www.cfr. org/somalia/al-shabab/p18650, (accessed 10 November 2014). 71. Hayat, A., ‘Reconstruction in Post-Taliban Afghanistan: Women and Education’, Resources for Feminist Research, vol. 30, no.3/4, 2003. 72. Brahimi, A., ‘The Taliban’s Evolving Ideology’, London School of Economics Global Governance, 2010. 73. UNODC, Afghanistan Opium Survey 2013, http://www.unodc.org/documents/ crop-monitoring/Afghanistan/Afghan_report_Summary_Findings_2013.pdf , (accessed 3 October 2014). 74. Rashid, A., ‘The Taliban: exporting extremism’. Foreign Affairs, vol.22, no.35,1999. 75. Stanekzai, M.M., ‘Thwarting Afghanistan’s insurgency.” A Pragmatic Approach toward Peace and Reconciliation’, United States Institute of Peace Special Report, no. 212, 2008. 76. Bruno, G. and L. Beehner, ‘Iran and the Future of Afghanistan’, Council on Foreign Relations, 30 March 2009, http://www.cfr.org/iran/iran-future-afghanistan/ p13578, (accessed 3 October 2014). 77. Starkey, J., ‘Major-General Richard Barrons puts Taliban fighter numbers at 36,000’, The Times, 3 March 2010. 78. Giustozzi, A., ‘Taliban networks in Afghanistan’, Center on Irregular Warfare and Armed Groups, Newport, Rhode Island, 2012, 84. 79. Bajoria, J., ‘The Taliban in Afghanistan’, Council on Foreign Relations, 6 October 2011, http://lindblomeagles.org/ourpages/auto/2012/2/11/58143717/ terrorism%20background%20readings.pdf, (accessed 3 October 2014). 80. This follows Global Peace Index convention. 81. Jensen, M., ‘Discussion Point: The Benefits and Drawbacks of Methodological Advancements in Data Collection and Coding: Insights from the Global Terrorism Database’, National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism (START), 25 November 2013, http://www.start.umd. edu/news/discussion-point-benefits-and-drawbacks-methodological-advancements- data-collection-and-coding, (accessed 7 October, 2014). Icons sourced from The Noun Project (see p. 54,55) include: Firecracker by Maximilian Becker from The Noun Project Book by Mateo Zlatar from The Noun Project People by Wilson Joseph from The Noun Project 91